project manual - bcd inc. | established in 1979, bcd inc

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME TWO

FOR

THOMAS NELSON HIGH SCHOOL

PHASE 3 (AUDITORIUM) NELSON COUNTY SCHOOLS

BARDSTOWN, KENTUCKY

BG 15-229 SKA #2011-02

10 FEBRUARY 2016

ARCHITECT

Studio Kremer Architects Inc

3258 Ruckriegel Parkway

Louisville KY

40299

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL

& PLUMBING ENGINEERS

CMTA Consulting Engineers

10411 Meeting Street

Prospect KY

40059

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

Slesser Engineering Inc

2325 Lime Kiln Lane

Louisville KY

40222

CIVIL ENGINEERS

Horizon Engineering LLC

111 North Second Street

Bardstown KY

40004

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

BCD Inc

1962 Filiatreau Lane

Bardstown KY

40004

2

Thomas Nelson High School�Phase 3 2011�02 CMTA Project NHS08�03

INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 20 MECHANICAL 200100� General Provisions � Mechanical ..................................... 200100�1 thru 24 200200� Scope of the Mechanical Work ........................................ 200200�1 thru 2 200300� Required Shop Drawings, Etc. ........................................ 200300�1 thru 4 201100� Sleeving, Cutting, Patching, Firestopping & Repairing ....... 201100�1 thru 4 201200� Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Grading .................... 201200�1 thru 6 201300� Pipe, Pipe Fittings, & Pipe Support .................................. 201300�1 thru 6 202100� Valves ......................................................................... 202100�1 thru 4 202200� Insulation � Mechanical ................................................. 202200�1 thru 6 202300� Thermometers, Pressure Gauges & Other Monitoring Instruments .................................... 202300�1 thru 2 202400� Identifications, Tags, Charts, Etc. ................................... 202400�1 thru 3 202500� Hangers, Clamps, Attachments, Etc ................................ 202500�1 thru 4

203100� Testing, Balancing, Lubrication and Adjustments .............. 203100�1 thru 4 DIVISION 21 – Fire Protection 210100� Fire Protection.............................................................. 210100�1 thru 8 DIVISION 22 – Plumbing 220100� Plumbing Specialties ..................................................... 220100�1 thru 6 220200� Plumbing Fixtures, Fittings and Trim ............................... 220200�1 thru 4 DIVISION 23 – HVAC 230100� Pumps ........................................................................ 230100�1 thru 3 230200� HVAC Equipment and Chemical Treatment ....................... 230200�1 thru 8 231100� Registers, Grilles, and Diffusers ...................................... 231100�1 thru 1 231200� Sheet Metal & Flexible Duct ........................................... 231200�1 thru 9 DIVISION 25 – Building Automation System 250010� General Provisions – Refer to 200100 .............................. 250010�1 thru 1 250100� Electrical Motors, Motor Starters and Other Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment .. 250100�1 thru 5 250400� Controls – Direct Digital ................................................ 250400�1 thru 37


200100�1

DIVISION 20 � MECHANICAL

SECTION 200100 � GENERAL PROVISIONS � MECHANICAL PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bidding Requirements,

General, Special and Supplementary Conditions, and all other contract documents shall apply to the Contractor's work as well as to each of his Sub�Contractor's work. All manufacturers, suppliers, fabricators, contractors, etc.

submitting proposals to any part if for work, services, materials or equipment to be used on or applied to this project are hereby directed to familiarize

themselves with all documents pertinent to this Contract. In case of conflict between these General Provisions and the General and/or Special Conditions, the affected Contractor shall contact the Engineer for clarification and final

determination.

1.2 Each Proposer shall also be governed by any unit prices and Addenda insofar as they may affect part of their work or services.

1.3 The work included in this division consists of the furnishing of all labor,

equipment, transportation, excavation, backfill, supplies, material,

appurtenances and services necessary for the satisfactory installation of the complete and operating Mechanical System(s) indicated or specified in the

Contract Documents. 1.4 Any materials, labor, equipment or services not mentioned specifically herein

which may be necessary to complete or perfect any part of the Mechanical Systems in a substantial manner, in compliance with the requirements

stated, implied or intended in the drawings and/or specifications, shall be included as part of this Contract.

1.5 It is not the intent of this section of the specifications to make any Contractor, other than the General Contractor (or Construction Manager, if

applicable), responsible to the Owner, Architect and Engineer. All transactions such as submittal of shop drawings, claims for extra costs, requests for equipment or materials substitution, shall be routed through the

General Contractor to the Architect (if applicable), then to the Engineer. Also, this section of the specifications shall not be construed as an attempt to

arbitrarily assign responsibility of work, material, equipment or services to a particular trade or Contractor. Unless stated otherwise, the subdivision and assignment of work under the various sections shall be optional.

1.6 It is the intent of this Contract to deliver to the Owner a new project once

work is complete. Although plans and specifications are complete to the extent possible, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractors involved to remove and/or relocate or re�attach any existing or new systems which


200100�2

interfere with new equipment or materials required for the complete installation without additional cost to the Owner.

1.7 In general, and to the extent possible, all work shall be accomplished without

interruption of existing facilities operations. The Contractor shall advise the

Owner at least forty�eight (48) hours prior to the interruption of any services (gas, domestic water, heating, etc.). The Owners shall be advised of the

exact time that interruption will occur and the length of time the interruption will last. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in complete work stoppage by the Contractors involved until a complete schedule of

interruptions can be developed.

1.8 Definitions and Abbreviations: 1.8.1 Contractor � Any Contractor whether proposing or working independently or

under the supervision of a General Contractor and/or Construction Manager and who installs any type of mechanical work (Controls, Plumbing, HVAC,

Sprinkler, Gas Systems, etc.) or, the General Contractor.

1.8.2 Engineer � The Consulting Mechanical�Electrical Engineers either consulting to the Owners, Architect, other Engineers, etc. In this case: CMTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers.

1.8.3 Architect � The Architect of Record for the project.

1.8.4 Furnish � Deliver to the site in good condition and turn over to the Contractor

who is to install.

1.8.5 Provide � Furnish and install complete, tested and ready for operation.

1.8.6 Install � Receive and place in satisfactory operation.

1.8.7 Indicated � Listed in the Specifications, shown on the Drawings or Addenda thereto.

1.8.8 Typical � Where indicated repeat this work, method or means each time the

same or similar condition occurs whether indicated or not.

1.8.9 Contract Documents � All documents pertinent to the quality and quantity of

work to be performed on this project. Includes, but not limited to: Plans, Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, General and Special Conditions, Addenda, Alternates, Lists of Materials, Lists of Sub�Contractors, Unit Prices,

Shop Drawings, Field Orders, Change Orders, Cost Breakdowns, Schedules of Value, Periodical Payment Requests, Construction Contract with Owners, etc.

1.8.10Proposer � Any person, agency or entity submitting a proposal to any person,

agency or entity for any part of the work required under this contract.


200100�3

1.8.11OSHA � Office of Safety and Health Administration.

1.8.12KBC � Kentucky Building Code. 1.8.13The Project � All of the work required under this Contract.

1.8.14NEC � National Electrical Code.

1.8.15NFPA � National Fire Protection Association.

1.8.16ASME � American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

1.8.17AGA � American Gas Association. 1.8.18SMACNA � Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.

1.8.19ANSI � American National Standards Institute.

1.8.20ASHRAE � American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers. 1.8.21NEMA � National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

1.8.22UL � Underwriters Laboratories.

1.8.23ADA � Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.9 Required Notices: Ten days prior to the submission of a proposal, each proposer shall give written notice to the Engineer of any materials or

apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, Proposers

signify that they have included the cost of all required items in the proposal and that the Proposer will be responsible for the safe and satisfactory

operation of the entire system. PART 2 – INTENT:

2.1 It is the intention of the Contract Documents to call for finished work, tested

and ready for operation. 2.2 Details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper

installation and operation of systems, equipment, materials, etc., shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or indicated.


200100�4

PART 3 – DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

3.1 The drawings are diagrammatic only and indicate the general arrangement of

the systems and are to be followed. If deviations from the layouts are

necessitated by field conditions, detailed layouts of the proposed departures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before proceeding with the

work. The drawings are not intended to show every item which may be necessary to complete the systems. All proposers shall anticipate that additional items may be required and submit their bid accordingly.

3.2 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other. No

Proposer shall take advantage of conflict between them, or between parts of either. Should this condition exist, the Proposer shall request a clarification not less than twelve days prior to the submission of the proposal so that the

condition may be clarified by Addendum. In the event that such a condition arises after work is started, the interpretation of the Engineer shall be final.

3.3 The drawings and specifications shall be considered to be cooperative and

anything appearing in the specifications which may not be indicated on the drawings or conversely, shall be considered as part of the Contract and must be executed the same as though indicated by both.

3.4 Contractor shall make all his own measurements in the field and shall be

responsible for correct fitting. The work shall be coordinated with all other branches of work in such a manner as to cause a minimum of conflict or delay.

3.5 The Engineer shall reserve the right to make adjustments in location of

piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. where such adjustments are in the interest of improving the project.

3.6 Should conflict or overlap (duplication) of work between the various trades become evident, this shall be called to the attention of the Engineer. In such

event neither trade shall assume to be relieved of the work which is specified under his branch until instructions in writing are received from the Engineer.

3.7 Unless dimensioned, the mechanical drawings only indicate approximate locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. Dimensions given in figures

on the drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions and all dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in the field to insure no conflict with other work.

3.8 Each Proposer shall review all drawings including Architectural, Mechanical,

Electrical, Fire Protection, Landscaping, Structural, Surveys, etc., to insure that the work he intends to provide does not encroach a conflict with or affect the work of others in any way. Where such effect does occur it shall

be the Proposer's responsibility to satisfactorily eliminate any such


200100�5

encroachment conflict or effect prior to the submission of his proposal. Each Proposer shall in particular insure that there is adequate space to install his

equipment and materials. Failure to do so shall result in the correction of such encroachment conflict or effect of any work awarded the proposer and shall be accomplished fully without expense to others and that they are

reasonably accessible for maintenance. Check closely all mechanical and electrical closets, chases, ceiling voids, wall voids, crawl spaces, etc., to

insure adequate spaces. 3.9 Where on the drawings a portion of the work is drawn out and the remainder

is indicated in outline, or not indicated at all, the parts drawn out shall apply to all other like portions of the work. Where ornamentation or other detail is

indicated by starting only, such detail shall be continued throughout the courses or parts in which it occurs and shall also apply to all other similar parts of the work, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 Details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper

installation and operation of systems, equipment, materials, etc., shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or indicated.

3.11 Where on the Drawings or Addenda the word typical is used, it shall mean

that the work method or means indicated as typical shall be repeated in and

each time it occurs whether indicated or not.

3.12 Special Note: Always check ceiling heights indicated on Architectural Drawings and Schedules and insure that they may be maintained after all mechanical and electrical equipment is installed. Do not install equipment in

the affected area until the conflict is resolved.

PART 4 � EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONDITIONS: 4.1 Each Proposer shall inform their self of all of the conditions under which the

work is to be performed, the site of the work, the structure of the ground, above and below grade, the obstacles that may be encountered, the

availability and location of necessary facilities and all relevant matters concerning the work. Each Proposer shall also fully acquaint their self with all existing conditions as to ingress and egress, distance of haul from supply

points, routes for transportation of materials, facilities and services, availability of utilities, etc. His proposal shall cover all expenses or

disbursements in connection with such matters and conditions. No allowance will be made for lack of knowledge concerning such conditions after bids are accepted.

PART 5 � EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SUBSTITUTIONS OR DEVIATIONS:

5.1 When any Contractor requests approval of materials and/or equipment of

different physical size, weight, capacity, function, color, access, it shall be

understood that such substitution, if approved, will be made without


200100�6

additional cost to anyone other than the Contractor requesting the change regardless of changes in connections, space requirements, electrical

characteristics, etc. from that indicated, electrical service, etc. In all cases where substitutions affect other trades, the Contractor requesting such substitutions shall advise all such Contractors of the change and shall

renumerate them for all necessary changes in their work. Any drawings, Specifications, Diagrams, etc., required to describe and coordinate such

substitutions or deviations shall be professionally prepared at the responsible Contractor's expense. Review of Shop Drawings by the Engineers does not in any way absolve the Contractor of this responsibility.

5.2 Notwithstanding any reference in the specifications to any article, device,

product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; any

devices, products, materials, fixtures, forms, or types of construction which, in the judgment of the Engineer, are equivalent to those specified are

acceptable, provided the provisions of Paragraph (5.1) immediately preceding are met. Requested substitutions shall be submitted to the

Engineer a minimum of ten days prior to bids. 5.3 Wherever any equipment and material is specified exclusively only such

items shall be used unless substitution is accepted in writing by the Engineers.

5.4 Each Proposer shall furnish along with his proposal a list of specified

equipment and materials which is to be provided. Where several makes are

mentioned in the specifications and the Contractor fails to state which they propose to furnish, the Engineer shall choose any of the makes mentioned

without change in price. Inclusion in this list shall not insure that the Engineers will approve shop drawings unless the equipment, materials, etc., submitted in shop drawings are satisfactorily comparable to the items

specified and/or indicated.

5.5 Required Notices: Ten days prior to the submission of a proposal, each proposer shall give written notice to the Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances,

rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, Proposers

signify that they have included the cost of all required items in the proposal and that the Proposer will be responsible for the safe and satisfactory operation of the entire system.

PART 6 � SUPERVISION OF WORK:

6.1 The Contractor shall personally supervise the work for which they are

responsible or have a competent superintendent, approved by the Engineers,


200100�7

on the work at all times during progress with full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor.

PART 7 � CODES, RULES, PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS, REGULATIONS, ETC.:

7.1 The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all permits, government sales taxes, fees, inspections and other costs, including

all utility connections, meters, meter settings, taps, tap fees, extensions, etc. in connection with his work. He shall also file all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental

departments and/or the appropriate municipality or utility company having jurisdiction, whether indicated or specified or not. He shall also obtain all

required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver same to the Engineers before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. Ignorance of Codes, Rules, Regulations, Laws, etc. shall not render the

Contractor irresponsible for compliance. The Contractor shall also be versed in all Codes, Rules and Regulations pertinent to his part of the work prior to

submission of a proposal.

7.2 The Contractor shall include in their work, without extra cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not indicated

or specified.

7.3 All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the National Fire Codes of the National Fire Protection Association, with the requirements of local utility companies, or municipalities and with the requirements of all

governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

7.4 All materials and equipment so indicated and all equipment and materials for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the approval label of, or shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), Incorporated.

Each packaged assembly shall be approved as a package. Approval of components of a package shall not be acceptable.

7.5 All plumbing work is to be constructed and installed in accordance with

applicable codes, plans and specifications which have been approved in their

entirety and/or reflect any changes requested by the State Department of Health. Plumbing work shall not commence until such plans are in the

possession of the Plumbing Contractor. 7.6 All Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning work shall be accomplished in

accordance with the Kentucky Building Code (KBC) and amendments thereto, the latest standards recognized by the American Society of Heating,

Refrigerating and Air Conditioning and the National Fire Protection Association.


200100�8

7.7 The Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of all Final Inspection Certificates obtained to the Engineer when work is complete. Final payment

for work will be contingent upon compliance with this requirement. 7.8 Where minimum code requirements are exceeded in the Design, the Design

shall govern.

7.9 The Contractor shall insure that his work is accomplished in accord with the OSHA Standards and that he conducts his work and the work of his personnel in accord with same.

7.10 Work in elevators, elevator shafts and elevator equipment rooms shall

comply with the Elevator Code enforced by the Commonwealth of Kentucky.

7.11 All work relating to the handicapped shall be in accord with regulations

currently enforced by the Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction, Commonwealth of Kentucky and the American Disabilities Act.

7.12 All work in conjunction with a propane gas installation shall, in addition to all

other Codes, Rules, Regulations, Standards, etc., comply with the requirements of the local gas supplier and/or standards and recommendations of the American Gas Association and NFPA.

7.13 All work in relation to domestic water systems shall, in addition to all other

Codes, Rules, Regulations and Standards, be in compliance with the requirements of the local water utility company.

7.14 All work in relation to the installation of sanitary or storm sewers shall, in addition to all other Codes, Rules, Regulations and Standards, be in

compliance with the local agency governing such installations. 7.15 Discharge of any toxic, odorous or otherwise noxious materials into the

atmosphere or any system shall be subject to regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and/or the air pollution control

commission. If in doubt, contact the State Division. PART 8 � EQUIPMENT SUPPORT:

8.1 Each piece of equipment, apparatus, piping, or conduit suspended from the

ceiling or mounted above the floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, pipe stand, platform or carrier in accordance with the best recognized practice. Such supporting or mounting means shall be provided

by the Contractor for all equipment and piping. Exercise extreme care that structural members of building are not overloaded by such equipment.

Provide any required additional bracing, cross members, angles, support, etc.


200100�9

PART 9 � DUCT AND PIPE MOUNTING HEIGHTS:

9.1 All exposed or concealed ductwork, piping, etc., shall be held as high as

possible unless otherwise noted and coordinated with all other trades.

Exposed piping and ductwork shall, insofar as possible, run perpendicular or parallel to the building structure.

PART 10 � COST BREAKDOWNS (SCHEDULE OF VALUES):

10.1 Within thirty days after acceptance of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, one copy of a detailed cost breakdown on each

respective area of work. These cost breakdowns shall be made in a format approved by the Engineer. Payments will not be made until satisfactory cost breakdowns are submitted.

PART 11 – GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES:

11.1 All geothermal heat pump and split system compressors shall have five year

warranty. (1st year parts and labor, 2nd thru 5th year compressor only). 11.2 The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, apparatus, materials, and

workmanship entering into their Contract to the best of its respective kind and shall replace all parts at his own expense, which are proven defective

within the time frame outlined in the General Conditions of the Contract. The effective date of completion of the work shall be the date of the Engineer's Statement of Substantial Completion. Items of equipment which have longer

guarantees, as called for in these specifications, shall have warranties and guarantees completed in order, and shall be in effect at the time of final

acceptance of the work by the Engineer. The Contractor shall present the Engineer with such warranties and guarantees at the time of final acceptance of the work. The Engineer shall then submit these warranties, etc. to the

Owner. The Owner reserves the right to use equipment installed by the Contractor prior to date of final acceptance. Such use of equipment shall not

invalidate the guarantee except that the Owner shall be liable for any damage to equipment during this period, due to negligence of his operator or other employees. Refer to other sections for any special or extra warranty

requirements.

11.3 Provide all warranty certificates to Owner. PART 12 � CHANGES IN MECHANICAL WORK:

12.1 REFER TO GENERAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS.

PART 13 � CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST:

13.1 REFER TO GENERAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS.


200100�10

PART 14 � SURVEY, MEASUREMENTS AND GRADE:

14.1 The Contractor shall lay out their work and be responsible for all necessary

lines, levels, elevations and measurements. The Contractor must verify the

figures shown on the drawings before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from failure to do so.

14.2 The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical

from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established

lines and levels. Verify all measurements at the site and check the correctness of same as related to the work.

14.3 Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual

measurements and those indicated which prevents following good practice or

the intent of the contract documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer and shall not proceed with this work until the Contractor has

received instructions from the Engineer on the disposition of the work.

PART 15 � TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT:

15.1 The permanent heating and plumbing equipment, when installed, may be

used for temporary services, with the consent of the Engineers. Should the permanent systems be used for this purpose the Contractors shall make all

temporary connections required at their expense. They shall also make any replacement required due to damage wear and tear, etc., leaving the same in "as new" condition.

15.2 Permission to use the permanent equipment does not relieve the Contractors

from the responsibility for any damages to the building construction and/or equipment which might result because of its use.

15.3 A pre�start�up conference shall be held with the Architect, Owner, General Contractor and the Mechanical Contractor. Equipment shall not be started

until after this meeting. 15.4 During all phases of construction:

15.4.1Heat Pump Units:

15.4.1.1 At a minimum, four complete sets of filter media are required for each

unit. In each unit, install two sets of filter media during construction

(more shall be required if construction activities dictate more frequent changes). In each unit, install one set of filter media at substantial

completion. Leave one set of filter media in boxes in appropriate mechanical room as a spare set for the Owner. All other filters shall be used by the Contractor during construction. Dispose of all construction

filter media.


200100�11

15.4.1.2 On the outside of all return air openings install a minimum of two sets of

fiberglass filter media, such as cheesecloth, to be utilized as pre�filters for the “construction” filters. Install first set upon start�up and then install second set when first set is dirty. Dispose of all dirty construction filters.

Change filters as often as necessary to keep units from becoming dirty at no additional cost.

15.4.1.3 At substantial completion of the project the entire unit shall be cleaned to

present a like “new” unit for the Owner and all filters shall be replaced

with new.

PART 16 � TEMPORARY SERVICES: 16.1 The Contractor shall arrange any temporary water, electrical and other

services which he may require to accomplish his work. Refer also to General and Special Conditions.

PART 17 � RECORD DRAWINGS:

17.1 The Contractor shall insure that any deviations from the Design are as they

occur recorded in red, erasable pencil on record drawings kept at the jobsite.

The Engineer shall review the record documents from time to time to insure compliance with this specification. Compliance shall be a contingency of final

payment. Pay particular attention to the location of under floor sanitary and water lines, shut�off valves, cleanouts and other appurtenances important to the maintenance and operation of Mechanical Systems. Also, pay particular

attention to Deviations in the Control Systems and all exterior utilities. Keep information in a set of drawings set aside at the job site especially for this

purpose and deliver to the Engineers upon completion of the work.

PART 18 � MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

18.1 All equipment, materials and articles incorporated in the work shall be new

and of comparable quality to that specified. Each Proposer shall determine that the materials and/or equipment he proposes to furnish can be brought into the building(s) and installed within the space available. In certain cases,

it may be necessary to remove and replace walls, floors and/or ceilings and this work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All equipment shall be

installed so that all parts are readily accessible for inspection, maintenance, replacement of filters, etc. Extra compensation will not be allowed for relocation of equipment for accessibility or for dismantling equipment to

obtain entrance into the building(s). Insure, through coordination that no other Contractor seals off access to space required for equipment materials,

etc. 18.2 Materials and equipment, where applicable, shall bear Underwriters'

Laboratories label where such a standard has been established.


200100�12

18.3 Use extreme care in the selection of equipment and its installation to insure

that noise and vibration are kept at a minimum. The Engineer's determination shall be final and corrections to such discrepancies shall be made at the cost of the Contractor.

18.4 Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture and device used in the plumbing or

drainage systems shall be stamped or indelibly marked with the weight or quality thereof and with the manufacturer's mark or name.

18.5 All equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name and address. All electrically operated equipment shall bear a data plate indicating required

horsepower, voltage, phase and ampacity. Pumps shall have a data plate indicating horsepower, static pressure head and flow rate.

PART 19 � COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES:

19.1 The Contractor shall give full cooperation to all other trades and shall furnish in writing with copies to the Engineer, any information necessary to permit

the work of other trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.

19.2 Where any work is to be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, each shall cooperate in working out space conditions to

make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than ¼" = 1'�0", clearly indicating how his work is to

be installed in relation to the work of other trades, or so as not to cause any interference with work of other trades. He shall make the necessary changes

in his work to correct the condition without extra charge. 19.3 The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary

templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.

PART 20 � QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR/WORKMEN:

20.1 All mechanical contractors bidding this project must have been a licensed company for a minimum of two years to qualify to bid this project. Individual

employee experience does not supersede this requirement. 20.2 All mechanical subcontractors bidding the mechanical work must have

completed one project of 70% this subcontract cost size and two projects of 50% this subcontract cost size.

20.3 All mechanical work shall be accomplished by qualified workmen competent

in the area of work for which they are responsible. Untrained and

incompetent workmen, as evidenced by their workmanship, shall be


200100�13

summarily relieved of their responsibilities in areas of incompetency. The Engineer shall reserve the right to determine the quality of workmanship of

any workman and unqualified or incompetent workman shall refrain from work in areas not deemed satisfactory. Requests for relief of a workman shall be made through the normal channels of Architect, Contractor, etc.

20.4 All plumbing work shall be accomplished by Journeymen Plumbers under the

direct supervision of a Master Plumber as defined and clarified under Kentucky State Plumbing Law Regulations and Code. Proof and Certification may be requested by the Engineer.

20.5 The installation of all Heating, Ventilating and Air�Conditioning Systems

(HVAC) by any Contractor, whether in existing or new building construction shall be performed by a Licensed Kentucky Master HVAC Contractor. This includes any Contractor installing HVAC systems, piping and ductwork.

20.6 All sheet metal, insulation and pipe fitting work shall be installed by workmen

normally engaged or employed in these respective trades, except where only small amounts of such work are required and are within the competency of

workmen directly employed by the Contractor involved.

20.7 All automatic control systems shall be installed by workmen normally

engaged or employed in this type work, except in the case of minor control requirements (residential type furnaces, packaged HVAC equipment with

integral controls, etc.) in which case, if a competent workman is the employee of this Contractor, he may be utilized subject to review of his qualifications by the Engineer and after written approval from same.

20.8 All special systems (Automatic Sprinkler Equipment, etc.) shall be installed

only by workmen normally engaged in such services. Exception to this specification may only be made in writing by the Engineer.

20.9 All electrical work shall be installed pursuant to current State law. (ie. All electrical work shall be installed by licensed electricians).

20.9.1The Department of Housing, Building and Construction’s Electrical Division

requires that all new lighting control panels, new Building Automation

Systems control panels, and new conventional HVAC control panels be certified as being constructed and wired in accordance with NFPA 70 110.3

(a) (1) and article 409. 20.9.2Control panels shall have an identification label stating the “Certification

Agency” such as UL, CSA, CE, etc. or a label of certification for each control panel by a Professional Engineer (P.E.) registered in the State of Kentucky,

stating that the design of the control panel was under their direct supervisory control.


200100�14

20.9.3The Electrical Advisory Council for the State of Kentucky requires that only an electrical contractor licensed by the State of Kentucky with a licensed

Master Electrician and a licensed on�site electrician can install the electrical wiring for lighting controls systems or Building Automation Systems (BAS).

PART 21 � CONDUCT OF WORKMEN:

21.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct of all workmen under his supervision. Misconduct on the part of any workman to the extent of creating a safety hazard, or endangering the lives and property of others,

shall result in the prompt relief of that workman. The consumption of alcoholic beverages or other intoxicants, narcotics, barbiturates,

hallucinogens or dehabilitating drugs on the job site is strictly forbidden. PART 22 � PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:

22.1 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all material and equipment

they furnish in connection with their work and special care shall be taken to properly protect all parts thereof from damage during the construction

period. Such protection shall be by a means acceptable to the Engineer. All piping, etc., shall be properly plugged or capped during construction in a manner approved by the Engineer. Equipment damaged stolen or vandalized

while stored on site, either before or after installation, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at their expense.

PART 23 � SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING:

23.1 The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery onto the premises of any equipment and

apparatus furnished. All such temporary appurtenances shall be set up in strict accord with OSHA Standards and Requirements. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

PART 24 � BROKEN LINES AND PROTECTION AGAINST FREEZING:

24.1 No conduits, piping, troughs, etc. carrying water or any other fluid subject to

freezing shall be installed in any part of the building where danger of freezing

may exist without adequate protection being given by the Contractor whether or not insulation is specified or indicated on the particular piping. All

damages resulting from broken and/or leaking lines shall be replaced or repaired at the Contractor's own expense. If in doubt, contact the Engineer. Do not install piping across or near openings to the outside whether they are

carrying static or moving fluids or not. Special Note: Insulation on piping does not necessarily insure that freezing will not occur.


200100�15

PART 25 – CLEANING:

25.1 The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the area of their work presentable to

the public and clean of rubbish and debris caused by his operations; and at

the completion of the work, shall remove all rubbish, debris, all of his tools, equipment, temporary work and surplus materials from and about the

premises, and shall leave the area clean and ready for use. If the Contractor does not attend to such cleaning upon request, the Engineer may cause cleaning to be done by others and charge the cost of same to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage from fire which originates in, or is propagated by, accumulations of his rubbish or debris.

25.2 After completion of all work and before final acceptance of the work, the

Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials and shall

remove all foreign matter such as grease, dirt, plaster, labels, stickers, etc., from the exterior of piping, equipment, fixtures and all other associated or

adjacent fabrication.

25.3 Ductwork and piping shall be kept clean at all times. Ductwork stored on the job site shall be placed a minimum of 4” above the floor and shall be completely covered in plastic. Installed ductwork shall be protected with

plastic. Do not install the ductwork if the building is not “dried�in”. If this is required, the entire lengths of duct shall be covered in plastic to protect. The

Owner/Engineer shall periodically inspect that these procedures are followed. If deemed unacceptable, the Contractor shall be required to clean the duct system utilizing a NADCA certified Contractor.

PART 26 � CONCRETE WORK:

26.1 The Contractor shall be finally responsible for the provisions of all concrete

work required for the installation of any of his systems or equipment. The

Contractor may, at his option, arrange with the others to provide the work. This option, however, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities

relative to dimensions, quality of workmanship, locations, etc. In the absence of other concrete specifications, all concrete related to Mechanical work shall be 3500 psi minimum compression strength at 28 days curing and

shall conform to the standards of the American Concrete Institute Publication AC1�318. Heavy equipment shall not be set on pads for at least seven (7)

days after pour. Insert 6�inch steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. 26.2 All concrete pads shall be complete with all pipe sleeves, anchor bolts,

reinforcing steel, concrete, etc. as required. Pads larger than 18" in width shall be reinforced with ½" round bars on 6" centers both ways. Bars shall

be approximately 3" above the bottom of the pad. All parts of pads and foundations shall be properly rodded or vibrated. If exposed parts of the pads and foundations are rough or show honeycomb after removing forms,


200100�16

all surfaces shall be rubbed to a smooth surface. Chamfer all square edges one�half inch.

26.3 In general, concrete pads for equipment shall extend four (4) inches beyond

the equipment's base dimensions. Where necessary, extend pads 30 inches

beyond base or overall dimensions to allow walking and servicing space.

26.4 Exterior concrete pads shall be four (4) inches minimum above grade and four (4) inches below grade on a tamped four (4) inch dense grade rock base unless otherwise indicated or specified. Surfaces of all foundations and bases

shall have a smooth finish with one�half (½) inch chamfer on exposed edges. Turn down edges 18” below grade.

PART 27 � NOISE, VIBRATION OR OSCILLATION:

27.1 All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. In case of

moving machinery, sound or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered

objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Contractor at their expense.

27.2 All equipment subject to vibration and/or oscillation shall be mounted on

vibration supports whether indicated or not suitable for the purpose of minimizing noise and vibration transmission, and shall be isolated from external connections such as piping, ducts, etc. by means of flexible

connectors, vibration absorbers, or other approved means. Unitary equipment, such as small room heating units, small exhaust fans, etc., shall

be rigidly braced and mounted to wall, floor or ceiling as required and tightly gasketed and sealed to mounting surface to prevent air leakage and to obtain quiet operation. Flush and surface mounted equipment such as

diffusers, grilles, etc., shall be gasketed and affixed tightly to their mounting surface.

27.3 The Contractor shall provide supports for all equipment they furnish.

Supports shall be liberally sized and adequate to carry the load of the

equipment and the loads of attached equipment, piping, etc. All equipment shall be securely fastened to the structure either directly or indirectly through

supporting members by means of bolts or equally effective means. If strength of supporting structural members is questionable, contact Engineers.

PART 28 – ACCESSIBILITY:

28.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts

and chases, the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for

the proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with all others whose


200100�17

work is in the same space. Such spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size required.

28.2 The Contractor shall locate and install all equipment so that it may be

serviced, and maintained as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow ready

access and removal of the entire unit and/or parts such as valves, filters, fan belts, motors, prime shafts, etc.

28.3 The Contractor shall provide in the bid access panels for each concealed

shut�off valve, motorized control damper, manual air damper or other device

requiring service as shown on engineer's plans or as required. Locations of these panels shall be identified in sufficient time to be installed in the normal

course of work. PART 29 � RESTORATION OF NEW OR EXISTING SHRUBS, PAVING, SURFACES,

ETC.:

29.1 The Contractor shall at their expense restore to their original conditions all paving, curbing, surfaces, drainage ditches, structures, fences, shrubs,

existing or new building surfaces and appurtenances, and any other items damaged or removed by his operations. Replacement and repairs shall be in accordance with good construction practice and shall match materials

employed in the original construction of the item and shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner and/or Engineer.

PART 30 � MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND LINES:

30.1 The locations of all piping, conduits, cables, utilities and manholes existing, or otherwise, that comes within the contract construction site, shall be

subject to continuous uninterrupted service with no other exception than the Owner of the utilities permission to interrupt same temporarily.

30.2 Utilities and lines, where known, are indicated on the drawings. Locations and sizes are approximate. Prior to any excavation being performed, the

Contractor shall ascertain that no utilities or lines are endangered by new excavation. Exercise extreme caution in all excavation work.

30.3 If utilities or lines occur in the earth within the construction site, the Contractor shall probe and locate the lines prior to machine excavation or

blasting in the respective area. 30.4 Cutting into existing utilities and services where required shall be done in

coordination with and only at times designated by the Owner of the utility.

30.5 The Contractor shall repair to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer, any surfaces or subsurface improvements damaged during the course of the work, unless such improvement is shown to be abandoned or removed.


200100�18

30.6 Machine excavation shall not be permitted with ten feet of electrical lines or lines carrying combustible and/or explosive materials. Hand excavate only.

30.7 Protect all new or existing lines from damage by traffic, etc. during

construction. Repairs or replacement of such damage shall be at the sole

expense of the party responsible.

PART 31 – WEATHERPROOFING: 31.1 Where any work pierces waterproofing including waterproof concrete, the

method of installation shall be as approved by the Engineer before work is done. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and

flashing required to make openings permanently watertight. PART 32 � FINAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT:

32.1 The Contractor shall finally connect to mechanical services (water, gas, air),

any terminal equipment, appliances, etc., provided under this and other divisions of the work. Such connections shall be made in strict accord with

current codes, safety regulations and the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. If in doubt, contact the Engineers prior to installation.

PART 33 � REQUIRED CLEARANCE FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:

33.1 The NEC has specific required clearances above, in front, and around electrical gear, panels etc. The Contractor shall not install any piping, ductwork, etc., in the required clearance. If any appurtenance is located in

the NEC required clearance, it shall be relocated at no additional cost.

PART 34 – INDEMNIFICATION: 34.1 The Contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Engineer, employees,

officers, agents and consultants from all claims, loss, damage, actions, causes of actions, expense and/or liability resulting from, brought for, or on

account of any personal injury or property damage received or sustained by any person, persons, (including third parties), or any property growing out of, occurring, or attributable to any work performed under or related to this

contract, resulting in whole or in part from the negligence of the Contractor, any subcontractor, any employee, agent or representative.

PART 35 � HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:

35.1 Any worker, occupant, visitor, inspector, etc., who encounters any material of whose content they are not certain shall promptly report the existence and

location of that material to the Contractor and/or Owner. The Contractor shall, as a part of their work, insure that his workers are aware of this potential and what they are to do in the event of suspicion. The Contractor

shall also keep uninformed persons from the premises during construction.


200100�19

Furthermore, the Contractor shall insure that no one comes near to or in contact with any such material or fumes therefrom until its content can be

ascertained to be non�hazardous. 35.2 CMTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers, have no expertise in the determination of

the presence of hazardous materials. Therefore, no attempt has been made by them to identify the existence or location of any such material.

Furthermore, CMTA nor any affiliate thereof will neither offer nor make any recommendations relative to the removal, handling or disposal of such material.

35.3 If the work interfaces, connects or relates in any way with or to existing

components which contain or bear any hazardous material, asbestos being one, then, it shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to contact the Owner and so advise them immediately.

35.4 The Contractor by execution of the contract for any work and/or by the

accomplishment of any work thereby agrees to bring no claim relative to hazardous materials for negligence, breach of contract, indemnity, or any

other such item against CMTA, its principals, employees, agents or consultants. Also, the Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold CMTA, its principals, employees, agents and consultants, harmless from

any such related claims which may be brought by any subcontractors, suppliers or any other third parties.

35.5 No asbestos or mercury containing materials shall be installed in this project.

PART 36 – EQUIPMENT/CONTROLS STARTUP & VERIFICATION:

36.1 Manufacturer’s start�up of equipment is mandatory for this project where noted on the plans and in the specifications. The Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s start�up in the bid and shall be required to utilize the

attached forms for system start�up and verification for (1) geothermal heat pumps. The manufacturer’s standard forms will not be acceptable. All

information shall be completed by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner/Engineer prior to acceptance of the equipment.

36.2 A pre�start�up conference shall be held with the Architect, Owner, General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Controls Contractor,

Test and Balance Contractor, and the Manufacturer’s providing startup services. The purpose of this meeting will be discuss the goals, procedures, etc. for start�up

36.3 Equipment and controls startup and verification shall be required for this

project. A specific line�item shall be included on the schedule of values by each Trade for “equipment and controls startup”. This line�item value shall be approved by the Engineer. The Engineer, Owner and the Engineer’s Field


200100�20

Inspector(s) shall closely monitor progress and quality of the equipment and controls startup and may withhold pay requests as deemed appropriate.

36.4 The Contractor shall include in the bid to provide equipment and controls

startup and verification for ALL mechanical systems specified for this project.

Specific startup/verification specifications are included throughout the Mechanical specifications. In general, as part of the verification process,

equipment suppliers shall perform start�up by their factory authorized technicians (not third party contractors) and shall complete and submit start�up reports/checklists. This shall include heat pump units, pumps, etc.

Submit start�up reports to the Engineer. The Contractor shall have appropriate trades on site to correct all deficiencies noted by the factory

representative. For each deficiency noted, documentation of corrective action (including date and time) shall be submitted to the Engineer and Owner. Where factory start�up is not specified for a particular piece of

equipment or system, the Contractor shall be responsible to perform start�up.

36.5 Many pieces of equipment and systems are specified with “manufacturer”

startup. Except for the equipment specified in this specification section, the manufacturer’s recommended startup procedures and checklists will be acceptable for use in the project. Where “manufacturer” startup is not

specified, then this Contractor shall perform startup services in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. All startup/verification process

shall be thoroughly documented by the Contractor and shall include the time and date when performed.

36.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for completion of System Verification Checklist (SVC) / Manufacturer’s Checklists. Furnish to the Testing Agent

and Engineer. Sample checklists shall be submitted to the Engineer, Owner, and Testing Agent for approval.

36.7 The contractor shall utilize the attached forms for the system start�up and verification of the geothermal heat pump units.

END OF SECTION.

200100 � 21

HEAT PUMP UNIT

SYSTEM START�UP REPORT

Project: Date:

Tag: Time:

System: Technician:

Contractor: ___________________________

Heat Pump Unit Pass Fail Comments

Preliminary Checklist

Voltage and Power Supply Correct per Name Plate

Check Unit Voltage and Amps

Phasing is Correct Per Compressor Rotation

Maximum Overcurrent Protection Correct

Low Voltage Wiring Correct

Verify Water Flow and Direction Through Unit

Cooling Mode

Call for Cooling

Pump On

Fan On

Compressor/Compressors On

Supply Air Temperature

Return Air Temperature

Space Temperature Satisfied

Fan Off

Compressor/Compressors Off

Pump Off

Heating Mode

Automatic Changeover to Heating

Call for Heating

Pump On

Fan On

Compressor/Compressors On

Space Temperature Satisfied

Supply Air Temperature

200100 � 22

Heat Pump Unit Pass Fail Comments

Return Air Temperature

Fan Off

Compressor/Compressors Off

Pump Off

Unoccupied Mode

Unit Off

Cooling Setpoint 85°F

Heating Setpoint 60°F

Other Items

Duct Smoke Detector (If Applicable)

Check, Clean and Note Strainer Condition

Test Condensate Drain / Pump Operation

Check and Note Air Filter Condition


200200�1


SECTION 200200� SCOPE OF THE MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Mechanical work for this Contract shall include all labor, materials,

equipment, fixtures, excavation, backfill and related items required to completely install, test, place in service and deliver to the Owner the complete mechanical systems in accordance with the accompanying plans

and all provisions of these specifications. This work shall primarily include, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

1.1.1 Interior domestic hot, cold and recirculating hot water system.

1.1.2 Interior soil, waste and vent systems.

1.1.3 All plumbing equipment, fixtures and fittings.

1.1.4 100% automatic sprinkler system. 1.1.5 All mechanical exhaust and relief systems.

1.1.6 All insulation associated with mechanical systems.

1.1.7 Condensate drainage systems.

1.1.8 Complete heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.

1.1.9 Interior geothermal hydronic system flushing and purging. 1.1.10All required controls.

1.1.11All applicable services and work specified in General Provisions � Mechanical.

1.1.12Provide all required motor starters, etc. not provided under the electrical

sections.

1.1.13Thorough instruction of the owner’s maintenance personnel in the operation

and maintenance of all mechanical equipment. 1.1.14Thorough coordination of the installation of all piping, equipment and any

other material with other trades to insure that no conflict in installation.

1.1.15Approved supervision of the mechanical work.


200200�2

1.1.16Procurement of all required inspections, including fees for all inspection services and submission of final certificates of inspection to the Engineers

(Plumbing, etc.). 1.1.17Excavation, backfilling, cutting, patching, sleeving, concrete work, etc.,

required to construct the mechanical systems.

1.1.18Equipment and controls start�up and verification as specified.

END OF SECTION.


200300�1


SECTION 200300 � REQUIRED SHOP DRAWINGS, DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, PARTS LISTS, SPECIAL KEYS & TOOLS

PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Contractor's attention is directed also to the General and Special

Conditions and GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL as well as to all other

Contract Documents as they may apply to his work.

1.2 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer, through the General Contractor and the Architect (where applicable) within thirty (30) days after the date of the Contract, a minimum of seven (7) copies of all

shop drawings, certified equipment drawings, installation, operating and maintenance instructions, samples, wiring diagrams, etc. on all items of

equipment specified hereinafter.

1.3 Each shop drawing and/or manufacturers descriptive literature shall have the proper notation indicated on it and shall be clearly referenced to the specifications, schedules, fixture numbers, etc., so that the Engineer may

readily determine what the Contractor proposes to furnish. All data and information schedules indicated or specified shall be noted on each copy of

each submittal. 1.4 Submittal data shall include specification data including metal gauges,

finishes, accessories, etc. Also, the submittal data shall include certified performance data, wiring diagrams, dimensional data, and a spare parts list.

Submittal data shall be reviewed by the Engineer before any equipment or materials is ordered or any work is begun in the area requiring the equipment.

1.5 All submittal data shall have the stamp of approval of the Contractor

submitting the data as well as the General Contractor and the Architect (if applicable) to show that the drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor. Any drawings submitted without these stamps of approval may not be

considered and will be returned for proper resubmission.

1.6 The Contractor shall make any corrections or changes required by the Engineer and shall re�submit for final review as outlined above.

1.7 It shall be noted that review of shop drawings by the Engineer applies only to conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance

with the information given in the contract documents. In all cases, the Contractor alone shall be responsible for furnishing the proper quantity of equipment and/or materials required, for seeing that all equipment fits the


200300�2

available space in a satisfactory manner and that piping, electrical and all other connections are suitably located.

1.8 The Engineers review of shop drawings, schedules or other required

submittal data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for:

adaptability of the item to the project; compliance with applicable codes, rules, regulations and information that pertains to fabrication and

installation; dimensions and quantities; electrical characteristics; and coordination of the work with all other trades involved in this project.

1.9 Equipment shall not be ordered and no final rough�in connections, etc., shall be accomplished until reviewed equipment shop drawings are in the hands of

the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain reviewed shop drawings and to make all connections, etc. in the neatest and most workmanlike manner possible. The Contractor shall coordinate with all the

other trades having any connections, roughing�in, etc. to the equipment.

1.10 If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements set forth above, the Engineer shall have the option of selecting any or all items listed in the

Specifications or on the drawings; and the Contractor shall be required to furnish all materials in accordance with this list.

1.11 Colors for equipment in other than mechanical spaces shall be selected from the Manufacturer's standard and factory optional colors. Color samples shall

be furnished with the shop drawing submission for such equipment. 1.12 Shop Drawing Submittals

1.12.1All submittals for HVAC equipment shall include all information specified.

This shall include air and water pressure drops, RPM, noise data, face velocities, horsepower, voltage motor type, steel or aluminum construction, and all accessories clearly marked.

1.12.2All items listed in the schedules shall be submitted for review in a tabular

form similar to the equipment schedule. 1.12.3All items submitted shall be designated with the same identifying tag as

specified on each sheet.

1.12.4Any submittals received in an unorganized manner without options listed and with incomplete data will be returned for resubmittal.

PART 2 � SHOP DRAWINGS:

2.1 Shop Drawings, descriptive literature, technical data and required schedules shall be submitted on the following:


200300�3

Plumbing Fixtures, Fittings and Trim (2.2.1) Electric Water Heaters

Floor Drains (2.2.3&2.2.1) Fire Protection Sprinkler System

(2.2.1) Heat Pump Units

(2.2.1) VAV Boxes (2.2.2&2.2.1) Controls

Register, Grilles, Diffusers and Louvers High Velocity Ductwork Ductwork Accessories (Volume Dampers, Etc.)

Insulation (2.2.1) Pumps and Hydronic Specialties

(2.2.1) Exhaust Fans Double Wall Ductwork

2.2 Special Notes:

2.2.1 Upon substantial completion of the project, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineers (in addition to the required Shop Drawings) three (3) complete

copies of operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists for each item marked (1) above. These documents shall include at least:

2.2.1.1 Detailed operating instructions 2.2.1.2 Detailed maintenance instructions including preventive maintenance

schedules. 2.2.1.3 Addresses and phone numbers indicating where parts may be

purchased.

2.2.1.4 Expanded parts drawings, parts lists, service manuals, schematics, wiring diagrams.

2.2.2 Shop drawings for the Control Systems shall include detailed, scaled plans

and schematic diagrams indicating the function and operation of the system.

2.2.3 Shop drawings for the Building Fire Protection System shall be prepared and

stamped by a Certified Contractor and shall meet the criteria of the Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction and submitted to the Engineer. After the Engineer's review, they shall be submitted by the

Contractor to the proper state authorities along with the required State review fee.

PART 3 � SPECIAL WRENCHES, TOOLS, ETC.:

3.1 The Contractor shall furnish, along with equipment provided, any special wrenches or tools necessary to dismantle or service equipment or appliances

installed under the Contract. Wrenches shall include necessary keys, handles and operators for valves, cocks, hydrants, etc. A reasonable number of each shall be furnished. Provide the following minimally:


200300�4

3.1.1 Two (2) wall hydrant keys

PART 4 � BALANCE REPORTS: 4.1 Upon substantial completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineers four (4) bound copies of the Certified Air and Hydronic Balance Report.

END OF SECTION.


201100�1


SECTION 201100 � SLEEVING, CUTTING, PATCHING, FIRESTOPPING AND REPAIRING

PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Contractor's attention is directed to the General and Special Conditions, General Conditions�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other

sections of the Contract Documents which affect the work of this section and which are hereby made a part of the work specified in this section.

1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all openings, sleeves, trenches, etc.,

that he may require in floors, roofs, ceilings, walls, etc., and shall coordinate

all such work with the Construction Manager and all other trades. Coordinate with the Construction Manager, any openings which he is to provide before

submitting a bid proposal in order to avoid conflict and disagreement during construction. Improperly located openings shall be reworked at the expense

of the Contractor. 1.3 The Contractor shall plan his work ahead and shall place sleeves, frames or

forms through all walls, floors and ceilings during the initial construction, where it is necessary for piping, ductwork, conduit, etc., to go through;

however, when this is not done, the Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for the installation of his work, or he shall pay other trades for doing this work when so directed by the Engineer. Any damage caused to

the buildings by the workmen of the responsible Contractor must be corrected or rectified by him at is own expense.

1.4 The Contractor shall notify other trades in due time where he will require

openings or chases in new concrete or masonry. He shall set all concrete

inserts and sleeves for his work. Failing to do this, he shall cut openings for his work and patch same as required at his own expense.

1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for properly shoring, bracing, supporting,

etc., any existing and/or new construction to guard against cracking, settling,

collapsing, displacing or weakening while openings are being made. Any damage occurring to the existing and/or new structures, due to failure to

exercise proper precautions or due to action of the elements shall be promptly and properly made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.6 All work improperly done or not done at all as required by the Mechanical Trades in this section, will be performed by the Construction Manager at the

direction of the Contractor whose work is affected. The cost of this work shall be paid for by the Contractor responsible.


201100�2

PART 2 – SLEEVES:

2.1 Cast iron or Schedule 40 (minimum) steel sleeves shall be installed through

all walls where pipe enters the building below grade. Sleeves shall be flush

with each face of the wall and shall be sufficiently larger than the entering pipe to permit thorough caulking between pipe and sleeve for water proofing.

2.2 In all cases, sleeves shall be at least two pipe sizes larger than nominal pipe

diameter plus insulation.

2.3 Horizontal sleeves passing through exterior walls or where there is a

possibility of water leakage and damage shall be caulked watertight. Vertical sleeves in roofs shall be flashed and counterflashed with lead (4 lb.) or 16 oz. copper and welded or soldered to piping, lapped over sleeve and properly

weather sealed.

2.4 Where sleeves pass through roof construction, sleeves shall extend minimum of 8" above the roof. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be cut off flush

with inside surface unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 Openings thru structural slabs shall be accomplished by means of sleeves.

(No drilling will be allowed in structural slabs). In waffle, pre�cast or pan joist construction, openings may be made by means of diamond (core)

drilling or as otherwise approved by the Engineers. PART 3 – CUTTING:

3.1 All rectangular or special shaped openings in plaster, stucco or similar

materials, including gypsum board, shall be framed by means of plaster frames, casing beads, wood or metal angle members as required. The intent of this requirement is to provide smooth even termination of wall, floor and

ceiling finishes as well as to provide a fastening means for grilles, diffusers, lighting fixtures, etc.

3.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate all openings in masonry walls

with the Construction Manager; and, unless otherwise indicated on the

Architectural drawings, shall provide lintels for all openings required for the mechanical work (Louvers, wall boxes, exhaust fans, etc.). Lintels shall be

sized as follows: 3.2.1 New Openings under 48" in width: Provide one 3½"x3½"x3/8" steel angle

for each 4" of masonry width. Lintel shall have 8" bearing on either side.

3.2.2 New Openings over 48" in width: Consult the Project Structural Engineer. 3.3 No cutting is to be done at points or in a manner that will weaken the

structure and unnecessary cutting must be avoided. If in doubt, contact the


201100�3

Engineer.

3.4 Pipe openings in slabs and walls shall be cut with core drill. Hammer devices will not be permitted. Edges of trenches and large openings shall be scribe cut with a masonry saw.

PART 4 � PATCHING AND REPAIRING:

4.1 Patching and repairing made necessary by work performed under this

division shall be included as a part of the work and shall be done by skilled

mechanics of the trade or trades for work cut or damaged, in strict accordance with the provisions herein before specified for work of like type to

match adjacent surfaces and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 4.2 Where portions of existing lawns, shrubs, paving, etc. are disturbed for

installation of work of this Division, such items shall be repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.3 Where the installation of conduit, ducts, piping, etc. requires the penetration

of fire or smoke rated walls, ceilings or floors, the space around such conduit, duct, pipe, etc., shall be tightly filled with an approved non�combustible fire insulating material satisfactory to maintain the rating integrity of the wall,

floor or ceilings affected.

4.4 Where the installation of ductwork requires the penetration of non�rated floors, the space around the duct or pipe shall be tightly filled with an approved non�combustible material.

4.5 Where ducts penetrate fire rated assemblies, fire dampers shall be provided

with an appropriate access door. 4.6 Piping passing through floors, ceilings and walls in finished areas, unless

otherwise specified, shall be fitted with chrome plated brass escutcheons of sufficient outside diameter to amply cover the sleeved openings and an

inside diameter to closely fit the pipe around which it is installed. 4.7 Stainless steel collars shall be provided around all ducts, flues, breechings,

large pipes, etc. at all wall penetrations; both sides.

PART 5 � FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS: 5.1 All mechanical pipes and ducts penetrating fire rated floors and walls must be

firestopped. Firestopping assembly must be UL listed. Refer to the architectural drawings for all fire rated assemblies.

5.2 Firestopping materials to include but not limited to the following:

5.2.1 3M fire barrier FS�195 wrap/strip.


201100�4

5.2.2 3M fire barrier CP 25 caulk.

5.2.3 3M fire barrier MP moldable putty.

5.2.4 3M fire barrier RC�1 restricting collar with steel hose clamp.

5.2.5 3M fire barrier damming materials. 5.2.6 3M fire barrier CS�195 composite sheet.

5.2.7 3M fire barrier fire dam 150 caulk.

5.2.8 Steel sleeves.

PART 6 � INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS:

6.1 The following indicates the 3M penetration detail for uninsulated pipe penetration of various wall and floor construction types:

6.1.1 One, two or three hour fire rated solid or block concrete wall � 3M #5300�

MPC16 or 3M #5300�MPC26.

6.1.2 One hour fire rated gypsum wallboard � 3M #5300�MPC7.

6.1.3 Two hour fire rated gypsum wallboard � 3M #5300�MPC7.

6.2 The following indicates the 3M penetration detail for �insulated pipe penetrations of various wall and floor construction types:

6.2.1 One, two and three hour concrete block wall � 3M #5300�IMP2.

6.2.2 One hour fire rated gypsum wallboard � 3M #5300�IMP4.

6.2.3 HVAC ducts penetrating a one or two hour fire rated wall or floor shall be firestopped per 3M #5300�HVD1.

6.2.4 Multiple pipes penetrating fire rated floors and walls may be firestopped as a group. Submit 3M details for specific applications if this method of

firestopping is chosen.

END OF SECTION.


201200�1


SECTION 201200 � EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Contractor's attention is directed to the General and Special Conditions,

General Conditions�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other sections of the Contract Documents which affect the work of this section and

which are hereby made a part of the work specified in this section.

1.2 The Contractor shall include all excavating, filling, grading, and related items required to complete their work as shown on the drawings and specified herein or as required to complete, connect and place all mechanical systems

in satisfactory operation.

1.3 Unless otherwise shown or required, provide separate trenches for sewers, water lines and other underground raceways, with a minimum of 10 feet

measured from outside diameter between pipes. In locations, such as close to buildings where separate trenches for sewers and water lines are impractical, lay the water pipe on a solid shelf at least 2'�0" above the top of

the sewer and 2’�0" to the side. All exterior lines shall have a minimum earth cover of thirty six (36) inches to top of pipe, unless otherwise

indicated. 1.4 Water lines crossing under sewer lines, or crossing less than 2 feet above

sewer lines, must be encased for a distance not less than 5 feet on either side of the point of crossover.

PART 2 � EARTH AND ROCK CLASSIFICATION:

2.1 Materials to be excavated shall be unclassified, and shall include earth, rock, or any other obstructions encountered in trenching to install underground or

underslab utility pipes. Include all costs for rock removal in the bids. No adjustment in the Contract sum will be made on account of the presence or absence of rock, shale, or other materials encountered in the excavating.

PART 3 � BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS:

3.1 Maintain carefully all bench marks, monuments and other reference points.

If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.

PART 4 – EXCAVATION:

4.1 Excavate trenches of sufficient width for proper installation of the work.

When the depth of backfill over sewer pipe exceeds 10 feet, keep the trench

at the level of the top of the pipe as narrow as practical. Trench excavation


201200�2

for piping eight inches and smaller shall not exceed thirty inch width for exterior lines and twenty�four inch width for interior lines. Excavate to 6"

below the bottom of new pipes for installation of compacted grillage. 4.2 Sheet and brace trenches as necessary to protect workmen and adjacent

structures. Comply with local regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General

Contractors of America, Inc., and current OSHA Standards. Do not remove sheeting until trench is backfilled sufficiently to protect pipe and prevent injurious caving. Where removal of sheeting and/or bracing is hazardous,

leave in place. Cut off such sheeting not to be removed at least 3 feet below finished grade.

4.3 Rules and regulations governing the respective utilities shall be observed in

executing all work under this heading. Active utilities discovered in the

course of excavation shall be protected or relocated in accordance with written instructions from the Engineer. Inactive and abandoned utilities

encountered in trenching operations shall be removed and abandoned with ends plugged or capped in accord with current codes and safe practice. If in

doubt, contact Engineers. Machine excavation shall not be allowed within ten (10) feet of existing electric lines or lines carrying combustible materials. Use only hand tools.

4.4 The removal of rock shall be accomplished by use of hand or power tools

only. Blasting shall not be permitted unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Any damage to existing structures, exterior services, or rock intended for bearing, shall be corrected at the responsible Contractor's

expense.

4.5 Perform final grading of trench bottoms by hand tools; carry machine excavation only to such depth that soil bearing for pipes and raceways will not be disturbed. Grade the bottom of trenches evenly to insure uniform

bearing for all piping and raceways. Cut bell holes as necessary for joints and jointmaking. Except as hereinafter specified, bottom of trenches for bell

and spigot pipe, flanged pipe, etc. shall be shaped to the lower quadrant of pipe with additional excavation for bell or flange. Piping installed where it rests on bell or flange and/or is supported with blocks or wedges will not be

accepted.

4.6 Keep trenches free from water while construction therein is in progress. Under no circumstances lay pipe or appurtenances in water. Pump or bail water from bell holes to permit proper jointing of pipe. Any dewatering from

this Contractor's trenches which is required during construction, shall be included in this Contract.

4.7 In no case shall excavation work be accomplished that will damage in any

way the new structure, existing structures, equipment, utility lines, large

trees to remain, etc. The Contractors shall take the necessary steps to


201200�3

prevent flow of eroded earth by water or landslide onto the property of others, or against the structures. The repair of all such damage or any other

damage incurred in the course of excavation shall be borne by the responsible Contractor.

4.8 Use surveyor's level to establish elevations and grades.

4.9 Machine excavation shall be held a sufficient distance from foundations and footings to insure no damage to same. Contractors shall accept full responsibility and pay for repairs and/or replacement of structural members,

footings, etc.

4.10 The Contractor shall accept the site as it is and remove all trash, rubbish and material from the site prior to starting excavation work.

4.11 The Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades and temporary bridges around excavations as required for safety. Temporary bridges shall be

provided where excavations cross paved areas and walks. The Contractor shall maintain these bridges in a safe and passable condition for all traffic

until removal. Refer to OSHA Standards for such installations and comply with same in all details.

4.12 Pay particular attention to existing utilities and lines to avoid damage. The locations of existing lines which are indicated on the plans were taken

unconfirmed from drawings prepared for previous construction and locations are approximate only. Also, certain water, gas, electric, storm and sanitary sewer lines and other underground appurtenances, active or abandoned, may

not appear on the drawings. It shall be each Mechanical Contractor's responsibility to ascertain the location of all lines and excavate with caution

in their area. 4.13 Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated

subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer,

shall be at Contractor’s expense. PART 5 – BACKFILL, COMPACTION AND SURFACE REPAIR:

5.1 Backfilling for mechanical work shall include all trenches, manhole pits,

storage tank pits, and/or any other earth and/or rock openings which are excavated under this Contract. Backfilling shall be carefully performed and the surface restored to its original level to receive new finish. Wherever

trenches and earth openings have not been properly filled and/or settlement occurs, they shall be re�excavated, re�filled and properly compacted,

smoothed off and finally made to conform to the level of the original ground surface.


201200�4

5.2 All trenches shall be backfilled with 6" of manufactured sand or #8 crushed stone after finished excavation. Install the new pipe on the compacted fill

material. Install tracer wire on pipe. Apply any special coatings to the pipe at this point. Also perform all required pressure tests and check the grade of the pipe to ensure that it is correct and free of swags, bows or bends. Once

testing is complete, backfill the pipe bed to 12" above the top of the pipe with specified compacted fill material. Backfill the remainder of the trench

with earth (debris and rock free) tamped at 6" intervals. Water settling of backfill is permitted only as an aid to mechanical compacting.

5.3 Backfill and compact beneath areas to be seeded or sodded within six (6) inches of finished grade. The remaining six (6) inches shall be backfilled with

clean top soil. 5.4 Backfill and compact beneath paved areas, walks, etc. shall be brought to

proper grade to receive the sub�base and paving. No paving shall be placed on uncompacted fill or unstable soil.

5.5 Wherever, in the opinion of the Engineer, the soil at or below the requisite

pipe grade is unsuitable for supporting piping, special support shall be provided as directed by the Engineer.

5.6 Backfill and compaction for natural gas lines shall be in strict accordance with the local utility company or local municipality’s requirements. If in doubt,

contact the utility company or local municipality. 5.7 Unsuitable material and surplus excavated material not required for backfill

shall be removed from the site. The location of dump and length of haul shall be the affected Contractor's responsibility.

5.8 Provide and place any additional fill material from off the site as may be

required for backfill. Fill obtained from off site shall be of kind and quality as

specified for backfill and the source approved by the Engineer and shall be brought to the site by the Contractor requiring the fill.

5.9 In the absence (if not specified or indicated elsewhere in the drawings or

specifications to be done by others) of such work by others, the Contractor

shall lay new sod over his excavation work for existing disturbed grassy areas. Level, compress and water in accord with sound sodding practice.

5.10 Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum

percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

5.10.1At a minimum, fill in grass areas shall be compacted to 95% Standard

Proctor Density, ASTM D�698, at moisture content between 2 percent below to a 3 percent above the optimum moisture content or as specified in Division 2 – Earthwork; whichever is most stringent.


201200�5

5.10.2At a minimum, fill in concrete or asphalt area shall compacted to 98% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D�698, at moisture content between 2

percent below to a 3 percent above the optimum moisture content or as specified in Division 2 – Earthwork; whichever is most stringent.

5.11 Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of

backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same

elevation in each lift.

5.12 Grading: 5.12.1Grading Outside Building Lines:

5.12.1.1 All materials used for backfill around structures shall be of a quality

acceptable to the Engineer and shall be free from large or frozen lumps, large rocks, wood, and other extraneous material. All spaces excavated

and not occupied by footings, foundations, walls or other permanent work shall be refilled with earth up to the surface of the surrounding ground, unless otherwise specified, with sufficient allowance for settlement. In

making the fills and terraces around the structures, the fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth and shall be kept smooth as the

work progresses. Each layer of the fill shall be compacted. Sections of the fill immediately adjacent to buildings or structures shall be thoroughly compacted by means of mechanical tamping or hand tamping as may be

required by the conditions encountered. All fills shall be placed so as to load structure symmetrically.

5.12.1.2 As set out hereinbefore, rough grading shall be held below finished grade

and then the topsoil which has been stockpiled shall be evenly spread

over the surface. The grading shall be brought to the levels shown on the Drawings. Final dressing shall be accomplished by hand work or machine

work, or a combination of these methods as may be necessary to produce a uniform and smooth finish to all parts of the regrade. The surface shall be free from clods greater than one inch in diameter. Excavated rock (1”

and smaller) may be placed in the fills, but is shall be thoroughly covered. Rock placed in fills shall not be closer than 24 inches from finished grade.

Refer to Division 2 – Earthwork. 5.13 Maintenance:

5.13.1Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas

during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match


201200�6

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

5.14 Disposal of Excess Non�organic Soil and Rock:

5.14.1Unless otherwise directed, excess topsoil and subsoil suitable for fill shall remain the property of the Owner and be stockpiled by the Contractor on�site

where directed. 5.14.2General: Any excess excavated waste material shall become the property of

the Contractor and shall be disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION.


201300�1


SECTION 201300 � PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS AND PIPE SUPPORT PART 1 – GENERAL:




1.2 The piping indicated shall be installed complete and shall be of the size indicated. When a pipe size is not indicated, the Contractor shall request the pipe size from the Engineers. All piping shall be installed straight and true,

parallel or perpendicular to the building construction. Piping shall be installed so as to allow for expansion without damage to the building finishes,

structure, pipe, equipment, etc., use offsets, U�bends or expansion joints as required. Where a section of piping is not indicated but is obviously required

for completion of the system, the Contractor shall provide same at no additional cost to the project. No mitered joints or field fabricated pipe bends shall be accepted. Pipe shall clear all windows, doors, louvers and

other building openings.

1.3 All pipes shall be supported in a neat and workmanlike manner and wherever possible, parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on trapeze type hangers. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor line

with approved steel pipe riser clamps. The use of wire or perforated metal to support pipes will not be permitted. Hanging pipes from other pipes shall not

be permitted. Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed eight feet for pipes up to 3 inches and ten feet on all other piping. Small vertical pipes (1 inch and less) shall be bracketed to walls, structural members, etc. at four (4)

foot intervals so as to prevent vibration or damage by occupants. Insulated piping shall be supported on a rigid insulation block at each hanger so as to

prevent crushing of insulation by hangers. Hangers shall pass completely around the insulation jacket and a steel protective saddle shall be applied to prevent compression of the insulation. (Refer to Specifications Section

entitled INSULATION�MECHANICAL.

1.4 Where piping rests directly on a hanger, clip, bracket or other means of support, the support element shall be of the same material as the pipe, (e.g., copper to copper, ferrous to ferrous, etc.) or shall be electrically isolated one

from the other so as to prevent pipe damage by electrolysis. Pay particular attention and do not allow copper pipe to rest on ferrous structural members,

equipment, etc. without electrolytic isolation. 1.5 Where plastic piping penetrates a fire rated assembly, it shall be replaced

with a threaded metal adapter and metal pipe or whatever means necessary


201300�2

to maintain the separation rating in accordance with local plumbing and fire codes.

1.6 Plastic piping or any material with a flame and smoke spread rating not

approved for plenum use shall not be permitted in supply, return, relief or

exhaust plenums.

1.7 Install all gas piping per NFPA54. Union or valves shall not be installed in an air plenum. Piping below slab must be sleeved and vented. Piping installed in contained non�vented areas shall not have mechanical joints.

1.8 Dielectric nipples or couplings shall be provided at all connections of

dissimilar materials. 1.9 In general, piping shall be installed concealed except in Mechanical, Janitor

Rooms, etc. unless otherwise indicated, and shall be installed underground or beneath concrete slabs only where indicated. All lines at ceilings shall be

held as high as possible and shall run so as to avoid conflicts with other trades, and to facilitate the Owner's use and maintenance. Location of pipe

in interior partitions shall be carefully coordinated with whoever will construct the partitions after the piping is in place. Where exposed risers occur they shall be kept as close to walls as possible.

1.10 Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall be new and of the best grade

and quality for the type specified. 1.11 Installation of pipe shall be in such a manner as to provide complete

drainage of the system toward the source. Drain valves shall be provided at all drainage points on pipes. Drain valves shall be ½" size gate type with

3/4" hose thread end and vacuum breaker. Label each drain valve. 1.12 Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by

the Contractor and worked into place without springing or forcing. All pipes shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining and before assembling.

All lengths of pipe shall be set vertically and tapped with a hammer to remove scale and dust and inspected to insure that no foreign matter is lodged therein.

1.13 All hot and cold water piping shall be kept a sufficient distance apart so as to

prevent heat transfer between them. Cold water piping shall also be kept apart from refrigerant hot gas lines.

1.14 Piping carrying water or other fluids subject to freezing shall not be installed in locations subject to freezing; if in doubt, consult Engineer.

1.15 Piping for all drainage systems shall be installed to permit flow, trapping, and

venting in accord with current codes and sound practice.


201300�3

1.16 All increases in vent size at roof shall be by means of service weight cast iron increasers.

1.17 Non�metallic piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. If no such instructions are available, consult

Engineers.

1.18 Nipples shall be of the same material, composition and weight classification as pipe with which installed.

1.19 Where piping is not indicated on the plans, but is obviously or apparently required, contact the Engineers prior to submission of a bid proposal.

1.20 Pay particular attention to conflict of piping with other work. Do not install

until conflict is resolved. If necessary, contact Engineers.

1.21 Piping materials in each system shall, to the extent practicable, be of the

same material. Frequent changes of material (for example, from copper to steel) shall be avoided and in no case shall be accomplished without use of

insulating unions and permission of the Engineers. 1.22 Apply approved pipe dope (for service intended) to all male threaded joints.

Pay particular attention to dope for fuel gas lines. The dope shall be listed for such use.

1.23 Eccentric reducers shall be used where required to permit proper drainage

and venting of pipe lines; bushings shall not be permitted.

1.24 High points of closed loop chilled/hot water and geothermal water heating

systems shall have manual air vents as required unless automatic air vents are specifically indicated. Pipe to suitable drainage point.

1.25 All piping shall be capped or plugged during erection as required to keep clean and debris and moisture free.

1.26 The entire domestic hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping system shall

be sterilized in strict accord with requirements of the Department of Health

Codes, Rules and Regulations for the State in which the work is being accomplished.

1.27 The entire sanitary waste and vent piping system within the building shall be

air�tight. If any sewer gases are present within the building, it is the

contractor’s responsibility to locate and correct this problem completely, and re�tested. Any odor problems within a one year after substantial completion

is the responsibility of the contractor to correct. 1.28 Site water piping utilized for domestic service shall be filled, cleaned and

disinfected. Disinfection shall utilize chlorine per the local water company


201300�4

standards. Hyper�chlorinated water shall be discharged (and diluted if required) at the end of the pipeline into the sanitary sewers per local utility

regulations. PART 2 � UNIONS AND FLANGES:

2.1 Screwed unions, soldered unions or bolted flanges shall be provided as

required to permit removal of equipment, valves and piping accessories from the piping system. Keep adequate clearances for coil removal, rodding, tube replacement, motor lubrication, filter replacement, etc. Flanged joints shall

be assembled with appropriate flanges, gaskets and bolting. The clearance between flange faces shall be such that the connections can be gasketed and

bolted tight without imposing undue strain on the piping system. 2.2 Dielectric insulating nipples or couplings shall be used wherever the adjoining

materials being connected are of dissimilar metals such as connections between copper and steel pipe.

PART 3 � SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS:

3.1 All piping and material shall be new, made in the United States and shall

conform to the following minimum applicable standards:

3.1.1 Steel pipe; ASTM A�53.

3.1.2 Copper tube; Type K, L, M; ASTM B88�62; Type DWV ASTM B306�62.

3.1.3 Cast iron soil pipe; ASA A�40.l and CS 188�59.

3.1.4 Cast iron drainage fittings; ASA B16.12. 3.1.5 Cast iron screwed fittings; ASA B16.4.

3.1.6 Cast brass and wrought copper fittings; ASA B16.18.

3.1.7 Cast brass drainage fittings; ASA B16.23.

3.1.8 Solder; Handy and Harmon, United Wire and Supply; Air Reduction Co. or equivalent.

PART 4 � PITCH OF PIPING:

4.1 All piping systems shall be installed so as to drain to a low point. Certain minimum pitches shall be required for this drainage. For proper flow and/or

for proper operation, the following pitches shall be required: 4.2 Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: ¼ inch per foot in direction of flow

where possible but in no case less than 1/8" per foot.


201300�5

4.3 Condensate Drain Lines From Cooling Equipment: Not less than ¼ inch per

foot in direction of flow. 4.4 Exterior Storm Lines: Not less than 1 percent grade in direction of flow.

4.5 All Other Lines: Provide ample pitch to a low point to allow 100 percent

drainage of the system. PART 5 – APPLICATIONS:

5.1 Fire Protection � Interior

5.1.1 Refer to the Fire Protection System section of these specifications.

5.2 Soil, Waste and Vent Piping (Below Slab)

5.2.1 Schedule 40 PVC pipe with drainage pattern fittings and solvent cement joints made in accordance with the Plumbing Code. PVC pipe will not be

allowed in boiler rooms unless otherwise stated on the construction documents.

5.3 Soil, Waste and Vent Piping (Above Slab)

5.3.1 Type DWV copper drainage piping with cast bronze drainage pattern fittings with solder joints.

5.3.2 Schedule 40 PVC pipe with drainage pattern fittings and solvent cement joints made in accordance with the Plumbing code.

5.4 Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculating Hot Water Piping (Above Slab)

5.4.1 Type "L" hard copper tubing with wrought copper fittings with lead free solder equivalent in performance to 95/5. (Maximum lead content of solder

and flux is 2%). 5.5 Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculating Hot Water Piping (Below Slab)

5.5.1 Type "K" hard or soft copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed

joints. There shall be no joints beneath slabs. 5.6 Geothermal/Heat pump loop piping (Interior)

5.6.1 Mains and branches – Piping shall be virgin polyethylene with a PE 3408

piping formaulation and 345464C or greater cell classification. Pipe shall be SDR 15.5, minimum pressure rating of 110 psi at 73.4°F.


201300�6

5.6.2 Branches � Type "L" hard copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and 95/5 solder.

5.6.3 Transitions from polyethylene to copper – Factory manufactured

transition required with brass threads. No metal threads shall be

inserted into polyethylene piping, and no polyethylene threads shall be inserted into metal piping.

5.6.4 The only acceptable method for joining pipe is by a heat fusion process.

Pipe shall be butt or socket fused in accordance with pipe manufacturer's

procedures. Installers shall have heat fusion school certification per geothermal specifications. Provide copy of heat fusion card to Engineer

for review. 5.6.5 Special Notes: Takeoffs and branch piping to individual coils or heat

pumps shall not be connected to the bottom of hydronic mains. Connection to mains shall be at the side of the main. Also refer to details

on the drawings

5.7 Air Vent Discharge Lines 5.7.1 Type "L" soft copper; wrought copper fittings, 95/5 solder.

5.8 Condensate Drain Lines

5.8.1 Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings.

5.9 Water Heater Relief Line

5.9.1 Type "M" copper tubing with sweat fittings and 95/5 solder.

END OF SECTION.


202100�1


SECTION 202100 � VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 Each Mechanical Contractor's attention is directed to the General and Special

Conditions, General Conditions�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other sections of the Contract Documents which affect the

work of this section and which are hereby made a part of the work specified herein.

1.2 Each Mechanical Contractor (and/or Sub�Contractors) shall provide all valves

required to control, maintain and direct flow of all fluid systems indicated or

specified. This shall include, but may not be limited to all valves of all types including balancing cocks, air cocks, lubricated plug cocks, packed plug

cocks, special valves for special systems, etc., for all Mechanical Systems.

1.3 All valves shall be designed and rated for the service to which they are applied.

1.4 The following type valves shall not be acceptable: Zinc, plastic, fiber or non�metallic.

1.5 Each type of valve shall be of one manufacturer, i.e., gate valves, one

manufacturer, globe valves, one manufacturer, silent check valves, one

manufacturer, etc.. The following valve manufacturers shall be acceptable: Lunkenheimer, Powell, Nibco, Crane, Jenkins, T & S Brass, Walworth,

Milwaukee, DeZurik, Consolidated Valve Industries, Inc., Bell & Gossett, Apollo.

1.6 All valves shall comply with current Federal, State and Local Codes.

1.7 All valves shall be new and of first quality. 1.8 Contractor shall provide colored tape on ceiling tile where valves are located

above ceiling. Provide access panels where valves are located above hard ceiling.

PART 2 � TYPES AND APPLICATION � DOMESTIC WATER:

2.1 Globe Valves (2" and under): Globe Valves shall have bronze body, bonnet and disc holder. Globe valve shall have union bonnet, integral seat, teflon or

stainless steel renewable disc and be rated for 150 psi working pressure. Globe valve shall be Nibco T�235 for threaded ends or Nibco S�235 for solder ends.


202100�2

2.2 Check Valve (2" and under): Check valve shall have bronze body, disc and hinge. check valve shall be Y�pattern type, horizontal swing, renewable disc

and rated for 150 psi working pressure. Check valve shall be Nibco T�413 for threaded ends or Nibco S�413 for solder ends.

2.3 Ball Valve (2" and under): Ball valve shall have bronze body, ball and reinforced, water tight seat. Valve shall be "full�port" type. Valve handle

shall only require quarter turn to go from full open to full close. The handle shall be removable with vinyl grip. Valve shall be rated for 180 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi working pressure. Ball valve shall be Nibco

T�585 for threaded ends and Nibco S�585 for solder ends.

2.4 Ball Valves (2½”�3”): Ball valve shall have bronze body, ball and reinforced, watertight seat. Valve shall be "full port" type. Valve handle shall only require quarter turn to go from full open to full close. The handle shall be

removable with vinyl grip. Valve shall be rated for 250 degrees F water temperature and 200 psi working pressure. Ball valve shall be Nibco T�580

for threaded ends and Nibco TS�580 for solder ends. Provide extended handles for all ball valves installed in an insulated system.

2.5 Strainers (2" and under): Watts 77S Series "Y" type strainer with cast iron

body and threaded ends. Screen shall be 20 mesh stainless steel. Strainer

shall be provided with cleanout plug and be rated for 200 psi working pressure.

2.6 Strainers (2 ½ and larger): Watts 77F Series "Y" type strainer with semi�

steel body and flanged ends. Screen shall be 20 mesh stainless steel.

Strainer shall be provided with bolted cleanout and be rated for 200 psi working pressure.

2.7 Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts #U5B water pressure reading valve with

bronze body, bolted bonnet, integral stainless steel strainer and outlet water

pressure gauge. Internal disc, diaphragm and stainless steel seat shall all be removable. Valve shall be rated for inlet water pressures up to 300 psi.

Water pressure reducing valves shall be provided for all equipment where water pressure exceeds the equipment manufacturer’s ratings.

2.8 Vacuum Breakers: Watts #288A atmospheric type vacuum breaker with brass body. Vacuum breaker shall be rated for 210 degrees F and 125 psi

working pressure and shall meet ASSE Standard 1001. 2.9 Double Check Valve: Double check valve shall have bronze body

construction and be provided with inlet strainer, (2) gate valves for isolation and (3) test ports. Assembly shall be rated for 110 degrees F water

temperature and 175 psi water pressure. Assembly must meet requirements of AWWA Standard C506. Provide Watts #900 with threaded ends for sizes 2" and less. For sizes over 2" provide Watts #709 with flange ends.


202100�3

2.10 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: Watts #909 reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be provided with inlet strainer, (2) gate valves for

isolation, (3) test ports and air gap fitting. Assembly shall be rated for 110 degrees F water temperature and 175 psi water pressure. RPBP shall be UL listed and meet AWWA C511 standards. All valves 3" and less in size shall

bronze body construction, over 3" in size shall have epoxy coated cast iron bodies. Assemblies 2" and under in size shall have threaded ends, over 2" in

size shall have flange ends. 2.11 Balancing Valve: Bell & Gossett “Circuit Setter” Model CB or equal balancing

valve. All valves to be of bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure read�out

ports across valve seat area. Read�out ports to be fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve bodies to have 1/4" NPT tapped drain/purge port. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for

service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated nameplates to assure specific valve settings.

Valves shall be designed for positive shut�off.

PART 3 � TYPES AND APPLICATION – HYDRONIC/GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS: 3.1 Check Valves (2" and less): Check valve shall have bronze body, disc and

hinge. Check valve shall be Y�pattern type horizontal swing, renewable disc and rated for 200 psi working pressure. Check valve shall be Nibco T�413 for

threaded ends or Nibco S�413 for solder ends. 3.2 Check Valves (2�1/2" and larger): Check valve shall have cast iron body and

cast iron bolted bonnet the disc and seat ring shall be bronze. Check valve shall be horizontal swing with renewable seat and disc. Valve shall be rated

for 200 psi working pressure. Check valve shall be Nibco F�918 for flanged ends and Nibco T�918 for threaded ends. Threaded ends valve allowed for sizes 3" and less only.

3.3 Ball Valves (2” and under): Ball valve shall have bronze body, ball and

reinforced, watertight seat. Valve shall be "full port" type. Valve handle shall only require quarter turn to go from full open to full close. The handle shall be removable with vinyl grip. Valve shall be rated for 250 degrees F

water temperature and 200 psi working pressure. Ball valve shall be Nibco T�585 for threaded ends and Nibco S�585 for solder ends. Provide extended

handles for all ball valves installed in a chilled water system or dual temperature hot/chilled water system.

3.4 Ball Valve (2�1/2” to 3”): Ball valve shall have bronze body, ball and reinforced, watertight seat. Valve shall be "full port" type. Valve handle

shall only require quarter turn to go from full open to full close. The handle shall be removable with vinyl grip. Valve shall be rated for 250 degrees F water temperature and 200 psi working pressure. Ball valve shall be Nibco

T�580 for threaded ends and Nibco S�580 for solder ends. Provide extended


202100�4

handles for all ball valves installed in a chilled water system.

3.5 Butterfly Valve: Butterfly valve shall have cast iron body with bronze disc. Valve to have extended neck to allow for insulation and be "lug" type configuration. Interior liner shall be made of EPDM. Lever handle shall be

lock type with 10 position settings. Valve to be rated for 200 psi working pressure and be equal to Hammond 6000 Series.

3.6 Strainers (2" and under): Watts 77S Series "Y" type strainer with cast iron

body and threaded ends. Screen shall be 20 mesh stainless steel. Strainer

shall be provided with cleanout plug and be rated for 200 psi working pressure.

3.7 Strainers (2½" and larger): Watts 77F Series "Y" type strainer with semi�

steel body and flanged ends. Screen shall be 20 mesh stainless steel.

Strainer shall be provided with bolted cleanout and be rated for 200 psi working pressure.

3.8 Flexible Connection: Pumpsaver SMP or equal braided stainless steel pump

connector(s). Construction to be of annular corrugated stainless steel close�pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s), and a stainless steel ring�ferrule/band (material gauge not less than

.048") must be integrally seal�welded using a 100% circumferential, full�penetration TIG weld. End fittings shall be flat�face plate steel flanges with

150# ANSI drilling and outside diameter. Fittings must be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. Braided stainless steel pump connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F (455°C). The rated

working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. Each braided stainless steel pump connector shall be individually leak

tested by the manufacturer using air�under�water or hydrostatic pressure. Flanged pump connectors shall be prepared for shipment using cut�to�length spacers, securely positioned between the flanges to prevent axial

compression damage and maintain the manufactured length. Spacers must be removed prior to system start up.

3.9 Air Eliminator: Amtrol automatic air eliminator with cast iron body and

bronze pilot. Unit to be rated for 150 psi working pressure and 250 degrees

F working temperature. Pipe discharge to nearest floor drain.

3.10 Automatic Air Vent: Armstrong Model 79 automatic air vent for vertical mounting with brass body and polypropylene float. Vent to be rated for 150 psi working pressure and 240 degrees F working temperature. Pipe

discharge to nearest floor drain.

3.11 Manual Air Vent: Armstrong Model 505A manual air vent with brass body. Install with 12" length of 1/4" soft copper discharge piping.

END OF SECTION.


202200�1


SECTION 202200 � INSULATION � MECHANICAL PART 1 – GENERAL:



which are hereby made a part of the work specified herein.

1.2 Work under this section shall include all labor, equipment, accessories, materials and services required to furnish and install all insulation, fittings and finishes for all mechanical systems specified herein and/or as indicated.

1.3 Application of insulation materials shall be done in accordance with

manufacturer's written recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not specified, use applicable thickness recommended by manufacturer for

specific use. Insulation shall be applied by a company regularly engaged in the application of insulation and any work deemed unacceptable by the Engineers shall be removed and properly installed at the expense of the

Contractor.

PART 2 – MANUFACTURERS: 2.1 Insulation shall be as manufactured by Manville, Keene Corp., Knauf, Owens�

Corning, Armstrong, World Industries or other approved equivalent. Insulation sundries and adhesives shall be as made by Benjamin Foster,

Childers, Vimasco or approved equivalent. PART 3 � FIRE RATINGS AND STANDARDS:

3.1 Insulations, jackets and facings shall have composite fire and smoke hazard

ratings as tested by ASTM E�84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 procedures not exceeding Flame Spread 25, Smoke Developed 50 and Fuel Contributed 50.

3.2 Adhesives, mastics, tapes and fitting materials shall have component ratings as listed above.

3.3 All products and their packaging shall bear a label indicating above

requirements are not exceeded.

3.4 Duct linings shall meet the Erosion Test Method in compliance with UL

Publication No. 181.


202200�2

PART 4 � GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS:

4.1 Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces in a neat and workmanlike

manner reflecting the best current practices in the trade. Insulation shall not

be applied to piping, ductwork or equipment until tested, inspected and released for insulation.

4.2 Where more than one thickness of insulation is required, joints (both

longitudinal and transverse) shall be staggered.

4.3 All insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling openings and sleeves.

However, insulation shall be broken through fire walls. All covered pipe and ductwork is to be located a sufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork and other obstacles to permit the application of the full thickness of

insulation specified. If necessary, extra fittings and pipe are to be used. No noticeable deformation of insulation or discontinuity of vapor seal, where

required, will be accepted. Coordinate work with plumbers, pipe fitters, etc. to assure hanger locations agree with location of insulation inserts.

4.4 “Concealed", where used herein, shall mean hidden from sight as in trenches,

chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts, or above hung finished ceilings.

"Exposed" shall mean that piping or equipment is not "concealed" as defined above. Piping and equipment in service tunnels, mechanical equipment

rooms, storage areas, or unfinished rooms is to be considered as "exposed". 4.5 Existing and/or new insulation removed and/or damaged during course of

construction shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer.

4.6 Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Do not use staples thru the jacket. NO EXCEPTIONS!

4.7 All insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together.

4.8 The Contractor shall insure that all insulation (piping, ductwork, equipment, etc.) is completely continuous along all conduits, equipment, connection routes, etc. carrying cold fluids (air, water, other) and that condensation can,

in no way, collect in or on the insulation, equipment, conduits, etc. Any such occurrence of condensation collection and/or damage therefrom shall be

repaired solely at the expense of the Contractor. PART 5 � PIPING SYSTEMS:

5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 Bevel insulation and jacket at all points where insulation terminates at

unions, flanges, valves and equipment. Note: Applies to hot water lines

only; cold water lines require continuous insulation.


202200�3

5.1.2 Pipe insulation shall extend around valve bodies to above drain pans in

hydronic equipment over pumps, etc. to insure no condensation drip or collection.

5.1.3 Valves, flanges and unions shall only be insulated when installed on piping whose surface temperature will be at or below the dew point temperature of

the ambient air. 5.1.4 Insulation shall not extend through fire and smoke walls. Pack sleeve at fire

and smoke wall with approved fire retardant packing similar to mineral wool.

5.2 INSULATION SHIELDS AND INSERTS 5.2.1 Metal insulation shields are required at all pipe hangers where the piping is

insulated. Metal shields shall be constructed of galvanized steel, formed to a 180 ° arc. Insulation shields shall be the following size:

PIPE SIZE SHIELD GAUGE SHIELD LENGTH

2" AND LESS 20 12"

2 1/2" TO 4" 18 12"

5" TO 10" 16 18"

12" AND GREATER 14 24"

5.2.2 Insulated pipes 2” in diameter and larger shall be additionally supported with

wood inserts of sufficient compressive strength to carry the weight of the

pipe and fluid. Inserts shall extend beyond extend beyond the hanger and shall be at least 6” in length.

5.3 PREMOLDED INSULATION FITTING COVERS

5.3.1 Provide Zeston 2000 or equal PVC insulated fitting covers on all pipe fittings, flanges, valves and pipe terminations. Fittings shall be insulated by applying

the proper factory precut insulation insert to the pipe fitting. The ends of the insulation insert shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe insulation tufted and tucked in, fully insulating the

pipe fitting. The proper thickness of insulation must be applied to keep the jacket temperature less than 150°F. An approved vapor retarder mastic

compatible with the PVC shall be applied around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation and on the fitting cover throat overlap seam. The PVC fitting cover shall then be applied and secured with pressure sensitive tape along

the circumferential edges. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and have an overlap on itself at least 2" on the downward side.

On fittings where the operating temperature is below 50°F, two or more layers of the insulation inserts shall be applied with the first layer being


202200�4

secured with a few wrappings of fiber glass yarn to eliminate voids. One addition insert shall be used for each additional 1" of pipe insulation above 1�

1/2". 5.4 INSULATION MATERIAL (FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS)

Insulation shall be Owens�Corning Model 25ASJ/SSL or approved equivalent

fiberglass pipe insulation with an all service jacket. The insulation shall be a heavy density, pipe insulation with a K factor not exceeding 0.27 Btu per inch/h.ft² °F at 75°F mean temperature. The insulation shall be wrapped

with a vapor barrier jacket. The jacket shall have an inside foil surface with self sealing lap and a water vapor permeability of .02 perm/inch. All

circumferential joints shall be vapor sealed with butt strips. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The following pipes shall be insulated with the thickness

of insulation as noted.

5.4.1 Domestic Water Systems:

5.4.1.1 Domestic Cold Water � 1" thick insulation 5.4.1.2 Domestic 120°F Hot Water and

120°F Recirculating Hot Water � 1" thick insulation

5.4.1.3 Armaflex shall be permitted for use on domestic water piping located in block walls (before the building has been dried in).

5.4.2 Geothermal Heat Pump Piping � 1" thick on all concealed piping.

5.4.3 Condensate Drain Lines � 1/2" thick.

5.4.4 Floor Drain Sanitary Pipes: 5.4.4.1 All floor drains that have condensate spilled to the drain, and the sanitary

pipe is not below slab, shall have its respective sanitary pipe insulated with 1" thickness. Insulate the pipe until it connects to a 4" main, but a

minimum of 20 feet in the direction of flow. 5.5 JACKETS

5.5.1 Exposed (Mechanical Platforms, Interior Finished Rooms and Storage

Rooms): 5.5.1.1 All insulated piping, with�in 8 feet of the finished floor, in the above areas

shall have a 6 oz. canvas jacket with fire retardant lagging apply to the insulation specified for the piping.


202200�5

PART 6 � DUCTWORK SYSTEMS:

6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 Duct sizes indicated are the net free area inside clear dimensions; where ducts are internally lined, overall dimensions shall be increased accordingly.

6.1.2 Duct insulation shall extend completely to all registers, grilles, diffusers, and

louver outlets, etc., to insure no condensation drip or collection.

6.2 EXTERNAL INSULATION (FOR SUPPLY, RETURN AND OUTSIDE AIR

DUCTWORK)

6.2.1 Owens/Corning, All Service Fiberglass Duct Wrap, "Faced Duct Wrap � Type

75" or approved equivalent, 2" thick fiberglass duct wrap, factory laminated to a reinforced foil kraft vapor barrier facing (FRK) with a 2" stapling flange

at one edge. The installed R value shall be a minimum of 5.0. Flame spread 25, smoke developed 50, vapor barrier performance 0.02 perms per inch.

6.3 EXPOSED EXTERNAL INSULATION (FOR SUPPLY, RETURN AND OUTSIDE AIR

DUCTWORK ON THE MECHANICAL PLATFORMS)

6.3.1 Owens/Corning or approved equivalent industrial insulation type 705. 1½"

rigid fiberglass industrial board with foil scrim kraft vapor barrier facing, 6.0 PCF density, K=0.23 Btu in/hr.ft² °F @ 75°F. . Use semi�rigid Type 703/704 insulation for round ducts. The installed R�value shall be a minimum of 5.0.

Flame spread 25, smoke developed 50, vapor barrier performance 0.02 perms per inch. Provide 6oz. canvas jacket with fire retardant lagging and

provide a metal corner bead at all duct corners (on the exterior of the insulation) for protection. The corner bead shall be taped in place with foil scrim tape.

6.4 INTERNAL INSULATION: Duct liner shall be 1” thick flexible elastomeric

insulation (Armaflex AP Duct Liner). K=0.27 BTU in./hr. ft2 °F @ 75°F.

NOTE: Only where shown or noted on the drawings."

6.5 DUCT SOUND ABSORBER / DUCTWRAP

6.5.1 Where noted on the drawings, provide the following in addition to the duct

insulation (if required).

6.5.2 1" thick Kinetics KBC�100RBQ (or Sound Seal BBC�1 B�10FS QFA�1) limp

barrier material (1.3 lb/sq ft), reinforced with a fiber glass screen, loaded with barium sulphate, with a quilt faced fiber glass absorber on one side. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Minimum Sound Transmission Loss

per octave band shall be:


202200�6

Octave Band ST Loss (dB) 125 Hz 10

250 Hz 16 500 Hz 22 1000 Hz 30

2000 Hz 39 4000 Hz 43

STC 27

END OF SECTION.


202300�1


SECTION 202300 � THERMOMETERS, PRESSURE GAUGES AND OTHER MONITORING INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Mechanical Contractor(s) shall include all thermometers, pressure gauges and/or compound gauges at the locations indicated.

1.2 All thermometers, pressure gauges and/or compound gauges shall be provided with “PET Cocks” to allow the gauge to be removed and replaced

without shutting down system. PART 2 � THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES:

2.1 All thermometers and pressure gauges shall be readable from a standing

position on the floor.

2.2 Water thermometers shall be Bimetal type with 3" dial, stainless steel case, stainless steel stem and socket with length as required by piping system. Accuracy to be plus or minus 1%. Lens to be plastic. Hot water thermometer

shall have a 30°F to 240°F range and chilled water thermometer shall have a 25°F to 125°F range. (Marsh Master Therm or equal.)

2.3 Pressure gauges shall be Bourdon Type, circular, 2�1/2" face, black letters on

white face graduated in 2 PSI or less and shall be manufactured for service

intended. Provide with pig tail connectors and gauge cocks. Accuracy to be plus or minus 2%. Water pressure and low pressure steam gauges shall

have 0 to 100 PSI range and medium/high pressure steam gauges shall have 0 to 200 PSI range. (Marsh Acculite II or equal.)

2.4 Provide direct mount Bimetal dial thermometers in HVAC ductwork. Thermometer shall be 3" diameter, with acrylic plastic lens and stainless

steel case. Air temperature range shall be 25°F to 125°F. (Marsh Master Therm or equal.)

2.5 Pressure gauges and thermometers subject to vibration shall be mounted remotely away from vibrating pipe surface, etc. with flexible tubing.

2.6 Mount thermometers in approved wells. Do not make direct contact of base

with fluid in pipe.

2.7 Gauges and thermometers shall be Marsh, Marshalltown, Trerice, Weksler or

equivalent.


202300�2

PART 3 � PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST STATION (PETES PLUG):

3.1 Provide 1/4" NPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe,

1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with two valve cores. (Valve core

material to be Neoprene for temperatures up to 200ºF and Nordel for temperatures between 200ºF and 275ºF.). Petes Plugs to have 3" length

when installed on insulated pipes and 1�1/2" length for uninsulated pipes. Petes Plug to be fitted with a color coded cap strap with gasket, and shall be rated at 1000 PSIG at 140ºF.

END OF SECTION.


202400�1


SECTION 202400 � IDENTIFICATIONS, TAGS, CHARTS, ETC. PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 Each Mechanical Contractor's attention is directed to the General and Special

Conditions, General Conditions�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other Contract Documents which affect the work of this section

and which are hereby made a part of the work specified herein.

PART 2 � VALVE TAGS AND CHARTS: 2.1 Provide and install on each valve in the Mechanical Systems a l½" diameter

circular brass tag fitted to each valve so that it cannot be removed. Each tag shall be embossed consecutively with letter and number identifiers as to

system and purpose respectively. Letter identifiers shall be as follows:

2.1.1 GS Geothermal Condenser Water Supply 2.1.2 GR Geothermal Condensing Water Return 2.1.3 DCW Domestic Cold Water

2.1.4 DHW Domestic Hot Water 2.1.5 RHW Recirculating Hot Water

2.1.6 FP Fire Protection 2.2 Number identifiers shall be determined by the Contractor sequentially. For

example, valve No. GS/GR�1 may be maintenance stops for heat pump units. Only provide tags on concealed valves. (Valve chart shall continue from

previous valve chart, coordinate with Owner.) 2.3 Provide three (3) copies of typewritten valve charts indicating each valve

identifier, the valves purpose and its location. Also furnish one electronic copy on CD in Micrsoft Excel format. For example: "GS/GR Heat Pump

Maintenance Stop�One valve above classroom (10) ceiling." One (1) copy of this chart shall be mounted in suitable wood frame(s) with clear plastic or glass covers in a conspicuous location in the Mechanical Room. Two other

copies shall be turned over to the Engineers.

2.4 Where more than one major Mechanical Room is indicated for the project, install mounted valve schedule in each major Mechanical Room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of

more than single Mechanical Room.

PART 3 � PIPING IDENTIFICATION: 3.1 All piping installed shall be identified according to the chart hereinafter

specified. Provide stenciled markers and arrows indicating direction of flow


202400�2

on all piping installed under this contract. Markers and arrows shall be painted on the piping using machine cut stencils. All letters shall be sprayed

using fast drying lacquer paint. All markers and arrows shall be properly oriented so that descriptive name may be easily read from the floor. Piping shall be identified on twelve foot centers. All piping shall be minimally

identified once above all room ceilings and where it passes thru walls or floors. At the Contractor's option, Setmark or equivalent manufactured

marking system may be substituted for field marking. The following table describes the size of the color field and size of the identification letters which shall be used for pipes of different outside pipe diameters.

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE OR COVERING

LENGTH OF COLOR FIELD

SIZE OF LETTERS

INCHES INCHES INCHES

3/4 TO 1 1/4 8 ½

1 ½ TO 2 8 3/4

2 ½ TO 6 12 1 1/4

8 TO 10 24 2 ½

OVER 10 32 3 ½

3.1.1 GS Geothermal Condenser Water Supply

3.1.2 GR Geothermal Condenser Water Return 3.1.3 DCW Domestic Cold Water

3.1.4 DHW Domestic Hot Water (120 ºF) 3.1.5 RHW Recirculating Hot Water(120 ºF) 3.1.6 FP Fire Protection

3.2 All above piping shall also be identified with a 2” band of painted color every

10’�0” minimum. The owner will provide the color chart for proper identification.

PART 4 � EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:

4.1 Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall be identified with the title of the equipment as taken from the plans in a position that is clearly visible from the floor. The equipment shall be identified neatly and conspicuously

with engraved black lamacoid plates (or equivalent) with 2” high white letters on the front of each piece of equipment. All mechanical equipment shall

have the electrical panel number and circuit number identified on the lamacoid plate. Coordinate with the electrical contractor.


202400�3

PART 5 � DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION: 5.1 All ductwork shall be identified as to the service of the duct and direction of

flow. The letters shall be at least two inches high and the flow arrow shall be at least six inches long. The letters and flow arrow shall be made by precut

stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can. 5.2 DUCTWORK ABBREVIATION

Supply Air Ductwork SA

Return Air Ductwork RA Exhaust Air Ductwork EA Outside Air Ductwork OA

5.3 All ductwork above shall also be identified with a 6” x 6” block of painted

color every 10’�0” minimum. The owner will provide the color chart for proper identification.

END OF SECTION.


202500�1


SECTION 202500 � HANGERS, CLAMPS, ATTACHMENTS, ETC.

PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The Contractor's attention is directed to the General and Special Conditions, General

Provisions � Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this

branch of the work. Attention is also directed to other sections of the Contract

Documents which affect the work of this section and which are hereby made a part

of the work specified in this section.

1.2 Each Contractor's attention is also directed to Section 201300, Pipe, Pipe Fittings and

Pipe Support.

1.3 This section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing dampers,

supports, anchors, and accessories for piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Furnishing

and installing shall be by each trade for the completion of their work.

1.4 Power driven anchors and expansion anchors shall be permitted only when

permission is granted in writing by the Architect and Engineer.

PART 2 � MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

2.1 Hangers, Clamps, Attachments, Etc.:

SIZE SPECIFICATION

1. Pipe Rings 2" pipe and smaller Adjustable swivel split ring or

split pipe ring, Grinnell

Figures 104 and 108, Elcen,

Fee & Mason, or approved

equivalent.

2. Pipe Clevis 2�1/2" pipe and larger Adjustable wrought Clevis

type, Grinnell Figure 260,

Elcen, Fee & Mason, or

approved equivalent.

3. Pipe Clevis All Steel Clevis for insulated pipe,

Elcen Figure 12A, Grinnell,

Fee & Mason or approved

equivalent.

4. Rise Clamps All Extension pipe or riser clamp,

Grinnell Figure 261, Elcen,

Fee & Mason or approved

equivalent.


202500�2

5. Beam Clamps and

Attachments

All Grinnell Figure numbers listed

or, Elcen, Fee & Mason, or


Malleable beam clamp with

extension piece figure 229; I�

beam clamp figure 131; C�

clamp figures 83, 84, 85, 86,

87, and 88.

6. Brackets All Welded steel brackets

medium weight, Grinnell

Figure 195, Elcen, Fee &

Mason or approved

equivalent.

7. Concrete Inserts All Grinnell Figure numbers listed

or, Elcen, Fee & Mason or


Wrought steel insert Figure

280 and wedge type insert

Figure 281.

8. Concrete Fasteners All Self�drilling concrete inserts,

Phillips, Grinnell, Elcen or


9. Trapeze Hangers All Grinnel Figure #46.

10. Rod Attachments All Grinnel Figure numbers listed

or Elcen, Fee & Mason, or


Extension piece Figure 157,

rod coupling Figure 136, and

forged steel turnbuckle Figure

230.

11. U�Bolts All Standard, U�bolt, Grinnell

Figure 137, Elcen, Fee &

Mason, or approved

equivalent.

12. Welded Pipe Saddles All Pipe covering protection

saddle sized for thickness of

insulation, Grinnell Figure

186, Elcen, Fee & Mason or


13. Pipe Roll All Adjustable swivel pipe roll,

Grinnell Figure 174, Elcen,

Fee & Mason, or approved

equivalent.


202500�3

14. Protection Saddle All Sheet metal pipe protection

saddle (See Specification

Section 202200, Elcen Figure

219, Fee & Mason, Power

Strut, or approved equivalent.

15. Hanger Rods All Steel, diameter of the hanger

threading, ASTM A�107.

16. Miscellaneous

Steel

All Steel angles, rods, bars,

channels, etc., used in

framing for supports and

fabricated brackets, anchors,

etc., shall conform to ASTM�

A�7.

17. Concrete Channel

Inserts

All Continuous slot inserts,

Unistrut, or approved

equivalent. Heavy duty

Series P�3200 or Light Duty

Series P�3300 as required.

18. Adjustable Spot Insert All Adjustable spot insert

Unistrut, or approved

equivalent, P�3245. Design

load 1000 lbs.

PART 3 – INSTALLATION:

3.1 Unless otherwise specifically indicated or hereinafter specified in the specifications, all supporting, hanging and anchoring of piping, ductwork,

equipment, etc., shall be done by each trade as is necessary for completion of the work and shall be as directed in the following paragraphs:

3.2 Supporting and hanging shall be done so that excessive load will not be placed on any one hanger so as to allow for proper pitch and expansion of

piping. Hangers and supports shall be placed as near as possible to joints, turns and branches.

3.3 For concrete construction, utilize adjustable concrete inserts for fasteners. Expansion anchors and power driven devices may be used when approved in

writing by the Architect/Engineer. Utilize beam clamps for fastening to steel joists and beams and expansion anchors in masonry construction. When piping is run in joists, piping shall be top mounted on trapeze type hangers

with each pipe individually clamped to trapeze hanger.

3.4 Trapeze hangers are not allowed, unless specifically approved by the engineer.


202500�4

3.5 Install all miscellaneous steel other than designed building structural members as required to provide means of securing hangers, supports, etc.,

where piping does not pass directly below or cross steel joists. 3.6 Piping shall not be supported by the equipment to which it is connected.

Support all piping so as to remove any load or stress from the equipment.

3.7 Where piping, etc., is run vertically, approved riser clamps, brackets or other means shall be utilized at approximately 10'�0" center to center minimum and an approved adjustable base stand or fitting on concrete support base

shall be utilized at the base of the vertical run.

3.8 Where piping is run along walls, knee braced angle frames or pipe brackets with saddles, clamps, and rollers (where required) mounted on structural brackets fastened to walls or columns shall be used.

3.9 Support all ceiling hung equipment, with approved vibration isolators.

3.10 Where copper tubing is specified, hangers shall be of copper clad type when

piping is uninsulated. 3.11 Uninsulated piping hung from above shall be supported with ring and clevis

type pipe hangers. Uninsulated piping mounted on trapeze and wall bracket type support shall be held in place with U�bolts. U�bolts shall allow for axial

movement in the piping. 3.12 All insulated piping shall be supported with clevis type and pipe roll hangers.

Hangers shall be sized to allow the pipe insulation to pass through the hangers. Install insulation protection saddles at all hanger locations. Welded

pipe saddles shall be installed at all hangers on piping 5" and larger. The pipe saddles shall be sized for the thickness of insulation used. Hangers shall fit snugly around outside of insulation saddles.

3.13 Under no conditions will perforated band iron or steel wire driven hangers be

permitted. 3.14 In general, support piping at the following spacing:

3.14.1Steel and copper piping � 8 foot intervals for piping 3" and smaller; 10 foot

intervals for larger piping. 3.14.2Schedule 40, 80 plastic HDPE pipe: Shall be supported at intervals not to

exceed four (4) feet and at the end of the branches and at the change of direction and shall be installed as to permit freedom of movement. Vertical

piping shall be supported at their bases and all upward movement shall not be restricted. Hangers shall be at least one (1) inch wide and shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping to allow free movement at all

times.


202500�5

3.15 Where fireproofing is dislodged/damaged from the building structures due to

contractor installation of hangers, clamps, etc., it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to repair all dislodged/damaged fireproofing to original fire proof rating. This shall include all work performed by the contractors sub�

contractors as well.

END OF SECTION.


203100�1


SECTION 203100 � TESTING, BALANCING, LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, General Provisions �

Mechanical, and other Contract Documents are a part of this specification and shall be binding on all Mechanical Contractors. It shall be each Contractor's responsibility to apprize himself of all information pertinent to his work prior

to submitting his proposal. No adjustments will be made in this Contract which is a result of failure to comply with this requirement.

1.2 The Engineer, or his authorized representative, shall be notified by the

Contractor twenty�four (24) hours in advance of any tests called for in these

specifications or required by others. Any leaks or imperfections found shall be corrected and a new tests run to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his

authorized representative. Upon completion of a test, a written approval of that part of the work will be given to the Contractor. Only after written

approval, signed by the Engineer, shall the Contractor apply insulation or paint or allow his work to be furred�in. This written approval, however, does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibilities for any failure during the

guarantee period. The expense of all tests shall be borne by the Contractor, along with all temporary equipment, materials, gauges, etc. required for

tests. PART 2 – PLUMBING:

2.1 Piping shall be tested before being insulated or concealed in any manner.

Where leaks or defects develop, required corrections shall be made and tests repeated until systems are proven satisfactory.

2.2 Water piping systems shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of one hundred fifty pounds. The system shall be proven tight after a twenty�four (24) hour

test. 2.3 The house drain line, interior storm sewers, interior rain water conductors,

and all soil, waste and vent piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of not less than a 10�foot head or an air test of not less than 5 lbs. per sq. inch

using a mercury column gauge and shall hold for 15 minutes. 2.4 Exterior sewer lines to the termination point outside the building shall be

subject to a ten�foot hydrostatic test or an approved smoke test. These lines shall be subjected to a second test after 2 feet of backfill has been properly

installed. 2.5 After fixtures have been installed, the entire plumbing system, exclusive of

the house sewer, shall be subjected to an air pressure test equivalent to one


203100�2

inch water column and proven tight. The Contractor responsible shall furnish and install all of the test tees required, including those for isolating any

portion of the system for tests. 2.6 Thermometers and gauges shall be checked for accuracy. If instruments

prove defective, they shall be replaced.

2.7 The Contractor shall perform all additional tests that may be required by the Department of Health or other governing agency.

2.8 Set temperature control on water heaters and adjust tempering valves as required.

2.9 Balance the water flow rate of each domestic hot water recirculating pump.

Set the flow rate for each balancing valve in the recirculating hot water

system. If flow rates are not indicated, contact the engineer for each balance valve GPM.

2.10 Any leaks or imperfections found shall be corrected and a new test run until

satisfactory results are obtained. The cost of repair or restoration of surfaces damaged by leaks in any system shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 3 � HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING:

3.1 The test and balance of this system shall be by a contractor who employs only the services of a certified AABC or independent NEBB firm whose sole business is to perform test and balance services. The test and balance

contractor shall report all deficiencies to the engineer.

3.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall test all piping before being insulated or concealed in any manner. Where leaks or defects develop, required corrections shall be made and tests repeated until systems are proven

satisfactory. Water piping systems shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of not less than one hundred pounds and shall be proven tight after a twenty�

four (24) hour test. 3.3 All motors, bearings, etc. shall be checked and lubricated as required during

start�up procedures. All automatic, pressure regulating and control valves shall be adjusted. Excessive noise or vibration shall be eliminated. Provide

all start�up documents to Designer prior to any test and balance services. 3.4 System balancing, where required, shall be performed only by persons skilled

in this work. The system shall be balanced as often as necessary to obtain desired system operation and results.

3.5 All fan belts shall be adjusted for proper operation of fans.


203100�3

3.6 All deficiencies observed by the Test and Balance Contractor shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and Mechanical Contractor.

3.7 For the purpose of placing the heating, ventilating and air conditioning

system in operation according to design conditions and certifying same, final

testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC Standards for Total System Balance, Volume Six (2002), for air and hydronic

systems as published by the Associated Air Balance Council. The following systems shall be test and balance:

3.7.1 The outside air and exhaust duct systems associated with OA�2. Provide static pressure profiles thru the system. Static pressure profiles shall include

all sections from the exhaust duct inlet and outside air duct outlet of the air handling unit. Show accurate representation of fans, coil and energy wheel.

3.7.2 Adjust and verify calibrations of the duct static pressure sensors for OA�2.

3.7.3 Set the minimum and maximum air flow rates for each VAV box.

3.7.4 Balance all supply, return, outside, and exhaust air grille to within 10% of design air flow rate.

3.7.5 Balance all exhaust air fans and record inlet static pressure.

3.7.6 The contractor shall provide a purge cart to purge the geothermal piping system (both inside the building and outside). A minimum velocity of 2 ft/sec in each piping section must be maintained until all air is removed. The

system shall also be forward and reversed to remove all debris. The Test and Balance Contractor shall confirm the minimum velocities are obtained

during the purging process and shall also measure supply and return pressures. The Contractor shall provide P/T plugs as required by the Test and Balance Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all means and methods

necessary to insure minimum velocities are obtained.

3.8 Provide a preliminary test report to the mechanical engineer immediately after the system is air balanced, or any initial phases are balanced. This report may be hand written. Anticipate visiting the site again after the

engineer has reviewed the report. The engineer may request up to 15 additional static pressure measurements for any air handling system to help

resolve any balancing deficiencies. Include five additional static pressure measurements for each exhaust air system.

3.9 Instruments used for testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall have been calibrated within a period of six months prior to balancing. All

final test analysis reports shall include a letter of certification listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration.


203100�4

3.10 Test and Balance agency is to provide sizing of fan or motor sheaves required for proper balance. The Mechanical Contractor will purchase and install all

sheaves and belts as required. This includes new and existing equipment. 3.11 Four (4) copies of the complete test reports shall be submitted to the

Consulting Engineer prior to final acceptance of the project. Preliminary test reports shall be submitted when requested.

3.12 The Contractor shall provide and coordinate his work in the following

manner:

3.12.1Provide sufficient time before final completion date so that tests and

balancing can be accomplished. 3.12.2Provide immediate labor and tools to make corrections when required without

undue delay.

3.13 The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of same

during each working day of testing and balancing. PART 4 � FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM:

4.1 Test in accord with local Fire Marshall requirements and/or requirements or

recommendations of NFPA Regulations.

END OF SECTION.


210100�1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

SECTION 210100 � FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL:

1.1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Section 200100, and other

Contract Documents are a part of this specification and shall be binding on the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to apprize himself of all information pertinent to his work prior to submitting his proposal. No

adjustments will be made in this Contract which are a result of failure to comply with this requirement.

1.2 No Contractor, other than those regularly engaged in the installation of

approved and franchised automatic sprinkler systems will be considered or

approved for the work under this section of the specifications. Bidders must have had not less than five (5) years experience in the fabrication and

erection of such systems, both wet, dry and rack storage types, and shall have completed installations similar and equivalent in scope to this system

under approval by one or more of the recognized Underwriting Associations in the Insurance Field.

1.3 Before submitting bid, examine all Mechanical, Architectural, and Structural Drawings, visit the site and become acquainted with all conditions that may,

in any way whatsoever, affect the execution of this work. Also, the Contractor shall coordinate with the rating bureau and insuring agency to verify adequacy of water supply for the proposed sprinkler system extension.

1.4 The Contractor shall take his own measurements and be responsible for

exact size and location of all openings required for installation of this work. Figured dimensions where indicated are reasonably accurate and should govern in setting out work. Detailed method of installation is not indicated.

Where variations exist between described work and approved practice, the Engineer shall be consulted for directive.

1.5 It is the intent of the Plans and Specifications to provide a general layout

only and locate major equipment, piping, etc. Variations in head locations,

pipe routing, etc., may be anticipated by the Contractor and shall be coordinated with all other trades and indicated on the drawings and

descriptive literature called for hereinafter. It shall be the express responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required materials and equipment and perform all work required to install a complete and approved

installation.

1.6 All materials and methods shall be in accordance with applicable codes, regulations and/or ordinances and meet approval of local inspection authority and the State Fire Marshal. Also, all work shall comply with the latest

editions of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection


210100�2

Association, OSHA Regulations, the National Building Code, the Life Safety Code, International Mechanical Code and KBC (Where applicable). The local

insuring agency shall review plans prepared by the Contractor (submitted by the Contractor) but shall have no authority to make changes once work has begun.

1.7 All materials and equipment installed as a part of this work shall be listed by

the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as approved for fire protection installations and the installation shall comply with the National Fire Code in every respect.

1.8 All work performed under this section shall be accomplished in close harmony

with all other trades. All work not so coordinated shall be removed and reinstalled at the expense of the Contractor.

1.9 The Contractor shall submit a proposed layout to the Engineer prior to submittal to the Fire Marshal's Office.

PART 2 � SCOPE OF WORK:

2.1 Furnish all material, labor, tools, equipment and supervision required for

installation of a complete fire protection system as indicated on the project

drawings. Include all necessary piping, sprinkler heads, test connections, valves, drains, cabinets, etc.

2.2 The Contractor shall provide flushing and sterilization of all water lines in

accordance with current Kentucky Plumbing Codes, Rules and Regulations

and shall make connection to domestic water mains in accord with current rules and regulations of the State Department of Sanitary Engineering and

Division of Water. PART 3 � WATER SUPPLIES AND SYSTEM LAYOUT CRITERIA:

3.1 Where flow and pressure data are available, they are indicated on the project

drawings. The Contractor shall independently verify all such information and notify the engineer of any discrepancies discovered prior to beginning the work. Where no flow information is indicted on the project drawings, the

Contractor shall obtain some and indicate it on the shop drawing submittal. All flow information obtained must be no older than 6 months. Piping

systems shall be hydraulically sized based on the most conservative flow information obtained. No adjustments in the contract amount will be allowed for failure of the Contractor to obtain adequate flow information.

PART 4 � DRAWINGS AND DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE:

4.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineers, seven (7) copies

of detailed drawings indicating his proposed Automatic Sprinkler System.


210100�3

These drawings shall indicate minimally the following components when they are used in the system.

4.1.1 Name and address of Owner, Architect and Engineers.

4.1.2 Make and type of sprinkler heads (Catalog cuts).

4.1.3 Make and type of flanged check valve (Catalog cuts). 4.1.4 Make and type of flanged gate valve (Catalog cuts).

4.1.5 Make and type of automatic drains (Catalog cuts).

4.1.6 Make and type of pipe hangers (1 catalog cut of each make and/or type).

4.1.7 Make, type and electrical characteristics of:

4.1.7.1 The pressure sensing switch*.

4.1.7.2 The post indicator supervisory switch*. 4.1.7.3 The main gate valve supervisory switch*.

4.1.7.4 The flow switch*.

4.1.8 Make and type of indicating butterfly valve.

4.1.9 Note: All layouts and drawings are to be closely coordinated with the work of all other trades. The Engineers will, upon request, provide a complete set of

Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications to aid the Contractor in this work.

4.1.10*SPECIAL NOTE: THESE ITEMS (indicated by asterisk) must be clearly coordinated with the Fire Alarm System supplier.

4.1.11On a set of drawings to the same scale as the drawings accompanying these

specifications, indicate:

4.1.11.1 Each head location coordinated with lights, diffusers and other ceiling

mounted device. 4.1.11.2 Location of all risers, mains, runout lines, etc.

4.1.11.3 Size of all risers, mains, runout lines, etc.

4.1.11.4 Location and type of pipe hangers.


210100�4

4.1.11.5 All other information required by the Kentucky Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction.

4.1.11.6 The Contractor shall submit these drawings to the Engineer through the

General Contractor and Architect where applicable. The Contractor shall

submit reviewed drawings to the Kentucky Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction for their review and approval. No work shall

be done until drawings are approved by the Kentucky Department of HBC. PART 5 � SYSTEM DRAINAGE:

5.1 The entire Sprinkler System (except that part which is below grade and will

not freeze) shall be installed so as to allow 100% drainage. 5.2 All sprinkler branch piping shall be installed so as to drain back to the main

riser.

5.3 Approved 2" drawoff piping shall be provided on sprinkler risers with discharge piping running to nearest floor drain or open air.

5.4 Where sprinkler piping is trapped, an approved auxiliary draw�off shall be

provided and neatly installed.

5.5 All draw�offs shall have a metal tag labeled "Sprinkler Drain".

PART 6 � INSPECTIONS AND TESTS:

6.1 Furnish all labor, equipment and conduct all required tests in the presence of the Owner and Engineer or designated representative.

6.2 All piping and devices comprising the fire protection system shall be tested

under hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 PSI and maintained for not

less than two (2) hours.

6.3 Any leaks or cracks developing as a result of these tests shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner.

6.4 Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall submit a written and signed certificate to the Engineers indicating that he performed the above

prescribed tests and rectified all malfunctions arising therefrom. PART 7 – PERMITS:

7.1 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary state, municipal,

county, city and other permits and fees and pay all State taxes which are applicable.


210100�5

PART 8 – GUARANTEE: 8.1 All workmanship, equipment and material shall be guaranteed in writing

against defects from any cause, other than misuse, for a period of one year after date of final acceptance.

PART 9 � ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE:

9.1 Upon completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineers, a properly filled out "Sprinkler Contractor's Certificate Covering Materials and Tests." (4

copies). PART 10 – CLEANING:

10.1 Upon completion of this work all debris, material, and equipment shall be

removed from the building and premises; all piping shall be cleaned ready for finish painting. Note: Do not remove rust inhibitive primer specified

hereinafter. PART 11 � EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

11.1 Signs: Appropriate code approved and required signs shall be installed on all

control valves, drains, inspector's test, etc., indicating the function, installation, etc. Signs shall be neatly affixed with rust inhibitive screws, rivets or where hung from piping; with stainless steel No. 14 AWG wire.

11.2 Check Valves:

11.2.12½" and over; listed and approved by UL and FM; marked SV�FM; 175#

working pressure; 1 BBM; flanged; equivalent to Mueller, Scott or

Lunkenheimer.

11.2.22" and under; 150# working pressure; bronze; screwed; equivalent to Jenkins, Scott or Lunkenheimer.

11.3 Pipe & Fittings:

11.3.1Up to 2" (Interior) Schedule 40 ASTM A�53 black steel; 125# cast iron screwed fittings or Schedule 10, ASTM A�135 black steel with victaulic or similar type approved fittings.

11.3.22½" and larger (Interior) Schedule 40 black steel with flanged, welded or

victaulic (or similar) type approved fittings or Schedule 10, ASTM A�135 black steel with victaulic or similar type approved fittings.


210100�6

11.4 Clamps and Anchors: Furnish and install approved clamps, as required, at all (45 degree) l/8 bends, (90 degree) ¼ bends and flange and spigot pieces to

the straight pipe to insure permanent anchorage of all fire lines. Clamps, clamp rods, nuts, washers, and glands shall be coated with a quick drying coal tar bituminous paint after installation.

11.5 Hangers: All piping shall be adequately and permanently supported in an

approved manner on approved hangers (Submit with drawings). Minimally support piping on 8 foot intervals for pipe 3” and smaller; 10 foot intervals for larger piping. Also support at all changes in direction.

11.6 Do not route sprinkler piping directly above any light fixtures. Do not route

sprinkler piping near ceiling; hold tight to structure. Where large volumes occur above ceiling route pipe at least 36” above ceiling. The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate during design of sprinkler systems to insure these

requirements are met.

11.7 Sleeves and Escutcheon Plates:

11.7.1Furnish and install sleeves for pipes where piping penetrates masonry walls; exterior wall sleeves to be watertight. Fire and smoke stop all penetrations through fire and smoke walls and coordinate with General Contractor for

locations.

11.7.2Furnish and install cast brass chrome plated split ring type escutcheons where piping penetrates walls, ceilings and floors, whether in finished areas or not.

11.8 Inspection Test Connections & Pressure Gauges:

11.8.1A 1" inspection test connection as required by the Kentucky Building Code.

Discharge shall run to open air.

11.8.2Control valve for test connection shall be installed not over 7' above the

floor. 11.8.3A pressure gauge at the inspection. Test connection at each location

indicated on the Plans. Pressure gauges shall be 2½" diameter and readable from the floor.

11.9 Gate Valves:

11.9.12½" and over; listed and approved by UL and FM; marked SV�FM; 175# working pressure; 1 BBM; OS&Y; flanged; cast iron discs; bronze seat rings;

four point wedging mechanism; equivalent to Mueller, Scott or Lunkenheimer.


210100�7

11.9.22" and under; 150# working pressure; bronze; rising stem; screwed; bronze discs; bronze seat rings; two point wedging mechanism; equivalent to

Jenkins, Scott or Lunkenheimer. 11.10 Fire Valve Cabinets:

11.10.1 Manufacturer. The products specified hereunder shall be Crocker or

equivalent by Larsen's Mfg. Co., J.L. Industries, Kidde, or other nationally recognized manufacturer of cabinets conforming closely to specification requirements.

11.10.2 Valve cabinets for recessed installation at all locations where shown

shall be similar to Crocker Model No. 2700 with flat trim and clear glazed full glass door. Provide 18 ga. steel tub, 20 gauge steel door, 16 gauge steel frame and white enamel finish interior with all exposed exterior portions

painted with color selected by Architect.

11.10.3 Each cabinet shall be equipped with one 2½" Fire Department valve with cap and chain. All connections and threads shall be as required by the

local authority. 11.11 Detector Check Valve:

11.11.1 Furnish and install detector check valve as required by the local authority.

It shall be listed and approved by Underwriter Laboratories and Associated Factory Mutual Laboratories; 175# working pressure; IBBM; flanged; with tapped bosses each side for by�pass meter trimming; equivalent to Viking,

Badger or Grinnell.

11.11.2 The Contractor shall contact the servicing water company and ascertain their policy pertaining to the by�pass water meter; if not furnished by water company. The Contractor shall furnish and install the by�pass meter and

trimming as detailed on the drawings.

11.12 Sprinkler Heads: Gem, Grinnell, Star, Viking, Reliable or approved equivalent as follows: All sprinkler heads shall be fed in a reverse bend arrangement. When working in existing facilities, sprinkler heads style and

color shall match existing.

11.12.1 Quick Response Sprinkler Heads: 11.12.1.1Semi�Recessed, Quick Response – Reliable (or equal) Model F1FR�300

semi�recessed automatic sprinkler head. Escutcheon and head shall be white.

11.12.1.2Upright, Quick Response – Reliable (or equal) Model F1FR Vertical Upright

automatic sprinkler head.


210100�8

11.12.1.3Sidewall, Quick Response – Reliable (or equal) Model GFR, horizontal sidewall automatic sprinkler head.

11.12.1.4Concealed, Quick Response – Reliable (or equal) Model G4A Concealed

automatic sprinkler head. Cover shall be white.

11.12.1.5Caged, Pendent, Quick Response – Reliable (or equal) Model F1FR Vertical

Upright automatic sprinkler head with D1 cage. 11.12.1.6Sprinkler head degree ratings shall be determined by the area serviced in

accord with current Codes and Standard Practices. Indicate degree ratings on submitted Shop Drawings.

11.12.1.7The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for inspection, one (1) sample

of each type of sprinkler head, proposed to be used on the project.

11.12.1.8Where heads are installed in a tile ceiling, they shall be installed in the

middle of the tiles, at half or quarter points along the length of the tiles.

11.12.1.9Coordinate sprinkler head locations in kitchen freezer/cooler units with light fixtures and other ceiling mounted devices to insure proper coverage is maintained. Provide these heads with cages.

11.13 Alarm Valves: Gem, Grinnell, Star, Viking, Reliable or approved equivalent

as follows: All sprinkler heads shall be fed in a reverse bend arrangement. 11.13.1 Wet Type: All alarm valves must be UL and FM approved. Alarm valve

shall have a grooved seat design with retarding chamber. Valve shall be rated for 175 PSI working pressure. Valve shall be provided with external

bypass line and drain valve. Reliable Model or approved equal. 11.14 Flow Indicator Switches: Furnish and install flow indicator switches as

required by NFPA 13. All flow indicator switches shall be UL approved. Coordinate with Fire Alarm System supplier/installer.

11.15 Tamper Switches for Water Shut�Off Valves: Furnish and install tamper

switches where required by NFPA 13. All tamper switches shall be UL

approved. Coordinate with fire alarm system supplier/installer. All tamper switches located in fire protection pits shall be waterproof, capable of

operating beneath water and be NFPA approved. PART 12 – GUARANTEE:

12.1 All workmanship, equipment and material shall be guaranteed in writing

against defects from any cause, other than misuse, or vandalism, for a period of one year after date of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION.


220100�1

DIVISION 22 � PLUMBING

SECTION 220100 � PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 – GENERAL:


General Conditions�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other sections of the Contract Documents which affect the work specified in this

section.

1.2 The Contractor shall provide all equipment and specialties complete with trim required and connect in a manner conforming to the State Plumbing Code.

1.3 The Contractor shall obtain exact centerline rough�in dimensions between partitions, walls, etc. as required for lay�out of his rough�in work. All work

shall be roughed�in so that all exposed piping will be straight and true without bends or offsets.

1.4 All equipment and specialties shall be new unless other wise indicated or

specified. They shall also be of equivalent quality, dimensions, material, etc.

as those specified.

1.5 All equipment and specialties shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.6 Prior to final inspection, test by operation at least twice, all equipment.

1.7 Prior to final inspection, remove all stick�on labels, dirt, grease, other removable stampings, lettering, etc. from equipment and specialties and thoroughly clean same.

1.8 All equipment and specialties shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike

manner. Unacceptable workmanship shall be removed and replaced at the installing Contractor's cost.

PART 2 � DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES:

2.1 General: Provide all drainage specialties indicated, specified and/or required to provide complete and acceptable removal of all storm, sanitary, waste, laboratory waste, etc. from the building and into approved receptors.

Drainage specialties shall be on non�electrolytic conduction to the material to which they are connected. Drainage specialties shall be installed in a manner

so as to insure no leakage of toxic or odorous gases or liquids and shall have traps and/or backflow preventers where required. Nor shall they allow backflow into other or existing systems.


220100�2

2.2 Cleanouts – Interior (CO): In addition to cleanouts indicated, provide cleanouts in soil and waste piping and storm drainage at the following

minimum locations: 2.2.1 At base of each stack.

2.2.2 At fifty (50) foot maximum intervals in horizontal lines.

2.2.3 At each change of direction of a horizontal line.

2.2.4 As required by current State Plumbing/Building Codes.

2.2.5 As required to permit rodding of entire system. (If in doubt, contact Engineers.)

2.2.6 Water closets, slop sinks and other fixtures with fixed traps shall not be accepted as cleanouts.

2.2.7 Cleanouts and/or test tees concealed in inaccessible pipe spaces, walls and

other locations shall have an eight (8) inch by eight (8) inch (minimum) access panel or cover plates shall be set flush with finished floors and walls and shall be key or screw driver operable.

2.2.8 Access panels for cleanouts shall be of the Zurn, 1460 series or equivalent by

Josam or Wade. Where they are not to receive paint, they shall be polished bronze unless otherwise indicated where they are to receive paint or other finishes. They may, at the Contractor's option, be Perma�Coated steel,

prepared to receive finish.

2.2.9 Cleanouts and access panels shall be sized so as to permit the entry of a full sized rodding head capable of one hundred percent circumferential coverage of the line served.

2.2.10Provide a non�hardening mixture of graphite and grease on threads of all

screwed cleanouts during installation. 2.2.11Do not install cleanouts against walls, partitions, etc. where rodding will be

difficult or impossible. Extend past the obstruction.

2.2.12In finished walls, floors, etc., insure that cleanouts are installed flush with finished surfaces and, where required, grout or otherwise finish in a neat and workmanlike manner.

2.2.13Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Josam, Wade, Ancon, Jay R.

Smith, similar to the following: 2.2.13.1 Zurn, Z�1440 cleanouts or Z�1445 cleanout tee at base of exposed stack

and at change in direction of exposed lines.


220100�3

2.2.13.2 Zurn, Z�1440 cleanout or Z�1445�1 cleanout tee where stacks are

concealed in finished walls. 2.2.13.3 Zurn, ZN�1400�T cleanout with square scoriated top in finished concrete

and masonry tile floors.

2.2.13.4 Zurn, ZN�1400�Tx cleanout with square recessed top for tile in vinyl and linoleum finished floors.

2.2.13.5 Zurn, ZN�1400�Z cleanout with round recessed top for terrazzo floors.

2.2.13.6 Mueller, No. D�731 or D�714, Nibco, Flage or equivalent for cleanouts in copper waste with cover plates and/or access panels listed for other cleanouts.

2.2.13.7 Threaded hex head type cleanouts of same materials as pipe for piping 2"

and smaller.

2.2.13.8 Zurn, cleanout with round top with adjustable retainer for carpet area. Install flush with carpet.

2.3 Floor Drains: Provide floor drains at locations indicated and/or as required by State Plumbing/Building Codes. Install in a neat and workmanlike

manner. Coordinate locations with appropriate persons or party to insure floor pitch to drain where required.

2.3.1 Install floor drains in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the State Plumbing and Building Codes unless otherwise indicated.

2.3.2 Each floor drain located on floors above the lowest floor shall be provided

complete with a three (3) foot by three (3) foot, four (4) pound sheet lead

flashing and clamping collar or chlorinated polyethylene shower pan liner of 30 mil. Lead pans shall be given a heavy coat of asphaltum on bottom and

sides before installation and a heavy coat on exposed surfaces (if any). After installation, provide one ply of fifteen (15) pound roofing felt beneath each pan.

2.3.3 Insure by coordination with the appropriate persons or party that spaces

served by a floor drain(s) has a water seal extending at least three (3) inches from the floor of the space served on all floors above the lowest level.

2.3.4 The floor drains shall be Zurn, Josam, Wade, Watts Drainage, Ancon or equivalent, similar to the following:

2.3.5 FD�1 � Zurn, ZN�415 floor drain with 6"dia. nickel bronze strainer, Type "B",

dura�coated cast iron body with bottom 3" outlet.


220100�4

2.3.6 FD�3 � Zurn, ZN�511 floor drain with 9"dia. Dura�coated cast iron strainer,

dura�coated cast iron deep sump with 4" bottom outlet, seepage pan and sediment bucket. Provide with trap primer connection.

2.4 Water Supply Specialties: Provide all water supply specialties indicated, specified and/or required for the complete installation. Install in a neat and

workmanlike manner in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Building Code.

2.4.1 Where required by the State Plumbing Code, install code approved vacuum breakers in each water supply specialty.

2.5 Freezeproof Wall Hydrants: Provide code approved wall hydrants at each

location indicated in a neat and workmanlike manner. Affix tight to walls and

insure that the feed piping is on the heated side of the building insulation blanket.

2.5.1 Where hydrants are of handwheel type, remove handwheels and turn over to

owners in an envelope labeled "Wall Hydrants" exterior upon completion of the project.

2.5.2 Where hydrants have key operators, turn over at least two (2) keys in an envelope labeled "Wall Hydrants" to owners upon completion of the project.

2.5.3 Where hydrants have lockable boxes, turn over at least two (2) keys in an

envelope labeled "Wall Hydrants, Exterior" to owners upon completion of

project.

2.5.4 Mount all wall hydrants at least twenty (20) inches above finished exterior grade. Where this is not possible or practical, contact Engineers.

2.5.5 Wall hydrants shall be as follows or equivalent:

2.5.5.1 Zurn 1320 or equivalent, 3/4", with half�turn ceramic cartridge, encased, flush, non�freeze, anti�siphon, automatic draining wall hydrant with key lock and combination backflow preventer/vacuum breaker.

2.6 Hose Bibbs (HB): Provide code approved hose bibbs with vacuum breakers

and male threaded spouts at each location indicated, in public toilet rooms and as follows:

2.6.1 Do not install hose bibbs in spaces which do not have existing planned or installed floor drains even if sill cocks are indicated for these areas.

2.6.2 Hose bibbs shall be mounted at eighteen (18) inches above finished floor

served.


220100�5

2.6.3 The hose bibbs shall be Woodford or equivalent similar to the following:

2.6.3.1 HB�Woodford Model 24 with loose key handle polished chrome finish, brass construction.

2.7 Boiler Drains (BD): Install 3/4 inch bronze body boiler drains, similar and equivalent to Nibco, No. 72 or 73, as indicated and at the following locations:

2.7.1 At the low point of the plumbing system.

2.7.2 In each hot water heater and/or storage tank.

2.7.3 At the low point the geothermal hydronic system. 2.7.4 At the low point of each isolatable section of any system carrying water.

NOTE: Install a code approved vacuum breaker where installation on to domestic

water system.

2.8 Water Hammer Arrestors (WHA): Provide water hammer arrestors at each location indicated and/or as required to eliminate hydrostatic on the domestic water system. Provide at least one water hammer arrestor at all quick acting

valve locations including:

Flush valve fixtures – Type “B” (Each toilet room with 1�3 flush valve fixtures shall have its own Type “B” water hammer arrestor)

2.8.1 Multiple Fixtures – Branch Line Less Than 20’ Long: The preferred location for a Zurn Shoktrol is at the end of the branch line between the last two

fixtures served when the branch lines do not exceed 20’ in length, from the start of the horizontal branch line to the last fixture supply on this line.

2.8.2 Water hammer arrestors shall be Zurn, Z�1700, Shoktrol, Smith, Josam, Wade or equivalent. Water hammer arrestors shall be stainless steel, bellows

type. Field fabricated capped cylinders shall not be acceptable. 2.8.3 Note: Provide insulating unions where arrestors are of dissimilar material

from the piping served (unless piping is non�conducting, such as ABS or PVC).


220100�6

2.8.4 Schedule:

MARK MANUFACTURER & MODEL

SIZE (FIXTURE

UNITS)

P.D.I. SIZE

TYPE "A" ZURN, Z�1700 #100 1�11 A

TYPE "B" ZURN, Z�1700 #200 12�32 B

TYPE "C" ZURN, Z�1700 #300 33�60 C

TYPE "D" ZURN, Z�1700 #400 61�113 D

PART 3 � GENERAL SPECIALTIES:

3.1 Vacuum Breakers and Back Flow Preventers: Where required by the Building

Code, whether indicated or not, provide approved vacuum breakers or

backflow preventers at the following locations.

3.2 Where domestic water system connects to hydronic system. 3.3 At any hose (threaded) tap on the domestic water system.

3.4 At all mop basins, provide check valves to the hot and cold water supply

upstream of the faucet. 3.5 Roof Flashings: All plumbing vents or other plumbing passing thru the roof

shall be flashed as approved by the State Plumbing and Building Codes and as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and/or Contractor.

END OF SECTION.


220200�1

DIVISION 22 � PLUMBING

SECTION 220200 � PLUMBING FIXTURES, FITTINGS AND TRIM PART 1 – GENERAL:




1.2 The Contractor shall provide all fixtures complete with trim required and connect in a manner conforming to the State Plumbing Code.

1.3 The Contractor shall obtain exact centerline rough�in dimensions between partitions, walls, etc. as required for lay�out of his rough�in work. All work

shall be roughed�in so that all exposed piping will be straight and true without bends or offsets.

1.4 Coordinate stainless steel sink with architectural casework shop drawings.

Do not order sinks until this has been coordinated.

1.5 Water supplies shall connect through walls with stops and chrome plated

escutcheons with set screws. In general, furnish the following with manual loose key stop valves:

1.5.1 Drinking Fountains 1.5.2 Wall�hung Lavatories

1.5.3 Hose Bibbs

For all other fixtures, furnish with manual permanent�key stop valves (ie.

sinks in casework, etc.). When in doubt, contact Engineer prior to installation.

1.6 Water supplies shall connect through walls with stops and chrome plated

escutcheons with set screws.

1.7 All exposed piping, stops, traps, tailpieces, etc. shall be code approved

chrome plated brass unless otherwise indicated or specified. Where acid resistant piping is indicated on the drawing or the specifications, all piping and ancillary components from the sink/lavatory to dilution basin shall be

acid resistant acid specified and required by code.

1.8 All fittings, fixtures and trim shall be new unless otherwise indicated or specified. They shall also be of equivalent quality, dimensions, material, etc. as those specified.


220200�2

1.9 Handicapped fixtures shall be mounted as recommended by the KBC and ADA.

1.10 All fixtures shall be mounted as recommended by the manufacturer unless

otherwise indicated or specified and so as to be rigid to walls and floors. Pay

particular attention to flush valves and bracket concealed portion to building structure during rough�in. Loose, shaky flush valves, lavatories, etc. shall

not be acceptable. 1.11 Prior to final inspection open all faucets and allow to run for fifteen (15)

minutes, then remove all faucet aerators and thoroughly clean until smooth flow is obtained.

1.12 Prior to final inspection, test by operation at least twice:

1.12.1(Where applicable) adequate flow of hot and/or cold water at;

1.12.1.1 All Faucets 1.12.1.2 Flush Valves

1.12.1.3 Hose Bibbs 1.12.1.4 All Other Valved Hot and/or Cold Water Openings In the Plumbing System

1.13 Prior to final inspection, remove all stick�on labels, dirt, grease, other removable stampings, lettering, etc. from plumbing fixtures and thoroughly

clean same. 1.14 All fixtures shall be set level and true and shall be grouted into finished walls,

floors, etc. in a neat and workmanlike manner with an approved waterproof non�yellowing grout for such service.

1.15 Special Note for Handicap Grab Rails: Coordinate top of shower valves, flush

valves, flush tank, etc., with location of grab rails as shown on the

architectural plans. The Contractor shall install all items to allow for installation, removal and service without removal of the grab bar.

1.16 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement's

manufacturers offering plumbing fixtures and trim which may be

incorporated in the work include the following:

1.16.1Plumbing Fixtures � Water Closet, Lavatory and Urinal 1.16.1.1 American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products

1.16.1.2 Eljer Plumbingware Div., Wallace�Murray Corp. 1.16.1.3 Kohler Co.

1.16.1.4 Zurn


220200�3

1.16.2Plumbing Trim

1.16.2.1 American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products 1.16.2.2 Chicago Faucet Co. 1.16.2.3 Delta Co.

1.16.2.4 T&S Brass & Bronze Work Co. 1.16.2.5 Speakman Co.

1.16.2.6 Zurn Aqua�Spec 1.16.3Flush Valves

1.16.3.1 Sloan Valve Co.

1.16.3.2 Zurn Co. 1.16.4Fixture Seats

1.16.4.1 Bemis Mfg. Co.

1.16.4.2 Church Seat Co. 1.16.4.3 Olsonite Corp., Olsonite Seats

1.16.5Water Coolers

1.16.5.1 Elkay Mfg. Co. 1.16.5.2 Halsey Taylor Div., King�Sealey Thermos Co.

1.16.5.3 Haws Drinking Faucet Co. 1.16.5.4 Western Drinking Fountains, Div. of Sunroc Corp. 1.16.5.5 Oasis Co.

1.16.6Fixture Carriers

1.16.6.1 Josam Mfg. Co. 1.16.6.2 Kohler Co.

1.16.6.3 Tyler Pipe 1.16.6.4 Zurn Industries

1.16.6.5 Wade PART 2 – SELECTION:

P�1A Water Closet – ADA, Flush Valve, Wall Mounted

Crane Plumbing Model “Placidus 3446” vitreous china, elongated rim, siphon action water closet. Provide 1 ½” top spud, solid plastic elongated seat with

open front, extended back, and check hinge. Provide with concealed carrier. Mount seat at 18" AFF. Install flush valve on “open” side of water closet.

Water closet flush valve shall be as follows:

� Hard Wired, electric eye flush valve to be Sloan “Optima”

111 ES�S with EL�154 120/24 V. transformer.


220200�4

P�2 Lavatory – ADA, Backsplash, Wall Hung

Crane Plumbing Model “Harwich 1412" vitreous china 20" x 18" lavatory with backsplash, rectangular basin, splash lip, front overflow, soap depression.

Provide with concealed arm support and wall carrier. Provide lavatory drain with integral perforated strainer, 3/8" angle rigid supplies with stops and P�

trap. Install insulation on the supply lines and P�trap similar to Brocar “Trap Wrap” vinyl plastic covering per ADA Standards. Mounting height to be per ADA. Lavatory trim shall be as follows:

� Hard wired, Electric eye faucet to be Chicago Faucet 652�

8CP, deck mounted, 8” coverplate, field adjustable settings. Provide with transformer and Powers series 480 thermostatic tempering valve.

P�3 Urinal� Standard

Crane Plumbing Model “Cromwell 7397", vitreous china blowout urinal with

3/4" top spud inlet, 2" I.P.S. outlet. Provide with wall carrier. Urinal flush valve shall be as follows:

� Hard Wired, electric eye flush valve to be Sloan “Optima” 186 ES�S with EL�154 120/24 V. transformer.

P�5 Electric Water Cooler � ADA and Standard, surface mounted

Sunroc Model #NWCA�8BLN electric water cooler; 8.0 GPH of 50°F water at 90°F room temperature and 80°F entering water; stainless steel basin, 1/5

HP compressor; 115/1phase/60 HZ. Mount spout at 36” AFF. Provide with loose key manual shut�off at wall.

END OF SECTION.


230100�1

DIVISION 23 � HVAC

SECTION 230100 � PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL:


General Provisions � Mechanical and to all other contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to other sections of the specifications which affect the work of this section and which are

hereby made a part of the work specified herein.

1.2 Electric motors shall be furnished with the pumps and shall be of the size and type scheduled or otherwise specified. All motors shall be UL labeled and shall comply with applicable NEMA standard. Motors to be high efficiency

type. Refer to Section 250100.

1.3 Shop drawings shall be submitted as required by Section 200200 and shall include complete pump specifications, installation and start�up instructions,

current and accurate pump performance curves with the selection points clearly indicated, maintenance data and spare parts lists.

1.4 Pumps shall be factory tested, cleaned and painted prior to shipment. Size, type, capacity and electrical characteristics are listed in the pump schedule.

1.5 Insofar as possible, all pumps shall be by the same manufacturer.

PART 2 � PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED INLINE PUMPS:

2.1 The pumps shall be of the horizontal permanently lubricated type, specifically designed for quiet operation. Suitable for 225 degrees F operation at 150 PSIG working pressure.

2.2 The pumps shall have a solid high�strength alloy steel shaft supported by

XL11 permanently lubricated sealed precision bearings. Bearings are to be permanently oil lubricated. Pump shaft shall connect to a non�metallic Noryl impeller.

2.3 Pump shall have integral stainless steel face plate and double sided stainless

steel neck rings for increased life and seasonal start�up capabilities. 2.4 Pump volute shall be of cast bronze. The connection style on bronze pumps

shall be flanged.

2.5 The motor shall be isolated from circulating fluid through use of a carbon/silicone seal attached on a stainless steel shaft sleeve.


230100�2

2.6 Motors shall be of an Open Drip�Proof design and shall be non�overloading at any point on the pump curve. Motors shall be UL and CSA listed.

2.7 Pump shall be of a maintenance free design and be capable of operating in

variable speed (varying voltage) applications.

2.8 Pump manufacturer shall be ISO�9001 certified.

2.9 Pump shall be manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Grundfos, Taco, Armstrong,

or approved equal.

PART 3 � CLOSED COUPLED INLINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS:

3.1 The pumps shall be of a vertical or horizontal installation type specifically

designed for quiet operation. Suitable for 225° F operation at 175 PSIG

working pressure. The pump shall be single stage, vertical split case design, all bronze construction. The pump internals shall be capable of being services

without disturbing piping connections.

3.2 The pumps shall have a solid SAE1045 steel shaft that is integral to the motor. A non�ferrous shaft sleeve shall be employed to completely cover the wetted area under the seal.

3.3 The motor bearings shall support the shaft via heavy�duty grease lubricated

ball bearings. 3.4 Pump shall be equipped with a mechanical seal assembly. Seal assembly

shall have a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket, stainless steel spring, and be of a carbon ceramic design with the carbon face rotating

against a stationary ceramic face. 3.5 Pump shaft shall connect to a brass impeller. Impeller shall be hydraulically

and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew or nut.

3.6 Pump should be designed to allow for true back pull�out access to the pump’s

working components for ease of maintenance.

3.7 Pump volute shall be of cast iron design for heating systems or cast brass for

domestic water systems. The connection style on cast iron and bronze pumps shall be flanged. Volute shall include gauge ports at nozzles.

3.8 Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design. Motors shall have heavy�duty grease lubricated ball bearings to offset

the additional bearing loads associated with the closed coupled pump design. Motors shall be non�overloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications.


230100�3

3.9 Pump shall be of a maintainable design and for ease of maintenance should use machine fit parts and not press fit components.

3.10 Pump manufacturer shall be ISO�9001 certified.

3.11 Each pump shall be factory tested and name�plated before shipment.

3.12 Pumps shall conform to ANSI/HI 9.6.3.1 standard for Preferred Operating Region (POR) unless otherwise approved by the engineer.

3.13 Pump shall be manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Grundfos, Taco, Armstrong, or approved equal.

END OF SECTION.


230200�1


SECTION 230200 � HVAC EQUIPMENT AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT PART 1 – GENERAL:




1.2 The Contractor shall provide in complete working order the following heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment located as indicated and installed, connected and placed in operation in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. All equipment shall be factory painted and, where applicable, factory insulated and shall, where such standards

exist, bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratory.

1.3 Each subcontractor shall be responsible for their own completion of System Verification Checklists/Manufacturer’s Checklists.

1.4 Factory startup is required for all HVAC equipment. In general, as part of the verification process, equipment suppliers shall perform

start&up by their factory authorized technicians and shall complete and submit start&up reports/checklists. This shall include outside air handling units, heat pumps, range hood and makeup air unit, etc.

Refer to Specification Section 200100.

1.5 All HVAC equipment shall comply with the latest provisions of ASHRAE Standard 90 and all provisions of the International Energy Conservation Code.

1.6 Note to Suppliers and Manufacturers Representative furnishing proposals for

equipment for the project: 1.6.1 Review the Controls Section of these Specifications (if applicable) to

determine controls to be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, if any.

1.6.2 All equipment shall be furnished for a single point electrical connection unless specifically excluded as a requirement.

1.6.3 Review the section of these specifications entitle: REQUIRED SHOP DRAWINGS, DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, PARTS

LISTS, SPECIAL KEYS, TOOLS, ETC., and provide all documents called for therein.


230200�2

1.6.4 Ensure that the equipment which you propose to furnish may be installed, connected, placed in operation and easily maintained at the location and in

the space allocated for it. 1.6.5 Review all documents as indicated in Paragraph "1.1" preceding.

1.6.6 Determine from the Bid Documents the date of completion of this project and

insure that equipment delivery schedules can be met so as to allow this completion date to be met.

1.6.7 Electric motors shall be furnished with the equipment and shall be of the size and type scheduled or otherwise specified. All motors shall be UL labeled

and shall comply with applicable NEMA standard. Motors shall be high efficiency type. Refer to Section 250100.

1.6.8 Review the Section on Motor Starters and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.

1.6.9 Where manufacturer’s temperature controls are specified, they shall be in full

compliance with NFPA 90�A including automatic smoke shut down provisions. 1.6.10For all belt driven equipment, provide final fan and motor sheaves as

determined by the air balance contractor during project balancing phase. The mechanical contractor shall install any new sheaves and belts as required

for balancing and smooth startup without any noticeable squealing. PART 2 � VERTICAL GEOTHERMAL HEAT PUMP UNITS:

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

2.1.1 Dual Stage and Single Stage Heat Pump Units: FHP Manuf./Bosch Group,

WaterFurnace, Trane, and ClimateMaster. (Any closet dimension

modifications or access requirements due to the manufacturer specifics shall be the burden of the approved manufacturer.)

2.2 GENERAL: Equipment shall be specifically designed for applications within

conditioned interior areas. Exposed to outdoor ambient surroundings shall

not be allowed. Equipment shall be completely factory assembled and tested, piped, internally wired and fully charged with Refrigerant R&410A.

Threaded female water inlet and outlet connections, threaded female condensate connection, thermostat field interface terminal strip, discharge duct collar and all safety controls shall be furnished and factory installed.

Capacities shall be rated in accordance with ARI for geothermal applications. Equipment shall be ETL or CSA approved. All equipment shall have decals

and labels to aid in servicing and indicate caution areas. 2.3 CASING: The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with ½”

fiberglass on interior, discharge duct collar and return collar. Lift�out


230200�3

removable access panels shall be provided for access to the compressor and blower assembly compartments. The drain pan shall be constructed of

corrosion resistant material and insulated to prevent sweating. The bottom of the drain pan shall be sloped on two planes which will direct the condensate to the drain connection. When the unit is installed per the

manufacturer’s instructions, the drain pan shall be tested as follows:

2.3.1 Temporarily plug the drain pan. 2.3.2 Fill the drain pan with 2” of water or the maximum allowed by the drain pan

depth, whichever is smaller.

2.3.3 Remove the temporary plug and verify the drain pan removes the water within 3 minutes.

2.4 COMPRESSOR: The compressor shall be high�efficiency, hermetically sealed with internal vibration isolation. External vibration isolation shall be provided

by rubber mounting devices located underneath the mounting base of the compressor. Internal thermal overload protection shall be provided.

2.4.1 2 Tons through 5 Tons – FHP ES Series with ECM motor and two stage

compressor. (Two compressor units are acceptable).

2.4.2 10 to 15 Tons – FHP EC Series with standard motor and two compressors.

2.5 AIR�TO�REFRIGERANT HEAT EXCHANGER: The air�to�refrigerant heat

exchanger shall be constructed of staggered copper tubes with die formed

corrugated aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. The air�to�refrigerant heat exchanger shall have a working pressure rating of 400 PSIG.

Multiple compressor equipment shall provide a single air�to�refrigerant heat exchanger for each compressor.

2.6 WATER�TO�REFRIGERANT HEAT EXCHANGER: The water�to�refrigerant heat exchanger shall be of a high quality co�axial coil for maximum heat transfer.

The copper coil shall be deeply fluted to enhance heat transfer and minimize fouling and scaling. The coil shall have a working pressure of 600 psig on the refrigerant side and 400 psig on the water side.

2.7 REVERSING VALVE: The reversing valve shall be a pilot operated sliding

piston type with replaceable encapsulated magnetic coil. The reversing valve shall be energized in the cooling cycle.

2.8 REFRIGERANT TUBING: Refrigerant Tubing: Refrigerant tubing shall be constructed of copper. All low temperature refrigerant lines shall be

insulated with an elastomeric insulation that has a 3/8" thick wall, flame spread rating of less than 25 and smoke density rating of less than 50, as tested in accordance with ASTM�84. The elastomeric insulation shall have a

UL 94V�5 rating.


230200�4

2.9 REFRIGERANT METERING: The equipment shall be provided with a thermal

expansion valve. This device shall allow operation of the equipment in the range of 25 to 110º F entering fluid temperatures and 60 to 90º F entering air temperatures. The equipment shall only operate with one variable (enter

water temperature, entering air temperature, cfm or gpm) at an extreme condition. All other variables must be within the Anominal@ range of

operation. 2.10 SERVICE ACCESS: The equipment shall be provided with factory supplied

high and low pressure Schrader ports for easy refrigerant pressure or temperature testing.

2.11 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM (BLOWER/MOTOR ASSEMBLY): Unless otherwise

noted, nominal ¾ Ton Single Stage Units: All fan motors shall be three

speed high efficiency PSC, wired on the high speed “tap”. The motor shall have permanently lubricated and sealed bearings. All motors shall have

internal thermal overload protection. The fan assembly shall be arranged for back, left, or right discharge. The discharge must also be capable of being

changed in the field. Removal of the motor and fan wheel shall be made with the assistance of a factory provided orifice ring assembly. This assembly shall attach the wheel and motor to the fan housing providing single service

access.

2.12 ALL TWO STAGE UNITS 5 TONS AND SMALLER: The fan shall be direct drive centrifugal forward curved type with a dynamically balanced wheel. The housing and wheel shall be designed for quiet low velocity operation. The

fan housing shall be removable from the unit without disconnecting the supply air ductwork for servicing of the fan motor. The fan motor shall be an

ECM�2 microprocessor controlled DC type motor with internal programming factory set for the specific unit and featuring soft start/stop and a delay off feature for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. Air flow rates shall be

varied according to the staging of the unit. There will further be provisions for adjusting the air delivery of the motor and blower by ± 15% from rated

air flow. 2.12.1Units that are 10 to 15 Tons: All fan motors shall incorporate a belt driven

motor selection. Adjustable motor sheave and blower drive assemblies shall allow a greater variation in external static pressures. The motors shall be

capable of providing external static pressures as scheduled. Access of the blower is provided through the back of the unit by utilizing removing panels, and/or through a side access panel if the adjustments to the motor belt or

drive assembly are needed.

2.13 HEAT PUMP AIR FILTER SYSTEM: 2.13.1GENERAL: The Contractor shall completely assemble each system for each

heat pump and install in heat pumps ready to use.


230200�5

2.13.1.1 Heat pumps 5 tons and smaller require one 24” X 24” air filter system

(one 24 X 24 filter). 2.13.1.2 Heat pumps that are 10�15 tons require one 48” X 48” air filter system

(four 24” X 24” filters).

2.13.2Refer to 200100 for Temporary Use of Equipment Requirements. 2.13.3SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSING:

2.13.3.1 Airguard single stage flat bank side access filter housing (Model FB).

2.13.3.2 Accommodate required quantity of 24” X 24” X 2” deep flat filters. 2.13.3.3 Factory assembled. 2.13.3.4 One door.

2.13.3.5 16 gauge aluminized steel. 2.13.3.6 See plans for sizes and quantities per unit.

2.13.4FILTER MEDIA:

2.13.4.1 American Air Filter – Perfect Pleat 2” – Merv 8 rating.

2.14 UNIT CONTROLS – SAFETIES: A factory tested and installed control box shall contain all necessary devices to allow heating and cooling operation of the

equipment to occur. These devices shall be as follows: 2.14.124 Vac, Energy Limiting Class II, Transformer.

2.14.2Blower motor controller shall be a 24 Vac relay.

2.14.3Compressor controller shall be a 24 Vac, contactor. All three�phase operated

equipment shall have a contactor that interrupts all three�phases providing

power to the compressor.

2.14.4Operating interface shall be a minimum of an eight�position terminal strip located on the unit. This interface shall provide the means of connection between the field installed Energy Management System and operating

controls contained within the unit.

2.14.5Electrically operated safety lockout relay. This device shall prevent operation and anti�short cycling of the compressor during adverse conditions of operation. This device may be reset by either a remote thermostat or

momentary interruption of power.

2.14.6High pressure switch shall protect the compressor against operation at refrigerant system pressures in excess of 600 PSIG.


230200�6

2.14.7Low pressure switch shall prevent compressor operation underneath 20 PSIG low charge or catastrophic loss of charge situations.

2.14.8Condensate Overflow: Provide a factory�installed internal wired (in series)

condensate overflow detection device independent of the energy

management system. If overflow is detected, the unit shall not operate.

2.15 HOSE KIT: HOSE KIT SIZES SHALL BE AS SCHEDULED ON THE DRAWINGS. 2.15.1Provide a factory�assembled, one piece hose kit/piping package for supply

and return connections for each heat pump.

2.15.2Contractor shall provide and install hose kit piping packages. Each kit shall be sized per the schedule on the drawings. Valves may be mounted in any altitude and do not require straight sections of pipe either upstream or down

stream for proper operation.

2.15.3Each return side hose kit/piping package shall include the following:

2.15.3.1 Single piece ball � valve body for sizes 3/4” – 2”, shall be constructed of hot forged brass with threaded inlets and outlets. 2�1/2” and larger shall be single piece flanged butterfly valves, shall be constructed of ductile

iron with threaded inlets and outlets. All valve bodies are suitable for a minimum of 400 PSIG working pressure.

2.15.3.2 Single pressure/temperature test ports for verifying the pressure

differential and system temperature.

2.15.4Each supply side hose kit/piping package shall include the following:

2.15.4.1 Single piece ball � valve body for sizes 3/4” – 2”, shall be constructed of

hot forged brass with threaded inlets and outlets. 2�1/2” and larger shall

be single piece fanged butterfly valves, shall be constructed of ductile iron with flanged inlets and outlets. All valve bodies are suitable for a

minimum of 400 PSIG working pressure. 2.15.4.2 Single pressure/temperature test ports for verifying the pressure

differential and system temperature.

2.15.4.3 Strainer shall be Y�type configuration furnished with hose connector blow down valve. Strainer screen shall be stainless steel mesh and easily accessible for cleaning without disconnecting hoses.

2.15.4.4 All valves shall be labeled with flow direction, manufacturer and model

number, unit tagging. 2.15.5Stainless Steel Braided Supply and Return Hoses: All hoses shall be

equipped with end connections at terminal unit and shall be 24” long. All end


230200�7

connections shall be either permanently crimped swivel ends or butt welded to carbon steel end fittings to meet stated pressure ratings. Operational

temperature shall be rated from fluid freezing to 200 degrees F. Minimum burst pressure shall be four times the working pressure. Field flushing connection fitting furnished by contractor. 3/4” to 2” shall be reinforced, fire

retardant EPDM rubber, bonded to the inside wall of braiding. 2�½” and larger shall be a corrugated type 321 stainless steel tube.

2.15.6Warrantee: Manufacturer shall warrant all components, for no less than five

(5) years from date of purchase. Manufacturer shall warrant steel braided

hose for no less than three (3) years from date of substantial completion.

2.15.7START�UP: Prior to utilization of equipment, start�up service shall be performed by factory authorized representative. Refer to Specification Section 200100.

PART 3 � CHEMICAL TREATMENT:

3.1 SCOPE

3.1.1 Provide a water treatment program for the geothermal closed loop piping

system. It is the contractor’s responsibility to contact the engineer 2 weeks

in advance to any treatments performed on the systems. It is the engineer’s discretion whether or not this process should be monitored after notification.

3.2 QUALIFICATIONS

3.2.1 Chemicals, service and equipment shall be supplied by a company which specializes in water treatment.

3.3 CLOSED LOOP RECIRCULATION SYSTEM (GEOTHERMAL AND CHILLED/HOT

WATER SYSTEMS)

3.3.1 Equipment: Provide a 3/4" valved and capped port for injection of the closed

loop chemicals into the system. 3.3.2 Chemical: Furnish initial supply of the closed loop chemicals for the systems.

This contractor shall retest and refill (as needed) the system after 3, 6 and 12 months to verify the proper dosage is in each system.

3.4 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF GEOTHERMAL HYDRONIC PIPING

3.4.1 General: The heating and cooling system for this contract is a geothermal system. There are several precautions which must be observed during its

installation. This contractor is advised to read all of the manufacturer’s instructions prior to commencing the installation. This cleaning and flushing of the hydronic must be accomplished by the chemical treatment contractor.

4” purge valves are being provided in the geothermal valve vault. A purge


230200�8

cart will be required to purge and flush geothermal building piping inside and outside the building.

3.4.2 Cleaning and Flushing Hydronic Piping: All water circulating systems for the

project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the

system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil and any and all other material foreign to the water. During construction, extreme care shall be exercised to

prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each

piece of pipe, fitting or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. After system is complete, the contractor shall first fill the piping loops and all

runouts with clear water. The loop water shall be circulated for one hour with make�up water open and boiler drain open to accomplish initial flushing of the system. After initial flushing, the initial individual terminal devices

shall be connected permanently to the supply and return runouts conditions. The sub�contractor shall add Trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to

the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system water shall

be brought up to 95 degrees F temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The authorized factory representative shall be given notice by the contractor of scheduling this cleaning and, if the Mechanical Engineers

representative deems it necessary, the operation shall be repeated. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested

by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (PH = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by use of Trisodium Phosphate shall be repeated.

After the cleaning and flushing is complete, and approved by CMTA, the chemical treatment contractor shall provide the proper water treatment

including rust inhibitors for the system. 3.4.3 Flushing shall be witnessed by the Engineer and Owner.

END OF SECTION.


231100�1


SECTION 231100 � REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 � REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS:

1.1 GENERAL

1.1.1 Alternate R, G & D selections, other than manufacturers and models listed

below, will be accepted, provided quality, function and characteristics are

equivalent. Acceptable alternates are Metalaire, Anemostat, Krueger, Price, Titus, Carnes, Nailor Industries and Tuttle & Bailey. Shop drawings shall

identify and list all characteristics of each device exactly as scheduled herein. Finishes shall be selected by the Architect. If Architect elects not to select color, all colors shall be white. Factory color samples shall be submitted with

shop drawings.

1.1.2 Include with the shop drawings a room�by�room schedule indicating devices installed. Also note ceiling types and installations.

PART 2 – SELECTION:

2.1 Refer to drawings for schedule.

END OF SECTION.


231200�1


SECTION 231200 � SHEET METAL AND FLEXIBLE DUCT PART 1 – GENERAL:


General Requirements�Mechanical and to all other Contract Documents as they apply to this branch of the work. Attention is also directed to all other sections of the Contract Documents which affect the work of this section and


1.2 This branch of the work includes all materials, labor and accessories for the fabrication and installation of all sheet metal work as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. Where construction methods for various items

are not indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all such work shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the recommended methods

outlined in the latest edition of SMACNA's Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Low Velocity Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems.

These references and plate numbers shall be used by the Engineer for required sheet metal thicknesses and final acceptance of methods of fabrication, hanging, accessories, etc. All equipment furnished by

manufacturers shall be installed in strict accord with their recommended methods.

1.3 All ductwork stored on site shall be maintained dry and clean. All stored

ductwork shall be covered and ends shall be capped. After duct is installed

open ends shall be capped with plastic. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain a clean duct system. If system is soiled this

Contractor shall be responsible for having ductwork cleaned by a NADCA Certified Contractor.

1.4 Ductwork and piping shall be kept clean at all times. Ductwork stored on the job site shall be placed a minimum of 4” above the floor and shall be

completely covered in plastic. Installed ductwork shall be protected with plastic. Do not install the ductwork if the building is not “dried�in”. If this is required, the entire lengths of duct shall be covered in plastic to protect. The

Owner/Engineer shall periodically inspect that these procedures are followed. If deemed unacceptable, the Contractor shall be required to clean the duct

system utilizing a NADCA certified Contractor. 1.5 Prior to purchase and fabrication of ductwork (shop fabricated or

manufactured), the Contractor shall coordinate installations with new and existing conditions. Notify the Engineer if there are any discrepancies for

resolution.


231200�2

PART 2 � LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK:

2.1 GENERAL (LOW VELOCITY)

2.1.1 Double turning vanes shall be installed in square turns and/or where indicated.

2.1.2 Provide a “high efficiency” type take�off with round damper (Flexmaster CB�

D�B03 or approved equal) for all round duct branches from a rectangular

main to a GRD. Refer to the detail on the drawings for all installation requirements.

2.1.3 Cross�break all ducts where either cross sectional dimension is 18" or larger.

2.1.4 Air volume dampers shall be installed in each duct branch takeoffs and/or where indicated, whichever is more stringent. All such dampers shall be

accessible without damage to finishes or insulation and shall be provided where required for proper system balance.

2.1.5 Unless otherwise dimensioned on the drawings, all diffusers, registers and

grilles shall be located aesthetically and symmetrically with respect to

lighting, ceiling patterns, doors, masonry bond, etc.

2.1.6 The interior surface of the ductwork connecting to return/exhaust air grilles shall be painted flat black. The ductwork shall be painted a minimum of 24" starting from the grille.

2.1.7 Ducts shall be hung by angles, rods, 18 ga. minimum straps, trapezes, etc.,

in accordance with SMACNA's recommended practices. There shall be no less than one set of hangers for each section of ductwork. Where ductwork contains filter sections, coils, fans or other equipment or items, such

equipment or items shall be hung independently of ductwork with rods or angles. Do not suspend ducts from perlins or other weak structural members

where no additional weight may be applied. If in doubt, consult the structural engineer.

2.1.8 Provide approved flexible connectors at inlet and outlet of each item of heating and cooling equipment whether indicated or not. Install so as to

facilitate removal of equipment as well as for vibration and noise control. 2.1.9 All ductwork connections, fittings, joints, etc., shall be sealed. Seal with

hardcast "Irongrip 601". Apply per manufacturer's recommendations.

2.1.10Duct dimensions indicated are required inside clear dimensions. Plan duct layouts for adequate insulation and fitting clearance.


231200�3

2.1.11All angular turns shall be made with the radius of the center line of the duct equivalent to 1.5 times the width of the duct.

2.1.12Miscellaneous accessories such as test openings with covers, latches,

hardware, locking devices, etc., shall be installed as recommended by

SMACNA and/or as indicated. Test openings shall be placed at the inlet and discharge of all centrifugal fans, VAV boxes, fan sections of air handling

units, at the end and middle of all main trunk ducts and where indicated. All such openings shall be readily accessible without damage to finishes.

2.1.13Whether indicated or not, provide code approved, full sized fire dampers at all locations where ductwork penetrates fire rated walls. Fire stop rating

shall meet or exceed the rating of the wall. Provide an approved access panel at each fire damper located and sized so as to allow hand reset of each fire dampers. All such fire dampers and access panels shall be readily

accessible without damage to finishes. Refer to Architectural Plans for locations of fire rated walls. All access doors shall be 16"x16" or as high as

ductwork permits and 16" in length.

2.1.14The Contractor who installs the sheet metal shall furnish to the Air Balancing Contractor, a qualified person to assist in testing and balancing the system.

2.1.15Locate all supply, return and exhaust diffusers and grilles in the locations shown on the architectural reflected ceiling plan.

2.1.16All fans and other vibrating equipment shall be suspended by independent

vibration isolators.

2.2 MATERIALS (LOW VELOCITY)

2.2.1 Ductwork, plenums and other appurtenances shall be constructed of one of

the following: (Except MRI Scan Rooms – only use aluminum in the MRI

Scan Rooms)

2.2.1.1 Steel sheets, zinc coated, Federal Specification 00�S�775, Type I, Class E & ASTM A93�59T with G�90 zinc coating.

2.2.1.2 Aluminum alloy sheets 3003, Federal Specification AA�A�359, Temper H�14.

2.2.2 Ductwork, plenums and other appurtenances shall be constructed of the

materials of the minimum weights or gauges as required by the latest

SMACNA 2” W.G. Standard or below table. When gauge thickness differs, the heavier gauge shall be selected. The below table shall serve as a

minimum.


231200�4

Round Diameter Duct Gauge Rectangular Width Duct Gauge

3�12 Inches 26 Ga. 3�12 inches 26 Ga,

12�18 Inches 24 Ga. 13�30 inches 24 Ga.



37�52 Inches 18 Ga. 85 inches and up 18 Ga.

2.2.3 Insulated Flexible Air Duct (Use Only Where Indicated)

2.2.3.1 Thermaflex G�KM or equal. Flexible air duct shall be one (1) inch thick

fiberglass insulation with CPE liner permanently bonded to a coated spring

steel wire helix supporting a fiberglass scrim and fiberglass insulating blanket. Flexible air duct shall be listed under UL Standard 181 as a Class

I flexible air duct complying with NFPA 90A and 90B. Maximum flame spread = 25 and maximum smoke developed = 50. Minimum insulating value is R�4.2. Flexible duct shall be used only for GRD runouts and no

section shall be more than five feet in length.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS (LOW VELOCITY) 2.3.1 Flexible Connectors: Duro�Dyne, Ventfabrics, Inc., U.S. Rubber or

equivalent; conforming to NFPA No. 90A; neoprene coated glass fabric; 20 oz. for low velocity ducts secured with snap lock.

2.3.2 Turning Vanes: Fabricated as recommended by SMACNA: noiseless when in

place without mounting projections in ducts. All turning vanes shall be

double blade type.

2.3.3 Access Doors in Ductwork: Flexmaster TBSM, Air Balance, Vent Products or equal. Access doors for rectangular ducts shall be 16"x16" where possible. Otherwise install as large an access door as height permits by 16" in length.

Door shall be 2” thick double�wall insulated with continuous hinge and cam lock. Provide in ducts where indicated or where required for servicing

equipment whether indicated or not. Provide a hinged access door in duct adjacent to all fire, smoke and control dampers for the purpose of

determining position. Access doors shall also be provided on each side of duct coils and downstream side of VAV boxes and CAV boxes.

2.3.4 Access Doors in Ceilings or Walls: Provide Kees D Panel, Cesco, Milcor or equal. 24”x24”, 16 gauge galvannealed steel door and frame with primer

finish to accept specified finish, 3 screwdriver operated cam latches and concealed continuous pivoting rod hinge. Door shall open 175 degrees. For masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry

anchors. For fire rated units, provide manufacturer’s standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self�closing mechanism.


231200�5

2.3.5 Volume Dampers (Rectangular): Leader MO3 or Empco, Air Balance, Louvers and Dampers, Cesco, Ruskin, Pottorff, Greenheck, rectangular volume

dampers. Frames shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall be opposed blade 18 gauge galvanized steel with triple crimped blades on 6” centers. Linkage shall be concealed in jamb. Bearings shall be ½” nylon.

Maximum single section size shall be 48" wide and 72" high. Provide with Ventfabrics 1" high elevated dial regulator to avoid damper handle from

conflicting with duct insulation. Provide permanent mark on dial regulator to mark air balance point.

2.3.6 Volume Dampers (Round): Leader BR�4 or Empco, Air Balance, Louvers and Dampers, Cesco, Ruskin, Pottorff, Greenheck round volume dampers.

Dampers shall be butterfly type consisting of circular blade mounted to axle. Frames shall be 22 gauge steel and 5" long. Damper blades shall be 20 gauge crimped galvanized steel. Axle shall be 3/8"x5” square plated steel.

Bearing shall be 3/8” nylon. Provide with Ventfabrics 1" high elevated dial regulator to avoid damper handle from conflicting with duct insulation.

Provide permanent mark on dial regulator to mark air balance point.

2.3.7 Fire Dampers: Fire dampers shall be Leader Type U�205B 1½ hour rating U�215B vertical 1½ hour rating or United Air Type U�255B for a 3 hour vertical rating. Other acceptable manufacturers are Ruskin, Air Balance, Prefco,

Pottorff, Greenheck or National Controlled Air. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard 555. Each fire

damper shall have a 1½ or 3 hour fire protection rating as required by fire wall. Damper shall have a 165 degrees F fusible link, and shall include a UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Fire damper

shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings

utilizing minimum 20 gauge steel sleeves, angles, other materials, practices required to provide an installation equipment to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Blade and frame thickness

shall be a minimum of 22 gauge. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's instructions. The blades shall be out of the air

stream. Provide an access door for fire damper reset at all fire damper locations.

PART 3 � HIGH VELOCITY DUCTWORK:

3.1 GENERAL (HIGH VELOCITY) 3.1.1 High velocity ductwork shall be utilized for all supply ductwork between air

handling units and VAV/CAV boxes. Provide Eastern Sheet Metal Model “CB” or equal takeoff fitting for each VAV/CAV off high velocity main. Shop or

field fabricated takeoffs are note acceptable, 3.1.2 Duct dimensions indicated are required inside clear dimensions.


231200�6

3.1.3 All ductwork connections, fittings, joints, etc., shall be sealed. Seal with Hardcast "DT" tape and Hardcast "RTA�50" adhesive installed in strict

accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.1.4 Ductwork shall be installed per the latest SMACNA Medium or High Pressure

Manual, whichever is applicable.

3.1.5 All hanger straps shall be 18 ga. minimum with reinforcement angles installed in strict accordance with SMACNA. Flat oval ducts shall be installed with 2"x2"x¼" angles on top and bottom ducts 18" wide and larger. Use

1"x1"x3/16" angles on ducts under 18" wide.

3.1.6 Miscellaneous accessories such as test openings with covers, latches, hardware, locking devices, etc., shall be installed as recommended by SMACNA or the duct manufacturer, and/or as indicated. Test openings shall

be placed at the discharge of all air handling units and at the end and middle of all main trunk ducts and where indicated. All such openings shall be

readily accessible without damage to finishes.

3.1.7 Whether indicated or not, provide code approved, full sized fire dampers at all locations where ductwork penetrates fire rated walls. Fire stop rating shall meet or exceed the rating of the wall. Provide an approved access

panels at each fire damper located and sized so as to allow hand reset of each fire damper. All such fire dampers and access panels shall be readily

accessible without damage to finishes. Refer to Architectural Plans for locations of fire rated walls. Where access doors are installed in insulated ductwork, the access door shall be the insulated type.

3.2 MATERIALS (HIGH VELOCITY SINGLE WALL)

3.2.1 Prior to purchase/shipment of the ductwork, manufacturer shall provide as

part of the submittal process scaled, field coordinated Autocad drawings of

the complete system to be furnished. Drawings will indicate all system components including fittings, ductwork and manifolds. Drawings shall be

available in an electronic format. 3.2.2 All round and oval high velocity ductwork for systems above 1.5” W.G. shall

be Eastern Sheet Metal, United McGill or Semco or equal as required by the latest SMACNA 10” W.G. Standard.

3.2.3 Ductwork shall be spiral, lock�seam construction fabricated from galvanized

steel meeting ASTM�527 standard. Any ductwork exposed to view shall be

constructed of "Paint�Grip" steel. Ductwork shall be constructed of the following minimum gauges:

Round Diameter Duct Gauge

3�14 Inches 26 Ga.



231200�7

3.2.4 All high velocity duct fittings shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as

the spiral pipe. Contractor or field fabricated fittings shall not be accepted. Duct fittings shall be constructed per the latest SMACNA 10” WG standard with continuous welds. Take�off fittings shall be combination type tees

(Eastern Sheet Metal Model “CB” or equal). Straight or angle tees are not acceptable. Fittings shall be constructed of the following minimum gauges.

Round Diameter Duct Gauge


3.2.5 All single wall ductwork will be furnished with factory installed flanges equal to Eastern Sheet Metal Flange.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS (HIGH VELOCITY)

3.3.1 Flexible Connectors: Duro�Dyne, Ventfabrics, Inc., U.S. Rubber or equivalent; conforming to NFPA No. 90A; neoprene coated glass fabric.

Provide flexible connectors at inlet and outlet of air handling equipment to accommodate a minimum of three times the operating pressure of the system.

3.3.2 Take�offs: Take�offs shall be combination type tees, Eastern Sheet Metal

Model “CB” or equal. Straight tees are not allowed. 3.3.3 Fire Dampers: Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance

with UL Safety Standard 555. Each fire damper shall have a 1½ or 3 hour fire protection rating as required by fire wall. Damper shall have a 165

degrees F fusible link, and shall include a UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Fire damper shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown. Fire

dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing minimum 20 gauge steel sleeves, angles, other materials, practices required to provide an

installation equipment to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Blade and frame thickness shall be a minimum of 22 gauge. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's

instructions. Fire dampers shall be United Air Type U�205B 1½ hour rating U�215B vertical 1½ hour rating or Leader Type U�255B for a 3 hour vertical

rating. The blades shall be out of the air stream. Other acceptable manufacturers are Ruskin, Air Balance, Prefco, Pottorff, Greenheck or

National Controlled Air. Provide an access door for fire damper reset at all fire damper locations.

3.3.4 Access Doors in Ceilings or Walls: Provide Kees D Panel, Cesco, Milcor or equal. 24”x24”, 16 gauge galvannealed steel door and frame with primer

finish to accept specified finish, 3 screwdriver operated cam latches and concealed continuous pivoting rod hinge. Door shall open 175 degrees. For masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry


231200�8

anchors. For fire rated units, provide manufacturer’s standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self�closing mechanism.

3.3.5 Access Doors; In Ductwork: All access doors in round or oval high velocity

ductwork shall be screw and gasketed type. Screws shall be maximum 4

inches on centers. Access door sizes shall be as follows:

DUCT DIAMETER OPENING SIZE 3�4 inches 4"x10" 5�6 inches 6"x10"

7�24 inches 10"x16" 26�36 inches 16"x16"

Over 36 inches 16"x22"

PART 4 � EXPOSED ROUND DUCTWORK IN AUDITORIUM:

4.1 Prior to purchase/shipment of the ductwork, manufacturer shall provide as

part of the submittal process scaled, field coordinated Autocad drawings of the complete system to be furnished. Drawings will indicate all system

components including fittings, ductwork and manifolds. Drawings shall be available in an electronic format.

4.2 Furnish and install where indicated double wall duct. The double wall duct shall be Eastern Sheet Metal, United McGill, Semco or approved equivalent.

The duct shall have an inner shell, a 1�inch layer of fiberglass insulation and an outer pressure shell.

4.3 Ductwork outer shell shall be spiral, lock�seam construction fabricated from galvanized steel meeting ASTM�527 standard. Any ductwork exposed to view

shall be constructed of "Paint�Grip" steel. Ductwork shall be constructed as specified in MATERIALS (LOW VELOCITY)

4.4 Inner shell for spiral pipe shall be perforated galvanized steel with 3/32" perforations with an overall open area of 23%, or solid galvanized steel, as

noted on drawings. Ductwork shall have 3 intermediate reinforcing ribs and be constructed of the following minimum gauges:

Round Diameter Gauge 3�60 Inches 26 Ga.

61�84 Inches 24 Ga. 4.5 Inner shell for fittings shall be galvanized steel. All fittings shall be

manufactured by the same manufacturer as the spiral pipe. Fittings shall be constructed a minimum of 22 Ga.

4.6 The fiberglass liner shall have a maximum thermal conductivity (k) factor of

0.27 btu per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit per inch thickness

at 75 degree F ambient temperature.


231200�9

4.7 All double wall ductwork will be furnished with factory installed flanges equal

to Eastern Sheet Metal Flange which shall consist of a 1.5 outer flange and an inner secondary flange which shall keep the inner flange concentric and eliminate inner wall connections. Flanges requiring inner couplings will not be

allowed, no insulation shall be exposed to the airstream at the connections.

4.8 All grille and register taps shall be factory manifolded. Field installed taps will not be allowed. Manifolded taps may be tack welded and caulked for appearance. Only taps for grilles and registers may be provided this way.

All other fittings shall be full body welded.

END OF SECTION.


250100�1

DIVISION 25 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

SECTION 250100 � ELECTRIC MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 � MOTORS:

1.1 The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.

1.2 Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven

loads. 1.3 Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the

motor to operate in the service factor range.

1.4 Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg. B environment with maximum 50 deg. C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).

1.5 Starting capability: frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control

system and not less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually

controlled motors.

1.6 Service Factory: 1.15 for poly�phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.

1.7 Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.

1.8 Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturer's

standards to suit specific application.

1.9 Provide inverter rated motors where variable frequency drives are utilized.

Motor shall be premium efficiency type with Class F insulation. 1.10 Bearings:

1.10.1Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals;

1.10.2Re�greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally

inaccessible for regular maintenance;

1.10.3Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce

lateral or axial thrust in motor.


250100�2

1.11 Enclosure Type:

1.11.1Open drip�proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or

remotely located during operation;

1.11.2Guarded drip�proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or

building occupants; 1.11.3Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed;

1.12 Overload protection: Provide built�in thermal overload protection and, where

indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

1.13 Efficiency: Provide "Energy Efficient" motors with a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If

efficiency not specified, motors shall have a minimum efficiency as listed below:

1 HP 85% Eff'y 10 HP 91.7% 1�1/2 to 2 HP 84% 15 HP 92.4%

3 HP 88.5% 20 HP 93% 5 HP 88.5% 25 HP and up 93.6%

7�1/2 HP 91.7% 1.14 Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,

characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.

PART 2 � MOTOR STARTERS�GENERAL: 2.1 Provide motor starters where indicated on the mechanical equipment

schedules or elsewhere in the contract documents.

2.2 Motor starters shall be NEMA style. Their sizing and installation shall be coordinated with the equipment manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

2.3 All starters shall be size 0 minimum. They shall be constructed and tested in

accord with latest edition of NEMA standards. All starters shall be across�the�line magnetic type, unless indicated otherwise. On motors of 20 H.P. or greater rating, the supplier should provide starters capable of limiting inrush

currents. These shall be of the wye�delta, 2 speed�2 winding, or reduced voltage open�transition type, as required. Do not utilize closed transition

starters unless specifically indicated.


250100�3

2.4 Magnetic starters shall be furnished with the following characteristics and accessories as a minimum. See other sections of these specifications and

mechanical schedules for further requirements. 2.4.1 Contacts shall be silver�alloy, double�break type except NEMA size 8 and 9

shall be single�break type. Contacts shall be replaceable without removal of wiring or removal of starter from enclosure. Number of contacts shall be as

required for service indicated. Contacts shall be gravity dropout type, positive operation.

2.4.2 Coil voltage shall be 120 volts, A.C., 60 HZ or less, as required to suit control systems available voltages. Coils shall be of molded construction, except for

size 8 and 9 which shall be hand wound. Provide coil clearing contact as required.

2.4.3 Provide control transformer of adequate K.V.A. as required on all starters with line�to�line voltages higher than 120 volts A.C. Provide fuse block and

slow�blow fuse to protect control transformer per NEMA, N.E.C. and U.L.

2.4.4 Provide hand�off�auto selector switch in face of starter, wired into hand and off switch positions. Auto position (if needed) to be field wired as indicated on plans or schedules for automatic control.

2.4.5 Provide NEMA Class 20 resetable overload relays, accurately sized to the

motor nameplate rating of the motor served and the temperature differential between motor and controller. Overloads shall be easily replaceable, and resetable without opening enclosure, via a push button or similar means.

Class 10 or Class 30 overloads may be used depending on type of motor duty encountered.

2.4.6 Provide at least one N.O. auxiliary contact (field�convertible to N.C.

operation) with each starter. Refer to mechanical details or schedules for

additional requirements, if any. All starters shall have space for two additional single�pole contacts.

2.4.7 All starters shall be thru�wiring type.

2.4.8 Provide phase failure sensing relay to open starter coil circuit (on loss of one or more phases) on all three�phase starters controlling motors of 7½ H.P. or

larger. PART 3 � ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:

3.1 All mechanical equipment shall be provided for single point electrical

connection unless specifically noted to the contrary. 3.2 The equipment manufacturer shall provide internally mounted fuses with his

equipment, as required, to comply with the U.L. listing on the equipment


250100�4

name plate. (i.e., hermetically sealed compressors or equipment with name plate data that recommends or requires fuse protection.) See also, National

Electrical Code, Article 440, Part C, and other applicable sections of the N.E.C.

3.3 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all mechanical equipment requiring electrical connections be provided with all required

proper wiring, electrical protective devices, disconnecting means and electro�mechanical starting units to properly match the mechanical equipment requirement. Each separate contractor engaged for the project shall

coordinate with all other trades to ensure all necessary equipment and labor is included for fully functioning mechanical systems, installed per code

requirements. 3.4 Refrigeration condensing units with internal compressors shall be furnished

with integral starter.

3.5 All interlock or other control wiring, unless specifically noted otherwise, is the responsibility of this Contractor.

3.6 All equipment shall be suitably enclosed. All enclosures for equipment shall

be rated and approved for the environment in which it operates. (i.e., NEMA

1, NEMA 3R, NEMA 7, NEMA 12, etc.) Verify the requirement with the installation condition if not indicated on the plans.

3.7 Observe the following standards for manufacture of equipment and in

selection of components:

3.7.1 Starters, control devices and assemblies: NEMA � (I.E.C. style not

acceptable) 3.7.2 Enclosures for electrical equipment: NEMA

3.7.3 Enclosed switches: NEMA

3.7.4 All electrical work, generally: NFPA 70

3.7.5 All electrical work in industrial occupancies: J.I.C. standards

3.7.6 All electrical components and materials: U.L. listing required. 3.8 Where scheduled on the drawings, provide disconnect switches and

contactors. Disconnect switches to be fusible type or circuit breaker type.

PART 4 � REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 3/4 H.P. OR LESS: 4.1 This section describes requirements for small mechanical equipment such as

(but not limited to) package terminal heating/cooling units, water source


250100�5

heat pumps, VAV boxes, unit heaters, vertical and horizontal unit ventilators, exhaust fans, in�line fans, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, DDC temperature

control panels, etc. 4.2 Small equipment with motor(s) of 3/4 H.P., single phase or less are generally

not required to be furnished with starter(s), unless otherwise noted.

4.3 For such equipment, provide integral contactor or horsepower�rated relay where controlled by thermostat or other type of switch. Contactors or relays shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.

4.4 Provide transformer within unit as required to provide low voltage A.C. for

thermostat control. 4.5 Provide internal fusing for unit motor and other loads in fuse block or in�line

fuseholder. See also Article 2.2, this Section.

4.6 Where externally�mounted disconnecting means is required and would be impractical, unsightly or inappropriate in the judgment of the Engineer,

disconnects shall be located within the unit. These disconnects may be fusible H.P.�rated snap switches or manual starters with overload elements, as required. Locate this and other electrical equipment within enclosure

where easily accessible behind access panel or door on unit, and as acceptable to the electrical inspector or local authority having jurisdiction.

Refer to mechanical equipment schedules for further information.

END OF SECTION.

Thomas Nelson High School�Phase 3 2011�02

CMTA Project NHS08�03

250400�1

DIVISION 25 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

SECTION 250400 � CONTROL � DIRECT DIGITAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 The Nelson County School District (NCSD) invites temperature control

contractors (TCC) to bid on the temperature controls at the designated school.

The controls are to be Direct Digital controls (DDC).

1.2 Furnish a totally native BACnet system. The operating system shall be based on

a distributed control system in accordance with specifications. The operators

work station and associated printer will be provided by the owner and will

control all building controllers, application controllers and all input/output

devices. It will communicate using the protocols and network standards as

defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135�2001, BACnet. In other words, all

workstations and controllers, including unitary controllers shall be BACnet. No

gateways shall be used for communications to controllers.

1.3 NCSD has a computer (head end) located at the district warehouse building that

communicates with various schools. The head end operates on Windows XP

professional software and communicates to the other schools via the web using

“Tridium” software / hardware (Web supervisor server) powered by “Niagara

frame ware”. A part of the frame ware is building alarm software called “Vykon”.

Also installed on the head end is “Work Place Tec Tool” software that contains

the visual basic programming tools for the schools. The actual version and

revision numbers are:

1.3.1 Head end will have AX Vykon installed at the head end.

1.3.2 Tridium version at all schools will be JACE R2 release 5.26 (or greaters),

complete with oBIX driver.

1.3.3 Tridium license for all current schools with NCSD holding the license.

1.3.4 Install Vykon software features to provide for the following alarming.

1.3.4.1 Critical alarms will interrupt existing software with a flashing alarm header,

computer alarm noise and printout at designated printer. Acknowledgement

will require an authorized sign in and will be printed out.

1.3.4.2 Trouble alarms, such as communications interruptions will place a header

above existing work; acknowledgement is by normal sign in and will be

printed out.

1.3.4.3 Normal alarms such as heat pump problems alarm or fans and pump alarms

will interrupt existing software with a flashing alarm header and printout.

Acknowledgements will require normal sign in and will be printed out.



250400�2

1.3.4.3.1 All fans and pumps that call for a current sensor relay or other proving

device and associated with a command and if they do not agree after 20

seconds (adjustable) they will be considered to be in alarm.

1.3.5 If TCC needs to update or revise any of the existing software, to allow their

software to operate seamlessly, it will be completed by the TCC as a part of this

contract.

1.3.6 All additional licensing needed for this project shall be supplied by TCC.

1.3.7 If the existing building head end software needs to be updated or revised to

communicate with TCC’s software it will be completed by the TCC as a part of

the bid.

1.3.8 All new software, graphics, terminology, operation, trending, scheduling etc. will

look like the existing systems and any changes needed to accomplish this will be

the responsibility of the TCC.

1.4 All controllers, control interface hardware, associated software, services,

installation, warranty, training, etc., shall be included as hereinafter specified.

1.5 Provide all power wiring necessary for the operation of panels, etc., is to be

included as work of this section. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

1.6 The TCC contractor shall provide all VFD’s. Refer to Specification Section

230200 for VFD requirements.

1.7 TCC shall be responsible for the installation of class 1, 2 or 3 wiring, conduit,

terminations tagging and connections as needed for a fully operational system.

See section 5.1 for details.

1.8 Acceptable Manufacturers:

1.8.1 Base Bid: Alerton, TAC or Johnson Controls. All DDC controllers used in the bid

must have been submitted and received approval from the BACnet® Testing

Labs.

1.8.2 Alternate: (Refer to Front End Specifications for numbering of Alternates):

Alerton

1.9 Acceptable installing Temperature Control Contractors (TCC): ECT Services,

MELCO or Johnson Controls.

1.10 The above mentioned TCC shall all have access to various types of WEB

browsers (i.e. Netscape, IE, etc.), which shall be included for access to the

Direct Digital Control (DDC) system via the School Districts Wide Area Network

(WAN). It will be the responsibility of the TCC to implement this project onto



250400�3

the Master WEB Supervisor at the Nelson County School District (NCSD)

maintenance services office with no damage to the existing projects. Any

computer connected to the WAN, utilizing a web browser and having the proper

password shall be able to communicate with the school’s DDC system.

PART 2 – CONTROL CONTRACTOR (TCC)/MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

2.1 The TCC shall have an established working relationship with the control

manufacturer of not less than five years and shall have prior approval from

NCSD and are the only allowed suppliers and/or installing contractors.

2.2 The TCC’s or Manufacturer’s installer and programmer shall have successfully

completed control manufacturer’s classes on control systems and shall present

for review the certification of training.

2.3 The TCC must have at least 5 years experience working with Tridium, Vykon

software and products and have factory certification.

2.4 The TCC programming team for this project shall be:

2.4.1 Identified by name.

2.4.2 The programmer’s previous work experiences shall not be less than five years.

2.4.3 The programmer shall be technically proficient in both control systems and

mechanical (variable volume outside air handling units, water�to�water systems,

geothermal systems, etc.) systems.

2.4.4 Programmer’s references from all jobs during the past 12 months shall be

presented.

2.4.5 If proposed programmer do not meet minimum competency, the owner has the

right to request a different installer and programmer.

2.4.6 No programmer substitutions will be made without prior approval from the

owner.

2.5 Related Items

2.5.1 The interface between the DDC system and other equipment is the responsibility

of the TCC.

PART 3 – QUALITY CONTROL – CODES AND STANDARDS

3.1 All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations

of all codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities. Such

codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and

specifications, As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current



250400�4

editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids for the following codes:

3.1.1 National Electric Code (NEC)

3.1.2 Kentucky Building Code (KBC)

3.1.3 Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

3.1.4 ANSI/ASHRAE 135�1995 (BACnet™)

3.1.5 National Electric Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA)

3.1.6 National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)

3.1.7 American Society Of Heating, Refrigeration, And Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE)

3.1.8 Instrument Society Of America (ISA)

3.1.9 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

3.2 Meet all of the local authorities and State Fire Marshal code requirements for

normal operating and smoke mode functions.

PART 4 – SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS: Submittal shall be broken down into two

stages. The first stage will be a pre�submittal followed up with the final, complete

submittal. The TCC shall not start the project until the pre�submittal is approved.

4.1 Pre�submittals are a way for the TCC to interface with the customer to make

sure layout, terminology, point lists and graphics are consistent with customers

needs. 3 sets of pre�submittals shall be sent along with transmittal letters to all

parties in the chain of information to sign off that they are passing the pre�

submittals along. Pre submittals shall consist of:

4.1.1 Temperature control drawings as per 4.2.1 and 4.2.3,

4.1.2 Points list as per 4.2.7,

4.1.3 Sequence of operation as per 4.2.9.

4.2 Final submittals ( a minimum of 7 copies) shall consist of:

4.2.1 All Temperature Control drawings shall be provided on 11 X 17 paper (with

legible font type and size) and in electronic files. (Visio 2000 or AutoCAD v. 14

or higher versions).

4.2.2 All drawings shall be labeled TC (temperature control) rather than being

referenced within the mechanical or electrical divisions. Sheets shall be

consecutively numbered.

4.2.3 One drawing per AHU or system (e.g., boiler plant). Drawing shall include point

descriptors (DI, DO, AI, AO), addressing, and point names. Each point names

shall be unique (within a system and between systems). For example, the point

named for the mixed air temperature for AHU #1, AHU #2, and AHU #3 shall

not be MAT but could be named AHU#1MAT, AHU#2MAT, and AHU#3MAT. The

point names could be logical and consistent between systems and AHU’s. The

abbreviation or short hand notation (e.g., MAT) shall be clearly defined in

writing by the TCC. Naming standard will be decided on during pre submittals.



250400�5

4.2.4 Submit Floor plans depicting DDC control devices (control units, network

devices, LAN interface devices, and power transformers as well as static

pressure sensor in duct and temperature sensors in rooms) in relation to

mechanical rooms, HVAC equipment, and building footprint.

4.2.5 DDC System architecture diagram indicating schematic location of all Control

Units, workstations, LAN Interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and

type for each Control Unit,

4.2.6 Memory allocation projections.

4.2.7 Point’s List. At the end of this section is a minimum points list. These point lists

do not define global and virtual points. It does not list points to be implemented

in each controller. It is up to the TCC to associate points within the building to

utilize the controllers affectively and efficiently.

4.2.8 Points List submitted in the pre�submittals will show all points needed, global

and virtual points and as they will be grouped as requested by the TCC.

4.2.8.1 Points list shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format.

Failure to provide points list or listing all points will mean the total submittal

will be rejected.

4.2.9 Control Logic documentation shall include:

4.2.9.1 A detailed sequence of operation shall be submitted on separate sheets for

each AHU or HVAC system.

4.2.9.2 Also include The following logic control statements:

4.2.9.2.1 Set points, throttling ranges, dead�bands, and differentials for

temperature and pressure variables, PID coefficients, reset schedules,

etc.

4.2.9.2.2 Limits/conditions and interlocks.

4.2.9.2.3 Measured variables (e.g., mixed air temperature).

4.2.9.2.4 Variables to communicate to/from the network.

4.2.9.3 Control logic diagrams in graphical or flow chart format shall be submitted

unless waived in writing by the owner.

4.2.9.4 Control logic diagrams shall identify

4.2.9.4.1 System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text)

4.2.9.4.2 All DO, DI, AO, AI points



250400�6

4.2.9.4.3 Virtual points

4.2.9.4.4 Global points

4.2.9.4.5 All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop

4.2.9.4.6 Legend for graphical icons or symbols

4.2.9.4.7 Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT = outside air

temperature)

4.2.9.4.8 Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off)

4.2.9.4.9 Voltage, amperage, or resistance input/output signal for all sensors and

controlled devices

4.2.10Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for

motor start, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel

control point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block

numbers identified. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Provide panel

termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on

system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are

existing, factory�installed and portions to be field�installed.

4.2.11Detailed electric connections to all control devices and sensors.

4.2.12Show all electric connections of the controls system to equipment furnished by

others complete to terminal points identified with manufacturer’s terminal

recommendations.

4.2.13TCC shall provide one complete drawing that shows the control�wiring interface

with equipment (geothermal unit, boiler/chiller, outside air unit, etc.) provided

by others.

4.2.14Provide complete panel drawings that are:

4.2.14.1 Clearly labeled.

4.2.14.2 Schematic OR drawn to scale.

4.2.14.3 Show the internal and external component arrangement so that the

operators can identify the components by their position if the labels come

off.

4.2.14.4 Wiring access routes shall also be identified so that Class 1 wiring is

separated from Class 2 and 3 and so high voltage wiring is segregated from

low voltage wiring.

4.2.15Complete identification of all control devices (manufacturer’s type, number, and

function).

4.2.16The graphic screens for each system shall be described and shall include a

sketch or picture of the screen with a list of the variables to be placed on the

screen.



250400�7

4.2.17Provide details for labeling all wiring, control devices, and controllers (see 5.5).

4.2.18Material and equipment descriptive material such as catalog cuts, diagrams,

performance curves, and other data to demonstrate conformance with

specifications shall be provided.

4.2.19Bill of material shall appear on each drawing where material is shown. If

complete part numbers are used as descriptors by each device, a master bill of

material shall be in the drawing set including all devices/equipment and match

to schematic and actual field labeling. Provide quantity, manufacturer, actual

product ordering number, description, size, accuracy, operating ranges (voltage,

temperature, pressure, etc.), input/output parameters, etc.

4.2.20A complete list and description of software needed by TCC to generate,

implements, and operate final BAS.

4.2.21Submit PICS on all DDC controllers.

4.3 Record Documents (As�Builts). 5 copies to be transmitted at time of customer

sign off of system acceptance documentation.

4.3.1 Provide a complete set of control drawings with as�installed equipment and

operating sequences on paper and in electronic format (Visio 2000 or AutoCAD

v. 14 or higher versions). “As�built” (i.e., as�installed and debugged and after

system acceptance) documentation shall include the following as minimum:

4.3.1.1 All data specified in the shop drawings and submittals in their final "as�built"

form.

4.3.1.2 Schematic outline of the overall control system for quick reference.

4.3.1.3 Adequate record of the work as installed, including exact location of control

panels (using mechanical AutoCAD drawings).

4.3.1.4 Blue prints and AutoCAD files shall include sequence of operation.

4.3.1.5 System hardware specification data, which provides a functional description

of all hardware components.

4.3.1.6 System engineering information, which provides all of the information for the

system set�up, definition and application.

4.3.1.7 System database information that provides the point names and application

data programmed into the controllers.

4.3.1.8 All of the information, data, procedures and drawings shall be supplied in the

form of manuals and electronic copies where applicable.



250400�8

4.3.2 Provide as�installed (after system acceptance) control logic diagrams showing all

points (real and virtual).

4.3.3 DDC systems that use line�based programming must reference line code

number with control logic diagrams and/or with sequence of operation text.

Control Contractor shall discuss final format with owner.

4.3.4 For application oriented control units, provide sequence of operation text and

answers to menu�driven configuration software.

4.3.5 Provide licensing to NCSD of electronic copies of all software for each

workstation and laptop. This includes, but is not limited to: project graphic

images (editing/modifying/creating), project database, trouble�shooting and

debugging programs, project�specific programming code, tools software,

upload, download and archive software and all other software required to

operate and modify the programming code (including software at system level,

primary control units, secondary control units, and all communication software).

Any hardware devices (cables, protection devices) required to operate the

software/hardware shall also be provided.

4.3.6 The Control Contractor shall document deviations from the shop drawing

submittals. Documentation shall include what equipment was changed and the

reason for the change.

4.3.7 Provide copy of final test reports.

4.4 Operating and Maintenance Materials

4.4.1 Provide Operation and Maintenance Data on all equipment requiring service or

adjustment.

4.4.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide three complete sets of manuals

bound in loose�leaf binders within 30 days after completing acceptance tests.

Final copies delivered after completion of the acceptance tests shall include all

modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.

4.4.3 Manuals shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each

subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and have nearest service

representatives for each item of equipment and each system.

4.4.4 Identify each manual’s content on the cover. Place tab sheets at beginning of

each chapter or section and at beginning of each appendix.

4.4.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following:

4.4.5.1 Software manual,

4.4.5.2 Operations manual,



250400�9

4.4.5.3 Maintenance manual,

4.4.5.4 Acceptance Test Forms,

4.4.5.5 Conformance Certificates,

4.4.5.6 Warranty Certificates.

4.4.6 Software Manual: The software manual shall describe all furnished software.

The manual shall be oriented to programmers and shall describe calling

requirements, data exchange requirements, data file requirements, and other

information necessary to enable proper integration, loading, testing, and

program execution. Provide one software manual per Host Terminal (typically

two). One Hard copy and one CD�ROM are acceptable.

4.4.7 Operator’s Manual: The operator’s manual (one per local Terminal) shall

provide all procedures and instructions for operation of the system, including,

but not limited to:

4.4.7.1 General description including an overview of the system, its organization, the

concepts of networking and central site/field hardware relationships.

4.4.7.2 DDC panels and peripherals.

4.4.7.3 System start�up and shutdown procedures.

4.4.7.4 Use of system, command, and applications software.

4.4.7.5 Alignment and calibration procedures.

4.4.7.6 Alarm presentation and reports.

4.4.7.7 Recovery and restart procedures.

4.4.7.8 Report generation.

4.4.7.9 System schematic graphics.

4.4.7.10 Establish set�points and schedules.

4.4.7.11 Download and upload information to or from field hardware.

4.4.7.12 Generate, collect, and review trends.

4.4.7.13 Back up system software and data files and,

4.4.7.14 Interface with third party software (e.g., Excel, Netscape).

4.4.8 Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall include:

4.4.8.1 Provide descriptions of maintenance for all equipment including:

� Inspection

� Periodic preventive maintenance

� Fault diagnosis

� Repair or replacement of defective components

� Emergency procedures for failure or fire

� Disassembly and shutdown procedures

� Maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment

� Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions

� Cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule

4.4.8.2 Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic drawing. List all

devices/equipment and match to schematic and actual field labeling. Provide

quantity, manufacturer, actual product ordering number, description, size,



250400�10

accuracy, operating ranges (voltage, temperature, pressure, etc.),

input/output parameters etc,

4.4.8.3 Field copies of wiring for Primary and Secondary Control Units. (Laminated

and permanently affixed in or above controller or in cabinets).

4.4.8.4 For all equipment not manufactured by the Control Vendor, the Control

Vendor shall provide an alphabetical list of system components with the

name, address, e�mail and 24�hour telephone number of the company

responsible for providing or servicing each item.

4.4.9 Acceptance Test Forms

4.4.9.1 Maintenance manual shall include copies of signed�off acceptance test forms.

Once acceptance forms are signed warranty will begin on signed off systems.

4.4.9.2 Acceptance Test Forms will consist of signed and dated control drawings and

sequences of operation. They will be signed by owner and TCC. Both parties

will check proper operation, of systems, points, nomenclature, set points,

differentials, occupied unoccupied schedules, trendable points, and complete

wiring “As Builts”

4.4.9.3 Acceptance Test Forms will consist of signed service sheet after the customer

has accepted, operated, approved of graphics on local computer. Complete

with local edition of the Operators manual.

4.4.9.4 Acceptance Test Forms will consist of signed service sheet after the customer

has accepted, operated, approved and graphics, on NCSD head end. Sign off

assures all other schools are operational at a point equal to conditions prior

to the installation of new BAS

4.4.9.5 Acceptance Test Forms will consist of signed service sheets documenting the

training is complete or being conducted as per specifications.

4.4.10Conformance certificates: Upon substantial completion of the work, supply

and turn over all required inspection certificates from governing authorities to

certify that the work as installed conforms to the rules and regulations of the

governing authorities.

4.4.11 Warranty Certificates: Warrant all work as follows:

4.4.11.1 Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free

from defects for a period of 24 months after acceptance test forms are

submitted per this section. Control system failures during the warranty

period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or

reduction in service to the owner.

4.4.11.2 The TCC shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24



250400�11

hours during normal business hours.

4.4.11.3 The TCC shall respond to the owner's request for Emergency service (defined

as life�threatening or creating the potential to cause property damage)

during the warranty period within 4 hours.

4.4.11.4 The TCC shall provide technical phone support to the owner during the

warranty period for warranty related issues. If the technical support location

of the contractor is outside of the toll free calling area for the customer, the

contractor shall have a toll free number or accept collect calls for the

purpose of providing technical support.

4.4.11.5 The TCC shall provide technical support bulletin service ((if available) for two

years.

4.4.11.6 During the warranty period and if required by the School District, standard

(in inventory) parts for the DDC system shall arrive at the School District

within 48 hours of placing an order. Non�standard parts (requiring re�

manufacturing or ordering from another supplier) shall be shipped as soon

as possible.

4.4.11.7 Operator workstation software, project�specific software, graphic software,

database software, and firmware updates which resolve known software

deficiencies as identified by the TCC or NCSD shall be provided and correctly

installed at no charge during the warranty period.

PART 5 – ELECTRICAL AND PANEL REQUIREMENTS

5.1 Wiring, Cable Trays, Conduit and Hangers

5.1.1 TCC shall supply, install and connect all conduits, boxes and wires between all

the different components related in this section including all line voltage to the

sensors, actuators, control panels and other control devices.

5.1.2 The TCC shall provide all CAT 5 cabling required to jace panels.

5.1.3 Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection

indicated on the electrical drawings. Bring to the attention of the Architect in

writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as

soon as discovered.

5.1.4 Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be

complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the

electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of

connections provided by the construction plans for the building.

5.1.5 All wiring and fiber optic cable in mechanical and electrical rooms shall be to

comply with the requirements of the Electrical Specifications and as follows:



250400�12

5.1.5.1 Use of conduit/EMT in mechanical rooms at all heights is required. Maximum

of 60% fill and minimum ¾”conduit.

5.1.5.2 Low voltage main raceway will be supplied and installed by the electrical

contractor in concealed and accessible areas. The TCC can use this tray for

their LAN cabling. All TCC cables/wires placed in this tray will have unique

cabling / wire colors and have use stamped on the cable (i.e. BAS cable)

from all other cables in the tray. If electrical contractor provided raceway is

not used for cabling then all wiring in concealed, accessible area will be in

bridal rings provided by TCC.

5.1.5.3 Bridle rings are acceptable in concealed, accessible areas. When bridle rings

are used for temperature control wiring, they shall be installed every 4 ft as

high as possible in the accessible space. Bridle rings shall be installed on the

top chord of the roof truss or roof structure (No bulb tees or bridging) to

facilitate running cable above all other mechanical and electrical systems in

the ceiling space. A bridle ring shall be located at the beginning and end of

the run as close to the connected device as possible.

5.1.5.4 Low voltage cables to wall sensors/ thermostats will be run in EMT until it

enters a concealed, accessible space. The electrical box that is used to

attach the sensor will be sealed with fiberglass batting.

5.1.5.5 Line voltage wiring to thermostats will be as specified in the Electrical

Specifications.

5.1.5.6 On renovation projects where walls are unable to be fished, upon

approval from NCSD, wire mold is acceptable. Wall thermostats and

sensors are to be mounted on shallow boxes only.

5.1.5.7 Flexible metal conduit shall be installed as specified in the Electrical

Specifications.

5.2 Unit Control Panels (installation and fabrication)

5.2.1 All panels must be NEMA type 1 enclosures, with a hinged door.

5.2.2 Provide flush mounted key lock. All temperature control panels are to be keyed

the same. All control panels must be painted the same color and identified.

Primered panels will not be acceptable. The boxes are to be made from 16�

gauge material.

5.2.3 Grounding terminals shall be color coded green and yellow and shall be

compatible with the other specialty terminals specified above and shall mount

on the same DIN rail system. Units shall be arranged so that the wiring

connected to them is grounded to the enclosure via the mounting rail. These

terminals shall be provided for grounding cable shields at the points where the



250400�13

cables enter a control panel and terminate on the control panel terminal strip.

Terminals shall be Entrelec M 4/5.3A.PI or equivalent by Weidmuller, Phoenix,

or Allen Bradley.

5.2.4 Provide one duplex outlet mounted inside the control panel and separately fused

with a non�time delay fuse at 15 A at any panel location containing electronic

control components. This receptacle may be served from the control panel 120

VAC power source. Label on receptacles shall read “Use for laptop only.” The

TCC shall route the power from the nearest acceptable panel and circuit.

Coordinate with the electrical contractor.

5.2.5 On all panel faces the following information shall be attached permanently on a

lamacoid plate:

5.2.5.1 Systems controlled within (i.e.� MAU�1, Ex fan�2, Heat pumps 2 and 3),

5.2.5.2 Controllers address contained within,

5.2.5.3 Power (120VAC) source complete with panel name and circuit number.

5.2.6 DDC Emergency Shut Down Panel

5.2.6.1 Locate the DDC Emergency Shut Down Panel near the fire alarm

annunicator panel located in office area. Refer to the floor plans.

5.2.6.2 Provide a master emergency auto/off switch on a flush mounted panel and

make operational as follows.

5.2.6.3 Auto position allows all system to operate as called for in “normal” operation.

5.2.6.4 Off Position shall stop all 100% outside air units (OA�1, OA�2, future OA�3,

Fieldhouse ERV�1, Kitchen MAU�1), and all building exhaust fans at the high

school, fieldhouse & concession buildings. This switch shall be used by the

fire department or authorized individuals in case there is a fire, chemical spill,

excessive dust outdoors, etc.

5.2.7 All panels, switches and indications are to be labeled with lamacoid plates.

PART 6 – MATERIALS, COMPONENTS, AND EQUIPMENT

6.1 Sensor Resolution: All temperature sensors shall have a minimum resolution of

1/10th of 1 degree F. (0.1 degree F.) Sensors stability shall be .24 degrees over

a year period. Space sensors must be tested and accurate to within .75 degrees

F. Outside air, water and duct sensors must be tested and accurate to within 2.0

degrees F.

6.2 Space Sensors: All space sensors will consist of a stainless steel handy box cover

with a temperature sensor mounted such that it senses space temperature.

Selected space sensors will also have a momentary switch as noted on drawings �

one in each control zone. When the switch is pushed in for 1 second the zone



250400�14

associated with this room will be reset to occupied mode for a period of 3 hours

(adjustable) and then reset to unoccupied mode. If switch is pushed for 10

seconds or more, the zone will reset to unoccupied immediately. If switch is

pushed during the occupied mode nothing will happen.

6.2.1 Space thermostat shall be provided with computer jack to allow programmers to

control all devices and controllers from any thermostat location.

6.2.2 All conduit or wire mold shall be plugged such that the sensor shall sense space

temperature only.

6.2.3 Space sensors shall be installed 5'�0" above the finished floor within 4” of light

switches, in supervised area's (classrooms, offices, storage rooms, etc.). They

shall be installed 6'�0" above the finished floor in all unsupervised areas.

(Restrooms, hallways, cafeterias, gyms, etc.). Provide steel guards for sensors

located in the gymnasium.

6.2.4 Space sensors shall be located to avoid chalkboards and tack boards and air

movement. Any deviation from the indicated location shown on the drawings the

TCC must request approval from the consulting engineer, architect and owner.

6.3 Water Sensors: Temperature sensors for water lines are to be the well type.

Wells are to be threaded brass (same manufacturer as the temperature sensor)

with sufficient lagging to facilitate installation of 1 1/2” insulation and the sensor

coated with a heat transfer compound. Strap on sensors will not be acceptable.

6.4 Outdoor Air Sensor: The master outdoor air sensor will be installed on the north

wall in the shade as not to be effected by sunlight or building ventilation.

Installation in outside air ductwork or louvers is not acceptable. If not installed to

provide "accurate" temperature it must be relocated (at the TCC’s expense) until

such a location is found. This location must be indicated on the control drawings.

There will be no exceptions to this unless approved by the consulting engineer

and NCSD. Coordinate with electrical contractor on location. The electrical

contractor shall install master photo electric monitor on same wall.

6.5 Mixed Air Sensor: These sensors must be bendable averaging, type made of

copper or aluminum elements. For Air Handling Units the sensors must be at

least 20 feet in length. Wired multiple point averaging sensors are not allowed.

Sensors installed on rigid insulated ductwork shall use spacers to eliminate

cutting of insulation to mount device.

6.6 Discharge Air Sensors: Discharge air sensors for heat pumps or air handling

units may be rigid insertion type. The length of the sensor shall be equal to 50%

of the duct length but at least 4” in length. In all applications, care shall be taken

to insure that the sensors are securely mounted as not to allow any vibration and

installed in such a manner as to indicate the truest possible temperature. The

element location shall be after the fan or final coil and NOT attached to the

mechanical equipment where it would interfere with service access on equipment.



250400�15

Discharge air sensors are required for all air handling units, outside air units and

heat pumps. Sensors installed on rigid insulated ductwork shall use spacers to

eliminate cutting of insulation to mount device.

6.7 Humidity Sensors: These devices shall be 100% solid state, linear and

temperature compensated with a 0�100% RH range. The response time shall be a

minimum of 30 seconds for a 60% change. They must have 1% accuracy

between 30�80% RH. The output of the device must utilize a 0�10 VDC signal.

The device must use a power supply of 24 VAC or VDC. Duct mounted sensors

shall have at least a 4" insertion probe with a 16 gage steel enclosure. For wall�

mounted sensors the enclosure must be polystyrene plastic mounted next to and

at the same height as the temperature sensor in that area. Both must have the

same appearance.

6.8 Freeze Thermostats (Freezestats): These devices must be the manual reset type.

This device must be wired by using a normally closed contact in series with the

motor starting circuit and a normally open set of contacts wired to a dedicated

input of the unitary controller. The element must be constructed of copper and

be at least 20 feet in length. One low�limit shall be used for every 20 square feet

of coil area. Additional low�limits shall be wired in series to provide complete

coverage. The controller shall be at the highest point and the capillary must be

installed in a horizontal serpentine pattern across the air entering the coil so it is

exposed to areas where low temperatures will occur. Vertical zigzag patterns are

not per manufacturers recommendations and will not be accepted. Capillary clips

shall be used at each change of direction. Poly tubing shall be used at each

capillary clip and each duct penetration for protection. In some cases it may

require being installed after the coil. Each application shall be closely evaluated

before installation. The device must sense the lowest temperature by any one�

foot section of its element.

6.9 Differential Pressure Transducers: Use Veris Model PXDLX2S Differential Pressure

Transducer with display. These devices shall be 100% solid state, linear and

temperature compensated. Accuracy shall be no less than +/� 1% of its full

scale, combined linearity and hysteresis. All pressure sensors must utilize output

averaging/output clipping to adjust and stabilize any fluctuations in the output.

The output of the device shall utilize 0�10 VDC signal. Fore sensing building

static pressures (compared to atmospheric) utilize a range of �0.25 to +0.25

inches water column.

6.10 Water Differential Pressure Transducers: Use Veris PWLX03S pressure transducer

assembled with AA16 three valve manifold brackets. Set for range of 0�25 psid.

Mounted to building structure with display 60” aff. Extend high and low pressure

lines from ball valves on mains to transducer with 3/8 inch annealed copper

tubing with field bends made with tubing benders. Support sensing lines.

6.11 Pump Differential Pressure Switches: Use Johnson Controls Penn P70F series.

Size according to system requirements. They shall be mounted across the pump

using copper piping, shutoff ball valve on both sides and mounted near



250400�16

associated pump. Contacts shall open when differential pressure is low indicating

motor or pump failure.

6.12 Current Sensing Devices: Hawkeye models #735, #705 or #908 may be used

for central station air handlers and for pump status. For compressor status, the

Hawkeye #800 or #900 may be used. When a current sensing device is used for

fan status or pump status it must be set to indicate an alarm when a belt or

coupling is broken. Sensor shall be adjustable and be provided with an LED pilot

light to indicate relay is tripped. As an alternative to the Hawkeye models, the

TCC may use sensors as manufacturered by RIB with the same features specified.

6.13 Control Valves: Valves shall be sized and furnished by the TCC. All proportional

water valves shall be sized with a 3 psig pressure drop. The valves shall be

provide the required capacity and the close off rating shall be in excess of the

system pressures encountered. Proportional type valves shall be rated at 125 psi

static pressure. Proportional valves 2” and smaller shall be ball�type valves with

characterized type inner valve. Valves 2 ½” and larger shall be globe valves with

characterized type inner valve. Solder end valves are not acceptable.

6.14 Dampers: Dampers requiring field mounting shall meet or exceed the IECC

requirements by having an air leakage rating less thatn 3 cfm/sqft at 1” of static

pressure and shall be AMCA licensed as a Class 1A damper similar to Ruskin

CD60. Frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel roll�formed airfoil blade type.

Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber mechanically locked into the blade edge.

Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type. Bearings shall be

permanently lubricated bronze or stainless steel. They shall be sized and

furnished under this section.

6.15 Actuators: All damper and valve actuators must be fail safe spring return type

with sufficient force to operate the dampers or valves under all normal operating

conditions. They must return to the normally open or closed position upon a loss

of power. The open or closed position will be determined by industry standards

and noted on valve / damper schedule.

6.15.1 "ALL" actuators must be manufactured by Belimo (http://belimo.com).

Actuators sold with another name that are manufactured by Belimo are

acceptable as long as they carry the 5 year warranty provided by Belimo. They

shall have internal feedback circuitry to provide a positive action to insure proper

positioning of the damper or valve through the entire sequence. Actuators must

have an adjustable starting point to accurately set the range of travel to the

output of the controller. All actuators must also utilize the same input signal (6�9

VDC, 2�10 VDC, 4�20 MA) in order to maintain some consistency in the control

application. Factory mounted VAV controllers/actuators are allowed. No other

factory mounted actuators are allowed.

6.16 CO2 Sensors: Use Veris C Series Carbon Dioxide sensors with field selectable

output and integral display. Sensor shall utilize non�dispersive infrared

technology repeatable to +/� 20 ppm at 0 – 2000 ppm range. All CO2 sensors



250400�17

shall be protected with steel guards. Plastic shall not be acceptable. Where CO2

sensors are duct�mounted, the sensor and control unit shall be designed for duct

insertion and placed in the ductwork to be readable from the floor.

6.17 Event Keypads: Locate an event keypad in the gymnasium. Keypad shall be IEI

Model IEI 232i (no exceptions). Provide momentary contact to start and stop

associated equipment. When proper code is entered the area will revert to

occupied control for 3 hours (adjustable at the front end). When unit is reset, it

will return to unoccupied mode.

6.18 3�Phase Line Monitor: ABB model SSAC (available from Grainer). Contact Form

SPDT, Input Line Voltage 200 to 480 VAC, trip delay, time range 0.25 to 30

seconds, automatic voltage range selection, 2 to 10% unbalanced voltage.

6.19 Surge Protection

6.19.1 Provide Vesta Pro UPS unit. Unit shall be intelligent line�interactive type: UPS

with AVR Boost and Buck function, power factor ~0.6.

6.19.2 All primary equipment located in BAS room shall be protected from power

surges and voltage transients.

6.19.3 Protected equipment shall consist of panel mounted equipment, computers,

printers, network controllers, dialers and Tridium panels. TCC is required to

provide surge protection for both the equipment and the separate 120VAC outlet.

They will also protect against brown outs.

6.19.4 The surge protection system shall be sized to handle all the protected

equipment for a period of 2 hours.

6.19.5 Application specific equipment mounted inside mechanical equipment of another

manufacturer need not have surge protection if installed by equipment

manufacturer.

6.19.6 If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the

contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged

by the failure at no cost to the owner.

6.20 Dialer: NCSD shall provide critical alarm dialer in BAS room panel. The

programming and phone connections for this device shall be by NCSD.

6.20.1 TCC shall provide 6”x6” space for NCSD to install the Dialer.

6.20.2 TCC shall provide 4 critical alarm relays in BAS panel and wire to the Dialer.

6.21 Relays: Relays for starting and stopping fractional horsepower motors shall be

rated as follows: For 1/4 horsepower motors or less use 15 ampere rated relays.



250400�18

6.21.1 For 1/3 horsepower motors use 20 ampere rated relays.

6.21.2 For 1/2 horsepower motors use 30 ampere rated relays.

6.21.3 Relays used for pilot duty service shall be rated at a minimum of 10 amperes.

6.21.4 All relays will have LED pilot lights to indicate relay is energized.

6.21.5 The use of RIB’s mounted next to starters or mounted in enclosed control

spaces on AHU’s is acceptable.

PART 7 – SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

7.1 The network controller/supervisor links the primary, secondary, and application

control units with the host computer for central reporting and system

communication via the Wide Area Network (WAN).

7.2 The system shall be configured as a distributed processing network(s) capable of

expansion as specified in this section.

7.3 The system architecture shall consist of a multi�level Wide Area Network (WAN),

which supports Control Units, networked Operator Workstations, and LAN

Interface Devices. The following indicates the functional description of the

system structure.

7.3.1 Inter�building LAN: Used for communication between Primary Controller LANs

located in each building and multiple networked Operator Workstations located in

selected buildings. This WAN will consist of using the existing School District

Ethernet backbone with TCP/IP protocol. BAS/DDC workstations and the LAN

Interface Device shall employ native TCP/IP protocol with the Ethernet 10BaseT

(IEEE802.3) physical layer standard for connection to Ethernet/ATM routers.

BAS/DDC workstations shall not require third party routers, gateways or

translators for TCP/IP protocol. Providing access to the Primary Control Units via

the Internet (using the school district’s WAN system) is acceptable and preferred.

7.3.1.1 Control Contractor shall coordinate with school district computer personnel on

acceptable LAN protocol and interfacing.

7.3.2 Primary Controller LAN: Used to connect Primary Control Units (Primary Control

Units�which generally control central plant equipment, air handlers) within a

building.

7.4 Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the network shall be

available to and accessible by all other devices, Control Units, LAN Interface

Devices, and Operator Workstations whether directly connected (via campus

backbone) or connected remotely. (Using the school districts WAN.)



250400�19

7.5 The DDC shall automatically place calls to workstations and other devices, if

required, to report alarms.

7.6 The communication speed between the Control Units, LAN interface devices, and

MWS computer shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under the

maximum future loading condition.

7.7 The Operator Workstations shall provide for overall system supervision, operator

interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, remote monitoring

and back up and loading of software and data to be stored in control unit volatile

memory.

7.8 The primary and secondary control units shall monitor, control, and provide the

field interface for all field points. Each Primary Control Unit or Secondary Control

Unit shall be capable of performing DDC functions independent of other Primary

Control Units or Secondary Control Units and operator interface devices.

7.9 Interruptions or fault at any point in the primary LAN shall not interrupt

communications between other nodes on the network.

7.10 All line drivers, signal boosters, repeaters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be

provided as necessary for proper data communication.

7.11 At selected lighting panels, there will be a BACnet controller to turn on and off

hallway and selected lighting. These panels will be cross linked using CAT6 cable

by the electrical contractor. TCC to coordinate final connection to BAS and

provide programming to BAS

PART 8 – NETWORK CONTROLLER/SUPERVISOR

8.1 The Network Controller shall be a fully user�programmable supervisory controller.

The Network Controller shall monitor and communicate the network of distributed

primary, secondary, application�specific control units, provide global strategy and

direction, and communicate on a peer�to�peer basis with other Network

Controllers/Supervisors.

8.2 Controllers shall be microprocessor�based with a maximum program scan rate of

one (1) second. They shall be multi�tasking, multi�user, and real�time digital

control processors. Controller size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet

the requirements of this Specification.

8.3 Each Network Controller/Supervisor shall support/communicate with a minimum

of 100 primary/secondary control units with no more than 90% of maximum

capability used. Memory size shall have at least 20% of availability free for

future use.

8.4 Each controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system,

databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all



250400�20

control units. In addition, if memory for historical data trending is not on primary

and/or secondary control units, then sufficient memory is required on the

network controller to capture and record historical trending data.

8.5 Network Controller/Supervisor shall be capable of interacting with printers,

pagers, and host workstations.

8.6 The Network Controller/Supervisor shall have an integrated real�time clock.

8.7 Error detection, correction, and re�transmission to guarantee data integrity.

8.8 Controller shall continuously perform self�diagnostics, communication diagnosis,

and diagnosis of all panel components. The network controller shall provide both

local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery

conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.

8.9 In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all

controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.

Nonvolatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration

data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real�time clock and all

volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.

8.9.1 During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal

system shutdown conditions.

8.9.2 Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off�time delay, the

controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention

through a normal soft�start sequence.

8.9.3 Should a primary/secondary controller memory be lost for any reason, the

operator’s workstation shall be able to reload the program with back�ups

provided by TCC. There will be back ups made by TCC, available for every

piece of equipment that contains “downloaded” software. These two

copies shall be presented on compact disk. In addition, TWO (2) back

ups will be made by TCC at end of warranty period to ensure all changes

made during warranty period have been saved.

8.9.4 USB flash drives will also be accepted.

8.10 UNITARY CONTROLLERS: Primary control units are stand�alone units able to

control HVAC equipment per the specified sequence of operation.

8.10.1 All controllers are to be installed in panels (refer to Section 5.2). Confer with

NCSD and Engineer for location of these panels.

8.10.2 If communication is lost and the global or virtual points are not read, the

controller shall revert to its last command received, until communication is re�

established. Controllers will revert to occupied mode in the event of a



250400�21

communication loss.

8.10.3 Each controller shall be capable of performing all specified control functions

independently.

8.10.4 Systems utilizing controllers that operate in a default mode only will not be

acceptable (Application specific).

8.10.5 Each Primary Control Unit shall be equipped with firmware resident self�

diagnostics for sensors and be capable of assessing an open or shorted sensor

circuit, and sensor input signal out of range conditions and taking an

appropriate control action (close valve, damper, etc.).

8.10.6 Controllers for heat pump units shall minimally have the following extra or

unassigned hardware points: (1) Analog in, (1) Binary In.

8.10.7 Unitary controllers must have direct control capabilities in order to upload and

download software, and view all points.

8.11 Power Failure Protection:

8.11.1 All Primary Control Units shall be protected from any memory loss due to a

loss of power by one or a combination of the following:

8.11.1.1 Volatile RAM shall have a battery backup using a lithium battery with a

rated service life of 50 hours, and a rated shelf life of at least 5 years.

Self�diagnostic routine shall report an alarm for a low battery condition.

8.11.1.2 EPROM, EPROM, or NOVROM non�volatile memory

8.11.2 Upon loss of communication with the network, the controller shall operate in

automatic mode or automatically force the controls to remain in the last

command status.

8.11.3 Should the duration of a loss of power exceed the specified battery back�up

period or the Primary Control Unit panel memory is lost for any reason. The

panel shall automatically report the condition (upon resumption of power) and

be capable of receiving a down load from any operator workstation via the LAN

or telephone line dial�up modem. In addition, the Owner shall be able to upload

the most current versions of all sequence of operation and database parameters

in the memory of each Primary Control Unit to any operator workstation via the

LAN, via the telephone line dial�up modem, or to the laptop PC via the local RS�

232C port.

8.12 Operator Workstation shall be located by the TCC as needed by NCSD in area

designated on drawings.

8.12.1 NCSD shall provide one Dell or compatible personal computer to be WEB



250400�22

Supervisor computer.

8.12.2 This WEB Supervisor will meet factory recommendations with capability to

serve as liaison between remote Master WEB Supervisor and school D.D.C.

system.

8.12.3 The operator’s workstation shall allow site interface with the system to allow

repair and maintenance personnel to perform diagnostics, interrogate any point,

and reprogram in the field.

8.12.4 Operators workstation will contain a LAN network card (compatible with School

District’s LAN system)

8.12.4.1 Windows XP Professional Edition operating system

8.12.4.2 System monitor

8.12.4.3 Surge power strip

8.12.4.4 Ink jet printer complete with printer drivers and software

8.12.5 TCC is to provide all necessary software to allow the Operators work station to

operate the same as the Head end unit. Interface card for control system local

bus. Required software, cables and interfaces for direct connection to all control

modules or zone control sensors to support memory downloads and other

commissioning and troubleshooting operations

PART 9 – SYSTEM SOFTWARE

9.1 System software will be the latest version available with upgrades provided for

full warranty period, and shall be fully licensed to the owner.

9.2 TCC shall inform NCSD of all patches, upgrades, problem reports, technical

bulletins, recalls, etc. when manufactures issues these items.

9.3 System software shall, at a minimum, provide the ability to:

9.3.1 Monitor and supervise all control points.

9.3.2 Add new points and edit system database.

9.3.3 Change control set points, timing parameters and loop tuning of PID coefficients

in all control loops in all control units.

9.3.4 Enter programmed start/stop schedules.

9.3.5 View alarm and messages and provide printouts same as head end.

9.3.6 Acknowledge alarms and provide printouts same as head end.

9.3.7 Modify existing control logic (or sequence of operation) in all control units.



250400�23

9.3.8 Upload/Download programs, databases, control parameters, etc.

9.3.9 Modify graphic screens.

9.3.10 Provide the following associated programs to be implemented by NCSD at a

future date. These programs shall be ready to go and only require

implementation data.

9.3.10.1 Optimal Start (training required)

9.3.10.2 Power fail motor restart (training required)

9.4 Sequence of Operation Programming “Methodology”:

9.4.1 The application software shall be user programmable. Application programming

shall be provided by the following conventions:

9.4.1.1 Graphical Block Programming: The method of programming shall be by

manipulation of graphic icon "blocks." Each block represents a subroutine

containing the programming necessary to execute the function of the device

that the block represents.

9.4.1.2 Graphical programming shall include:

9.4.1.2.1 The graphical programming software shall allow for interactive mouse�driven

placement of block icons on the graphic screen and connection of block

inputs to block outputs by means of drawing lines to form a graphic logic

diagram.

9.4.1.2.2 The user shall not have to manually input text to assign block input/output

interconnections. Blocks shall allow entry of adjustable settings and

parameters via pop�up windows.

9.4.1.2.3 The clarity of sequence shall be such that the user has the ability to verify

that the system programming meets the specs without having to learn or

interpret a manufacturer’s unique programming language.

9.4.1.2.4 Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic diagrams to be directly

compiled into application programs.

9.4.1.2.5 Logic diagrams shall be viewable either off�line, or on�line with real�time

output values.

9.4.1.2.6 Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs off�line

(not communicating with control units) using operator entered values for

physical inputs and time.



250400�24

9.4.1.2.7 Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs on�line

(communicating with control units), showing actual physical inputs land all

block outputs in real time.

9.5 Unitary Control Unit Database Archiving

9.5.1 The host software shall provide capability to upload sequence of operation,

database, and other control parameters from each controller.

9.5.2 Uploaded programs shall be retained on hard disk for system backup.

9.5.3 Programs may be modified using functions, and downloaded to individual

controllers as desired. Downloading of databases shall not interrupt other

multi�tasked functions that are ongoing.

9.6 Operator Interface Graphic Software

9.6.1 All graphic software shall be in the html web browser format and support

multiple simultaneous screens to be opened and resizable in a "Windows" type

environment. All functions, except text entry, shall be executable with a mouse.

9.6.2 Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that third party programs

can be used while the Operator Workstation Software is on�line. Provide the

ability to alarm graphically even when operator is in another software package.

9.6.3 The software shall allow for Owner to create user defined, color graphic displays

of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans, and mechanical and electrical

system schematics.

9.6.4 The contractor shall provide libraries of pre�engineered screens and symbols

depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters,

dampers, etc.), mechanical system components (e.g., pumps, boiler/chillers,

heat pumps, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. variable volume�terminal

units, etc.) and electrical symbols.

9.6.5 The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device

to allow the user to perform the following:

9.6.5.1 Define symbols

9.6.5.2 Position items on graphic screens

9.6.5.3 Attach physical or virtual points to a graphic

9.6.5.4 Define background screens

9.6.5.5 Define connecting lines and curves

9.6.5.6 Locate, orient and size descriptive text

9.6.5.7 Define and display colors for all elements

9.6.5.8 Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points

or other displays.

9.6.5.9 Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or other functions



250400�25

in the software

9.7 Software compatibility

9.7.1 Third Party Software Packages:

9.7.1.1 The host software shall provide the capacity to run third party software

packages for word processing, spreadsheets, or database management

programs.

9.7.1.2 Use of third party software shall not suspend operation of background tasks

of multi�tasking operating system, such as alarm logging, and report

generation.

9.7.1.3 The NCSD telecommunication department only supports Windows XP

at this time and it is the required operating system for all operating

stations and laptops.

PART 10 – SYSTEM SETUP:

10.1 This section further defines the responsibilities of the installer and programmer.

10.2 The following features shall be incorporated into the final delivered product.

10.3 Schedules

10.3.1Schedule will be installed using time parameters provided by owner.

10.3.2Stand�by mode shall be installed with Owner’s approval.

10.3.3Scheduling editor shall provided at each Host computer

10.3.4 Scheduling editor shall be capable of, at a minimum:

10.3.4.1 Easy method for selecting time periods and days for occupied and

unoccupied periods for each object (e.g., AHU, Zone).

10.3.4.2 Holiday and breaks shall be shown clearly on the calendar

10.3.4.3 Weekly Schedules: The weekly schedules screen shall display a full week

with holidays and special days included.

10.3.4.4 Provide a method for allowing several related air handling systems or other

equipment to follow a similar schedule.

10.3.4.5 It shall be possible to easily and directly copy the schedule for any scheduled

event to any other scheduled event without reentering all times.



250400�26

10.3.4.6 Each schedule shall accept a unique descriptor of up to at least 20 characters

to identify the schedule on screen.

10.3.4.7 Annual Schedules: An annual schedule calendar mechanism shall be

provided to schedule Holidays and Special days a minimum of one year in

advance. A full screen editor in calendar format shall be provided to allow

speedy selection and review of holidays and special days.

10.3.4.8 Dated schedules shall be self�managing and automatically deleted after

execution.

10.3.5Schedule Overrides:

10.3.5.1 It shall be possible to easily override, to the on or off condition, any

programmed scheduled event at any operator workstation. There shall be no

limit to the number of schedules that can be overridden at any one time.

Conditions shall revert to schedule when override period ends.

10.4 Graphic Screens

10.4.1 TCC shall schedule a graphics review meeting with the Engineer and

NCSD Mechanical Maintenance Department before generation of the

project graphics

10.4.2 Existing building floor plan graphics shall be modified for the additional square

footage. Links to equipment schematics shall be consistent with existing

building graphics.

10.4.2.1 Color Graphic Screens shall be designed for each of the following systems:

10.4.2.2 Geothermal Heat Pump Loop: Layout with temperature sensors located for

supply from well field and return to field, flow rate and filter pump status.

10.4.2.3 Geothermal Heat Pump Unit: Each heat pump graphic shall have its own

graphic page and indicate all associate points whether it is in heating or

cooling mode. All heat pump graphics will have outdoor air and occupied

/unoccupied mode and if motion sensor is on or off.

10.4.2.3.1 Heat pump units that feed 2 or more rooms and have more than 1

thermostat will show space temperature in each space and the average

temperature.

10.4.2.4 Show each VAV outdoor air terminal and display if space is occupied or

unoccupied as well as VAV airflow minimum, maximum and real�time

reading.



250400�27

10.4.2.5 Floor plans indicating all actual room numbers and thermostats and humidity

sensors (Operator shall be capable of clicking on any room and pull up the

respective graphic screen.)

10.4.2.6 Each room with a motion sensor shall have a light bulb that indicates if space

is occupied or unoccupied. Indicate the total number of rooms that are

occupied on the screen.

10.4.2.7 Indicate hallway lighting is on or off.

10.4.2.8 Show area zoning and location of override buttons. This floor plan may be

placed on several graphics

10.4.2.9 Exhaust fans.

10.4.2.10 General graphics shall display and allow setpoint adjustments as needed on

the following:

10.4.2.10.1 Master room set point

10.4.2.10.2 Access to schedules

10.4.2.10.3 Critical alarm points in alarm or normal.

10.4.2.10.4 Any other point not associated with a designated graphic

10.4.3 Color graphic Operator Interface:

10.4.3.1 Provide dual or multiple function windowing to allow user to view two or more

screen and toggle between simultaneous operations.

10.4.3.2 Update all point values a minimum of every 10 seconds.

10.4.3.3 Each color graphic terminal shall be driven by software allowing the operator

to access any system information via a system penetration method.

10.4.3.4 System penetration shall allow the operator to begin at an entire site plan

color graphic display and progressively select portions of the site plan to be

chosen for closer inspection or selection of a more detailed color graphic

display of a desired system without being required to enter any commands via

the keyboard.

10.4.3.5 Graphics shall be provided for all mechanical equipment and devices

controlled by the DDC system. These graphics shall include:

10.4.3.5.1 Flow diagram or graphic diagram showing all devices (e.g., valves,

dampers, sensors, fans, pumps, heat pumps, etc.)

10.4.3.5.2 Current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each

piece of equipment.



250400�28

10.4.3.5.3 Operating mode (occupied, unoccupied, overridden, etc.).

10.4.3.5.4 Time and date.

10.4.3.5.5 Percentage valve/damper open or closed (include “open” or “closed” on the

screen.

10.4.3.5.6 Analog readouts in mA or VDC (for commissioning and can be located on a

separate screen if needed to reduce screen clutter).

10.4.3.5.7 All analog and digital input and output points settable from the screen.

10.4.3.5.8 Place all values in appropriate engineering units and in appropriate

locations on the graphic representation.

10.4.3.5.9 Electrical schematics associated with all mechanical equipment and devices

controlled by the DDC. (The schematics shall also be provided with the as�

builts.)

10.4.3.5.10 Include all global and /or virtual points that effect the operation of the

system shown on that graphic (Outdoor air temperature, Enthalpy,

Humidity etc.)

10.4.3.6 All color graphic screens shall be standardized for similar mechanical

equipment and control devices. The type of points displayed will be the same

for similar color graphic screens.

10.4.3.7 Available for display or modification in any specific color graphic display shall

include, but not be limited to:

10.4.3.7.1 Real�time value display of any connected point in the system.

10.4.3.7.2 Alarm status condition of any desired system alarm point (change in color

when out of range).

10.4.3.7.3 Any software parameter such as set points for control sequences,

minimum position adjustments.

10.4.4 Centralized Scheduling and Modification:

10.4.4.1 The color graphic terminal shall support operator access to the Scheduling

Screens that allow the operator to review and modify any or all schedules as

desired. The centralized Scheduling function shall allow modification of

equipment schedules, modification of facility holiday schedules, and when

desired allow assignment of temporary schedules for designated portions of

the facility or specific equipment.



250400�29

10.5 Labeling and Identification:

10.5.1 All devices relating to the work or systems included herein, including

controllers, valves, motors, relays, etc., shall be identified with a unique

identification number or name on the submitted engineering drawings.

10.5.2 Tagging shall be computer generated or wire markers, input/output wiring, at

both ends. These labels will correspond to the identification numbers or names

on the AS BUILTS.

10.5.3 Cable and wiring not specifically associated with an input or output shall be

labeled with a number and a function description such as: 120 VAC, Panel #,

actuator/fan coil etc., power supply.)

10.5.4 Category 6 Ethernet cabling and communication cabling shall be easily

identified as a unique color for each throughout the building. Consistent with

existing colors.

10.6 Sequence of Operation:

10.6.1 The Owner and the Engineer must approve of major changes in provided

sequence of operation in writing.

10.6.2 The TCC shall provide two types of documentation for each system (e.g., heat

pump, VAV OA system, etc.). The two types of documentation include:

10.6.2.1 Control Logic: Control logic shall be a series of statements providing, for

each system, the following items:

10.6.2.1.1 Identification of control process.

10.6.2.1.2 Narrative of control loop or logic algorithm.

10.6.2.1.3 Control parameters such as set points and differentials (e.g., throttling

range, gains) reset schedules, and adjustable parameters for all points.

10.6.2.1.4 Identification of all constraints, limits, or interlocks that apply to control

loop.

10.6.2.1.5 Identification of all DO, DI, AO, AI points that apply to system.

10.6.2.1.6 Identification of all communication needs (data points from outside

control unit).

10.6.2.2 Logic Diagrams: For each control logic system, a logic diagram shall show

the actual interaction of the points (real and virtual) and the logic algorithm.

The diagram shall identify:

10.6.2.2.1 System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text).

10.6.2.2.2 All DO, DI, AO, and AI points.

10.6.2.2.3 Virtual points.

10.6.2.2.4 All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop.



250400�30

10.6.2.2.5 Legend for graphical icons or symbols.

10.6.2.2.6 Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT = outside air

temperature).

10.6.2.2.7 Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off).

10.7 Programming Guidelines

10.7.1 All control loops will be standardized throughout the programming code.

10.7.2 All adjustable set points shall be developed as software points stored at

memory locations so that set points can be changed by recommending the data

stored at the memory location rather than by entering the program and

changing parameters and lines in program code.

10.7.3 Control sequences that use outdoor air conditions to trigger certain specific

operating modes shall use data generated by one outdoor air temperature

sensor. In other words, the data from one sensor shall be shared by the entire

system. (global point)

10.7.4 Trending

10.7.4.1 Any analog point in the system needs to be able to be trended and most

status conditions need to be able to be trended.

10.7.4.1.1 The timing between trends shall be adjustable between once a minute to

24 hours.

10.7.4.1.2 When trending spooler is full it will down load information to local

computer.

10.7.4.1.3 Trending can be designated to be either text or graphic.

10.8 System Commissioning and Training

10.8.1 During all pre�installation meetings and construction meetings with

Construction Manager, Mechanical Contractor, Engineer, and/or Owner, the

Control Contractor attending the meetings must be the application engineer or

programmers that are/will design and program the DDC system.

10.8.2 The Control Contractor shall document the results of all meetings and E�mail or

fax these to NCSD and the Engineer.

10.8.3 Air and water balancing shall be completed (and discrepancies resolved) before

Control Contractor’s final system check and before the acceptance test to be

conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

10.9 Pre�Commissioning Testing, Adjusting, and Calibration Requirements



250400�31

10.9.1 A pre�commissioning checklist must be filled out for every DDC device within

the system. Checklist can be that of NCSD or one submitted by TCC or the

points list.

10.9.2 Pre�Commissioning Testing, Adjusting, and Calibration shall be completed prior

to Substantial Completion.

10.9.3 Provide Pre�Commissioning Test Report for approval by the Owner’s

representative before system demonstration.

10.10 Demonstration and Final Commissioning

10.10.1 This portion of commissioning must be performed with a representative of

NCSD Mechanical Maintenance Department present. A NCSD representative

shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing

procedures so as not to hinder progress of completion.

10.10.2 Work and/or systems installed under this section shall be fully functioning

prior to Demonstration, Acceptance Period and Contract Close Out. Control

Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate all work and/or systems.

10.10.3 All pre�commissioning forms and records will be accepted as guidelines to go

through final commissioning with NCSD, and also as final commissioning

documents if inspected and initialed by NCSD representative. They shall be

prepared in a three ring binder format with index to reference address, room

number, or device.

10.10.4 If more than 10 percent of the demonstrated equipment operation and

sequence of operation fails to operate per the submittals, or if there is obvious

evidence that some of the system has not been checked, the demonstration

test will be rescheduled after the control contractor takes corrective action.

This action will continue until NCSD determines the project is ready for

commissioning.

10.10.4.1 Software shall be fully configured to view project specific database and

shall include trend logs, specified graphic screens, and reports.

10.10.5 As problems are found, a log shall be completed showing the date,

technicians and Owners initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.

10.10.6 Any tests that fail to demonstrate the operation of the system shall be

repeated at a later date. The Control Contractor shall be responsible for any

necessary repairs or revisions to the hardware or software to successfully

complete all tests.

10.11 Acceptance

10.11.1 All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the



250400�32

satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner prior to the acceptance of the

control system as meeting the requirements of this document.

10.11.2 The system shall not be accepted until:

10.11.2.1 All pre�commissioning forms and checklists completed as part of the

demonstration are submitted and approved.

10.11.2.2 All submittal and record documents (See Part 4) have been submitted and

approved.

10.11.3 Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control

of the Control Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if

stated as such in writing by the Engineer. The Owner shall then perform such

tests no later than 3 months after the building is occupied. The Control

Contractor will incur the costs for these additional tests.

10.12 Opposite Season Testing

10.12.1 Allow for 8 hours of technician’s time to change system to opposite season

operation (changeover). They shall monitor, trend, and adjust the control

system during the changeover period to fine�tune the various control loops to

ensure the system is operating properly during other seasons. It will be the

responsibility of NCSD to contact the TCC to schedule an appropriate time for

this procedure.

10.12.2 Control loops shall be tuned for stability and minimum error under all load

conditions and all system operating conditions.

10.13 Training

10.13.1 Provide a minimum of four separate 4�hour on�site training sessions after

system acceptance and at the owner's request.

10.13.2 Contractor shall conduct training courses for designated personnel in

operation and maintenance of system. Training shall be oriented to specific

system being installed under his contract.

10.13.3 Training shall be a mix of, test exercises, and actual keyboard entry and

screen viewing at the operator’s terminal and head end. A curriculum shall be

discussed and implemented based on the level of expertise of the NCSD

employees. Hands�on experience and problem solving shall be emphasized.

10.13.4 If during any training session, the trainer/owner finds more than three (3)

items that need repair, the training session will be immediately terminated.

The session will be rescheduled for another date. The re�scheduled training

session will be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner.



250400�33

10.13.5 The training shall be oriented to making the owner self sufficient in the day�

to�day use and operation of the DDC system. Additionally, the training shall

include:

10.13.5.1 System start�up, shutdowns, power outage and restart routines, alarms,

acknowledging alarms, reviewing alarm points security levels, changing set

points, changing schedules and other parameters, overrides, freeze

protection, manual operation, return to automatic operation, and resetting

equipment.

10.13.5.2 All screens shall be discussed (allow time for questions).

10.13.5.3 Information specifically focused on showing the owner methods of

troubleshooting the mechanical systems using the DDC.

10.13.5.4 Use of laptop and hand�held operator interface device.

10.13.5.5 Creating, modifying, viewing, downloading, and reloading, trend logs.

10.13.5.6 Remote access to the system.

10.13.6 The other training sessions shall be oriented toward answering specific

questions from School District staff.

10.13.7 The trainer must be well grounded in both DDC system operation and in

mechanical systems service and shall be the programmer.

10.13.8 The owner may specify another site for training if desired.

10.13.9 Factory training. Provide pricing for factory training.

PART 11 – TIME SCHEDULES (ALL TIMES SHALL BE USER ADJUSTABLE):

11.1 Add the following zone to existing list of schedules: Zone 20 � Auditorium

11.2 Prior to final commissioning, the exact building and system operating schedules

shall be confirmed with the Owner.

PART 12 – AIR TERMINAL BOXES (VAVs & CAVs):

12.1 When a CAV box’s associated OA unit is operating, the CAV shall modulate as

required to maintain the specified amount of outside air indicated on the

drawings.

12.2 When a VAV box’s associated OA unit is operating and the associated space

motion sensor senses occupancy, the VAV shall modulate to maintain the

maximum specified amount of outside air indicated on the drawings.



250400�34

12.3 When a VAV box’s associated OA unit is operating and the associated space

motion sensor senses no occupancy, the VAV shall modulate to maintain the

minimum amount of outside air indicated on the drawings.

12.4 Where multiple motion sensors are associated with one VAV box, any motion

sensor indicating occupancy shall cause the VAV to modulate to maintain the

maximum specified amount of outside air indicated on the drawings.

12.5 Electrical contractor to furnish, mount and wire motion sensor. Spare contact

to be provided to TCC who will wire to controller. Interlock heat pump and VAV

utilizing the same spare contact.

12.6 The gymnasium and cafeteria VAV boxes shall modulate between their minimum

and maximum positions utilizing demand controlled ventilation with the use of

CO2 sensors. If the spaces are unoccupied via motion sensor output, then the

VAV boxes shall be at their minimum regardless of CO2 sensor output.

12.6.1 The CO2 algorithm shall be triggered on when the CO2 differential between

indoors and outdoors reaches 700 ppm or greater.

12.6.2 The CO2 algorithm shall be triggered off when the CO2 differential between

indoors and outdoors falls to 600 ppm or less.

12.6.3 When the CO2 algorithm is triggered off and the room is occupied via motion

sensor output, the corresponding VAV box shall be open to its minimum

position.

12.6.4 When the CO2 algorithm is triggered on and the room is occupied via motion

sensor output, the corresponding VAV box shall allowed to modulate open to its

maximum position based on the following formula:

12.6.4.1 Cafeteria � Vdcv = Vmin + ((Vmax – Vmin) * ((CO2�in + 1000)*(CO2�

out+1950))). 12.6.4.2 Gymnasium � Vdcv = Vmin + ((Vmax – Vmin) * ((CO2�in + 1000)*(CO2�

out+2750))).

12.6.4.3 The corresponding motorized return air damper shall modulate with the VAV

box position. When the CO2 algorithm is trigger off, the return air damper

shall be 100% open. When the CO2 algorithm is triggered on, the return air

damper shall modulate towards closed in conjunction with the VAV box

position.

12.6.4.4 The above algorithm is based on CO2�based Demand�Controlled Ventilation

Utilizing ASHRAE 62: Optimizing Energy Use and Ventilation by Schnell,

Turner, Shim (TO�98�21�1).

12.7 All air terminal airflows (minimum and maximum) shall be displayed and

adjustable through the individual graphic pages.



250400�35

12.8 The graphics page shall also indicate actual outside air CFM supply per air

terminal.

PART 13 � GEOTHERMAL HEAT PUMP UNIT WITH UNITARY CONTROLLER:

13.1 Each unit shall operate under the control of a local, stand�alone, microprocessor

based DDC controller field installed adjacent to unit. The TCC shall install and

hard�wire a pilot light directly to each heat pump cabinet. When compressor is

operating, pilot light shall be on. There shall be a light for each compressor.

(Factory mounted indicator lights are acceptable for the above requirement).

13.2 Each unit shall be placed into the occupied/unoccupied mode based upon the

user adjustable schedule at the Global Control Panel.

13.3 If communication is lost between the Global Control Panel and the Heat Pump

Controller, then the Heat Pump Controller shall be placed into the occupied

mode until communication is restored.

13.4 A smoke detector shall be located in the return air stream of the HP�240 heat

pumps. If smoke is detected, then the system shall shutoff and an audio/visual

alarm shall activate. Upon correction of the problem, the system shall be reset

and shall return to normal operation. Coordinate interface with Fire Alarm

System.

13.5 During the occupied mode, the heat pump fan and compressor(s) shall cycle as

required to satisfy space sensor setpoint. The unit shall automatically

changeover from heating to cooling. The unit shall operate the associated water

pump before starting the compressor.

13.6 The NCSD has adopted a standard on space temperature setpoints. The space

temperatures in occupied mode is not to get less than 70°F nor warmer than

74°F. To achieve this, the heat pump units can have 1.5°F throttling range

(from 70°F to 71.5°F and from 72.5°F to 74°F) and a dead band between

71.5°F to 72.5°F. They are to automatically be allowed heating or cooling to

meet these requirements.

13.7 The majority of heat pumps operate with a wall mounted temperature sensor.

The space temperature shall be set at master set point on computer as

previously described. Where one heat pump unit serves multiple spaces, the

unit shall maintain the master setpoint by averaging the multiple temperature

sensors. Generally two classrooms are served by one heat pump unit.

13.8 Heat pumps serving classrooms shall be interfaced with the motion sensor.

When the classroom has been unoccupied for 5 minutes (adj.) the heat pump

unit shall switch to a temporary unoccupied mode. Temporary setpoints shall

be 67°F in the heating mode and 76°F in the cooling mode. Once the motion

sensor is tripped, the unit shall cycle back to occupied mode. All unit set points

and adjustable ranges shall be adjustable through the host computer.



250400�36

13.9 Electrical contractor to furnish, mount and wire motion sensor. Spare contact

to be provided to TCC who will wire to controller. Interlock heat pump and VAV

utilizing the same spare contact.

13.10 During the unoccupied mode, the heat pump shall not operate unless the space

temperature falls below 60 deg F (adj.) or rises above 85 deg F (adj.).

13.11 They are to operate off one thermostat and they are to act as twinned units to

maintain space temperature setpoint. Each unit has multiple compressors, each

unit shall operate at low speed to maintain setpoint, unless additional capacity is

required due to space load.

13.12 Selected space sensors will also have a momentary switch � one in each control

zone. When the switch is pushed in for 1 second the zone associated with this

room will be reset to occupied mode for a period of 3 hours (adjustable) and

then reset to unoccupied mode. If switch is pushed for 10 seconds or more, the

zone will reset to unoccupied immediately. If switch is pushed during the

occupied mode nothing will happen.

13.13 Heat pump units with an “A” designation are provided with supplemental electric

heat elements. These elements shall only be activated when the space

temperature is 3 degrees F (adj.) or more below the heating setpoint.

13.14 Furnish and install current sensors for fan status and pump status on all heat

pumps.

PART 14 � ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EUH�1):

14.1 The unit shall maintain the user defined set point 65 degrees F (adj.). The DDC

system shall monitor unit status and space temperature.

PART 15 � POINT LIST – SEE ATTACHED:


250400�37

TERMINAL HEAT PUMP UNITS AND VAV/CAV POINT LIST

BINARY ANALOG FUNCTION

STATUS

ALARM

MAINT

POINT

HIGH ALARM

LOW ALARM

START/ STOP

LOW LIMIT

RESET

DAY/ NIGHT

SUMMER/WINTER

Supply Fan X S X X

Space Temperatures X

Supply Air Temp (Duct Mounted Only)

X S S

Pump X S X X

Smoke Detectors (Where required)

X

Motion Sensor X X

Heat Pump Alarm X

Compressor Command Cooling

X

Compressor Command Heating

X

Space Temperature #2 If Needed

X

Space Humidity (Typ 4)

X

VAV Box Airflow X

VAV Box Inlet Pressure

X

Motion Sensor X X

END OF TERMINAL HEAT PUMP AND VAV/CAV UNITS POINT LIST

S= Software Point X= Hardware Point

END OF SECTION.


INDEX

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

260501� General Provisions ........................................................ 260501�1 thru 20

260502� Description of Electrical System ..................................... 260502�1 thru 1

260503� Shop Drawings, Literature, Manuals, Parts Lists, and

Special Tools ................................................................ 260503�1 thru 4

260504� Cutting, Patching & Repairing......................................... 260504�1 thru 2

260508� Coordination Among Trades, Systems Interfacing and

Connection of Equipment Furnished by Others ................. 260508�1 thru 3

260510� Scope of the Electrical Work .......................................... 260510�1 thru 2

260519� Conductors, Identifications, Splicing Devices & Connectors 260519�1 thru 4

260526� Grounding ................................................................... 260526�1 thru 4

260531� Cabinets, Outlet Boxes & Pull Boxes ................................ 260531�1 thru 3

260533� Raceways & Fittings ...................................................... 260533�1 thru 11

260544� Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Grading .................... 260544�1 thru 2

260553� Identifications .............................................................. 260553�1 thru 1

262400� Electrical Distribution Equipment .................................... 262400�1 thru 7

262726� Wiring Devices & Plates ................................................. 262726�1 thru 4

264313� Surge Suppression Systems .......................................... 264313�1 thru 5

265113� Lighting ....................................................................... 265113�1 thru 7

265561� Theatrical Lighting, Dimming & Control Systems .............. 265561�1 thru 73

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION

270610� Voice/Data System ....................................................... 270610�1 thru 10

270800� Sound System ............................................................. 270800�1 thru 12

270720� Telephone System ........................................................ 270720�1 thru 1

275123� Intercommunication, Class Change & Signaling System ..... 275123�1 thru 8

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280730� Intrusion Detection System ........................................... 280730�1 thru 4

283100� Fire Alarm System ........................................................ 283100�1 thru 5


260501�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260501 � GENERAL PROVISIONS � ELECTRICAL PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 The Instructions to Bidders, General and Special Conditions, and all other

contract documents shall apply to the Contractor's work as well as to each of his Sub Contractor's work. Each Contractor is directed to familiarize himself in detail with all documents pertinent to this Contract. In case of conflict between these General Provisions and the General and/or Special Conditions, the affected Contractor shall contact the Engineer for clarification and final determination.

1.2 Each Contractor shall be governed by any alternates, unit prices and Addenda or

other contract documents insofar as they may affect his part of the work. 1.3 The work included in this division consists of the furnishing of all labor,

equipment, transportation, supplies, material and appurtenances and performing all operations necessary for the satisfactory installation of complete and operating Electrical Systems indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein.

1.4 Any materials, labor, equipment or services not mentioned specifically herein

which may be necessary to complete or perfect any part of the Electrical Systems in a substantial manner, in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the drawings and specifications, shall be included as part of this Contract. The Contractor shall give written notice of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted a minimum of ten days prior to bid. In the absence of such written notice and by the act of submitting his bid, it shall be understood that the Contractor has included the cost of all required items in his bid, and that he will be responsible for the approved satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensations.

1.5 It is not the intent of this section of the specifications (or the remainder of the

contract documents) to make any specific Contractor, other than the Contractor holding the prime contract, responsible to the Owner, Architect and Engineer. All transactions such as submittal of shop drawings, claims for extra costs, requests for equipment or materials substitution, shall be done through the Contractor to the Architect (if applicable), then to the Engineer.

1.6 This section of the Specifications or the arrangement of the contract documents

shall not be construed as an attempt to arbitrarily assign responsibility for work, material, equipment or services to a particular trade Contractor or Sub�Contractor. Unless stated otherwise, the subdivision and assignment of work under the various sections shall be the responsibility of the Contractor holding the prime contract.


260501�2

1.7 It is the intent of this Contract to deliver to the Owners a "like new" project once work is complete. Although plans and specifications are complete to the extent possible, it shall be responsibility of the Contractors involved to remove and/or relocate or re�attach any existing or new systems which interfere with new equipment or materials to be installed by other trades without additional cost to the Owner.

1.8 In general, and to the extent possible, all work shall be accomplished without

interruption of the existing facilities' operations. Each Contractor shall advise the Architect, Owner and Engineer in writing at least one week prior to the deliberate interruption of any services. The Owners shall be advised of the exact time that interruption will occur and the length of time the interruption will occur. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in complete work stoppage by the Contractors involved until a complete schedule of interruptions can be developed.

1.9 Whenever utilities are interrupted, either deliberately or accidentally, the

Contractor shall work continuously to restore said service. The Contractor shall provide tools, materials, skilled journeymen of his own and other trades as necessary, premium time as needed and coordination with all applicable utilities, including payment of utility company charges (if any), all without requests for extra compensation to the Owner, except where otherwise provided for in the contract for the work.

1.10 Definitions: 1.1.1 Contractor � Any Contractor whether proposing or working independently or

under the supervision of a General Contractor and/or Construction Manager and who installs any type of mechanical work (Electrical, Low Voltage, Fire Alarm, etc.) or, the General Contractor.

1.10.1 Engineer � The Consulting Mechanical�Electrical Engineers either consulting to

the Owner, Architect, other Engineers, etc. 1.10.2 Architect � The Architect of Record for the project, if any. 1.10.3 Furnish � Deliver to the site in good condition. 1.10.4 Provide � Furnish and install in complete working order. 1.10.5 Install � Install equipment furnished by others in complete working order. 1.10.6 Contract Documents � All documents pertinent to the quality and quantity of all

work to be performed on the project. Includes, but not limited to: Plans, Specifications, Addenda, Instructions to Bidders, (both General and Sub�Contractors), Unit Prices, Shop Drawings, Field Orders, Change Orders, Cost Breakdowns, Construction Manager's Assignments, Architect's Supplemental Instructions, Periodical Payment Requests, etc.


260501�3

1.10.6.1 Note: Any reference within these specifications to a specific entity, i.e.,

"Electrical Contractor" is not to be construed as an attempt to limit or define the scope of work for that entity or assign work to a specific trade or contracting entity. Such assignments of responsibility are the responsibility of the Contractor or Construction Manager holding the prime contract, unless otherwise provided herein.

PART 2 � INTENT 2.1 It is the intent of these specifications and all associated drawings that the

Contractor provide finished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use."

2.2 Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper

installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown.

PART 3 � ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 The drawings are diagrammatic only and indicate the general arrangement of the

systems and are to be followed insofar as possible. If deviations from the layouts are necessitated by field conditions, detailed layouts of the proposed departures shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval before proceeding with the work. The Contract Drawings are not intended to show every vertical or horizontal offset which may be necessary to complete the systems. Contractors shall, however, anticipate that additional offsets may be required and submit their bid accordingly.

3.2 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other. No

Contractor or supplier shall take advantage of conflict between them, or between parts of either, but should this condition exist, the Contractor or supplier shall request a clarification of the condition at least ten days prior to the submission of bids so that the condition may be clarified by Addendum. In the event that such a condition arises after work is started, the interpretation of the Engineer shall be the determining factor. In all instances, unless modified in writing and agreed upon by all parties thereto, the Contract to accomplish the work shall be binding on the affected Contractor.

3.3 The drawings and specifications shall be considered to be cooperative and

complimentary and anything appearing in the specifications which may not be indicated on the drawings or conversely, shall be considered as part of the Contract and must be executed the same as though indicated by both.

3.4 This Contractor shall make all his own measurements in the field and shall be

responsible for correct fitting. He shall coordinate this work with all other branches of work in such a manner as to cause a minimum of conflict or delay.


260501�4

3.5 The Engineer shall reserve the right to make minor adjustments in location of

conduit, fixtures, outlets, switches, etc., where he considers such adjustments desirable in the interest of concealing work or presenting a better appearance.

3.6 Each Contractor shall evaluate ceiling heights called for on Architectural Plans.

Where the location of Electrical equipment may interfere with ceiling heights, the Contractor shall call this to the attention of the Engineer in writing prior to making the installation. Any such changes shall be anticipated and requested sufficiently in advance so as to not cause extra work on the part of the Contractor or unduly delay the work.

3.7 Should overlap of work between the various trades become evident, this shall be

called to the attention of the Engineer. In such event neither trade shall assume that he is to be relieved of the work which is specified under his branch until instructions in writing are received from the Engineer.

3.8 The Electrical drawings are intended to show the approximate location of

equipment, materials, etc. Dimensions given in figures on the drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions and all dimensions whether given in figures or scaled shall be verified in the field. In case of conflict between small and large scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall take precedence.

3.9 The Electrical Contractor and his Sub Contractors shall review all drawings in

detail as they may relate to his work (structural, architectural, site survey, mechanical, etc.). Review all drawings for general coordination of work, responsibilities, ceiling clearances, wall penetration points, chase access, fixture elevations, etc. Make any pertinent coordination or apparent conflict comments to the Engineers at least ten days prior to bids, for issuance of clarification by written addendum.

3.10 Where on any of the drawings a portion of the work is drawn out and the

remainder is indicated in outline, or not indicated at all, the parts drawn out shall apply to all other like portions of the work. Where ornament or other detail is indicated by starting only, such detail shall be continued throughout the courses or parts in which it occurs and shall also apply to all other similar parts of the work, unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 Special Note: Always check ceiling heights indicated on Drawings and Schedules

and insure that these heights may be maintained after all mechanical and electrical equipment is installed. If a conflict is apparent, notify the Engineer in writing for instructions.

PART 4 � EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONDITIONS 4.1 Each Contractor shall inform himself of all of the conditions under which the work

is to be performed, the site of the work, the structure of the ground, the obstacles that may be encountered, the availability and location of necessary


260501�5

facilities and all relevant matters concerning the work. All Contractors shall carefully examine all Drawings and Specifications and inform themselves of the kind and type of materials to be used throughout the project and which may, in any way, affect the execution of his work.

4.2 Each Contractor shall fully acquaint himself with all existing conditions as to

ingress and egress, distance of haul from supply points, routes for transportation of materials, facilities and services, availability of temporary or permanent utilities, etc. The Contractor shall include in his work all expenses or disbursements in connection with such matters and conditions. Each Contractor shall verify all work shown on the drawings and conditions at the site, and shall report in writing to the Engineer ten days prior to bid, any apparent omissions or discrepancies in order that clarifications may be issued by written addendum. No allowance is to be made for lack of knowledge concerning such conditions after bids are accepted.

PART 5 � EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SUBSTITUTIONS OR DEVIATIONS 5.1 When any Contractor requests review of substitute materials and/or equipment,

and when under an approved formal alternate proposal, it shall be understood and agreed that such substitution, if approved, will be made without additional cost regardless of changes in connections, spacing, service, mounting, etc. In all cases where substitutions affect other trades, the Contractor offering such substitutions shall advise all such Contractors of the change and shall reimburse them for all necessary changes in their work. Any drawings, Specifications, Diagrams, etc., required to describe and coordinate such substitutions or deviations shall be professionally prepared at the responsible Contractor's expense. Special Note: Review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer does not absolve the Contractor of this responsibility.

5.2 References in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture,

form, or type of construction by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Each Contractor, in such cases, may, at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction which in the judgment of the Engineer is equivalent to that specified, provided the provisions of paragraph (A) immediately preceding are met. Substitutions shall be submitted to the Engineer a minimum of ten days prior to bid date for approval to bid in written form thru addenda or other method selected by the Engineer. If this procedure is not followed, the substitution will be rejected. If prevailing laws of cities, towns, states or countries are more stringent than these specifications regarding such substitutions, then those laws shall prevail over these requirements.

5.3 Wherever any equipment and material is specified exclusively only such items

shall be used unless substitution is accepted in writing by the engineers.


260501�6

5.4 Each Contractor shall furnish along with his proposal a list of specified equipment and materials which he proposes to provide. Where several makes are mentioned in the Specifications and the Contractor fails to state which he proposes to furnish, the Engineer shall have the right to choose any of the makes mentioned without change in price.

PART 6 � SUPERVISION OF WORK 6.1 Each Contractor and Sub�Contractors shall personally supervise the work or have

a competent superintendent on the project site at all times during progress of the work, with full authority to act for him in matters related to the project.

PART 7 � CODES, RULES, PERMITS, FEES, REGULATIONS, ETC. 7.1 The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all permits,

government sales taxes, fees, and other costs including utility connections or extensions, in connection with his work. As necessary, he shall file all required plans, utility easement requests and drawings, survey information on line locations, load calculations, etc., prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all utility and governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver same to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.

7.2 Ignorance of Codes, Rules, regulations, utility company requirements, laws, etc.,

shall not diminish or absolve Contractor's responsibilities to provide and complete all work in compliance with such.

7.3 The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any

labor, materials, services, apparatus or drawings required in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances rules and regulations, whether or not shown on drawings and/or specified.

7.4 All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the current edition

of the National Electrical Codes, National Fire Codes of the National Fire Protection Association, the requirements of local utility companies, and with the requirements of all governmental agencies or departments having jurisdiction.

7.5 All material and equipment for the electrical systems shall bear the approval

label, and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated. Listings by other testing agencies may be acceptable with written approval by the Engineer.

7.6 All electrical work is to be constructed and installed in accordance with plans and

specifications which have been approved in their entirety and/or reflect any changes requested by the State Fire Marshal, as applicable or required. Electrical work shall not commence until such plans are in the hands of the Electrical Contractor.


260501�7

7.7 The Contractor shall insure that his work is accomplished in accord with OSHA Standards and any other applicable government requirements.

7.8 Where conflict arises between any code and the plans and/or specifications, the

code shall apply except in the instance where the plans and specifications exceed the requirements of the code. Any changes required as a result of these conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer at least ten working days prior to bid date, otherwise the Contractor shall make the required changes at his own expense. The provisions of the codes constitute minimum standards for wiring methods, materials, equipment and construction and compliance therewith will be required for all electrical work, except where the drawings and specifications require better materials, equipment, and construction than these minimum standards, in which case the drawings and specifications shall be the minimum standards.

PART 8 � COST BREAKDOWNS 8.1 Within thirty days after acceptance of the Contract, each Contractor is required

to furnish to the Engineer one copy of a detailed cost breakdown on each respective area of work. These cost breakdowns shall be made on forms provided or approved by the Engineer or Architect. Payments will not be made until satisfactory cost breakdowns are submitted.

PART 9 � GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 9.1 Each Contractor shall reference General Conditions Article 3.5 and 12.2 for

warranties and corrections of work. 9.2 Items of equipment which have longer guarantees, as called for in these

specifications or as otherwise offered by the manufacturer, such as generators, engines, batteries, transformers, etc., shall have warranties and guarantees completed in order, and shall be in effect at the time of final acceptance of the work by the Engineer. The Contractor shall present the Engineer with such warranties and guarantees at the time of final acceptance of the work. The Owner reserves the right to use equipment installed by the Contractor prior to date of final acceptance. Such use of equipment shall in no way invalidate the guarantee except that Owner shall be liable for any damage to equipment during this period due to negligence of his operator or other employee.

PART 10 � INSPECTION, APPROVALS AND TESTS 10.1 Before requesting a final review of the installation from the Architect and/or

Engineer, each Contractor shall thoroughly inspect his installation to assure that the work is complete in every detail and that all requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. Failure to accomplish this may result in charges from the Architect and/or Engineers for unnecessary and undue work on their part.


260501�8

10.2 Owner's and Engineer's inspections: Two inspections will be held to generate and then review punchlist items. All site visits thereafter shall be billed to the Contractor at the Engineer's standard hourly rates.

10.3 The Contractor shall provide as a part of this contract electrical inspection an

inspector, licensed to provide such services. All costs incidental to the provision of electrical inspections shall be borne by the Contractor.

10.4 The Contractor shall advise each Inspection Agency in writing (with an

information copy of the correspondence to the Architect and/or Engineer) when he anticipates commencing work. Failure of the Inspection Agency to inspect the work in the stage following and submit the related reports may result in the Contractor's having to expose concealed work not so inspected. Such exposure will be at the expense of the responsible Contractor.

10.5 Inspections shall be scheduled for rough�in as well as finished work. The rough�

in inspections shall be divided into as many inspections as may be necessary to cover all roughing�in without fail. Report of each such inspection visit shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor within three days of the inspection.

10.6 Approval by an Inspector does not relieve the Contractor from the

responsibilities of furnishing equipment having a quality of performance equivalent to the requirements set forth in these plans and specifications. All work under this contract is subject to the review of the Architect and/or Engineer, whose decision is binding.

10.7 Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish the original and three copies

of the certificates of final approval by the Electrical Inspector (as well as all other inspection certificates) to the Engineer with one copy of each to the appropriate government agencies, as applicable. Final payment for the work shall be contingent upon completion of this requirement.

10.8 The Contractor shall test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds

before equipment and fixtures are connected, and when indicated or required, demonstrate by Megger Test the insulation resistance of any circuit or group of circuits. Where such tests indicate the possibility of faulty insulation, locate the point of such fault, pull out the defective conductor, replacing same with new and demonstrate by further test the elimination of such defect.

PART 11 � CHANGES IN ELECTRICAL WORK

REFER TO GENERAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS. PART 12 � CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST

REFER TO GENERAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS.


260501�9

PART 13 � SURVEYS, MEASUREMENTS AND GRADES 13.1 The Contractor shall lay out his work and be responsible for all necessary lines,

levels, elevations and measurements. He must verify the figures shown on the drawings before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to do so.

13.2 The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from

established benchmarks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work.

13.3 Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements

and those indicated, which prevents following good practice or the intent of the drawings and specifications, he shall notify the Engineer thru normal channels of job communication and shall not proceed with his work until he has received instructions from the Engineer.

PART 14 � TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT 14.1 The permanent electrical equipment, when installed, may be used for temporary

services, subject to an agreement between the Contractors involved, the Owner, and with the consent of the Engineer. Should the permanent systems be used for this purpose, each Contractor shall pay for all temporary connections required and any replacements required due to damage without cost, leaving the equipment and installation in "as new" condition.

14.2 Permission to use the permanent equipment does not relieve the Contractors

who utilize this equipment from the responsibility for any damages to the building construction and/or equipment which might result because of its use.

PART 15 � TEMPORARY SERVICES 15.1 The Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor or Construction

Manager for temporary electrical and other services which he may require to accomplish his work. In the absence of other provisions in the contract, the Contractor shall provide for his own temporary services of all types, including the cost of connections, utility company fees, construction, removal, etc., in his bid.

15.2 All temporary services shall be removed by Contractor prior to acceptance of

work. PART 16 � RECORD DRAWINGS 16.1 Note: Also, refer to additional record drawing requirements within the general

conditions and other sections of these specifications.


260501�10

16.2 The Contractor shall insure that any deviations from the design are being recorded daily or as necessary on record drawings being maintained by the Contractor. Dimensions from fixed, visible permanent lines or landmarks shown in vertical and horizontal ways shall be utilized. Compliance shall be a requirement for final payment. Pay particular attention to the location of underfloor or underground exterior in�contract or utility�owned or leased service lines, main switches and other appurtenances important to the maintenance and safety of the Electrical System. Deliver these record drawings to the Engineer as a system is completed, within ten days of the mark�up and/or while the accuracy of the mark�ups can be verified visually. Monthly payment may be withheld if the requirement is not complied with.

PART 17 � MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 17.1 All electrical equipment, materials and articles incorporated in the work shall be

new and of comparable quality to that specified. All workmanship shall be first�class and shall be performed by electricians skilled and regularly employed in their respective trades. The Contractor shall determine that the equipment he proposes to furnish can be brought into the building(s) and installed within the space available. All equipment shall be installed so that all parts are readily accessible for inspection, maintenance, replacement, etc. Extra compensation will not be allowed for relocation of equipment for accessibility or for dismantling equipment to obtain entrance into the building(s).

17.2 All conduit and/or conductors shall be concealed underground, within crawl space

in or below walls, floors or above ceilings unless otherwise noted. All fixtures, devices and wiring required shall be installed to make up complete systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Raceways shall not be placed within foundation walls and footings. See notes on plans about the limitation on work allowed to be installed within the crawl space.

17.3 All materials, where applicable, shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories label or that

of another Engineer�approved testing agency, where such a standard has been established.

17.4 Each length of conduit, wireway, duct, conductor, cable, fitting, fixture and

device used in the electrical systems shall be stamped or indelibly marked with the makers mark or name.

17.5 All electrical equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name and address and

shall indicate its electrical capacity and characteristics. 17.6 All electrical materials, equipment and appliances shall conform to the latest

standards of the National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and the National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) and shall be approved by the Owner's insuring agency if so required.


260501�11

PART 18 � QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN 18.1 All electrical contractors bidding this project must have been a licensed company

for a minimum of three years to qualify to bid this project. Individual employee experience does not supercede this requirement.

18.2 All subcontractors bidding the electrical work must have completed one project

of 70% this subcontract cost size and two projects of 50% this subcontract cost size.

18.3 All electrical work shall be accomplished by qualified workmen competent in the

area of work for which they are responsible. Untrained and incompetent workmen as evidenced by their workmanship shall be relieved of their responsibilities in those areas. The Engineer shall reserve the right to determine the quality of workmanship of any workman and unqualified or incompetent workmen shall refrain from work in areas not satisfactory to him. Requests for relief of a workman shall be made through the normal channels of responsibility established by the Architect or the contract document provisions.

18.4 All electrical work shall be accomplished by Journeymen electricians under the

direct supervision of a licensed Electrician. All applicable codes, utility company regulations, laws and permitting authority of the locality shall be fully complied with by the Contractor.

18.5 Special electrical systems, such as Fire Detection and Alarm Systems, Intercom

or Sound Reinforcement Systems, Telecommunications or Data Systems, Lightning Protection Systems, Video Systems, Special Electronic Systems, Control Systems, etc., shall be installed by workmen normally engaged or employed in these respective trades. As an exception to this, where small amounts of such work are required and are, in the opinion of the Engineer, within the competency of workmen directly employed by the Contractor involved, they may be provided by this Contractor.

PART 19 � CONDUCT OF WORKMEN 19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct of all workmen under his

supervision. Misconduct on the part of any workmen to the extent of creating a safety hazard, or endangering the lives and property of others, shall result in the prompt permanent dismissal of that workman from the project. The possession, consumption or influence of alcoholic beverages, narcotics or illegally used controlled substances on the jobsite is strictly forbidden. Possession of a fire�arm is prohibited and may result in prosecution. Foul or bad language, graffiti is strictly prohibited. Display of nude tattoos is prohibited.


260501�12

PART 20 � COOPERATION AND COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES 20.1 The Contractor is expressly directed to read the General Conditions and all

detailed sections of these specifications for all other trades and to study all drawings applicable to his work, including Architectural, Mechanical and Structural Drawings, to the end that complete coordination between trades will be effected.

20.2 Refer to Coordination Among Trades, Systems Interfacing and Connection of

Equipment Furnished by Others section of these Specifications for further coordination requirements. The Contractor is responsible for the correct location of all rough�in and connections at every piece of equipment. Work not correctly located shall be relocated at the Contractor's expense.

PART 21 � PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT 21.1 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all material and equipment

furnished by him in connection with his work and special care shall be taken to properly protect all parts thereof from damage and weather during the construction period. Such protection shall be by a means acceptable to the Engineer. All rough�in conduit shall be properly plugged or capped during construction in a manner approved by the Engineer. Equipment damaged while stored on site either before or after installation shall be repaired or replaced (as determined by the Engineer) by the responsible Contractor. Electrical equipment exposed to the weather shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

PART 22 � CONCRETE WORK 22.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all concrete work

required for the installation of any of his systems or equipment. If this work is provided by another trade, it will not relieve the Electrical Contractor of his responsibilities relative to dimensions, quality of workmanship, locations, etc. In the absence of other concrete specifications, all concrete related to Electrical work shall be 3000 PSI minimum compression strength at 28 days curing and shall conform to the standards of the American Concrete Institute Publication ACI�318. Heavy equipment shall not be set on pads for at least seven days after pour.

22.2 All concrete pads shall be complete with all pipe sleeves, embeds, anchor bolts,

reinforcing steel, concrete, etc., as required. Pads larger than l8" in width shall be reinforced with minimum #4 round bars on 6" centers both ways. All reinforcing steel shall be per ASTM requirements, tied properly, lapped 18 bar diameters and supported appropriately up off form, slab or underlayment. Bars shall be approximately 3" above the bottom of the pad with a minimum 2" cover. All parts of pads and foundations shall be properly rodded or vibrated. If exposed parts of the pads and foundations are rough or show honeycomb after removing forms properly adhered repairs shall be made. If structural integrity is


260501�13

violated, the concrete shall be replaced. All surfaces shall be rubbed to a smooth finish and chamfered edges.

22.3 Special Note: All pads and concrete lighting standard bases shall be crowned

slightly in center to avoid water ponding beneath equipment. 22.4 In general, concrete pads for small equipment shall extend 6" beyond the

equipment's base dimensions. For large equipment with service access panels, extend pads l8" beyond base or overall dimensions to allow walking and servicing space at locations requiring service access.

22.5 Exterior concrete pads shall be 4" minimum above grade and 4" below grade on

a tamped 4" dense grade rock base unless otherwise noted or required by utility company. Surfaces of all foundations and bases shall have a smooth finish with three�quarter inch radius or chamfer on exposed edges, trowelled or rubbed smooth. All exterior pads shall be crowned approximately 1/8" per foot, sloping from center for drainage.

PART 23 � RESTORATION OF NEW OR EXISTING SHRUBS, PAVING, ETC. 23.1 The Contractor shall replace to their original condition all paving, curbing

surfaces, drainage ditches, structures, fences, shrubs, existing or new building surfaces and appurtenances, and any other items damaged or removed by his operations. Replacement and repairs shall be in accordance with good construction practice and shall match materials employed in the original construction of the item to be replaced. All repairs shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in accord with the Architect's standards for such work, as applicable. Patchwork on new construction will not be accepted.

PART 24 � MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND LINES 24.1 The locations of all piping, conduits, cables, utilities and manholes existing, or

otherwise, that come within the contract construction site, shall be subject to continuous uninterrupted maintenance with no exception unless the Owner of the utilities grants permission to interrupt same temporarily, if need be. Provide one week's written notice to Engineer, Architect and Owner prior to interrupting any utility service or line. Also see Article 1. � General, this section.

24.2 Known utilities and lines as available to the Engineer are shown on the drawings.

However, it is additionally required that, prior to any excavation being performed, each Contractor ascertain and mark all utilities or lines that would be endangered by the excavation. Contractor shall bear costs of repairing damaged utilities.

24.3 If the above mentioned utilities or lines occur in the earth within the construction

site, the Contractor shall first probe and make every effort to locate the lines prior to excavating in the respective area.


260501�14

24.4 Cutting into existing utilities and services shall be done in coordination with and as designated by the Owner of the utility. The Contractor shall work continuously to restore service(s) upon deliberate or accidental interruption, providing premium time and materials as needed without extra claim to the Owner.

24.5 The Contractor shall repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer any surface or

subsurface improvements damaged during the course of the work, unless such improvement is shown to be abandoned or removed.

24.6 Machine excavation shall not be permitted within ten feet of existing gas or fuel

lines. Hand excavate only in these areas, in accord with utility company, agency or other applicable laws, standards or regulations.

24.7 Protect all new or existing lines from damage by traffic, etc. during construction. 24.8 Protect existing trees, indicated to remain with fencing or other approved

method. Hold all new subsurface lines outside the drip line of trees, offsetting as necessary to protect root structures. Refer to planting or landscaping plans, or in their absence, consult with the Architect.

PART 25 � SMOKE AND FIRE PROOFING 25.1 The Contractor shall not penetrate rated fire walls, ceilings or floors with conduit,

cable, bus duct, wireway or other raceway system unless all penetrations are protected in a code compliant manner which maintains the rating of the assembly. Smoke and fire stop all openings made in walls, chases, ceiling and floors. Patch all openings around conduit, wireway, bus duct, etc., with appropriate type material to smoke stop walls and provide needed fire rating at fire walls, ceilings and floors. Smoke and fire proofing materials and method of application shall be approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. Submit means to be used.

PART 26 � QUIET OPERATION, SUPPORTS, VIBRATION AND OSCILLATION 26.1 All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any objectionable

sound or vibration, the performance of which shall be determined by the Engineer. Noise from moving machinery or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable noise or vibration inside such room, will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Contractor (or Contractors responsible) at his expense.

26.2 All equipment subject to vibration and/or oscillation shall be mounted on

vibration supports suitable for the purpose of minimizing noise and vibration transmission, and shall be isolated from external connections such as piping, ducts, etc., by means of flexible connectors, vibration absorbers or other


260501�15

approved means. Surface mounted equipment such as panels, switches, etc., shall be affixed tightly to their mounting surface.

26.3 The Contractor shall provide supports for all equipment furnished by him using

an approved vibration isolating type as needed. Supports shall be liberally sized and adequate to carry the load of the equipment and the loads of attached equipment, piping, etc. All equipment shall be securely fastened to the structure either directly or indirectly through supporting members by means of bolts or equally effective means. No work shall depend on the supports or work of unrelated trades unless specifically authorized in writing by the Architect or Engineer.

PART 27 � FINAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT 27.1 The roughing�in and final connections to all electrically operated equipment

furnished under this and all other sections of the contract documents or by others, shall be included in the Contract and shall consist of furnishing all labor and materials for connection and proper testing. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate with equipment suppliers, manufacturer’s representatives, the vendor or other trades to provide complete electrical and dimensional interface to all such equipment (kitchen, hoods, mechanical equipment, panels, refrigeration equipment, etc.).

PART 28 � WELDING 28.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for quality of welding done by his

organization and shall repair or replace any work not done in accordance with the Architect's or structural Engineer's specifications for such work. If required by the Engineer, the responsible Contractor shall cut at least three welds during the job for X�raying and testing. These welds are to be selected at random and shall be tested as a part of the responsible Contractor's work. Certification of these tests and X�rays shall be submitted, in triplicate, to the Engineer. In case a faulty weld is discovered, the Contractor shall be required to furnish additional tests and corrective measures until satisfactory results are obtained. All welding to be accomplished by certified welder.

PART 29 � ACCESSIBILITY 29.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and

chases, the adequate clearance in partitions and above suspended ceilings for the proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with the General Contractor (or Construction Manager) and all other Contractors whose work is in the same space, and shall advise each Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required to ensure adequate clearance and access.

29.2 The Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or

maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be


260501�16

limited to junction boxes, pull boxes, contactors, panels, disconnects, controllers, switchgear, etc. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, and any change shall be approved where the equipment is concealed.

29.3 Each Contractor shall provide (or arrange for the provision by other trades) the

access panels for each concealed junction box, pull box, fixtures or electrical device requiring access or service as shown on Engineer's plans or as required. Locations of these panels shall be identified in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. All access panels shall be installed in accord with the Architect's standards for such work.

29.4 Access Doors; in Ceilings or Walls: 29.4.1 In mechanical, electrical, or service spaces:

14 gauge aluminum, 1" border, refer to architectural specifications for finishes. 29.4.2 In finished areas:

14 gauge primed steel with 1" border to accept the architectural finishes specified for the space. Confirm these provisions with the Architect prior to obtaining materials or installing any such work.

29.4.3 In fire or smoke rated partitions, access doors shall be provided that equal or exceed the required rating of the construction they are mounted in.

29.4.4 All access doors shall have continuous hinge and screw type cover. Openings

shall be sized to allow personal to pass through. PART 30 � ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 30.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring and fusing complete from

power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. The Contractor shall install all starters not factory mounted on equipment. Unless otherwise noted, the supplier of equipment shall furnish starters with the equipment. Also refer to Division 15 of Specifications, shop drawings and equipment schedules for additional information.

30.2 All control, interlock, sensor, thermocouple and other wiring required for

equipment operation shall be provided by the Contractor. All such installations shall be fully compliant with all requirements of Division 26 regardless of which trade actually installs such wiring. Motors and equipment shall be provided for current and voltage characteristics as indicated or required. All wiring shall be enclosed in raceways unless otherwise noted.

30.3 Each Contractor or sub�contractor, prior to bidding the work, shall coordinate

power, control, sensor, interlock and all other wiring requirements for equipment or motors with all other contractors or sub�contractors, to ensure all needed


260501�17

wiring is provided in the Contract. Failure to make such coordination shall not be justification for claims of extra cost or a time extension to the Contract.

PART 31 � MOTORS 31.1 Each motor shall be provided by the equipment supplier or manufacturer with

conduit terminal box, adequate starting and internal thermal overload protective equipment as specified or required. The capacity shall be sufficient to operate associated driven devices under all conditions of operation and load and without overload, and at least of the horsepower indicated or specified. Each motor shall be selected for quiet operation, maximum efficiency and lowest starting KVA per horsepower as applicable. Also, see Division 15 of Specifications for further requirements and scheduled sizes.

PART 32 � CUTTING AND PATCHING 32.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, each Contractor shall provide his own

cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified in this Division. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be in accord with the Architect's standards for such work, as applicable.

32.2 No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Engineer and all

such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by him. PART 33 � SLEEVES AND PLATES 33.1 Each Contractor shall provide and locate all sleeves and inserts required for his

work before the floors and walls are built, or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. Each Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of his hangers. Drilling of anchor holes may be prohibited in post�tensioned concrete construction, in which case the Contractor shall request approved methods from the Architect and shall carefully coordinate setting of inserts, etc., with the Structural Engineer and/or Architect.

33.2 Galvanized steel sleeves shall be provided for all electrical conduit passing thru

concrete floor slabs and concrete, masonry, tile and gypsum wall construction. 33.3 Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade, the space between the

pipe or conduit and the sleeves shall be packed with mechanical waterstop or other approved material and made completely water tight by a method approved by the Engineer and/or Architect.

33.4 Where conduit motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves

of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Check floor and wall construction finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following:


260501�18

33.4.1 Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceiling. 33.4.2 In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush with

floor. 33.4.3 In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves ½ inch above finished floor,

except in rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 3/4 inches above floor.

33.5 Sleeves shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam

joints for all sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be constructed of galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

33.6 Fasten sleeves securely in floors, walls, so that they will not become displaced

when concrete is poured or when other construction occurs around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials being forced into the space between pipe and sleeve during construction. Fire and smoke stop all sleeves in a manner approved by the local authority having jurisdiction or per prevailing codes.

PART 34 � WEATHERPROOFING 34.1 Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the

method of installation shall be as approved by the Architect and/or Engineer before work is done. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely watertight.

34.2 Wherever work penetrates roofing, it shall be done in a manner that will not

diminish or void the roofing guarantee or warranty in any way. Coordinate all such work with the roofing installer.

PART 35 � OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 35.1 Upon completion of all work and all tests, each Contractor shall furnish the

necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his systems and equipment for a period of three days of eight hours each, or as otherwise specified. During this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the operations, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Give at least one week's written notice to the Owner, Architect and Engineer in advance of this period. Contractor shall prepare an agenda for approval by Owner. The Engineer may attend any such training sessions or operational demonstrations. The Contractor shall certify in writing to the Engineer with copy to the Owner and Architect that such demonstrations have taken place, noting the date, time and names of the Owner's representative that were present.

35.2 Each Contractor shall furnish three complete bound sets for approval to the

Engineer of typewritten and/or blueprinted instructions for operating and


260501�19

maintaining all systems and equipment included in this contract. All instructions shall be submitted in draft, for approval, prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions. Each section shall be properly tabbed, indexed and labeled, with a table of contents. Minimum 3�ring hard cover binder. Include specific part, catalog, model, serial, and shop order numbers; statement of warranties – indexed by section; manufacturer names, P.O.C. for warranties, etc.

35.3 Each Contractor, in the above mentioned instructions, shall include the

maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this contract and a detailed, easy to read parts list and the name and address of the nearest source of supply.

PART 36 � SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING 36.1 Each Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services

necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required in strict accordance with OSHA Guidelines.

PART 37 � CLEANING 37.1 Each Contractor shall, at all times, keep the area of his work presentable to the

public and clean of rubbish caused by his operations; and at the completion of the work, shall remove all rubbish, all of his tools, equipment, temporary work and surplus materials, from and about the premises, and shall leave the work clean and ready for use. If the Contractor does not attend to such daily cleaning immediately upon request, the Engineer and/or Architect may cause cleaning to be done by others and charge the cost of same to the responsible Contractor. Each Contractor shall be responsible or all damage from fire which originates in, or is propagated by, accumulations of his rubbish or debris.

37.2 After completion of all work and before final acceptance of the work, each

Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials and shall remove all foreign matter such as grease, dirt, plaster, labels, stickers, etc., from the exterior of materials, equipment and all associated fabrication. Pay particular attention to finished area surfaces such as lighting fixture lenses, lamps, reflectors, panels, etc.

PART 38 � PAINTING 38.1 Each fixture, device, panel, junction box, etc., that is located in a finished area

shall be provided with finish of color and type as selected or approved by the Architect or Engineer. If custom color is required by the plans or

specifications, it shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All other equipment, fixtures or devices located in finished or unfinished areas, that are not required to have or are provided with finish color or coating shall be


260501�20

provided in a prime painted condition, ready to receive finish paint or coating. All galvanized metal in finished areas and exposed on exterior shall be properly prepared with special processes to receive finish paint as directed and approved by the Architect.

PART 39 � INDEMNIFICATION 39.1 The Contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Engineer, employees,

officers, agents and consultants from all claims, loss, damage, actions, causes of actions, expense and/or liability resulting from, brought for, or on account of any personal injury or property damage received or sustained by any person, persons, (including third parties), or any property growing out of, occurring, or attributable to any work performed under or related to this contract, resulting in whole or in part from the negligence of the Contractor, any subcontractor, any employee, agent or representative.

PART 40 � HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 40.1 Any worker, occupant, visitor, inspector, etc., who encounters any material of

whose content they are not certain shall promptly report the existence and location of that material to the Contractor and/or Owner. The Contractor shall, as a part of his work, insure that his workers are aware of this potential and what they are to do in the event of suspicion. He shall also keep uninformed persons from the premises during construction. Furthermore, the Contractor shall insure that no one comes near to or in contact with any such material or fumes therefrom until its content can be ascertained to be non�hazardous.

40.2 CMTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers, have no expertise in the determination of the

presence of hazardous materials. Therefore, no attempt has been made by them to identify the existence or location of any such material. Furthermore, CMTA nor any affiliate thereof will neither offer nor make any recommendations relative to the removal, handling or disposal of such material.

40.3 If the work interfaces, connects or relates in any way with or to existing

components which contain or bear any hazardous material, asbestos being one, then, it shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to contact the Owner and so advise him immediately.

40.4 The Contractor by execution of the contract for any work and/or by the

accomplishment of any work thereby agrees to bring no claim relative to hazardous materials for negligence, breach of contract, indemnity, or any other such item against CMTA, its principals, employees, agents or consultants. Also, the Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold CMTA, its principals, employees, agents and consultants, harmless from any such related claims which may be brought by any subcontractors, suppliers or any other third parties.

END OF SECTION.


260502�1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 260502 � DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PART 1 – ELECTRICAL – PRIMARY SERVICE 1.1 Primary electrical service shall be underground, nominal 15,000 volts, three

phase, wye, to a pad�mount transformer as indicated on the plans. 1.2 Provide primary conduit, manhole extension connection, concrete transformer

pad, pull ropes, C/T installation and trenching in accord with Utility Company requirements.

1.3 In general, the utility company will provide the pad�mounted transformer,

primary cable and its terminations. Conduits routed off the property and connected to or near a manhole or pole and all other work shall be in accord with utility company requirements. Contact the utility company prior to bidding the work and include any and all charges for their work in bid.

PART 2 � SECONDARY SERVICE 2.1 Secondary service shall be 277/480V/3Ø/4W with solid grounded neutral. See

Electrical One Line Diagram. Trench, backfill, conduit, lugs, conductors, meterbase and CT cabinet by Electrical Contractor, all per utility company standards.

PART 3 � ADDITIONAL UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS 3.1 The Contractor shall provide the local utility company with a drawing produced

by a licensed Land Surveyor acceptable to the utility that locates the centerline of the primary duct. Coordinate further requirements with utility company.

3.2 Contact the utility company for specifics on construction of pads, conduit, etc.,

prior to bidding the work and determine all their requirements. All work shall be in accord with their standards.

3.3 The electrical contractor is responsible for all fees, permit costs, etc., from the

electrical utility company and the telephone company. This includes any cost to associated with the underground electrical service extension.

3.4 Each contractor, prior to bidding the work, is to contact the electrical utility

company (as well as the telephone and cable T.V. utility company) and determine the exact points of extension of all underground services in the field with a representative of each utility company. Also, obtain construction details on manholes, transformer pads, pedestal stub�ups, etc., from each utility company as applicable. Extension points indicated on the plans are approximate, and are given for the bidder's information only.

END OF SECTION.


260503�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260503 � SHOP DRAWINGS, LITERATURE, MANUALS, PARTS LISTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS PART 1 � SHOP DRAWINGS 1.1 Each Contractor shall submit to the Architect and/or Engineer, within thirty days

after the date of the Contract, sets of shop drawings and/or manufacturer's descriptive literature (coordinate exact quantity with architectural specifications) on all equipment required for the fulfillment of his contract. Each shop drawing and/or manufacturer's descriptive literature shall have proper notation indicated on it and shall be clearly referenced so the specifications, schedules, light fixture numbers, panel names and numbers, etc., so that the Architect and/or Engineer may readily determine the particular item the Contractor proposes to furnish. All data and information scheduled, noted or specified by hand shall be noted in color red on the submittals. The Contractor shall make any corrections or changes required and shall resubmit for final review as requested. Review of such drawings, descriptive literature and/or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviation from drawings or specifications unless they have, in writing, directed the reviewer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission of drawings, literature and manuals; nor shall it relieve them from responsibility for errors or omissions of any nature in shop drawings, literature and manuals. The term "as specified" will not be accepted.

1.2 If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements set forth above, the

Architect and/or Engineer shall have the option of selecting any or all items listed in the specifications or on the drawings, and the Contractor will be required to provide all materials in accordance with this list.

1.3 Review of shop drawings by the Engineer applies only to conformance with the

design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. In all cases, the installing Contractor alone shall be responsible for furnishing the proper quantity of equipment and/or materials required, for seeing that all equipment fits the available space in a satisfactory manner and that piping, electrical and all other connections are suitably located.

1.4 The Engineer's review of shop drawings, schedules or other required submittal

data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the adaptability of the equipment or materials to the project, compliance with applicable codes, rules, regulations, information that pertains to fabrication and installation, dimensions and quantities, electrical characteristics, and coordination of the work with all other trades involved in this project.

1.5 No cutting, fitting, rough�in, connections, etc., shall be accomplished until

reviewed equipment shop drawings are in the hands of the Contractors concerned. It shall be each Contractor's responsibility to obtain reviewed shop drawings and to make all connections, etc. in the neatest and most workmanlike


260503�2

manner possible. Each Contractor shall coordinate with all the other Contractors having any connections, roughing�in, etc., to the equipment, to make certain proper fit, space coordination, voltage and phase relationships are accomplished.

1.6 In accord with the provisions specified hereinbefore, shop drawings, descriptive

literature and schedules shall be submitted on each of the following indicated items as well as any equipment or systems deemed necessary by the Engineer:

1.6.1 Power Equipment

� Switchgear and panelboards. � Circuit breakers or fusible switches, per each type. � Power and lighting contactors. � Disconnect switches. � Fuses, per each type required. � Magnetic starters, if not submitted with unit equipment by supplier. � Control components (relays, timers, selector switches, pilots, etc.) � Building service grounding electrode components. � Generator and Transfer Switches.

1.6.2 Raceways � Conduit (each type).

� Cable tray and each type of cable tray fitting. � Wireways and each type of wireway fitting. � Surface raceways and fittings. � Bridle ring assembly. � Junction, pull, and device boxes.

1.6.2 Devices � Building wire, cable splices, and terminations

� Each type of wiring device and their coverplates. � Floor boxes, each by type, with required accessories. � Data/voice/video wallplates, each by type. � Any special items not listed above.

1.6.4 Lighting

� Light fixtures, each by type, marked to indicate all required accessories and lamp selection. Also provide original color selection chart to allow Architect and/or Engineer to indicate color selection. � Lamps, each by type. � Lighting standards or poles. � Photocells, time clocks or other lighting accessories. � Control systems (lighting).


260503�3

1.6.5 Systems

Note: Each system submittal is to be complete with legible cutsheets for all devices, equipment, special wiring, etc. Also provide scale building layout drawings that indicate device placement, wiring, etc. Refer to the specific system's specification for additional submittal requirements where required.

� Fire alarm system. � Building paging/intercom audio system. � Video system. � Data/voice network. � Sound reinforcement system(s). � Intrusion Detection System � CCTV Surveillance System � Access Control System

1.6.6 Miscellaneous

� Control panel assemblies. � Non�standard junction/pullboxes.

PART 2 � SPECIAL WRENCHES, TOOLS AND KEYS 2.1 Each Contractor shall provide, along with the equipment provided, any special

wrenches or tools necessary to dismantle or service equipment or appliances installed by him. Wrenches shall include necessary keys, handles and operators for valves, switches, breakers, etc. and keys to electrical panels, emergency generators, alarm pull boxes and panels, etc. At least two of any such special wrench, keys, etc. shall be turned over to the Architect prior to completion of the project. Obtain a receipt that this has been accomplished and forward a copy to the Engineer.

PART 3 � FIRE ALARM SHOP DRAWINGS 3.1 The Contractor and equipment supplier shall submit to the Architect and/or

Engineer, fire alarm system shop drawings complete with catalog cuts, descriptive literature and complete system wiring diagrams for their review prior to submittal to the Commonwealth's Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction or other governing authority for their review.

PART 4 � MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS 4.1 Upon substantial completion of the project, the Electrical Contractor shall deliver

to the Engineers (in addition to the required Shop Drawings) three complete copies of operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists for all equipment provided. These documents shall at least include:


260503�4

4.1.1 Detailed operating instructions. 4.1.2 Detailed maintenance instructions including preventive maintenance schedules. 4.1.3 Addresses and phone numbers indicating where parts may be purchased. 4.1.4 Reference specification 1770 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION.


260504�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260504 � CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Each Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all openings, sleeves, trenches,

etc. that he may require in floors, roofs, ceilings, walls, etc. and shall coordinate all such work with the General Contractor and all other trades. He shall coordinate with the General Contractor any openings which he is to provide before submitting a bid proposal in order to avoid conflict and disagreement during construction. Improperly located openings shall be reworked at the expense of the responsible Contractor.

1.2 Each Electrical Contractor shall plan his work ahead and shall place sleeves,

frames or forms through all walls, floors and ceilings during the initial construction, where it is necessary for conduit, buss duct, conductors, wireways, etc. to go through; however, when this is not done, this Contractor shall do all cutting and patching as well as reinforcement required for the installation of his work, or he shall pay other trades for doing this work when so directed by the Architect. Any damage caused to the buildings by the workmen of the responsible Contractor must be corrected or rectified by him at his own expense.

1.3 Each Electrical Contractor shall cut holes in casework, equipment panels, etc. (if

any), as required to pass pipes in and out. 1.4 Each Electrical Contractor shall notify other trades in due time where he will

require openings of chases in new concrete or masonry. He shall set all concrete inserts and sleeves for his work. Failing to do this, he shall cut openings for his work and patch same as required at his own expense.

1.5 Openings in slabs and walls shall be cut with core drill. Hammer devices will not

be permitted. Edges of trenches and large openings shall be scribe cut with a masonry saw.

1.6 Cast iron sleeves shall be installed through all walls where pipe enters the

building below grade. Sleeves shall be flush with each face of the wall and shall be sufficiently larger than the entering pipe to permit thorough caulking with lead and oakum between pipe and sleeve for waterproofing.

1.7 In all cases, sleeves shall be at least two pipe sizes larger than nominal pipe

diameter. 1.8 Sleeves passing through exterior wall (none are permitted thru roof) or where

there is a possibility of water leakage and damage shall be caulked water tight for horizontal sleeves and flashed and counter�flashed with lead (4 lb.) or copper and soldered to the piping, lapped over sleeve and properly weather sealed. All


260504�2

roof penetrations shall be made inside mechanical equipment curbs, method to be approved by Nelson County Board of Education.

1.9 All rectangular or special shaped openings in plaster, stucco or similar materials

including gypsum board shall be framed by means of plaster frames, casing beads, wood or metal angle members as required. The intent of this requirements is to provide smooth even termination of wall, floor and ceiling finishes as well as to provide a fastening means for lighting fixtures, panels, etc. Lintels shall be provided where indicated over all openings in bearing walls, etc.

1.10 No cutting is to be done at points or in a manner that will weaken the structure

and unnecessary cutting must be avoided. If in doubt, contact the Architect. 1.11 Each Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for properly shoring, bracing,

supporting, etc. any existing and/or new construction to guard against cracking, settling, collapsing, displacing or weakening while openings are being made. Any damage occurring to the existing and/or new structures, due to failure to exercise proper precautions or due to action of the elements, shall be promptly and properly made good to the satisfaction of the Architect.

1.12 All work improperly done or not done at all as required by the Electrical trades in

this section will be performed by the General Contractor at the direction of the Contractor whose work is affected. The cost of this work shall be paid for by the Contractor responsible.

1.13 All penetrations shall be patched with materials matching that which has been

disturbed. END OF SECTION.


260508�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260508 � COORDINATION AMONG TRADES, SYSTEMS INTERFACING AND CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS PART 1 � COORDINATION 1.1 The Contractor is expressly directed to read the General Conditions and all

sections of these specifications for all other trades and to study all drawings applicable to his work, including Architectural, Plumbing Fire Protection, Mechanical and Structural drawings, to the end that complete coordination between trades will be affected. Each Contractor shall make known to all other contractors the intended positioning of materials, raceways, supports, equipment and the intended order of his work. Coordinate all work with other trades and proceed with the installation in a manner that will not create delays for other trades or affect the Owner's operations.

1.2 Special attention to coordination shall be given to points where raceways,

fixtures, etc., must cross other ducts or conduit, where lighting fixtures must be recessed in ceilings, and where fixtures, conduit and devices must recess into walls, soffits, columns, etc. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to leave the necessary room for other trades. No extra compensation or time will be allowed to cover the cost of removing fixtures, devices, conduit, pipes, ducts, etc. or equipment found encroaching on space required by others. At least 8” of clear space must be available above each recessed light fixture.

1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with all trades to insure that

they have made provision for connections, operational switches, disconnect switches, fused disconnects, etc., for electrically operated equipment provided under this or any other division of the specifications, or as called for on the drawings. Any connection, circuiting, disconnects, fuses, etc., that are required for equipment operation shall be provided as a part of this contract.

1.4 If any discrepancies occur between accompanying drawings and these

specifications and drawings and specifications covering other trade's work, each trade shall report such discrepancies to the Architect far enough in advance so that a workable solution can be presented. No extra payment will be allowed for relocation of fixtures, devices, conduit, and equipment not installed or connected in accordance with the above instructions.

1.5 In all areas where air diffusers, devices, lighting fixtures and other ceiling�

mounted devices are to be installed, the Mechanical Trade(s) and the Electrical Trade and the General Trades shall coordinate their respective construction and installations so as to provide a combined symmetrical arrangement that is acceptable to the Architect and Engineer. Where applicable, refer to reflected ceiling plans. Request layouts from the Architect or Engineer where in doubt about the potential acceptability of an installation.


260508�2

PART 2 � INTERFACING 2.1 Each Electrical Trade, Specialty Controls Trade, Mechanical Trade and the

General Trades, etc., shall insure that coordination is effected relative to interfacing of all systems. Some typical interface points are (but not necessarily all):

2.1.1 Connection of Telecommunications (voice, video, data) lines to Owner's existing

or new services. 2.1.2 Connection of Power lines to Owner's existing or new services. 2.1.3 Connection of all controls to equipment. 2.1.4 Electrical power connections to electrically operated (or controlled) equipment. 2.1.5 Electrical provisions for all equipment provided by other trades or suppliers

within this contract. PART 3 � CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS 3.1 Each Contractor shall make all connections to equipment furnished by others,

whenever such equipment is shown on any part of the drawings or mentioned in any part of the Specifications, unless otherwise specifically specified hereinafter.

3.2 All drawings are complementary, one trade of the other. It is the Contractor's

responsibility to examine all drawings and specifications to determine the full scope of his work. The project Engineers have arranged the specifications and drawings in their given order solely as a convenience in organizing the project, and in no way shall they imply the assignment of work to specific trades, contractors, subcontractors or suppliers.

3.3 Supervision to assure proper installation, functioning and operation shall be

provided by the Contractor furnishing the equipment or apparatus to be connected.

3.4 Items indicated on the drawings as rough�in only (RIO) will be connected by the

equipment supplier or Owner, as indicated. The Contractor shall be responsible for rough�in provisions only as indicated. These rough�ins shall be in accord with the manufacturer's or supplier's requirements.

3.5 For items furnished by others, relocated, or RIO, the Contractor shall obtain from

the supplier or shall field determine as appropriate, the exact rough�in locations and connection sizes for the referenced equipment.

3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the General and all

other trades, as necessary, to determine any and all final connections that he is to make to equipment furnished by others.


260508�3

3.7 Sides of cable trays cannot be obstructed by pipes, ductwork, cables, etc. END OF SECTION.


260510�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260510 � SCOPE OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Each Electrical Contractor's attention is directed to Section 260501 � General

Provisions, Electrical, and all other Contract Documents as they apply to his work.

PART 2 � SCOPE OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK 2.1 The Electrical work for this project includes all labor, materials, equipment,

fixtures, excavation, backfill and related items required to completely install, test, place in service and deliver to the Owner complete electrical systems in accordance with the accompanying plans and all provisions of these specifications. This work shall primarily include, but is not limited to the following:

2.1.1 All conduits, cable tray, conductors, outlet boxes, fittings, etc. 2.1.2 All switchgear, generators, transfer switches, panels, disconnect switches, fuses,

transformers, contactors, etc. 2.1.3 All wiring devices and device plates. 2.1.4 All light fixtures and lamps. 2.2 Electrical connection to all electrically operated equipment furnished and/or

installed by others, including kitchen equipment, gymnasium equipment, mechanical equipment, etc.

2.3 Program/paging system, including equipment, wiring, terminal plates, service

cables, etc., for the classroom system as described herein, as well as plates, wiring, terminations for a second owner�installed digital telephone system.

2.4 Inspection of electrical system by an approved Electrical Inspector, in compliance

with local requirements. 2.5 Fire alarm system. 2.6 Grounding, per N.E.C. and the specified requirements. 2.7 All necessary coordination with electric utility company, telephone company,

cable T.V. Co., etc., to insure that work, connections, etc., that they are to provide is accomplished.


260510�2

2.8 All necessary fees and cost for permits, inspections, etc. Provision of electrical power, telephone and cable television services into the building from the utility termination points outside.

2.9 Video system, including antennas, cabling, electronics, terminal plates, service

conductors, etc. 2.10 Security system, complete with equipment, detectors, wiring, etc. 2.11 Cabling, testing and devices for data/voice network.

2.12 CCTV Surveillance System Complete.

2.13 Card Access Control System Complete. 2.14 Special Note: A specialty sub�contractor (Electronic Systems Contractor) shall

be utilized for all video, paging�intercom system, data/voice network, fire alarm work, sound systems and for the security system installation. The sub�contractor shall be especially skilled in such work and shall be able to demonstrate that their regular business involves such installations. The specialty sub�contractor(s) shall be acceptable to and approved by the Owner. The names of each such sub�contractor shall be listed on the form of proposal at the time of opening bids. Provisions for branch circuits, pulling of cabling, and installation of raceways for specialty systems may be regular sub�contractor if approved by specialty contractor. All terminations, connections, check�out and testing shall be by specialty contractor.

END OF SECTION.


260519�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260519 � CONDUCTORS, IDENTIFICATION, SPLICING DEVICES & CONNECTORS PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 This section of the Specifications covers all of the electrical power, lighting, and

control power (line voltage) conductors, but does not include signal conductors which will be provided by the Contractor, as specified elsewhere.

1.2 No more than 40% conduit fill is permitted for any conduit system,

including video, intercom, data, power or other signal circuits. 1.3 No more than seven conductors shall be installed in conduit for except for switch

legs and travelers in multi�point switching arrangements. Every circuit shall be provided with a separate neutral.

1.4 If circuits originate in panels with surge suppression that serve computer outlets,

neutrals shall not be shared. Pull separate neutrals for each phase. In these cases, a maximum of seven conductors is permitted in a conduit.

PART 2 � MATERIALS 2.1 CONDUCTORS 2.1.1 All conductors shall be 98% conductive annealed copper unless otherwise noted,

UL listed and labeled. 2.1.2 Lighting and receptacle branch circuits shall be not less than No. 12 copper wire

or as sized shown on the drawings with colored Type THW or THWN insulation. All feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN of the size as shown on the Contract Drawings. Conductor sizes indicated on drawings are based upon 75° C rating.

2.1.3 Conductors No. l0 and smaller sizes of wire shall be solid. Conductors No. 8 and

larger sizes shall be stranded. A 200 lb test nylon line shall be installed in all empty conduit and stubs for future use, as indicated. Conductors for fire alarm wiring and control wiring shall be stranded, and in compliance with NEC 760.

2.1.4 All wire on the project shall be new, in good condition, and shall be delivered in

standard coils or reels. 2.1.5 The color of the wire shall be selected to conform with Section 210�5 of the latest

edition of the National Electrical Code. Refer also to 260519�4.1, Color Coding.


260519�2

2.1.6 All equipment grounding conductors #6 AWG or less shall have green color insulation. Those larger than #6 shall be green taped 4" at each termination, pull and junction boxes.

2.1.7 Conductors used for motor connections and connections to vibrating or oscillating

equipment shall be extra flexible. 2.1.8 Conductors 150V to ground and less and greater than 100' in length shall be

increased at least one size to compensate for voltage drop. For higher voltages up to 600 volts, provide similar increase in wire size. All branch circuits shall be 3% maximum voltage drop.

2.1.9 Conductors for main ground from neutral bus, equipment grounding bus,

building steel, grounding grid and main cold water pipe connection shall be bare copper.

2.1.10 All conductors shall be identified by color code and by means of labels placed on

conductors in junction boxes and at terminal points with Brady, Gardner, T & B or approved equivalent labels indicating source, circuit No. or terminal No.

2.1.11 MC cable is not permitted for use on this project. 2.2 SPLICING DEVICES & CONNECTORS 2.2.1 Splicing devices for use on No. l4 to No. l0 AWG conductors shall be pressure

type such as T & B "STA�KON", Burndy, Reliable or approved equivalent. Wire nuts shall be spring pressure type, insulation 600V, 105 deg. C insulation, up to #8 size. Greater than #6 Cu shall be a compression type connection, 600V insulation, cold shrink tubing, taped, for full insulation value.

2.2.2 Terminating pressure applied ring type (or fork with upturned ends) terminations

shall be employed on motor and equipment terminals where such terminals are provided on motor and equipment leads or on all stranded wire terminations using No. 10 AWG or smaller conductors.

2.2.3 The use of split�bolt clamps is not permitted. 2.2.4 Large connectors (lugs) shall be compression, hydraulically set. Lugs furnished

on equipment shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.2.5 No aluminum conductors shall be used. PART 3 – INSTALLATION 3.1 The pulling of all wires and cable on this project shall be performed in strict

compliance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. No conductor entering or leaving a cabinet or box shall be deflected in such a manner as to


260519�3

cause excess pressure on the conductor insulation and after all insulation and insulating bushings are in place.

3.2 The radius of bending of conductors shall be not less than eighteen (l8) times the

outside diameter of the conductor insulation. 3.3 Conductors installed within environmental air plenums shall be per N.E.C.,

teflon�type insulation or approved equivalent. 3.4 Cables that are installed exposed shall not be routed across ceilings or ductwork.

They shall be held up against building structure or against permanent support members. They shall be installed in such a manner that they do not interfere with the operation of equipment or removal of ceiling tiles. Nylon tie�wraps shall be installed in such a manner so as to bundle conductors neatly, allowing runouts of single conductors or groups to drop down to equipment served. Install grommeting where dropping out of trays or into panels or service columns. Install sleeves with bushings where penetrating partitions. Firestop sleeves with approved material. Do not penetrate firewalls if so indicated on plans.

3.5 Maximum permissible pulling tensions, as recommended by the manufacturer for

any given type of cable or wire installed shall not be exceeded. Utilize special remote readout equipment as required to ensure compliance. All cables shall be installed in raceway or routed through bridle rings. All low voltage cabling concealed within walls shall also be installed in conduit.

PART 4 � COLOR CODING DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS, 600 VOLT OR LESS 4.1 Conductors to be color coded as follows: 4.1.1 120/208 Volt Conductors

Phase A � Black Phase B � Blue Phase C � Red Neutral – White Ground – Green

4.1.2 277/480 Volt Conductors Phase A � Brown Phase B � Orange Phase C � Yellow Neutral � Gray, or white with brown tracer 4.1.3 Control Wiring � Red, or as indicated. 4.1.4 Conductors within enclosures that may be energized when enclosure disconnect

is off � yellow, or taped with ¼" yellow tape every 6" of length, inside enclosure.


260519�4

Provide lamacoid plate warning sign on front of enclosure where this condition occurs.

4.1.4 D.C. Wiring � Positive � Light Blue Negative � Dark Blue END OF SECTION.


260526�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260526 � GROUNDING PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 All metallic conduit, raceways, cable trays, wireways, supports, cabinets and

equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code, as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accord with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction, as applicable.

1.2 The size of the equipment grounding conductors, grounding electrode conductors

and service grounding conductors shall be not less than that given in Article No. 250 of the National Electrical Code, and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Where ungrounded conductor sizes are increased to minimize voltage drop, grounded conductor sizes shall be increased in the proper proportion.

1.3 Grounding bus and non�current carrying metallic parts of all equipment and

raceway systems shall be securely grounded by connection to common ground. 1.4 The service entrance main ground bus shall also be connected to the main cold

metallic water pipe within three feet of where it enters the building, on both the house and street sides of the main shut�off valve with a properly sized bonding jumper. A properly sized bonding jumper shall also be provided to the frame of any steel structure utilized in the construction. The steel frame of the building (if any) shall be made electrically continuous. Also provide connection to driven ground rods as specified.

PART 2 � MATERIALS 2.1 Ground wires and cables shall be of the AWG sizes shown on the Contract

Drawings or shall be sized in accord with the prevailing codes. All ground wires and cables shall be copper.

2.2 All grounding fittings shall be heavy cast bronze or copper of the mechanical

type except for underground installations or interconnection of grounding grid to cable, columns and ground electrodes, which shall be thermically welded type as manufactured by Cadweld, Burndy Co., Therm�O�Weld, or approved equivalent.

2.3 Other bonding clamps or fittings in above ground locations shall be as

manufactured by O.A. Co., T & B, Burndy, or approved equivalent. 2.4 Ground electrode pipe systems shall be solid copper construction. Ground rods

shall be 5/8" minimum diameter, eight feet long, copperweld steel. All ground electrode systems shall be installed in accord with manufacturer's recommendations, U.L. listings, National Electrical and National Electrical Safety Codes. Top of all ground rods shall be at 12” below grade. Provide well access for testing at one (1) rod.


260526�2

PART 3 � INSTALLATION 3.1 All grounding conductors shall be protected from mechanical injury and shall be

rigidly supported. Where ground conductors are run through flexible conduit and through panelboard switchboard or motor control center feeders, they shall be securely bonded to such conduit thru the use of grounding bushings at the entrance and exit. All connection of equipment shall be made with an approved type of solderless connection and same shall be bolted or clamped to equipment or conduit.

3.2 Equipment grounding conductors shall be run to lighting fixtures, devices,

receptacles, electric heaters, furnace and other equipment. Equipment grounding conductors not exceeding No. 6 AWG in size shall be green colored Type "THWN". Those larger than No. 6 shall be green (same color everywhere) taped 4" at each termination, pull and junction boxes.

3.3 Equipment ground connections to GFI circuit breakers shall be carried and

bonded to each outlet on the circuit. Provide a separate equipment grounding conductor with green color insulation.

3.4 Resistance to the grounding at the service entrance equipment shall be in

accordance with the N.E.C., and shall not exceed five ohms. 3.5 All circuits shall have a separate grounding conductor. 3.6 When grounding systems are completely installed and all grading in the area of

the service grounding electrode has been completed up to finish elevations, perform a fall�of potential to determine actual system resistance to earth. Report results to the Engineer in writing. Refer to testing provisions in this section of specifications.

3.7 Where separately�derived systems are utilized as part of the power distribution

network, the neutral leg of the secondary side of generators, transformers, etc., shall be connected to a grounding electrode in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 The Contractor shall ensure that the ground return path thru building structural

steel or other means is electrically continuous back to the service grounding electrode and is of adequate capacity and impedance to carry the maximum expected fault or other current. Where no electrically continuous steel building frame is available, the Contractor shall provide a properly sized ground bar and ground conductor routed back to the main facility ground bus.

3.9 Where a building's steel frame is made electrically discontinuous by masonry

breaks (as at firewalls, etc.), the Contractor shall provide an accessible thermically welded bonding jumper of #500MCM copper to bond the building steel frame sections together, making the entire steel frame electrically


260526�3

continuous. The installation of these bonding jumpers shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to their being covered by construction.

3.10 Where lightning protection systems are utilized on the work, their electrodes and

conductors shall be electrically segregated from the building service ground, except where connections to structural elements are required for the proper installation of these systems. Lightning protection grounds shall only be utilized for lightning grounding applications, in accord with U.L. and manufacturer's recommendations.

3.11 Grounding connections shall never be made to fire protection, natural gas,

flammable gas or liquid fuel piping, except where specifically indicated on the plans.

3.12 Where dielectric fittings are utilized in piping systems, the piping system shall

not be utilized as a ground path. Bonding jumpers shall not be utilized to bridge over such fittings. Piping systems shall not be utilized as ground paths except where specifically required by codes in the case of water piping.

3.13 At all metallic outlet boxes, bond the equipment grounding conductor to

the box. PART 4 � GROUND TESTING PROCEDURE 4.1 The actual resistance to earth of the service grounding electrode shall be

measured by the Contractor via the fall�of�potential method. This testing shall be accomplished after the grounding electrode has been completely installed and the finished grade is achieved.

4.2 The results of the testing shall be summarized in a written report by the

Contractor, which shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. The report shall also be included with the operation and maintenance manuals for the Owner's information and future reference. This report is to also contain a detailed description and illustrations of the testing procedure, along with the name and model number of the testing instrument(s).

4.3 For the actual testing, the Contractor shall follow the procedures outlined below.

A self�contained instrument such as a "Megger" or "Ground OHMMETER" shall be used that is designed to eliminate the influence of stray current effects on the accuracy of the measurements.

4.3.1 Connect one side of the instrument to the grounding electrode conductor where

it connects to the facility main ground bus (point C1). Disconnect and isolate the grounding electrode conductor for the test.

4.3.2 Drive a copperweld reference electrode probe (point C2) into earth between 300

and 500 feet away from C1 and connect to measurement instrument.


260526�4

4.3.3 Drive the movable grounding probe (C3) into earth at ten equally spaced intervals, in a straight line between C1 and C2 points and note the E/I=R resistance readings on a graph at each point.

4.3.4 The resistance measurements in OHMS taken from the flat part of the curve shall

be averaged to determine the true grounding electrode resistance to earth. 4.3.5 At completion of testing, remove reference electrode C2 and all temporary wiring

and connections. 4.3.6 If actual measurements of grounding electrode indicate a resistance greater than

five OHMS, contact the Engineer for instructions. If deemed necessary by the Engineer, additional electrodes shall be placed and the measurement process repeated until the desired ground potential is achieved.

END OF SECTION.


260531�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260531 � CABINETS, OUTLET BOXES & PULL BOXES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 This section of the specifications covers all electrical cabinets, outlet boxes and

pull boxes. 1.2 Continuous runs of conduit shall have pull boxes at least each eighty�five (85)

feet of run, or as near as possible to that limit. PART 2 � MATERIALS & INSTALLATION 2.1 Cabinets, Outlet & Pull Boxes: 2.1.1 Cabinets for lighting and power, telephone, pull boxes, outlet boxes, or any other

purposes specified or shown on the Contract Drawings, shall be constructed of code gauge, galvanized steel with sides formed and corner seams riveted or welded before galvanizing. Boxes assembled with sheet metal screws will not be accepted. Pull boxes shall include all boxes used to reduce the run of conduit to the required number of feet or bends, supports, taps, troughs, and similar applications and shall also be constructed as specified above. All cabinets and boxes for NEMA 1 and 1A application shall be provided with knockouts, as necessary, or shall be cut in the field by approved cutting tools which will provide a clean symmetrically cut opening. All boxes, except panels, shall be provided with code gauge fronts with 1/4 turn fasteners. Fronts for panels shall be as specified under "Panelboards".

2.1.2 Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, 4" octagonal, not less than 2 1/8"

deep, with lugs or ears to secure covers, and those for use with ceiling lighting fixtures shall be fitted with 3/8" fixture studs fastened to the back of the boxes, where applicable.

2.1.3 Special size concealed outlet boxes for clocks, speakers, alarms, TV, etc., shall

be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. 2.1.4 Floor outlet boxes shall be fully adjustable stamped steel. 2.1.5 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in the specifications, outlet boxes

shall be installed at the following heights to bottom of box:

Wall Switches 44" Convenience Outlets 16" T.V. Outlets 44" Telephones 16" or as noted on details Panels 76" to top Weatherproof Outlets 24"


260531�2

Disconnects 5'�0" max. to centerline Fire Alarm Man. Stations 3'�6" Fire Alarm Horns 80" AFF or 6" below ceiling,

whichever is lower 2.1.6 The location of outlets, as shown on the drawings, shall be considered as

approximate only. It shall be incumbent upon this Contractor to study the general building drawings, with relation to spaces surrounding each outlet, in order to make his work fit the work of others and in order that when the fixtures are installed, they will be symmetrically located and will not interfere with any other work or equipment. Any change in fixture or layout shall be coordinated with and approved by the A�E before this change is made.

2.2 Cabinets, outlet boxes (FTGS) and junction or pull boxes (FTGS) shall be

threaded for rigid�threaded conduit, dust�tight vapor�tight or weatherproof as required for areas other than for NEMA 1 or 1A application. These shall be as manufactured by Crouse�Hinds, Appleton, Pyle�National, Killark, or approved as equivalent.

2.2.1 NEMA 1 or 1A cabinets, outlet boxes or pull or junction boxes shall be as

manufactured by Appleton, Steel City, T & B, or approved equivalent. They shall be sized per N.E.C., Article 370.

2.2.2 Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles, telephone, etc., concealed in walls shall

be galvanized steel, 4" X 4" X 2�1/8" with plaster cover for one (l) or two (2) devices, as required to be flush with face of finished wall. Where outlet boxes are installed in walls of glazed tile, brick, concrete block, or other masonry which will not be covered with plaster or in walls covered by wood wainscot or paneling, deep sectional masonry boxes shall be used and they shall be completely covered with the plates or lighting fixtures. This Contractor shall cooperate with the brick layers, block layers and carpenters to insure that the outlet boxes are installed straight and snugly in the walls. Receptacles shall be set vertically in walls. Circuit numbers shall be written inside all boxes and on box corners with black, permanent marker.

2.2.3 Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather proof with gasketed covers and baked on

grey enamel finish, per ANSI 61. Shall be flip up type with locking capabilities. 2.2.4 Outlet boxes mounted in glazed tile, brick, concrete block or other types of

masonry walls shall be mounted above or below the mortar joint. Do Not Split The Mortar Joint.

2.2.5 Boxes for more than two (2) devices shall be for number of devices required and

shall be one piece. No ganging of single switch boxes will be allowed. 2.2.6 Outlets for use on this project shall have only the holes necessary to

accommodate the conduit at the point of insulation and shall be rigidly secure in


260531�3

position. Boxes with knockout removed and openings not used shall have knockout covers installed to close openings.

2.2.7 Boxes up to 4�11/16 square size shall be fastened to their mounting surface with

two fasteners of proper size. Larger sizes shall be fastened with four fasteners, minimum.

PART 3 � SPECIAL NOTICE 3.1 Openings for conduit entrance in cabinets and boxes shall be prefabricated,

punched, drilled and/or reamed. The use of a cutting torch for this purpose is prohibited.

END OF SECTION.


260533�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260533 � RACEWAYS & FITTINGS PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 This section is intended to specify the raceways, conduit, conduit fittings,

hangers, junction boxes, splice boxes, specialties and related items necessary to complete the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 This section specifies basic materials and methods and is a part of each Division

26 Section that implies or refers to electrical raceways specified therein. 1.3 The types of raceways specified in this section include the following: Steel electrical metallic tubing. (E.M.T.) Intermediate metal conduit (I.M.C.). Rigid galvanized steel conduit (G.R.S.) Flexible metal conduit Liquid � tight flexible metal conduit. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. Surface metal raceways. Cable tray or cable trough. Duct banks, and their construction. 1.4 For each piece of cord�connected or flexible conduit connected items of

equipment in the kitchen, provide a "Kellems" or equivalent strain relief grip at each end of connector, to prevent pullout if equipment is rolled or shoved by cleaning personnel.

1.5 Refer to the Architect's details for fire�rated grids and gypsum board expanses

that protect certain areas of the steel construction of the building. This rated partition shall not be penetrated by electrical or mechanical work unless absolutely necessary, and then equivalent firestopping methods to restore the rating of the plane shall be provided.

1.6 No electrical raceways are to be embedded horizontally within concrete slabs,

footings or foundation walls. Note that all piping, conduit, etc., penetrations thru precast planks shall be done in a manner approved by the precast installer. All sleeves for lines run thru precast horizontal planks or grade beams shall be coordinated by each trade with the General Contractor, the Precast Manufacturer and in a manner as approved by the Architect and Structural Engineer.

1.7 All raceways, as listed in 1.3 above and otherwise specified herein shall be

provided in compliance with latest editions of all applicable U.L., NEMA, N.E.C. and A.N.S.I. standards. All conduit, raceways and fittings shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled, or bear the listing and label of an agency acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction.


260533�2

1.8 Conduit and raceways, as well as supporting inserts in contact with or enclosed

in concrete shall comply with the latest edition of all A.C.I. standards and the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for such work.

1.9 P.V.C. or other non�metallic conduit shall be rated for the maximum operating

temperature that could be developed by the conductors it encloses, while in normal operation.

1.10 The decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding in any case where a

question or inquiry arises regarding the suitability of a particular installation or application of raceways, supports or materials, if other than outlined herein.

1.11 Minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4" trade size. All conduit and raceways shall

be sized for the number of conductors contained, in accord with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code or any other applicable standards.

1.12 The installer of raceway systems shall avoid the use of dissimilar metals within

raceway installations that would result in galvanic�action corrosion. PART 2 � MATERIALS 2.1 STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: Electrical metallic tubing, (E.M.T.) of

corrosion�resistant steel construction shall be permitted for concealed installation in dry interior locations. Electrical metallic tubing shall not be installed underground, in concrete slabs or where exposed to physical damage. Electrical metallic tubing shall be permitted for exposed work in mechanical and electrical rooms and other exposed structure areas where not subjected to physical damage, as determined by the Engineer. All exposed conduit and fittings located within 8’�0” of finished floor shall be rigid steel with threaded connectors.

2.2 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT: Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be

used where subject to physical damage for exposed work in mechanical spaces, within factory or other industrial work areas, for exposed fit�up work on machinery, for exposed interior and exterior damp or wet location work, where installed in tunnels or crawl spaces, in hazardous atmospheres, in exterior underground locations where installed beneath roadways, where ells occur in underground P.V.C. conduits, or where turning out of concrete encased duct banks, and at other locations as specifically called out on the drawings. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used for all building interior power wiring or cables of over 600 Volts.

2.3 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,

intermediate metal conduit (I.M.C.) may be used in any location in place of rigid galvanized steel conduit, as permitted by codes, and as approved by the Engineer.


260533�3

2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Flexible conduit may be used only where required for connection to light fixtures, motors and other equipment subject to vibration. It shall be constructed of steel. It shall be installed with clamp�on, insulated throat connectors designed for the purpose. All flexible metal conduit shall be installed as a single piece. No joints shall be installed. Flexible conduit shall not be used in wet or dusty locations or where exposed to oil, water or other damaging environments. An equipment grounding conductor or bonding jumper shall be used at all flexible conduit installations. Maximum length shall not exceed 6' for light fixture and 3' for other connections. Use of MC cable is not permitted.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Weatherproof flexible metal conduit

shall be wound from a single strip of steel, neoprene covered, equivalent to "Liquatite" or "Sealtite" Type "UA". It shall be installed in such a manner that it will not tend to pull away from the connectors. Provide strain relief fittings equivalent to "Kellems" as required where subject to vibration. Flexible connections to motors in dusty areas shall be dust�tight, in areas exposed to the weather � weatherproof. Length shall not exceed 3' unless permitted by the Engineer.

2.6 RIGID NON�METALLIC CONDUIT: Rigid non metallic conduit shall be constructed

of P.V.C, nominally schedule 40 weight, encased in concrete wherein underground locations. If installation will enclose utility company provided conductors, verify exact type required, and install in accord with their standards, where more stringent than this specification in normal building conditions. It shall be U.V.�resistant, rated for 90°C conductor temperature.

Rigid non�metallic conduit may be used in exterior wet or damp locations where installed at least 6" underslab or underground and in exterior underground installations where encased in minimum 4” concrete with metallic marker tape with 12” of grade. . It shall not be run in interior locations, except with special permission from the Engineer for use in corrosive environments, and then only if protected from physical damage. No rigid nonmetallic conduit may be installed in environmental air plenums or cast into above�grade concrete slabs. No rigid nonmetallic conduit may be installed in locations where the ambient temperature might exceed the rating of the raceway. Where used underground, provide continuous marker tape with metallic tracer above line as required.

Where rigid non metallic conduit is placed underground, as for feeder circuits,

secondaries or branch circuit runs and where ell is made upward thru a slab on grade, transition the turning ell and the riser to rigid steel conduit to a height of 6" above the concrete slab. Transition may then be made to E.M.T or other approved conduit for remainder of run.

Flexible nonmetallic conduit shall not be used, except by special permission, obtained in writing from the Engineer.


260533�4

Provide equipment grounding conductors of copper, sized as required by codes, in all circuits installed in rigid nonmetallic raceways.

2.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS: Surface metal raceways and fittings shall be as

shown on drawings and shall be constructed of code gauge corrosion�resistant galvanized steel, finished in an ivory color. Finishes shall be suitable for field painting, prepared by the installing contractor as necessary. Surface metal raceways shall be painted to match wall color.

Surface metal raceways to be furnished with integral receptacles shall have Simplex Nema 5�20R outlets spaced on centers as indicated on plans. These shall be Wiremold Co. #2000 Series ivory color or equivalent Walkerduct, Isotrol or other approved manufacturer.

Surface metal raceways and all components and fittings shall be furnished by a

single manufacturer, wherever practical. All trim and cover fittings, flush feed boxes, splices, outlet fittings, etc, necessary for a complete installation shall be provided by the installing contractor � bends are not permitted. These raceways shall be rigidly mounted with two hole straps on not to exceed 36" centers in a run, or 6" from ends and on either side of a corner. Refer to plans for notations on exact types of these raceways and outlet configurations.

2.8 CABLE TRAY: Cable tray shall be furnished in mill�finished galvanized steel

construction, as noted and sized on the drawings.

The installing contractor shall carefully follow the manufacturer's recommendations for hanger sizing and hanger support spacing. The weight per linear foot of tray, fully loaded with a 200% safety factor shall be accounted for in sizing hangers. Refer to manufacturer's instructions and/or the drawings, as applicable for hangers and supports. In no case shall supports be spaced further than 8'�0" apart, or greater than 24" from a turn or offset. Cable tray shall be provided with all required fittings for a complete installation. Fittings shall include, but not be limited to: Horizontal and vertical elbows and tees, smooth dropout fittings, end closure plates, fixed (or adjustable) splices as needed for field offsets, reducers, barriers or box connector flanges.

2.9 DUCT BANKS: Duct banks are defined as a raceway or raceways installed in underground locations, enclosed in a steel�reinforced concrete envelope. They shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or otherwise required.

All concrete used in duct bank construction shall be 3000 PSI minimum 28 day compressive strength unless otherwise noted, in accord with latest A.C.I. standards. Testing of concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, as directed by the engineer. Place concrete against undisturbed earth, or provide forming as needed.


260533�5

Duct bank raceways shall receive a minimum of 3" concrete cover all sides. Minimum size of any duct bank shall be 12" x 12" square, in cross section. In all cases, local and national codes shall apply to duct bank construction where they exceed the requirements of this specification. Provide marker tape with metal tracer above within 12” of grade all duct banks. Each corner of duct bank shall receive a minimum No. 4 steel reinforcing bar with 2" minimum concrete cover on all sides. Lap bars fifteen diameters at all splices. Reinforcing steel shall be rigidly supported during pour and vibration, and shall be constructed to ASTM standards. Support for encased raceways shall be as recommended by raceway manufacturer, spaced 8'�0" maximum on centers, rigidly fastened to prevent floating of ducts during concrete pours. Supports shall be of a material compatible with the raceway, and shall be of the interlocking type, forming a rigidly braced installation. Provide base type and intermediate type spacers to suit conduit configurations and sizes. Where rigid nonmetallic raceways leave concrete duct banks, a transition to rigid steel conduit shall be made 18" inside the concrete envelope. Under no circumstances shall PVC, EB or similar ducts exit concrete envelope, except where duct bank ties into a manhole wall. Provide bell ends at such terminations and towel duct bank rebars 4" into manhole wall with grout. Refer to details on drawings, as applicable. Slope all raceways within duct bank systems such that they shall drain into manholes or pull boxes. Provide proper drainage at manholes or pull boxes to prevent water accumulation. Where ducts transition thru manholes, pull boxes or at terminating end, each duct shall be specifically identified. A nomenclature as shown on the drawings or as agreed upon by the installer and engineer shall be utilized to identify each individual duct. A permanent means of identifying each duct, such as engraved lamacoid plates or stamped metal tags shall be used.

2.10 RACEWAY FITTINGS: Fixture whips shall be 1/2" flexible, with steel fittings at

each end, six foot maximum length, with insulated throat bushings at each end and bonding locknuts. Wiring thru whip shall be solid #12, with #12 ground bonded to outlet at source end.

Conduit bodies shall be of gray iron or malleable iron. They shall be furnished in proper configurations, avoiding excessive plugged openings. Any openings that are left shall be properly plugged. All coverplates shall be gasketed with neoprene or similar approved materials, rated for the environment. Wiring splices within are not permitted. Where required, raceway fittings shall be provided in explosion�proof configurations rated for the atmosphere. Place conduit seal off fittings at each device in accord with applicable codes. Seal off fittings shall be packed with wadding, and poured with an approved non�shrink sealing compound.


260533�6

Where conduit transitions run from a cold to a warm environment, (such as at a freezer, refrigerator or exterior wall) sealoff fittings shall be placed on the warm side immediately at the boundary to prevent migration of condensation within raceway systems. Expansion fittings shall be provided at all locations where conduits or other raceways cross over expansion joints. Provide copper ground bonding jumpers across expansion fittings. Conduit bodies, junction boxes and fittings shall be dust tight and threaded for dusty areas, weatherproof for exterior locations and vapor tight for damp areas. Conduit fittings shall be as manufactured by Crouse Hinds, Appleton, Killark or approved equivalent. All surface mounted conduit fittings as with "FS", "FD", "GUB" Types etc., shall be provided with mounting hubs. Exposed conduit and fittings shall be rigid steel with threaded, cast boxes where located within 8’�0” of finished floor. Where lighting fixtures, appliances or wiring devices are to be suspended from ceiling outlet boxes, they shall be provided with 3/4" rigid conduit pendants. Outlet boxes shall be malleable iron, provided with self�aligning covers with swivel ball joint (minimum 125 lb. support) and No. 14 gauge steel locking ring. Provide safety chain between building structure and ballast housing of light fixtures for all fixtures, appliances or devices greater than 10 lbs weight. Fixtures shall be installed plumb and level. Cover pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Fittings for threaded raceways shall be tapered thread with all burrs removed, reamed ends and cutting oil wiped clean. Fittings for E.M.T. conduit shall be of steel, set screw type. Conduit stops shall be formed in center of couplings. All EMT connectors and couplings shall be of formed steel construction. All connectors shall be insulated throat type. Indentation or die�cast fittings shall not be permitted in any raceway system. All conduit fittings shall be securely tightened. All threaded fittings shall engage seven full threads. Fasteners shall be properly torqued to manufacturer's recommendations.

2.11 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: Supports and hangers shall be installed in accord

with all applicable codes and standards. They shall be corrosion � resistant, galvanized or furnished with an equivalent protective coating. All electrical raceways shall be hung independently from the building structure with U.L. listed and approved materials. Hangers and supports depending from the support systems of other trades work shall not be permitted, except with specific approval in writing from the Engineer. The use of tie wire for support or


260533�7

fastening of any raceway system is prohibited. Perforated metal tape shall not be used for raceway support.

No raceway shall be installed on acoustic tile ceiling tees and support wire, or in any location that will impair the functioning, access or code�required clearances for any equipment or system. Supports may not be fastened to roof decking or drive pins. Supports for raceways shall be of materials compatible with the raceway, of malleable iron, spring steel, stamped steel or other approved material. Die�cast fittings are not permitted for supports. The installing contractor shall provide all necessary supports and braces for raceways, in a rigid and safe installation, complying with all applicable codes. Individual raceways run on building walls or equipment shall be secured by two hole galvanized malleable iron or stamped steel pipe strap or "minerallac" 2�piece straps. The straps are to be anchored by an approved means such as expansion anchors, toggle bolts, through bolts, etc. Where required by codes or other standards, provide spacers behind mounting clamps to space conduits off walls. Individual conduits run on building steel shall be secured by means of clamp supports similar and equal to those manufactured by the C.C. Korn Company, Elcen Co., B�Line or approved equivalent. Provide korn clamps, bulb tee clamps, flange clamps, beam clamps, "minerallacs", etc. Vertical and/or horizontal runs of conduit shall be grouped in common hangers on "trapezes" of channel stock as manufactured by "Unistrut" or equivalent, 1�5/8" minimum depth. Utilize conduit clamps appropriate to the channel. Raceways shall not cross one another. Channel strut systems for supporting electrical equipment or raceways shall be constructed of 16 gauge minimum hot dip galvanized steel with 9/16" diameter holes on 8" centers, with finish coat of paint as manufactured by Unistrut, B�Line, Kindorf, or approved equivalent. The minimum diameter of round all�thread steel rods used for hangers and supports shall be 1/4", 20 threads per inch. All�thread rod shall be furnished with a corrosion�resistant finish. Welding directly on conduit or fittings is not permitted. Provide riser support clamps for vertical conduit runs. Riser support clamps shall be of heavy gauge steel construction. Install riser support clamps at each floor level penetration, or as otherwise required.


260533�8

Provide conduit cable support clamps for vertical conductor runs as required or indicated on plans. Clamps to be insulating wedging plug, with malleable iron support ring. Install within properly sized and anchored junction box. Spring steel clips and fittings such as those manufactured by HITT�Thomas, Caddy�Erico, or approved equivalent, with black oxide finish are permitted in any indoor dry location for concealed work, where acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction.

2.12 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS 2.12.1 All conduits, and cables penetrating fire rated floors and walls must be

firestopped. Firestopping assembly must be UL listed. All corridor walls, storage room walls and mechanical room walls are to be considered on hour fire rated. The second floor slab shall also be considered one hour rated.

2.12.2 Provide shop drawings indicating penetration detail for each type of wall and

floor construction. Shop drawings must be specific for each individual type. (i.e., one hour fire rated gypsum wall board with insulated metal pipe penetration.)

2.12.3 3M fire protection products are listed below. Equivalent products may be

submitted if they are UL listed. 2.12.4 The manufacturer of the firestopping materials must provide on site training for

the contractor. The training session shall demonstrate to the contractors the proper installation techniques for all the firestopping materials. The training session shall be four hours minimum. Contact the Engineer prior to conducting this training session.

2.12.5 Firestopping materials to include but not limed to the following: 2.12.5.1 3M fire barrier FS�195 wrap/strip. 2.12.5.2 3M fire barrier CP 25 caulk. 2.12.5.3 3M fire barrier MP moldable putty. 2.12.5.4 3M fire barrier RC�1 restricting collar with steel hose clamp. 2.12.5.5 3M fire barrier damming materials. 2.12.5.6 3M fire barrier CS�195 composite sheet. 2.12.5.7 3M fire barrier fire dam 150 caulk. 2.12.5.8 Steel sleeves.


260533�9

PART 3 � INSTALLATION 3.1 This Contractor shall lay out and install all conduit systems so as to avoid any

other service or systems, the proximity of which may prove injurious to the conduit, or conductors which it confines. All conduit systems, except those otherwise specifically shown to the contrary, shall be concealed in the building construction or run above ceilings. Size of all conduit shall conform to Table No. 1, Chapter 9, of the National Electrical Code, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

3.2 No conduit shall be installed in poured concrete slabs, foundation walls or

footings. Any conduit installed below slab shall be held 12" below slab. Conduit shall be held at least 6" from flues or hot water pipes.

3.3 All exposed conduit in mechanical spaces, conduit above corridor ceilings, above

gymnasium, library or other large room ceilings shall be installed on strut system racks with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings, with right angle turns consisting of cast metal fittings or symmetrical bends unless otherwise shown. All conduit shall have supports spaced not more than eight feet apart. Supports shall also be provided within 36” of all boxes, bends, and termination points. Where termination points are free standing, support shall be provided within 12”. Conduits randomly routed will not be accepted. Conduits shall be concealed in open structure (no finished ceiling) where possible and painted to match.

3.4 Groups of branch circuit conduits shall be run above corridor ceilings where

possible, and shall not be routed over classrooms. The conduits from wall outlets in classrooms shall be turned out in the zone between the structure or bottom of the gypsum board fire barrier and the room ceiling directly into junction boxes (fastened to the masonry walls, with a minimum of bends. These branch power, lighting and systems conduits shall then be routed along the walls (or structure, in the case of lighting conduits) to emerge thru the corridor walls at the elevations necessary to route with minimal offset to the racked conduit/junction box system mounted on the bottom of the corridor structure. If in doubt about any particular installation, contact the Engineer for clarification prior to proceeding with rough�in work.

3.5 Conduit shall be installed in such a manner so as to insure against collection of

trapped condensation. All runs of conduit shall be arranged so as to be devoid of traps. Trapped conduit runs shall be provided with explosion proof drains at low points. Runs of conduit between junctions shall not have more than the equivalent of three 90° bends.

3.6 Junction boxes shall be installed so that conduit runs will not exceed 85', or as

shown on the Contract Drawings. Sizes of junction boxes shall be in accord with Article 370 of the N.E.C.


260533�10

3.7 Underground electric, cable TV, telephone service or other steel conduit and underfloor steel conduit below the concrete floor slab shall be painted with two coats of bitumastic paint, such as "Asphaltum".

3.8 All underground or underfloor conduits shall be swabbed free of all moisture and

debris before conductors are pulled. 3.9 At least two 1 inch and three 3/4 inch conduits shall be stubbed from flush�

mounted panelboards into the nearest accessible area for future use. Provide suitable closures for these stubs. Identify each stub with a suitable hang tag.

3.10 Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

applicable requirements of latest edition of the N.E.C., and NECA "Standard of Installation", complying with recognized industry practices.

3.11 Coordinate with other trades, including metal and concrete deck trades, as

necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components. 3.12 Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations and required

heights. Hold tight to structure wherever possible, to maximize available space and not restrict other trades. Do not attach or support from roof deck.

3.13 Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables

or wires within raceways. 3.14 All underground conduits shall be buried to minimum depth of 36" from the top

of the concrete encasement or raceway to finished grade, unless otherwise noted on plans. Observe minimum burial requirements of local utility company where their standards or regulations apply. Conduits containing primary power conductors, (higher than 600 volts to ground) shall be 42" to top below finished grade, unless otherwise noted on plans.

3.15 No more than seven conductors shall be installed in conduit for computer

circuits, and no more than five for power lighting and convenience outlets without special permission of Engineer, except where switch legs and travelers for lighting controls will be the exceeding conductors or in the case of fire alarm wiring.

3.16 Exposed raceways installed in exterior locations shall receive one coat of primer,

two coats finish paint after preparation of galvanizing, color selected by Architect. Exposed raceways in interior painted areas shall be similarly painted.

PART 4 – SPECIALTIES 4.1 All EMT terminations at junction boxes, panels, etc. shall be made with case

hardened locknuts and appropriate fittings, with insulated throat liners. Insulating terminations shall be manufactured as a single unit. The use of split sleeve insulators is not permitted.


260533�11

4.2 All rigid conduit, except main and branch feeders, shall have heavy fiber

insulating bushings reinforced with double locknuts. All branch and main feeders shall have insulated bushings with grounding lugs and shall be bonded to enclosures with appropriately sized copper jumpers, except at pad mounted transformers. Bonding jumpers shall be installed as required by the N.E.C. and other applicable codes.

4.3 All conduit stubbed through floor during construction shall have openings

protected with plastic caps approved for this purpose. Connections on both ends of all flexible conduit shall be equivalent to Thomas and Betts, Ideal, Appleton, Efcor, or approved equivalent, rated for the environment.

4.4 Pulling lines shall be left in all open conduit systems and shall be non�metallic,

left securely tied off at each end cap any unused conduits. 4.5 Where spare raceways terminate in switchboards or motor control centers a

fishtape barrier shall be provided. 4.6 All outlet boxes shall be grounded with pigtail to the equipment grounding

conductor. 4.7 All empty raceways inside switchgear and open spaces shall be capped. 4.8 All fire alarm raceways shall be red. Junction and pull boxes shall be identified

with panel and circuit number on covers. END OF SECTION.


260544�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260544 � EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Each Contractor's attention is directed to Section 260501, General Provisions,

Electrical and all other contract documents as they may apply to his work. 1.2 Each Contractor shall include all excavating, filling, grading and related items

required to complete his work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 Electrical distribution lines and underground telephone or TV cables shall, in no

case, be placed in the same trench with sanitary, storm, domestic or fire protection water lines. Telephone or T.V. services shall, in all cases, be placed in a separate trench with minimum two feet separation from electrical power lines.

1.4 Depths of bury shall be:

42" minimum to top of primary ducts 36" minimum to top of secondary ducts 36" minimum to top of branch exterior circuits 36” minimum to top of telephone/communications/misc. ducts

PART 2 � SUBSURFACE DATA 2.1 Subsurface investigations have been made and the results shown on the

drawings. The information was obtained primarily for use in preparing foundation design. Each Contractor may draw his own conclusions therefrom. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner for subsoil quality or conditions other than at the locations and at the time investigations were made.

2.2 Materials to be excavated shall be unclassified, and shall include earth, rock, or

any other material encountered in the excavation to the depth and extent indicated on the drawings and specified herein. No adjustment in the Contract sum will be made on account of the presence or absence of rock, shale, or other materials encountered in the excavating.

PART 3 � BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS 3.1 Maintain carefully all bench marks, monuments and other referenced points. If

disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. PART 4 – EXCAVATION 4.1 Each Contractor shall accept the site as he finds it and remove all trash, rubbish

and material from the site prior to starting excavation for his work.


260544�2

4.2 Excavate trenches to sufficient width and depth for proper installation of the work and where required, smooth the bottom on the trench with hand tools in strict accordance with OSHA Guidelines.

4.3 Keep trenches free from water while construction therein is in progress. Under

no circumstances lay conduit or cable in water. Pumping or bailing water from this Contractor's trenches, which is required during construction shall be accomplished at his expense.

4.4 In no case shall excavation work be accomplished that will damage in any way

the new structure, existing structures, equipment, etc. Each Contractor shall take the necessary steps to prevent flow of eroded earth by water or landslide onto the property of others, or against the structures. The repair of all such damage, or any other damage incurred in the course of excavation, shall be borne by the responsible Contractor.

PART 5 � BACKFILL 5.1 Backfill shall be accomplished with clean debris free earth and the new earth

tamped at 12" intervals so as to avoid earth sinks along the trench. The responsible Contractor will be required to return to the project and fill any sunken areas along the route of his work.

5.2 Backfill trenches only after conduit and cable have been inspected by Agencies,

Engineer and Owner, tested, and locations of pipe lines have been recorded on record drawings. Provide at least one week's written or fax notification to all parties of impending work that needs to be reviewed.

5.3 The backfill below paved areas shall be brought to proper grade to receive the

sub�base and paving. No paving shall be placed on uncompacted fill. 5.4 The backfill below sodded or seeded areas shall be brought to within six inches of

finished grade. The remaining six inches shall be backfilled with clean soil. Concrete for concrete encasement shall cure a minimum of 3 days prior to backfill.

END OF SECTION.


260553�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 260553 � IDENTIFICATIONS PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Equipment, disconnect switches, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, and

sound equipment, motor starters, pushbutton stations, special device plates, and similar materials shall be clearly marked as to their function and use. Markings shall be applied neatly and conspicuously to the front of each item of equipment with 1/2" black lamacoid plate (or equivalent) with white letters 1/4" high.

1.2 Each Electrical Contractor shall provide clearly legible typewritten directories in

each electrical panel indicating the equipment, location within area, and area or room of circuit, etc. controlled by each switch, breaker, fuse, etc. These directories are to be inserted into plastic cardholders in each panel. Descriptions to be approved by owner.

Example: 1 Lights, East Side, Room 100 3 Receptacles, West Wall, Room 200

1.3 Branch circuit panelboards and switch gear shall be provided with a black

lamacoid plastic plate with 1/2" white letters for panel designation and 1/4" white letters showing voltage and feeder information. Branch circuit switches shall be designated as to function. Panelboard and switchgear labels shall indicate the source they are fed from, and the circuit number at that source. Clearly indicate the exact label legend to be furnished with each panelboard and switchgear on the shop drawings for each item of equipment prior to submission of shop drawings. Refer to drawings for further detail.

1.4 Where branch circuit panelboards and switchgear are connected to an emergency source, the lamacoid plate shall be red, and the word "emergency" shall be incorporated into the legend. Also provide similar plates and legends for automatic transfer switches, as appropriate. Refer to drawings for further details.

1.5 Lamacoid plates shall be located at center of top of trim for branch circuit panels,

switch gear, and centered at side for branch circuit switches. Fasten with self�tapping stainless steel screws or other approved method.

END OF SECTION.


262400�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 262400 � ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 � DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (600 AMPERE OR GREATER) 1.1 Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet at least 18” above the

floor. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler�type lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three�point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, with gray baked enamel finish electrodeposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel.

1.2 The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front

removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers. Bus structure shall be copper and shall be full height of panel.

1.3 Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current

ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C. rise above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. All panelboards unless otherwise noted shall have space to accept forty�two 20 amp one pole circuit breakers.

1.4 Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and

protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large, permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF." Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. All panelboards shall be capable of accepting 225 amp 3 pole branch breakers as a minimum unless otherwise noted.

1.5 Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on schedules on the plans or as determined by verification with local utility company. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short


262400�2

circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.

1.6 Distribution panelboards shall be Square "D", G.E., I.T.E./Siemens, Cutler

Hammer, or approved equivalent. PART 2 � BRANCH PANELBOARDS 2.1 This section covers lighting and power panelboards (refer to schedule and notes

on Contract Drawings and One�Line Diagram, of the Contract Drawings). 2.2 All panelboards shall be of the circuit breaker type, and shall be of one

manufacturer. 2.3 Branch panelboards shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified

herein. The lighting panelboards shall be of the dead�front, quick�make, quick�break, bolt�on circuit breaker type, with trip indicating and trip free handles. All circuits shall be clearly and properly numbered and shall be provided with thermal magnetic protection.

2.4 The panelboards shall be enclosed in code gauge, galvanized steel cabinets with

smooth finished hinged doors without visible external fasteners and heavy chrome locks. Provide baked�on grey enamel finish, in accord with ANSI 61. Panels shall be constructed in accord with Federal Specification W�P�115B Type 1 Class 1, UL67, UL50, NEMA P31, and NFPA 70. Locks shall all be keyed alike.

2.5 Each door shall have a directory card inside, covered with a plastic shield, filled

in typewritten with circuit numbers and description indicated. Room numbers shall be coordinated with final room numbers as selected by Owner �� not numbers on Contract Documents. Circuit descriptions must be approved by Owner.

2.6 Panelboard trim for surface or flush panels shall be double�hinged type, to allow

exposure of dead�front breaker portion behind locked door, with screw�fastened gutter trim that is hinged to allow full access to wiring gutters.

2.7 Special Note: The room numbers used to fill out the panel directories shall

match the actual final name and numbering scheme selected by the Owner. They shall not be filled out per the construction drawing numbering scheme, unless the Contractor is directed to do so by the Architect or Engineer.

2.8 Branch panelboards shall be surface or flush mounted as indicated on the

Contract Drawings. Flush panels trims shall be tight to wall and interior barriers, with no gaps allowing access to live parts. Oversize trims will not be acceptable.


262400�3

2.9 Note: Where mounted in groups, align top of trim or tub for all panels in an area. Exact mounting height of topline shall be as directed by the Engineer.

2.10 Circuit breakers shall be molded�case construction, per U.L. 489, Federal

Specifications W�C�375B/GEN MCCB, NEMA AB1. 208V circuit breakers shall be of 10,000 A.I.C. RMS symmetrical rating. 480V circuit breakers shall be 14,000 A.I.C. RMS symmetrical rating unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings or required by fault current capacity. Verify with utility company. Distribution panels ("DP") shall have 42K A.I.C. or 30K A.I.C. breakers as noted.

2.11 All busses and connections thereto in branch panelboards shall be copper. All

bus bars shall extend full length of panelboards. 2.12 All circuit breakers used to switch lights shall be SWD (switching duty) rated. All

circuit breakers used for H.I.D. lighting shall be H.I.D. rated. All circuit breakers for HVAC loads shall be HVAC rated.

2.13 All panelboards shall have full size uninsulated ground busses, insulated full

neutral busses. All "SS" panels indicated to have surge protection added outboard shall have 200% rated neutrals.

2.14 Panels shall be Square "D", G.E., Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or approved

equivalent. PART 3 � INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3.1 Panelboards with circuit breakers installed before the building has been finished

and cleaned shall be masked. 3.2 All dust and debris shall be removed from the panels before they are energized

and placed in service. All wires shall be properly formed � no splices are permitted in gutters. On flush units, paint trim to match wall.

3.3 All panelboard fronts shall be omitted until final punch list inspection is made.

Directories for each panelboard shall be completed and available for review by the A�E at that time. Provide description of load and location, i.e., "Lighting, East Wall, Room 101."

3.4 Panelboards of extra height shall be installed at least 18” above floor. PART 4 � SAFETY SWITCHES 4.1 Provide heavy duty safety switches as a final disconnecting means as required by

NEC and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 4.2 All safety switches shall be NEMA Type 1 or NEMA 3R and Heavy Duty Type HD

and UL listed. Provide uninsulated ground bus in all switches and additional insulated neutral bus if required by circuit.


262400�4

4.3 All safety switches shall have switch blades that are fully visible in the "OFF"

(open) position with the door open. 4.4 All current carrying parts shall be plated by an electrolytic process to resist

corrosion and to promote cooling. 4.5 Switch mechanism shall be quick�make, quick�break, load rated, such that

during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing and opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box (not cover) with facilities for pad locking in the open or closed position with up to three padlocks. NEMA 3R switch doors shall be interlocked with switch handle so that the door can only be opened when the switch is in the "OFF" (open) position.

4.6 Switches shall be as manufactured by Square D., G.E., Siemens, Cutler Hammer

or approved equivalent. PART 5 � FUSES 5.1 Upon completion of the building, the Contractor shall provide the owner with

spare fuses as shown below. All fuses shall be BUSSMANN or Little Fuse. 5.2 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be supplied

as spares: 5.2.1 Bussmann spare fuse cabinets � Catalog No. SFC � shall be provided to store the

above spares. 5.3 uses shall be installed in the equipment until the installation is complete,

including tests and inspections required prior to being energized. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer to insure retention of selective coordination, as designed.

5.4 Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN

HI�CAP TIME DELAY FUSES KRP�C. Fuses shall employ "O" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the fuse barrel. Fuses shall be a time�delay type and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 5 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes R.M.S. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class L.

5.5 Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN

LOW�PEAK Dual Element Fuses, LPN�RK (250 volts) or LPS�RK (600 volts). All dual element fuses shall have separate overload and short circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284°F melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short�circuit clearing


262400�5

chamber. The fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of l0 seconds and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1.

5.6 Motor Circuits � All individual motor circuits rated 480 amperes or less shall be

protected by BUSSMANN LOW PEAK DUAL�ELEMENT FUSES LPN�RK (250 volts) or LPS�RK (600 volts). The fuses for 1.15 service factor motors shall be installed in rating approximately l25% of motor full load current except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuse should be 150% to 200% of the Type KRP�C HI�CAP Time Delay Fuses of the rating shown on the drawings. 1.0 service factor motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW�PEAK Dual�Element Fuses LPN RK (250 volts) or LPS�RK (600 volts) installed in rating approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 or L.

5.7 Circuit breaker panels shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW�PEAK Dual Element

fuses LPN�RK (250 volts) or LPS�RK (600 volts) as shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1.

PART 6 � CONTACTORS 6.1 General: Contactors shall be continuously rated at the specified amperes per

pole for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistance and motor load. Contactors shall have totally enclosed, double�break silver�cadmium�oxide power contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts will not be acceptable. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. Contactors shall have straight�through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. Contactors shall have a gasketed NEMA Type 1 (NEMA 12 for electrically�held) enclosure, unless otherwise noted or required.

6.2 Contactors shall be approved per UL 508 and/or CSA, and be designed in

accordance with NEMA Standards. They shall be industrial�duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum. I.E.C.�style contactors are not acceptable.

6.3 Contactors shall have provisions for factory or field addition of: 6.3.1 Four N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contacts rated 6 amperes continuous at 600 volts. 6.3.2 Single or double circuit, N.O. or N.C., 30 or 60 ampere 600 volt power�pole

adder. 6.3.3 Control�circuit fuse holder, one or two fuses. 6.3.4 0.2�60 second adjustable interval timer attachment, if so indicated on plans. 6.3.5 Transient�suppression module for coil control circuit. Coil control to be 120 volts.

Provide circuit or step�down transformer.


262400�6

6.4 Electrically Held Lighting Contactors: Contactor coils shall be continuously rated

and encapsulated, 120 volt rated. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12, to minimize noise transmission.

6.5 Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors: Coil�clearing contacts shall be supplied

so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of operation. Both latch and unlatch coils shall be encapsulated. Coils shall be rated for 120 volt operation.

6.6 Lighting contactors shall be mechanically held, ASCO 917 or equivalent by G.E.,

I.T.E./Siemens, or Allen�Bradley. PART 7 – DRY�TYPE TRANSFORMERS 7.1 The Contractor shall provide dry�type transformers as manufactured by Square

"D", G.E., Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or equivalent. KVA ratings shall be as indicated on the electrical plans.

7.2 Three phase transformers are to have 480 volt Delta primary and 120/208V/30/

/4W secondary. 30 KVA transformers and larger are to be supplied with 2�2½% full capacity taps above and 4�2½% full capacity taps below primary voltage. Exceptions to the above will be shown on the electrical plans.

7.3 Copper�wound, 3�phase, common core, ventilated, dry�type isolation

transformer built to NEMA ST20 and relevant NEMA, UL and IEEE standard; 60 Hz rated; insulation & Varnish Systems: 220 degree C class; Epoxy Polyester impregnation; Transformers 750 kVA and less, 600 volt primary and less, shall be U.L. and CSA listed and bear the label. All terminals, including those for changing taps, must be readily accessible by removing a front coverplate. Windings shall be continuous copper wire with terminations brazed or welded. 10kV BIL.

7.4 Operating Temperature Rise shall be 130 degree C in a 40 degree C maximum

ambient. 7.5 Noise levels per NEMA ST�20, demonstrate compliance by providing factory

production test report for each unit on this project upon shipment. 7.6 Impedance shall be between 3.5% and 5.8% unless otherwise noted. 7.7 Zero sequence impedance/reactance; Less than 0.95% and 0.3% respectively. 7.8 Meet or exceed NEMA TP�1 Efficiency. 7.9 Transformer coils shall be vacuum impregnated with non�hygroscopic,

thermosetting varnish. Each layer shall have end fillers or tie downs to provide maximum mechanical strength. No splicing acceptable. Materials incorporated


262400�7

must have at least a minimum of one year of proven field usage, accelerated laboratory tests not acceptable in lieu of this field usage. Insulation systems shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.

7.10 Transformer coils shall have a final wrap of electrical insulating material designed

to prevent injury to the magnet wire. Transformers having coils with magnet wire visible will not be acceptable.

7.11 All cores to be manufactured from a high grade, non�aging, silicon steel with

high magnetic permeabilities, low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below saturation to allow for a minimum of 10% over voltage excitation. The cores shall be clamped with structural angles (formed angles not acceptable) and bolted to the enclosure to prevent damage during shipment or rough handling.

7.12 The core and coil unit shall be completely isolated from the enclosure by means

of a vibration isolating system and shall be so designed as to provide for continual securement of the core and coil unit to the enclosure. Sound isolating systems requiring the removal of all tie down facilities will not be acceptable.

7.13 Transformers 15 KVA thru 75 KVA shall be provided with interchangeable

mounting for floor or wall. 7.14 The maximum top of case temperature shall not exceed 35ºC above ambient. 7.15 The entire transformer enclosure shall be degreased, cleaned, phosphatized,

primed and finished with baked enamel. Air dry finishes will not be accepted as being equivalent.

7.16 The core and coils shall be visibly grounded to the frame of the transformer

cubicle by means of a flexible grounding strap of adequate size. 7.17 Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and substantiated by

certified tests on each unit furnished. The sound levels are not to exceed the following values: 10 to 45 KVA, 42 D.B. to 150 KVA; 45 D.B., 225 to 300 KVA; 50 D.B. and 500 KVA, 54 D.B.

7.18 Provide units with copper windings. PART 8 � PANELBOARD SCHEDULES 8.1 Refer to the drawings. END OF SECTION.


262726�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 262726 � WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 This section of the specifications covers all wiring devices and cover plates,

standard, weatherproof and dust�tight. 1.2 Wiring devices, listed by manufacturer and catalogue numbers are to establish

the quality and type required. Equivalent devices of other manufacturers will be acceptable with prior approval of the Engineer. Submit cutsheets and/or samples of each type ten days prior to bid date for review and written approval to bid. Insofar as possible, standard application or special application devices shall be by one manufacturer.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

TYPE RATING CONFIGURATION COLOR VENDOR � CAT. #

RECEPTACLE � DUPLEX

SPECIFICATION GRADE

125V, 20A

NEMA 5�20R

*

HUBBELL 5362,

GE 5362

LEVITON 5362

EAGLE 5362

RECEPTACLE �

COMPUTER

125V, 20A

NEMA 5�20R

BLUE

HUBBELL 5352,

GE 5362

LEVITON 5362

EAGLE 5362

RECEPTACLE � DUPLEX

G.F.I.

125V, 20A NEMA 5�20R * HUBBELL GF�5352

GE GF�5362

LEVITON 6898

RECEPTACLE – SINGLE 125V, 20A NEMA 5�20R * HUBBELL 5361

RECEPTACLE – SINGLE

WITH CLOCK HANGER

TAB, STAINLESS STEEL

PLATE

125V, 15A NEMA 5�15R METAL

HUBBELL 5235

LEVITON 658�BR

ARROW –HART 5760

RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX

ISOLATED GROUND

(WITH ORANGE LEGEND

PLATE)

125V, 20A NEMA 5�20R

ORANGE HUBBELL IG�5352

GE 5362�IG

LEVITON 5362�IG

RECEPTACLE, SINGLE

TWISTLOCK

250V, 30A NEMA 126�30R BLACK HUBBELL 2610A

RECEPTACLE, SINGLE 250V, 20A NEMA 10�20R BLACK HUBBELL 6810

GE 4124

LEVITON 5032

RECEPTACLE, SINGLE 250V, 50A NEMA 6�50R BLACK HUBBELL 9367

GE 4141

LEVITON 5374


262726�2

SWITCH, SINGLE POLE 120/277V,

20A

SPST * HUBBELL 1221

GE 5951

LEVITON 1221

SWITCH, THREE�WAY 120/277V,

20A

3�WAY * HUBBELL 1223

GE 5953

LEVITON 5953

SWITCH, FOUR�WAY 120/277V,

20A

4�WAY * HUBBELL 1224

GE 5954

LEVITON 5954

SWITCH, KEYED 120/277V,

20A

SPST N/A HUBBELL 1221�L

GE 5951�L

LEVITON 1221�L


20A

3�WAY N/A HUBBELL 1223�L

GE 5953�L

LEVITON 1223�L


20A

4�WAY N/A HUBBELL 1224�L

GE 5954�L

LEVITON 1224�L

NOTE:

SWITCH, KEYED TO EACH BE FURNISHED WITH ONE HUBBELL #1209 KEY. TURN OVER TO OWNER

AT CLOSE OF PROJECT AND OBTAIN RECEIPT FOR VERIFICATION THAT KEYS HAVE BEEN

DELIVERED.

SWITCH,

MOMENTARY, 3�

POSITION,

CENTEROFF

SWITCH

TIMER SWITCH

120/277V, 20A

(VERIFY

VOLTAGE USED)

120V

SPDT

SPST, 60 MINUTE

*

*

HUBBELL 1556

GRY GE

EQUIVALENT

NUTONE VS63

GE EQUIVALENT

LEVITON

EQUIVALENT

NOTES:

1. PROVIDE MATCHING CAP (PLUG) FOR ALL RECEPTACLES 30 AMP RATED AND ABOVE AS

REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT

2. ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE BACK OR SIDE�WIRED, CLAMPING TYPE

* SEE ARTICLE 3, COLOR.

2.2 For small motor loads of 3/4 HP or less, single phase, 120 or 277 volts, provide

snap�type, H.P. rated motor starter switch without thermal overloads. Hubbell 3031 IA or equivalent Square D or G.E. Provide lockout�type trim plate for each device. Provide with NEMA 1, NEMA 3R or other enclosure suitable for the location and atmosphere. All manual starters in finished areas shall be in flush�mounted enclosures. If the motor to be controlled is not equipped with internal thermal overload protection, overload heaters sized to match the motor


262726�3

nameplate amperes and the ambient temperature shall be provided. All such disconnects shall be mounted next to the motor above ceilings or exposed in mechanical spaces, located in readily accessible areas.

PART 3 � COLOR 3.1 Color of devices shall be grey, except for outlets shown as "SP" and outlets on

computer panels, which shall be blue. Samples (devices, plates or both) may be required to be submitted with other architectural color items by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate any such submission required with other trades, the Prime Contractor or as needed.

PART 4 � MANUAL DIMMERS 4.1 Manual dimmers for incandescent, MR�lamp incandescent or fluorescent loads

shall be matched to the type load intended to be controlled. 4.2 Power rating shall be verified by examining the plans and suitable for the load,

but in no case less than 125% of the circuit load. Furnish dimmers in nominal power ranges of 600W, 1000W and 1500 watts.

4.3 Manual dimmers shall be provided with all solid state components, complete with

choke coil and/or other R.F.I. suppression devices. 4.4 Manual dimmers shall be suitable for mounting in single gang outlet box,

ganging together in multi�section boxes where indicated, without derating being necessary.

4.5 Manual dimmers shall be of the sliding�type, with detent stop at off position, full

range control 0�100%. Lutron Company "Nova" Series or equivalent Lithonia, Lightolier. Provide with grey trim.

4.6 Manual dimmers for fluorescent lighting shall be matched to suit the

characteristics of the particular manufacturer's electronic ballast used in dimming � type fixture.

PART 5 � PLATES AND COVERS 5.1 Unless otherwise specified or noted, all wiring device plates and covers shall be

304 stainless steel, Hubbell or equivalent G.E. or Leviton. Color shall be satin, brushed. Provide engraved black�filled legends for "copier", "for computer only" and "laminator" outlets.

5.2 All kitchen or food service area plates shall be 304 stainless steel, with foam

gasket behind to help prevent water infiltration. 5.3 Cover plates shall be of one manufacture insofar as possible.


262726�4

5.4 Weatherproof plates for G.F.C.I. receptacles shall be cast aluminum, self�closing, gasketed, suitable for standard box mounting, U.L. listed for wet location use, cover closed. horizontal mounting – Intermatic #WPIOIOMC (die�cast zinc) or equivalent Tay�Mac or Ideal.

5.5 Weatherproof switch plates for toggle�handle switches shall be cast aluminum,

sealed, for standard outlet boxes, with thru � the cover toggle operation. Hubbell, equivalent G.E., or Leviton.

5.6 Cover plates for telephone wall outlets shall be as required to meet telephone

supplier's requirements. Color to match other plates on project. Furnish with wall�mounting studs if mounted at 48" or higher. Refer to Section 270610 for further requirements.

5.7 Cover plates for data/voice outlets with multiple cable feeds shall be multi�gang,

thermoplastic, modular, for snap�in terminators as specified elsewhere in the contract documents.

PART 6 � INSTALLATION 6.1 All wiring devices in dusty areas, exposed to weather and moisture shall be

installed in Type "FS" conduit fittings having mounting hubs, with appropriate cover plates.

6.2 Devices that have been installed before painting shall be masked. No plates or

covers shall be installed until all finishing and cleaning has been completed. Any device showing paint or dirt shall be replaced.

6.3 Provide G.F.C.I. duplex feed�thru style receptacles where indicated or required

by the National Electrical Code, whether specifically called out or not. When a G.F.C.I. receptacle is on a circuit with other non�G.F.C.I. receptacles, it shall always be placed at the homerun point of the circuit and shall be wired to ground�fault interrupt protect the downstream outlets on that circuit unless specifically indicated to the contrary. Provide a "G.F.C.I. protected" label on each downstream outlet.

6.4 Where surge suppression outlets are provided, they shall be ANSI Category "A"

style. They shall be installed as dedicated�circuit outlets or where with multiple outlets on a circuit, they shall be placed at the homerun point of that circuit and feed�thru wired to protect the downstream outlets on that circuit.

6.5 All receptacles shall be installed with ground prong at bottom position. 6.6 All outlet boxes, in final positions shall be properly fitted, tight to wall, per N.E.C.

No jumbo plates shall be used. All receptacles/grounds shall be "pig�tail" bonded to the outlet box (except for isolated grounds).

END OF SECTION.


264313�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 264313 � SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Each Contractor's attention is directed to Section 260501, General Provisions�

Electrical and all other contract documents as they may apply to his work. PART 2 � SCOPE OF THE WORK 2.1 The Contractor shall provide the necessary labor, materials, wiring and services

necessary to provide the complete electrical surge protection systems as specified herein. This work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:

2.1.1 Provision of Surge Suppression Units at certain points in the power distribution

network and on telephone and television service lines. 2.1.2 Proper installation of surge suppression unit(s), in accord with shop drawings.

Wiring routing, grounding and all connections shall be in exact accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 � QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in production of surge protection

equipment, of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been satisfactorily used in similar service for not less than three years.

3.2 Comply with NEC and NFPA requirements, as applicable to materials and

installation of surge protection components and wiring. Surge protection equipment shall be UL listed and labeled for its intended use. Where applicable, equipment shall comply with ANSI standards for such equipment.

3.3 SPECIAL NOTE: The physical routing, length and connections of the unit's

phase, neutral and ground conductors are critical to the performance of surge suppression units. The Contractor shall carefully observe and comply with the manufacturer's installation requirements and shall not exceed three feet of length.

PART 4 – SUBMITTALS 4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on surge protection systems and

components as part of shop drawing submissions. Indicate all capacity ratings, clamp times, maximum capacities, physical construction and listing agency approvals.

4.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for surge suppression

system. Include this data in Operation and Maintenance manuals.


264313�2

PART 5 – MATERIALS 5.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 5.1.1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering surge protection components which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the ones listed below. Other manufacturers will be considered if their proposed products are in full compliance with these specification requirements.

Surge Protective Devices:

To be furnished within switchgear and panelboards by such manufacturer.

PART 6 � BUILDING ELECTRICAL SERVICE SURGE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 6.1 GENERAL 6.1.1 Provide UL listed and labeled lightning and transient surge protection devices,

installed where shown on the drawings and in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations.

6.1.2 The surge protection devices shall be shunt type and polyphase, with the ability

to conduct high energy transients from line to neutral and neutral to ground. Provide in a NEMA 1 gasketed or NEMA 12 enclosure with hinged front panel. Provide a green L.E.D. or 24V pilot light to illuminate when unit is functioning normally. Provide internal fusing in modules to protect unit. Provide red pilot light to indicate failure of surge suppression or capacity reduction below unit ratings.

6.1.3 For each surge suppression unit, categories A, B & C, provide unit function status

indicators. These indicators may be mounted in the face of the equipment panel or remotely, immediately adjacent to the panel. Provide green L.E.D., illuminated for normal operation, red L.E.D. for trouble/fault or reduction of surge suppression capacity. Provide an audible alarm with silence switch to alarm at unit on malfunction for category "C" units only. Provide a surge counter for each category "C" unit to indicate each suppression operation of the unit.

6.1.4 Proposed substitutions for the manufacturer's model numbers listed here shall

meet or exceed the current published performance data for the units listed, and shall be submitted to the Engineer ten working days prior to bid for review.

6.1.5 Category "B" and "C" units shall be provided inside the electrical panelboards

and switchgear while category “A” to be flush�mounted in finished areas, or as noted.

6.1.6 Provide integral fused disconnecting means for each surge protection device.


264313�3

6.1.7 Internal Device Overcurrent Protection (Fusing): All protection modes (including

Neutral to Ground) of each surge suppression device shall be internally fused at the component level with fuse I²T capability allowing the suppressor's maximum rated transient current to pass through the suppressor without fuse operation. If the rated I²T characteristic of the fusing is exceeded, the fusing shall be capable of opening in less than one millisecond and clear both high and low impedance fault conditions. The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to 200 KA symmetrical fault current with 600 VAC applied. This overcurrent protection circuit shall be monitored, to provide indication of suppression failure. Conductor level fuses or circuit breakers internal or external to the surge suppression units are not acceptable as meeting this requirement.

6.1.8 Units shall be provided with L.E.D. status monitors and event counters. 6.2 MAIN SERVICE SURGE SUPPRESSION � CATEGORY "C" UNITS 6.2.1 Category "C" units shall be installed as indicated on the contract documents and

shall be heavy duty type. All units shall be 3 phase, 4 wire and shall have the following tested values: Line to Neutral 250,000 amperes; Line to Ground 250,000 amperes; Line to Line 250,000 amperes; and Neutral to Ground 250,000 amperes. All MOV's shall be individually fused with a UL 248�1 fuse. The unit shall have a NEMA designed and certified safety interlocked integral disconnect switch with an externally mounted manual operator.

6.3 PANELBOARD SURGE SUPPRESSION � CATEGORY "B" PARALLEL�WIRED UNITS 6.3.1 Units shall be installed as indicated on the contract documents, and connected as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 6.3.2 Category "B" units shall be 277�480 volts (or 120/208 volts, as indicated), 3Ø�4

Wire Wye service. Units shall be rated at 80,000 amperes per mode. Voltage peak clamping to occur at approximately 150% of line voltage, or less. Provide fusing and fault indicator pilot lights as in (A) � General above.

6.4 TELEPHONE AND TELEVISION SURGE SUPPRESSION 6.4.1 As a part of this section of work, the Contractor shall provide U.L. listed lightning

and surge arrestors on the incoming telephone, video, and television service lines.

6.4.2 Arrestors shall be U.L. listed, properly grounded per N.E.C., and shall be located

at the service entrance points for each cable. Also provide surge arrestors of the proper type for copper cables that are installed between buildings by the Contractor.


264313�4

6.4.3 Arrestors for telephone lines shall be RJ�45 in/out, complete with RJ�45 jumpers as needed. Provide quantity as required, connecting one to each phone line. Provide two spare units to Owner for future use.

6.4.4 Arrestors for coaxial lines shall be 25 to 250 MHZ on cable T.V. lines (with BNC

jacks in/out or as required by antenna connectors). 6.4.5 Provide a ground lug for individual surge suppression unit installations, with the

recommended ground wire size routed back to the building main electrical ground.

6.4.6 Where multiple surge suppression units are installed, as at service entrance

locations, provide a ground bar, copper with multiple tapped holes and a properly sized ground lead routed back to the building main electrical ground.

PART 7 � EXECUTION 7.1 Installation of Surge Protection Systems: 7.1.1 Install surge protection systems as indicated and in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with applicable requirements of NFPA, local prevailing codes and with UL lightning and power surge protection standards to ensure that surge suppression systems comply with requirements.

7.1.2 Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work as necessary to

interface installation of units. 7.1.3 Install conductors with direct, shortest possible phase, neutral and ground paths

from all in/out connections, avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops. 7.1.4 Install surge suppression units as close as practical to equipment they are

protecting. Install appropriate units at main electrical service entrance equipment and secondary branch panelboards as indicated.

7.1.5 Refer to the drawings for installation of individual surge suppression devices to

protect branch circuits. Also see Section 262726 for (receptacle type) device requirements. All receptacle type surge suppression units shall be wired as feed�thru type, to protect all downstream outlets on that branch circuit unless otherwise indicated.

7.1.6 Suppressors shall be installed such that conductor lengths are no more than

three feet to panel connections. 7.1.7 Where devices are indicated on drawings to be recessed, provide with flush

enclosure for recessed mounting.


264313�5

PART 8 – WARRANTIES 8.1 All surge suppression equipment shall be unconditionally warrantied by the

Contractor for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. If longer manufacturer's warranties are offered, they shall be made available to the Owner. Note these extended warranties in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals.

END OF SECTION.


265113�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 265113 � LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 Furnish and install all lighting fixtures, as herein specified, complete with lamps

and accessories for safe and effective operation. All fixtures shall be installed and left in an operable condition with no broken, damaged or soiled parts.

1.2 All items furnished shall comply with the latest standards applicable such as U.L.,

NEMA, etc., and shall bear labels accordingly. All fixtures shall be the color specified or as selected by the Architect. Wherever fixtures have evident damage, they shall be restored to new condition or shall be replaced. Likewise, fixtures showing dirt, dust or fingerprints shall be restored to new condition or shall be replaced.

1.3 Eight copies of light fixture factory shop drawings and cuts, showing fixture

dimensions, photometric data, installation data and, if applicable, air handling data, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 30 days after bid date. (Verify shop drawing quantities with the Architect.)

1.4 Locate pendant, surface mounted or chain�hung industrial fixtures in mechanical

rooms and similar spaces to avoid ductwork and piping. Locate around and between equipment to maximize the available light. Request a layout from the Engineer if uncertain about an installation. All suspended fixtures shall be mounted square and plumb.

1.5 Alternate fixtures may be substituted for types specified by name or catalog

number. Proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Engineer ten working days prior to bid date for written approval to bid. This written approval will only be issued in addendum form.

1.6 Where emergency battery packs are provided with fixtures (if any), they shall be

connected to an unswitched power line and wired in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations.

1.7 All reflecting surfaces, glass or plastic lenses, ballast housings, parabolic louvers,

downlighting Alzak cones and specular reflectors shall be handled with care during installation or lamping to avoid fingerprints or dirt deposits. It is preferred that louvers be shipped and installed with clear plastic bags to protect louvers. At close of project, and after construction air filters are changed, remove bags. Any louver or cone showing dirt or fingerprints shall be cleaned with solvent recommended by the manufacturer to a like�new condition, or replaced as necessary in order to turn over to the Owner new fixtures at beneficial occupancy.

1.8 Refer to architectural details as applicable for recessed soffit fluorescent fixtures


265113�2

or wherever fixture installations depend upon work of other trades. Coordinate all installations with other trades. Verify dimensions of spaces for fixtures, and if necessary, adjust lengths to assure proper fit and illumination of diffuser and/or area below.

1.9 Pre�manufactured or built to suit flexible wiring systems are not permitted for

this project. PART 2 � VOLTAGE 2.1 All lighting fixtures shall be rated 120, 277 or 480 volts, single phase as

indicated or required. PART 3 � BALLASTS 3.1 Electronic Ballast Specification 3.1.1 Fluorescent ballast shall to be electronic, programmed start to operate at a

frequency of 40KHz or higher with less than 2% lamp flicker, at an input voltage of 108 to 132 VAC (120 volt line) or 249 to 305 VAC (277 volt line) at an input frequency of 60 Hz, .88 ballast factor unless otherwise indicated on light fixture schedule. Light output to remain constant for line voltage of + 4%. Ballast to comply with EMI and RFI limits set by FCC (CFR 47 part 18) for normal electrical equipment and have less than 1.5 lamp current crest factor (or less if required by the fluorescent lamp supplier). Verify this prior to submitting shop drawings. Ballast to meet ANSI Standard 82.41 and be UL listed Class P, Type I. Ballast shall be non�PCB bearing, shall be rapid start.

3.1.2 Ballast to have less than 10% total harmonic distortion with less than 6% third

harmonic distortion. Ballast to have "A" sound rating with a power factor greater than .99 and have a twenty year rated life. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without resetting power. Ballasts used shall operate 1, 2, 3 or 4 T8 lamps as specified in the light fixture specification. Use ballast to match number of lamps in fixture, and meet all switching requirements as shown on the drawings. Ballasts shall be unconditionally warranted by the manufacturer for a period of five years from project beneficial occupancy. (Also see note at beginning of light fixture schedule.)

3.1.2.1 Sylvania, Advance and GE are acceptable manufacturers. 3.1.2.2 Provide in�line fuse�holder(s), with fuse sized per manufacturer's

recommendations for each fixture. 3.2 Where lighting standards have fuses protecting ballasts, an in�line type of

fuseholder shall be located at the base of the pole, readily accessible behind the handhole coverplate. Where multiple circuited luminaires are on a single pole, identify the separate fuseholders.


265113�3

PART 4 � LAMPS 4.1 Lamps furnished and installed in indicated fixtures shall be as manufactured by

G.E., Phillips, Sylvania or Venture. Wherever possible, all lamps provided shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

4.2 All incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 volts with a medium screw type base

(or as required) in wattages less than 300 watts and 130 volts, mogul screw type base in 300 watts and larger.

4.3 Fluorescent lamps shall be “Super” T8 (one inch diameter), various lengths,

wattages, with 3100 initial lumens and 3000 design lumens for 48” lamps, with a color rendering index (C.R.I.) of 85 or higher, medium bi�pin base configuration. Normal color to be 4100° Kelvin unless specified otherwise on light fixture schedule. Normal power input to be 32 watts for 48" lamps. Lamps to have an average life of 30,000 hours at three hours per start on a programmed start ballast. Lamps to operate at 265MA and shall be low mercury, green cap type. Sylvania, Philips, and General Electric are acceptable manufacturers.

4.4 Compact fluorescent lamps shall be Phillips "PL", G.E. "Biax" or Osram. All

compact fluorescent lamp/ballast combinations shall be rated for high power factor. No low power factor lamp/ballast combinations may be used.

PART 5 � LIGHT FIXTURE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5.1 Fluorescent Recessed Lighting Fixtures � General Requirements 5.1.1 The following are minimum requirements for recessed fluorescent fixtures for

lay�in grid, gypsum board, plaster and concealed spline ceilings. Surface�mounted fluorescent fixture requirements shall be similar.

5.1.2 Housings shall be premium specification grade, constructed of a minimum 22

gauge die embossed or stiffened cold rolled pre�treated rust�resistant steel. 5.1.3 All parts, including back of fixture, shall be finished with polyester powder or

white baked enamel (85% minimum reflectance) painted after fabrication. All wiring shall be type TFN, or THWN and shall be covered by the steel ballast cover, wiring channel, or socket track. Exposed wiring is not acceptable. Connection wiring shall be accessible thru a hinged access plate above ballast channel in top of unit.

5.1.4 Flexible manufactured wiring systems such as "Reloc" shall not be permitted. 5.1.5 The complete light fixture unit shall be UL listed and labeled. Other agency

listings may be acceptable with written approval from the Engineer. 5.1.6 Fixture lens doors shall be regressed white aluminum, reversible, hinged, painted


265113�4

after fabrication, with spring�loaded latches. 5.1.7 Lens shall be as specified for each fixture type. If a specific manufacturer and

series number of lens is listed, the substitute shall be of the exact specification (thickness, prism configurations, transparency, efficiency, photometric distribution, hardness, vandal�resistance, etc.). Minimum average thickness of any prismatic lens shall be 0.125".

5.1.8 Fixture trim and/or flanges shall conform with ceiling constructions as required.

Verify all types prior to submission of shop drawings and indicate any special types on submittals. Fixtures installed in drywall or plaster ceilings to be provided with flange, screed and swing gate anchoring system.

5.1.9 All fixtures shall be furnished with hold down clips to meet applicable seismic

codes, four clips per fixture minimum or the equivalent thereof in the installation trim. Contractor to install clips per manufacturer's requirements. If screws are required, they shall be provided. Verify thickness of drywall or plaster ceilings prior to submission of shop drawings, to allow for proper trim adjustment.

5.1.10 Support fixtures four wires, with one hanger wire at each end of fixture unit,

fastened to the fixture body and to the structure above. Hanger wires shall be installed within 15° of plumb, maximum or additional support shall be provided. Wires shall be attached to the fixture body and to the building structure � not to the supports of other work or equipment. Wire gauge shall be same as ceiling support.

5.1.11 Where building structure is located such that 15° cannot be maintained, the

Contractor shall provide "Unistrut" or similar structure to meet this requirement. 5.1.12 Special Note: This wire suspension and seismic clip requirement shall

also apply to exit lights, downlights, emergency battery pack units or any fixture mounted to or supported by lay�in grid ceilings.

5.1.13 Each type of fluorescent (or other type) lay�in fixture shall be furnished with the

proper housing flange or lip to suit the type of lay�in grid(s) being utilized on the project. The Contractor is to verify if narrow or standard grid members are being furnished and provide the proper type of light fixture trim. Indicate any special trims on shop drawing submittals.

5.1.14 Lamps shall be as specified in lamp section of these specifications, and suitable

for use in the fixture intended. If the lighting fixture manufacturer requires a specific lamp for optimum performance, that lamp shall be furnished.

5.1.15 Do not provide pressure�lock or any other type of lampholder unless specifically

indicated to the contrary or required by local codes. Fixtures may be shipped from the factory with lamps installed, at the Contractor's option.


265113�5

5.2 Industrial and Striplight Fluorescent Fixtures � General Requirements 5.2.1 Units shall have die�formed heavy gauge cold rolled steel channels and die�

embossed reflectors. 5.2.2 Finishes to be coated with a gloss powder paint or baked enamel finish with a

minimum 85% reflectance. 5.2.3 Units to have aligner clips where required for a continuous row appearance.

Where continuous rows exceed twelve feet in length, provide a "unistrut" channel or similarly adequate mounting to stiffen and align row.

5.2.4 Units to have captive latches for ballast covers, heavy�duty lampholders and wire

guards where specified. Wire guards shall be heavy�duty #14 wire gauge) minimum with corrosion�resistant plated or vinyl finish.

5.2.4.1 Ballasts to be as specified herein. 5.2.4.2 Units to be UL listed. 5.2.5 Mounting brackets and hanging mechanisms shall be as specified in fixture

descriptions, or as required. Allow a generous safety margin with all support systems, as recommended by the manufacturer.

5.3 Recessed Ellipsoidal or Parabolic Cone Downlight � General Requirements 5.3.1 Fixture to have an extruded or die�cast aluminum lampholder housing.

Retaining mechanism shall provide easy access to lamp and ballast junction box. Lamp holders shall be U.L. listed, compatible with the lamp type specified. All sockets shall be porcelain or high temperature plastic. No bakelite or fiber material shall be used.

5.3.2 Unit to have a corrosion�resistant steel junction box with bottom hinged access

covers and thermal protector. 5.3.3 Mounting/plaster frame to be heavy gauge steel with finishing trim friction

support springs, for the required ceiling thickness. Trim to be of color as selected by the Architect.

5.3.4 Optical system to consist of a specular clear Alzak upper ellipsoidal (or parabolic,

as noted) reflector with specular Alzak cone or microgroove matte black baffle as noted in schedule. Units shall have a UL approved clear tempered glass protection lens where used with metal halide or quartz lamp. Where other than clear Alzak cone/reflector color is noted on the schedule, it shall be furnished as specified.

5.3.5 Ballast to be HPF CWA 120 volt. Fixture to have a prewired, encased and potted


265113�6

ballast tray module. Ballast to be lowest sound rating available for the class and wattage of lamp.

5.3.6 Provide telescoping channel bar hangers that adjust vertically and horizontally. 5.3.7 Minimum flange shall match cone finish or provide painted color as selected by

the Architect on black microgroove baffle types. 5.3.8 Lamps shall be as specified in lamp section of these specifications. 5.3.9 Fixtures to be UL listed for thru�branch circuit wiring, recessed, and damp

locations. Where installed in plaster or drywall or other inaccessible ceiling type, they shall be U.L. listed for bottom access.

5.3.10 Refer to other sections of this specification for quartz restrike option

requirements. 5.4 Exit Lights � General Requirements 5.4.1 Housings and canopies shall be die�cast aluminum or corrosion resistant steel.

All exit lights shall be wall mounted and shall be mounted tight to wall, without back canopies.

5.4.2 Provide with stencil face, lettering color red, of sizes in accord with code, or as

otherwise specified. 5.4.3 Provide single or double face as scheduled, indicated on plans or as required by

the local authority having jurisdiction. Adjust installation position if required for clear visibility, in accord with applicable codes.

5.4.4 Complete unit to be finished in color as selected by the Architect. 5.4.5 Provide directional arrows as indicated on plans, as scheduled to suit the means

of egress or as required by the local authority having jurisdiction. 5.4.6 Use light emitting diode type illumination (L.E.D.). Exit light shall be provided

with a 5 year manufacturer's warranty, unconditional. 5.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 5.5.1 Note: Each vendor proposing to bid the materials specified herein below is

cautioned to review all requirements of the Contract Documents, as they may apply to the work involved, particularly Specifications Section 16090 � Articles 1 thru 5. The general materials requirements are to be met in their entirety by the contractors and vendors supplying these materials.

5.5.2 Note: Unless otherwise noted, all 48" dimension fixtures shall be provided with

48" “Super” T8 32 watt 3100 lumen lamps, quantity as specified, with


265113�7

companion 2, 3 or 4 lamp electronic ballasts. Where fixtures with ballasts have switches that controls lamps individually or in groups, the proper number of separate ballasts shall be provided. Refer to the drawings for specific control information.

5.5.3 TYPE DESCRIPTION Refer to drawings for schedule. 5.5.4 Note: All manufacturers including those specified are to provide Engineer with

manufacturer generated and guaranteed computer point�by�point calculations of the Cafeteria, Gym, Media Center, Computer Labs, Lobby and stage. Grid on 2'�0" centers. Utilize 85% ceiling/60% walls/30% floor reflectances, with point�by�points expressed across a 30" high workplane for all printouts. Note: Point�by�points plotted so small as to be illegible when faxed, must be mailed or delivered by hand. Printouts to be submitted with fixture brochures containing photometrics with Isolux patterns ten days prior to bid for written prior approval.

END OF SECTION.


265561�1

DIVISION 26 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 265561 – THEATRICAL LIGHTING, DIMMING AND CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Refer to Bid forms, Division 1 and Division 26 General Conditions. It is called to

the Electrical Contractor's attention that the work of this section includes all requirements listed therein.

1.2 The systems: complete functioning apparatus consistent with the current state of

the art of theatrical practice and including all components necessary for the operational functions specified, whether or not each separate device is specifically mentioned.

1.3 Furnish all required control wiring. All components necessary to make the system

a working Network shall be included in the bid. 1.4 Attention is called to the requirement to protect control electronics and dimmer

outputs from momentary voltage changes which may be caused by clock systems. Systems and components are called out based on the products of specific The Theatrical Dimming and Automated Rigging Systems Manufacturer ETC. The services of systems integration firms responsibilities are specified herein. Alternative proposals will be considered, provided they meet or exceed the requirements noted in this specification.

1.5 The Theatrical Lighting Systems Integration Contractor shall coordinate the

installation of complete Specialty Lighting and Rigging Systems and other equipment as described herein and shown on the Theatrical drawings

1.6 The Electrical Contractor and the Theatrical Lighting and Automated Rigging

Systems Integration contractor shall refer to this specification and the drawings to confirm each entity's exact scope of work. Inform the Architect and Engineer prior to the completion of scope clarification of any conflicts or unresolved scope issues in order that they may determine appropriate responsibilities and document this decision.

1.7 Equipment manufacturers authorized system integrator shall test installed

system, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation of the system, and assist the owner in Programming the network and theatrical lighting and rigging controls.

1.8 CLASSES OF MATERIALS AND INSTALLATIONS SPECIALTY LIGHTING DIMMING

AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 1.8.1 Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for the complete installation of

specialty lighting, dimming, automated rigging and control systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein.


265561�2

1.8.2 Refer to drawings for dimensions and locations. Check and verify dimensions and

details on drawings before proceeding with the Work. Report any discrepancy at once to Engineer. Should it appear the Work intended to be described, or any of the matters relative thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or in the specifications, apply to the Engineer for further drawings for explanations, as may be necessary. Conform to these explanations in the Work. If any question arises about the true meaning of the drawings or specifications, refer the matter to the Electrical Engineer whose decision is final and conclusive. In no case submit a bid, or proceed on any work with uncertainty. The intention of this specification and the accompanying applicable drawings are to provide a job complete in every respect. Electrical Contractor is responsible for this result.

1.9 INTENT 1.9.1 It is the intent of the contract requirements to provide a complete specialty

dimming, lighting and automated rigging control package as described herein including delivery and installation. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for complete lighting, controls, dimming and automated rigging systems. The Theatrical Systems Integration Contractor is responsible to coordinate with and assist the Electrical Contractor to properly execute the work of this section.

1.9.2 These systems shall consist of the components and functions as described

herein, shop drawings, as�built drawings, installation, engineering supervision for check�out of installation, operation/maintenance manuals, and on�site operation instructions to local Personnel. The systems shall be a complete functioning apparatus consistent with the current state of the practice of lighting and automated rigging industry and including all components necessary for the operational functions described whether or not each separate device is specifically mentioned. Provide and install any conduit and wire required.

1.9.3 Electrical Contractor and Theatrical Systems Contractor shall coordinate this

work with other trades. 1.10 COORDINATION 1.10.1 Clearly indicate the Work to be performed by other trade Contractors, and the

materials which are adjacent or abutting the Work of this Section. Coordinate as required, especially with concrete, drywall and painting contractors to insure a "finished" fixture and plug�in Installation.

1.10.2 Fixture land plug�in locations as indicated on the electrical drawings are

generalized and approximate carefully verify locations with Electrical Engineer's plans, and other reference data prior to installation.

1.10.3 Furnish the materials and labor for Work included under this Section in ample

time; and in sufficient quantities so that all of the Work may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of paving and walls.


265561�3

1.10.4 Coordinate and Schedule the work of this Section with the Work of other

Sections, utility Companies and the telephone company so that there shall be no delay in the proper Installation and completion of any part of each respective Work. Construction Work shall proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay caused by the Work of this Section.

1.10.5 Arrange scheduling of Work to prevent Work of this Section being damaged.

Remove and replace any work so damaged at no cost to Owner. 1.10.6 Where Work of this Section is to be flush or concealed, install it to assure that it

does not project beyond the finished lines of pavement, ceilings or walls. 1.10.7 Although the location of equipment included in the Work of this Section may be

shown on The Contract Drawings in a certain place. Actual construction may disclose that the location for the work does not make its position easily and quickly accessible. In such cases, call Engineer's attention to this situation before installing this Work, and comply with his Installation instructions.

1.10.8 Verify item conditions and furnish appropriate mounting details for each fixture.

Such mounting details shall be approved by Electrical Engineer and Theatrical Systems Contractor.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCES 1.11.1 A Theatrical Systems Contractor shall be included by each bidder with its team.

Each Theatrical Systems Contractor will be required to demonstrate their understanding of the project scope, their capability to coordinate and execute their portion of the work, and their ability to respond to warranty and ongoing service calls as specified herein.

1.11.2 Statement of Application: The Electrical Contractor, by commencing the Work of

this section\assumes overall responsibility, as part of the warranty for the Work, to assure that assemblies, components and parts shown or required within the Work of this Section, comply with the contract Documents.

1.12 STANDARDS 1.12.1 All applicable requirements of Division 1, and all other sections of Division 26

govern all work in this Section. I 1.12.2 NFPA 70 national Electrical Code 2005. 1.12.3 All equipment: U.L. listed. Proof of listing shall be provided. 1.12.4 All moving parts: have acceptable tolerances, mountings, connections, and

accessories coordinated into the system in a manner approved by the Owner and Electrical Engineer. No wood construction or equipment shall be incorporated into


265561�4

the system excepting as may be set Forth in the specifications. 1.12.5 All electrical and electronic parts and components: selected and installed

consistent with good practice and conservatively rated in their use in the circuit design. Each piece of equipment shall meet accepted basic engineering standards.

1.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.13.1 Lighting, Dimming and Automated Rigging Systems and their component

elements shall be delivered to this job site factory assembled and wired to the greatest extent practical, in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings, samples, certificates, and shall be handled in a careful manner to avoid damage.

1.13.2 Exposed finishes shall be protected during manufacture, transport, storage and

handling. Materials which become damaged shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed.

1.13.3 Delivered equipment shall include wiring, sockets, ballasts, shielding, channels,

lenses, lamps and other parts and appurtenances necessary for fixture installation of each fixture type.

1.14 FIELD ENGINEERING SERVICES 1.14.1 Manufacturer: furnish engineering assistance as needed during delivery and

installation to assist contractor. A qualified Field Engineer shall check the installation prior to initial energization of the system. The field engineer shall supervise initial turn�on and shall make or cooperate with the installing contractor in making any required adjustments or trimming of components to enable the system to function as specified.

1.14.2 The Field Engineer shall be fully experienced in the programming requirements

of all the Electrical controllers. 1.14.3 As a portion of the final inspection, the Field Engineer will demonstrate the

systems in the presence of the Engineer, Owner and/or Electrical Engineer, as directed, proving it to be operating properly and shall provide instructions in the use and in the Owner performed maintenance of the system.

1.14.4 The Theatrical Lighting Systems Contractor and the Field Engineer shall provide

instruction in system operation and maintenance: a minimum 24 hour period spread over at least three (3) working days, separate from the demonstration and offered at the Convenience of the Owner's schedule in the presence of the Electrical Engineer. Videotape In a clear and professional manner the instruction session.


265561�5

1.15 INSPECTIONS 1.15.1 The Electrical Contractor shall arrange for the Electrical Engineer to attend a

minimum of two (2) coordination meetings during the construction. 1.15.1.1 Pre�installation conference prior to the installation of major conduit rough�ins

and dimmer rack placement. 1.15.1.2 Post rough�in conference after conduit has been roughed in and dimmer

racks have been installed but before major load and control wiring is pulled and/or dimmer rack Terminations have begun.

1.15.2 Attendance by the Electrical Engineer at any preliminary conference and or

inspection shall not be construed as eliminating the possible rejection of various components during the final inspection.

1.15.3 The final inspection shall be by the Electrical Engineer. Completion of all items

and acceptance of the lighting control system as substantially complete shall be required prior to Owner’s training.

1.15.4 If inspection reveals any detail of construction, fabrication, or installation not in

strict accord with the specification or the contract requirements; approval and payment will be withheld in accordance with the General Conditions. Any additional inspections on the part of the Engineer/Electrical Engineer caused by the lighting control system not being completed when the Inspection is called will be borne by the Sub�contractor.

1.16 TESTING 1.16.1 Standard factory test of manufacturer shall be performed and typewritten copies

submitted to the Owner for record purposes. 1.16.2 The manufacturer shall provide for final adjustments for systems. These

adjustments shall accomplish at least the following: 1.16.2.1 Provide smooth, continuous light level control from zero percent light output

through full light output for both increasing and decreasing light levels. 1.16.2.2 Limit dimmer output voltage to incandescent circuits of house lighting to

between 90 and 95 percent of the rated lamp voltage, as directed. 1.16.2.3 Eliminate all radio frequency interference. 1.16.3 During testing and adjustment of the systems it will be necessary to rearrange

portable fixtures from circuit to circuit in order to test each dimmer for compliance with operating requirements. Contractor shall provide labor for testing as directed.


265561�6

1.16.4 The manufacturer shall provide labor to assist the Electrical Engineer with field

configuration of system software during final adjustments and inspection of installation.

1.17 SPECIALTY LIGHTING CLOSEOUT SERVICES 1.17.1 The Theatrical Lighting Systems Integration Contractor shall provide an

allowance for initial programming with the owner. 1.17.2 The Theatrical Lighting Systems Integration Contractor shall provide sixteen (16)

hours minimum for initial programming with the owner in addition to the manufacturers' turn�on and programming time.

1.18 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES 1.18.1 All equipment and components: approved and Listed by UL where applicable

standards have been established. This approval applies specifically but is not limited to Dimmers, Dimmer and Power Racks, Breaker Panels, Devices, and Fixtures and Automated Rigging Equipment.

1.18.2 All equipment: manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable

portions of the latest editions of UL, NEMA, ASA, AlEE, USITT, ESTA and IPECA standards.

1.19 ACCESSORIES 1.19.1 All loose accessories: delivered to the owner and installed or stored as directed. 1.20 WARRANTY 1.20.1 All systems, including all parts and labor, shall be under full warranty for a

period of not less than two (2) years from the date of written final acceptance. In the event that any of the Equipment should fail to produce capacities or meet design characteristics as specified, it shall be replaced with equipment that will meet requirements without additional cost. After occupancy, any necessary work performed shall be done at the convenience of the Owner's operational schedule, including overtime, if required.

1.21 MAINTENANCE SERVICES 1.21.1 The Theatrical Lighting Systems Integrator shall maintain a theatrical lighting

control and rigging systems service center with a minimum of one (1) factory�trained full�time service Technician. The service center shall be located within one hundred and fifty (150) miles of Louisville, Kentucky. The service center and the named technician shall have been authorized in writing by the Specialty Dimming and Rigging Systems Manufacturer to perform all necessary maintenance, repairs and upgrades to both the equipment and its embedded /


265561�7

accessible software. Provide proof of such authorization. In addition, the Manufacturer shall maintain a 24�hour service hotline and shall provide certification of its existence.

1.22 SUBMITTALS 1.22.1 Manufacturer shall provide eight (8) sets of full system submittals. Submittals

shall include: 1.22.1.1 Full system riser diagram(s) illustrating interconnection of system

components, wiring requirements, back box sizes and any special installation considerations.

1.22.1.2 Full set of printed technical data sheets. 1.22.1.3 Detailed set of dimmer schedules. 1.22.1.4 Detailed set of circuit and control schedules, including a complete list of all

deviations from specifications. 1.22.1.5 Full set of floor plans. 1.22.2 Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of such parts determined defective

upon inspection. 1.22.3 Manufacturer shall provide any additional information, including equipment

demonstrations, as required by the engineer and owner to verify compliance with specifications.

1.23 MANUFACTURER 1.23.1 Manufacturer shall be one who has been continuously engaged in the

manufacturer of lighting control equipment for a minimum of ten years. 1.23.2 The manufacturer shall have a factory authorized stocking service center with at

least one full time service technician on staff located within 150 miles of the job site. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a toll free 24�hour hotline with a maximum response time of 20 minutes, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year.

1.23.3 All equipment, where applicable standards have been established, shall be built

to the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., the National Electric Code and the United States Institute for Theater Technology. Permanently installed power distribution equipment such as dimmer racks and distribution shall be UL and C�UL Listed, and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bears the appropriate labels. Portable equipment such as consoles and fixtures shall be UL and C�UL Listed, ETL Listed and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels.


265561�8

1.24 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.24.1 See Product specifications 1.24.2 Permission to bid does not imply acceptance of the manufacturer. It is the sole

responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for controls systems that meet or exceed the specifications.

PART 2 � PRODUCT 2.1 LIGHTING CONSOLE AND ACCESSORIES (CC) 2.1.1 Approved Products:

• Avab – Pronto • ETC – Element • Martin – Maxxyz • Colortran • Lightolier Controls (IGBT Systems)

2.1.2 The lighting control console shall be a microprocessor�based system specifically

designed to provide complete control of stage, studio, and entertainment lighting systems.

2.1.3 The control system shall be Net3 and ETCNet2 native, with both protocols output

simultaneously over the network. The system shall also be able to control third party ACN devices directly. The system shall provide control of 1024 outputs on 250 channels.

2.1.4 A maximum of 10,000 cues, 1000 groups, 1000 Intensity Palettes, 1000 Color

Palettes, 1000 Focus Palettes, 1000 Beam Palettes, 1000 effects, 1000 macros and 100 curves may be contained in non�volatile electronic memory and stored to an onboard hard disk or to any USB storage device.

2.1.5 The console may be placed in Tracking or Cue Only mode by the user as a

system default and overridden on individual record actions as required. 2.1.6 A Master Playback fader pair and dedicated Grand Master/Blackout shall be

provided. 2.1.7 The console shall provide 40 pageable faders and bump keys that may be

operated in either LTP channel or HTP/LTP submaster mode. The console shall support a total of 300 submasters.

2.1.8 A high�resolution level wheel shall be provided to control intensity for selected

channels and scrolling within selected displays. On demand moving light controls shall be provided for control of other non�intensity parameters. Non�intensity


265561�9

parameters shall be controllable via the on demand or keypad controls. 2.1.9 On demand moving light controls shall provide mouse�based tools for non�

intensity parameters. The tools shall display the current value for each parameter and shall provide controls for adjusting each parameter.

2.1.10 Control and programming features for automated fixtures shall also include: a

standard library of fixture profiles, the ability to copy and edit existing profiles and create new profiles, patch displays including channel and output addressing, 16�bit fade resolution, color characterization allowing color mixing and storing in Hue and Saturation or native device values.

2.1.11 System information, including playback status, live output and blind values for

all record targets shall be displayed on a maximum of two external high resolution DVI monitors, or one SVGA monitor, which may also be touch�screen(s). Only one display shall be required for operation.

2.1.12 The system shall direct user input through on�screen dynamic prompts and

integral LEDs on console keys indicating current operating mode. A context sensitive on�line Help feature shall explain and provide an example of the operation of each feature of the system.

2.1.13 An optional, fully�functioning, detachable alphanumeric keyboard shall be

supported. The keyboard shall allow labeling of channels, cues, presets, groups, palettes, effects, macros, curves and the show. An integral electronic keyboard shall be provided.

2.1.14 A row of softkeys shall be provided, which change function based on the

selection and context of the console. These softkeys shall be labeled on the connected external display.

2.1.15 Console software upgrades shall be made by the user via a USB port; changing

internal components shall not be required. 2.1.16 The console operating software shall be loaded into program execution memory

from the internal hard drive when the console is powered. In the event of an uncontrolled shutdown, the console shall return to its last output state when power is restored.

2.1.17 Show data may be created and modified on a personal computer, using either

Windows XP or Vista operating systems, using a free offline editing application. The offline editor may also run natively on Macintosh platforms using OS X.

2.1.18 A PC, using Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7, or a Macintosh computer running

OS X, running a client software application shall be able to connect to a control system via the network and view current show data in a mirrored display environment.


265561�10

2.1.19 The system shall allow remote control from a purpose�built wireless remote focus unit (Radio Focus Remote). Systems without these remote control devices shall not be acceptable.

2.1.20 The system shall support a Telephone remote control that allows basic functions

to be controlled from a standard wireless phone producing touch�tone signals. This allows the use of a standard telephone for a low cost remote control. Systems that do not allow this function shall not be acceptable.

2.1.21 The system shall support up to 16 individual Time Code Event lists. 2.1.22 CONTROLS AND PLAYBACK 2.1.22.1 Manual Control and Programming Section

• The console keyboard shall be grouped by function. Major groupings shall be record target functions, numeric keys, level assignment functions, display navigation functions and controls.

• Non�intensity parameters may be set numerically or via the on demand

moving light controls. This control shall be fully interactive. In either case the current parameter value shall be displayed on the console monitor.

• Only those parameters available for control in the active lighting system

shall be displayed for control.

• Lamp controls provide direct access to luminaire functions such as striking and dousing arc lamps and calibrating entire fixtures or individual mechanisms of fixtures, as provided by the luminaire manufacturer. User access to these features is normalized across all manufacturers for ease of use. Use of a “control channel” for accessing these functions shall not be required and systems requiring use of a control channel shall not be acceptable.

• Fixtures with CMY or RBG color mixing may be set with direct CMY or RBG

controls, as well as the Hue and Saturation controls and/or color picker. Color may also be set directly to a gel match, normalized to 3200K.

2.1.23 PLAYBACK SECTION 2.1.23.1 The master fader shall consist of a 60mm Master Fader pair with associated

Load, Go and Stop/Back buttons. 2.1.23.2 It shall be possible to instantaneously halt an active cue, go back to the

previous cue, manually override the intensity fade or manually override the entire fade.

2.1.24 INTEGRAL CHANNEL/SUBMASTER FADERS


265561�11

2.1.24.1 Submaster and fader support shall be provided via 40 or 60 integral 45mm

faders with bump leys. These faders shall be pageable and shall operate in LTP channel and LTP/HTP submaster modes.

2.1.24.2 LTP channel mode shall allow the user access to intensity of the first 120

channels and shall operate with LTP logic. Faders that are not currently set to the same level as the corresponding channel shall have to be matched to that level before affecting said channel.

2.1.24.3 Up to 240 proportional, fully overlapping additive or inhibitive submasters

may be defined. Submasters shall have colored LEDs to indicate submaster status. Each submaster may have fade up, dwell and down fade times. Each has a bump and assert/channel select button. Submasters may be set to independent, exclusive and proportional/intensity master control.

2.1.24.4 The submaster blind buffer shall be linked directly to live playback allowing

live editing of live submaster content via the command line. 2.1.24.5 It shall be possible to set submaster values directly from the command line. 2.1.25 GRAND MASTER 2.1.25.1 A dedicated 60mm grand master and blackout button are provided. 2.1.25.2 The grand master shall proportionally fade intensity values to zero. Blackout

shall send all intensity outputs to zero. Non�intensity outputs shall not be affected. No additional configuration shall be required to withhold non�intensity values from Grand Master and Blackout control.

2.1.26 DISPLAY CONTROLS 2.1.26.1 Format shall change the view of selected displays. 2.1.26.2 Channel views may be displayed either in a expanded table view combining

conventional channel symbols with table views for multi�parameter devices, or in a channel summary view.

2.1.26.3 Flexichannel shall change which channels are viewed in selected displays,

based on a variety of different criteria. 2.1.26.4 Expand shall extend the selected view sequentially across connected displays. 2.1.26.5 Data shall display absolute values of referenced data. 2.1.27 OPERATING MODES 2.1.27.1 Live Mode


265561�12

• Channel lists may be constructed using the +, � and Thru keys. • Levels may be set with the keypad, level wheel and on demand moving

light controls. “Selected” channels shall be those last addressed and under keypad control.

• Sneak shall be used to restore specified channels to background states,

default values, or to send them to specified values, in user specified or default times.

• Selected channels may be set at a level or held to current values while all

other channels are set to zero using Rem Dim. Toggling Rem Dim shall restore all unselected channels to original levels. The Rem Dim level shall be user definable.

• Channels may be recorded into groups for fast recall of commonly used

channels. 1000 groups shall be available. Groups shall store selection order. The Offset function supports rapid creation of ordered groups, including reverse and random order.

• Parameter settings may be stored to Focus and Color Palettes. All

referenced data may be stored to whole numbers or to up to 99 decimal places between each whole number. It shall be possible to store 1000 of each palette type.

• Any collection of channel data, as determined by the use of “Record” or

selective store commands may be stored to palettes (as appropriate to the type).

• The following conditions may be placed on a channel or channel

parameter to be included with a cue record action. o Block flag o Note

• Cues may be recorded in any order. Up to 99 decimal cues may be

inserted between any two whole number cues. Each cue may contain a maximum of twenty parts. Parameters may be automatically assigned to specific parts or assigned when the part is created.

• It shall be possible to record cues and cue parts with the following

information: o Any collection of channel data, as determined by the use of “Record”

or selective store commands. o Cue Level timing and delays for Intensity Up and Intensity Down,

Parameter moves shall follow the Intensity Up time. o Follow or hang time o Link instruction


265561�13

o Loop value o Block and/or preheat o Curve o Label and note o Execute list to trigger other activity

• Non�intensity channel parameters may be marked (preset using

Automark. Automark presets any parameter transitions in the cue just prior to intensity becoming active. Automark may be disabled on a cue or cue part basis, enabling a “live” move.

• Any channel parameter may be stored with an effect instruction. These

effects may contain relative offsets from current value, or absolute instructions. Effects may be progressive action or on/off states. Entry and exit behaviors shall modify the channel parameters activity when beginning and ending the effect.

• Update may be used to selectively add modified parameter data quickly to

that parameter’s current source. It shall be possible to update inactive record targets. It shall also be possible to update back to the current source of the move instruction without specifying that cue via Trace.

• Recall From quickly pulls specified data from record targets into the

current view. • Copy To quickly copies selected data to specified record targets. • Address and channel check functions shall be provided. • Channel parameters may be “parked” at levels. Output addresses may

also be parted directly. Parked levels shall not be added to any live record operations, nor may they be changed until the parked element is “unparked”. Address park shall also be provided.

• About shall provide detailed status of selected channels or specified record

targets, including utilization information. About shall also access lamp control functions to calibrate devices, strike and douse arc sources. Use of a luminaire control channel for these functions shall not be acceptable.

• Live data may be displayed in an expanded table view containing

conventional symbols and table views for multi�parameter devices or in a summary view.

• Undo shall be used to sequentially step back through manual operations,

record, update and delete actions. Redo functions shall be provided. Multiple undo commands may be executed at once.

• Home shall set selected channels non�intensity parameters to their default


265561�14

values. • Move shall allow all show data to be moved from one record target to

another.

2.1.28 BLIND 2.1.28.1 The Blind display allows viewing and modification of all record targets without

affecting stage levels. 2.1.28.2 Record target data may be displayed in an expanded table view containing

conventional symbols and table views for multi�parameter devices, in a summary view or a spreadsheet view, which allows quick data comparisons, move and replace with functions.

2.1.28.3 Changes made in blind displays shall be stored automatically. 2.1.28.4 Blind editing shall be possible for all record targets. 2.1.28.5 It shall be possible to show or hide parameter data in spreadsheet views for

simplicity in viewing/editing. 2.1.29 PATCH DISPLAY 2.1.29.1 Patch shall be used to display and modify the system control channels with

their associated library data. 2.1.29.2 Each channel may be provided with a proportional patch level, preheat,

curve, label, swap and invert functions. 2.1.29.3 Offset functions in patch shall allow selection of channel ranges and shall

allow the user to establish a “custom” footprint for any device output. 2.1.29.4 Custom color wheels, color scrolls and gobo wheels shall be defined in patch.

These devices shall be created with a simple table and graphical user interface supported by images of major manufacturers.

2.1.29.5 Copy to and Move functions shall be supported in patch. 2.1.30 SETUP/BROWSER 2.1.30.1 Setup shall access system, show and desk configurations. 2.1.30.2 The browser shall access show data storage, import, export, print to .pdf

and clear functions, as well as show data utilities.


265561�15

2.1.31 INTERFACE OPTIONS 2.1.31.1 The console shall support a variety of local interfaces.

• AC input. • USB ( a minimum of five ports shall be provided for connecting devices

such as a Alphanumeric keyboard, mouse, touch screens, USB Flash drive, etc.) The desk shall provide at least four ports on the rear of the console and one on the control surface itself.

• Ethernet (one port) 802.3af compliant • Two DVI video output connectors, supporting a maximum of two DVI

monitors at 1280x1024 resolution minimum. • One VGA output connector.

2.1.32 ACCESSORIES 2.1.32.1 Net3 Radio Focus Remote 2.1.32.2 Net3 Remote Video Interface 2.1.32.3 Net 3 Gateways

• Net3/ETCNet2 to DMX/RDM Gateways (one to four ports) • MIDI/SMPTE Gateways • I/O Gateway with 12 analog inputs, 12 SPDT contact outputs, RD232

interface 2.1.32.4 Element Client Software Kit 2.1.33 PHYSICAL 2.1.33.1 All operator controls and console electronics for a standard system shall be

housed in a single desktop console, not to exceed 32.9” wide, 17.9” deep, 5.1” high, weighing 30 pounds.

2.1.33.2 Console power shall be 95 – 240V AC at 50 or 60Hz, supplied via a

detachable power cord. 2.1.34 RADIO FOCUS REMOTE 2.1.34.1 The Net3 Radio Focus Remote (RFR) shall be a wireless remote control device

that allows access to a variety of system functions. The hand�held transmitter unit shall provide access to frequently used commands for dimmer and channel checks as well as extended functions of the console via softkeys. The receiver unit shall plug directly into the console via USB or may connect to the lighting system via Ethernet.

2.1.34.2 The RFR shall be compatible with the Eos and Congo lighting control systems

and their associated consoles, clients, Remote Processor Units (RPUs) and


265561�16

lighting playback controllers. 2.1.34.3 When networked, the RFR receiver may support a maximum of four

transmitters. Each system may integrate up to 10 receivers, with a maximum of 12 transmitters on the system.

2.1.34.4 The system equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 2.1.35 HANDHELD DEVICE OR TRANSMITTER 2.1.35.1 The transmitter unit shall have a slide switch (on/off), 24 keys for console

commands, two rotary encoders with built�in switches and one backlit display. The unit shall also have a programmable “sleep” feature that helps to conserve battery life when the switch is left in the “on” position.

2.1.35.2 The keys of the transmitter unit shall be illuminated. The keys will be brightly

lit while keys are pressed and the unit is transmitting. After the key is released, the keys will remain dimly lit for a period of time before the unit sleeps.

2.1.35.3 The transmitter shall have one dedicated command for each key on the unit

with the exception of the six soft keys. Dedicated commands shall be displayed within each key. Softkey functions shall be accessed via a “More SK/Mode” key and shall be indicated within the built�in display.

2.1.35.4 Functionality of the unit shall be determined by the control system it is

connected to. Eos systems shall provide Eos commands, and Congo systems shall provide Congo commands.

2.1.35.5 The transmitter unit shall be provided with rechargeable nickel metal hydride

(NimH) batteries for power. These batteries should provide approximately two days of normal usage before requiring recharging.

2.1.35.6 The transmitter shall be a rugged steel unit, 2.7"(68mm) wide, 6.6"(168mm)

high and 0.8"(20mm) deep, excluding the fixed helical antenna. The unit shall weigh 14 oz (400g), including antenna. The unit shall come complete with a hanging point for a wrist strap or lanyard.

2.1.35.7 The Radio Frequency Output for the transmitter shall be 2.410 GHz with 11

additional HF: channels available (2.410GHz � 2.465 GHz). 99 Network IDs available per channel.

2.1.35.8 The working range of the radio signal shall be 300’ (90m) in an indoor

environment and 650’ (200m) in an outdoor, free field environment.


265561�17

2.1.36 RECEIVER UNIT 2.1.36.1 The receiver unit shall be provided with a 6.6’ (2m) USB cable. The receiver

may also be plugged into an available powered Ethernet port elsewhere in the system, however the maximum distance (cable length including cable inside the wall) from the power source shall be 330’ (100m).

2.1.36.2 The receiver unit shall be powered directly by the USB connection or by a

Power�over�Ethernet connection. 2.1.36.3 A signal LED shall illuminate when the receiver is receiving radio signal from

the transmitter. 2.1.36.4 The receiver shall be housed in a unit 2.8" (71mm) wide, 4.4" (112mm) high

and 0.7" (45mm) deep, and shall weight 13 oz. (380g) including antenna. 2.2 DIMMER RACK (DM) 2.2.1 Approved Products:

• ETC – Sensor+ • EDI – MX • Lutron – GP • Colortran • Lightolier Controls (IGBT Systems)

2.2.2 The installation rack shall be the Sensor+ as manufactured by Electronic Theatre

Controls, Inc., or equal. The fully digital dimmer rack shall consist of up to 48 dimmer module spaces. Sensor rack systems shall be UL Listed and CSA Approved, and shall be so labeled when delivered to job site.

2.2.3 ELECTRICAL 2.2.3.1 Sensor racks shall operate at up to 120/208V, three phase, four wire +

ground, 47 to 63 Hz at 800 amps max. Provisions shall be made for optional amp trap devices for fault current protection. Standard AIC fault current protection shall be 100,000.

2.2.3.2 All load and neutral terminals shall accept up to a #2 AWG wire. 2.2.4 ELECTRONICS 2.2.4.1 Dimmer control electronics shall be contained in one plug�in Control

Electronics Module (CEM+). Each CEM+ shall contain no discrete wire connections, and be housed in a formed steel body with an injection�molded face panel.


265561�18

2.2.5 PHYSICAL 2.2.5.1 The Sensor dimmer rack shall be a freestanding, deadfront switchboard,

substantially framed and enclosed with 16�gauge, formed steel panels. All rack components shall be properly treated, primed and finished. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy paint. Removable top and bottom panels shall facilitate conduit termination on the 48�module rack. Knockouts shall serve the same purpose on 12 and 24 module racks.

2.2.5.2 Sensor racks shall be available in four sizes, with the following dimensions.

• SR6+ (6 module) 16.6" H x 14.8" W x 13.3" D • SR12+ (12 module) 25.8" H x 14.8" W x 13.3" D • SR24+ (24 module) 45.8" H x 14.8" W x 16.8" D • SR48+ (48 module) 83.1" H x 14.8" W x 22.8" D

2.2.5.3 Racks shall be designed for front access to allow back�to�back or side�by�side

installation. 2.2.5.4 Racks shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all modules

without the use of tools. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of dimmer modules into power and signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control terminations. Racks that require removable panels to access load, neutral or control terminations shall not be acceptable.

2.2.5.5 An optional bus bar kit shall be available from the factory to allow adjacent

racks to be powered by a single line feed. No hard, rack�to�rack wiring shall be required. Racks that require discrete cabling to connect adjacent racks shall not be acceptable.

2.2.5.6 Module spaces shall be mechanically keyed to accept only the module type

(20A, 50A or 100A) specified for that space. Racks that allow modules of varying wattages to plug into the same space shall not be acceptable. The rack shall be configurable to accept mixed dimmer types and sizes throughout the rack.

2.2.5.7 Each rack shall provide a lockable full�height door containing an integral

electrostatic air filter that shall be removable for easy cleaning. A single low�noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. The fan shall draw all intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter, over the surfaces of the module housing and out the top of the rack. The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not exceed 40°C/104°F. Dimmer racks that do not employ both locking doors and electrostatic air filters shall not be acceptable. The fan shall turn on whenever any dimmer in the system is activated. In the event of an over�temperature


265561�19

condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down and a message shall appear on the control module LCD. The fan shall remain on during thermal shutdown of individual dimmer modules.

2.2.5.8 An airflow sensor shall be provided. In the event of inadequate airflow, the

affected rack shall shut down until the error is corrected. 2.2.5.9 If the ambient room temperature drops below 0°C/32°F or rises above 40°

C/104°F, a warning shall appear on the dimmer rack LCD. If the temperature rises above 46°C/115°F, the rack shall shut down until the condition is corrected.

2.2.5.10 A 3 x .5�inch LED status indicator (beacon) shall be mounted in the rack

door. The beacon shall be visible throughout a wide viewing angle. In normal operation conditions, this LED is illuminated. If the rack's control module senses an error condition, the beacon shall flash until the error is corrected. An optional indicator shall be available for remote locations.

2.3 CONTROL ELECTRONICS MODULE 2.3.1 The dimmer rack electronics shall be contained in one plug�in Control Electronics

Module (CEM+). Each control module shall plug into a dimming cabinet, with no discrete wire connections. A simple user interface shall be provided for group configuration, testing and diagnostics. The control module shall be UL/cUL Listed and CE Marked.

2.3.2 The control module shall be completely digital without employing any

digital�to�analog de�multiplexing schemes or analog ramping circuits. 2.3.3 CONTROL MODULE INTERFACE 2.3.3.1 A backlit 7�button keypad and 2�line�by�20�character backlit LCD shall be

provided for configuration, preset control, status and error indication as well as diagnostics.

• The seven buttons shall be Accept, Back, Plus, Minus, Home and Test as

well as Reset. 2.3.3.2 The front panel shall have four status LED indicators: a blue LED for power

status and three green LEDs for Network, DMX A, and DMX B status. 2.3.4 CONTROL SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 2.3.4.1 The control module shall be provided with an Ethernet control signal input.

This input shall be fully configurable with a range of patching and priority programming capabilities. The Ethernet signal shall supply seamless integration between the dimmer racks and both the entertainment and Electrical Engineerural lighting control systems. The Ethernet signal shall also


265561�20

enable remote configuration, playback, file storage and monitoring features on a personal computer on the network.

2.3.4.2 Two optically isolated DMX512 inputs shall also be provided, allowing

overlapping or separation of any control level. 2,500V of optical isolation shall be provided between the DMX512 inputs and the electronics. Systems that do not have optical isolation on a prewired factory plug�in device shall not be acceptable.

• A single DMX512 input may be configured as a DMX output. The DMX out

shall be capable of outputting DMX from data obtained from the Ethernet. 2.3.4.3 The control module shall plug into an electronic backplane, with power, panic

and station wiring connections available as screw terminals. DMX connections shall be available as either a screw terminal or a punch�down terminal. The Ethernet connection shall be a standard Cat5 RJ45 connection. The backplane shall also retain that specific rack’s configuration and preset data in non�volatile memory. When any new control module is inserted, it shall automatically come on�line fully functional.

2.3.4.4 Complete group configuration containing rack setups, preset and dimmer

information shall be stored in each control module. All data shall also be transferable to and from library storage on a personal computer on a group or per�rack basis. The system shall be capable of monitoring multiple racks on a single Ethernet connection.

2.3.5 CONTROL MODULE FEATURES 2.3.5.1 The control module shall have a dimmer update rate better than 16ms

(60HZ) or 20 ms (50 Hz) average. Dimmer outputs shall exhibit no oscillating or hunting for levels. Dimmers with the same choke type set to the same level shall output within ±1V of each other, regardless of phase or input voltage.

2.3.5.2 Dimmer output levels shall be regulated for incoming line voltages. The

regulation shall adjust for both RMS voltage changes and deformations in the incoming AC waveform. The control module shall monitor and adjust each dimmer's output to maintain a constant power to the load. Regulation shall maintain the desired output voltage ±1V for the entire operating range (90�240V AC) with the exception that the maximum output will be no greater than the line voltage minus dimmer insulation loss. The regulation shall compensate for dips and anomalies in the AC waveform on a dimmer�by�dimmer basis. There shall be no interaction between dimmers in the system or any other equipment. The output shall be nominally regulated to 120V, but shall be field adjustable on a dimmer�by�dimmer basis to allow for varying cable length.


265561�21

2.3.5.3 The control module shall support a rack filled with different types and sizes of

dimmer modules. The properties of each dimmer shall be configurable, including dimmer name, output curve, dimmer firing mode, and scale voltage values.

• The output curve selections shall include IES Modified Square, Square,

Linear, Modified Linear and a Sensor v2.0 output curve. The control module shall also have the capability of storing up to three custom curves as well as an adjustable preheat level, assignable on a per�dimmer basis.

• The dimmer firing modes shall include: Normal (Dimmed), Dimmer

Doubled, Switched (unregulated on/off with adjustable on�at level), Fluorescent with adjustable threshold, and Off.

o Dimmers set as Dimmer Doubled shall allow a single dimmer to set

two different levels on one dimmer circuit by splitting the AC power into positive and negative half cycles with no resultant DC line current.

2.3.5.4 The control module shall contain diagnostic routines to allow the user to test

and troubleshoot the system. The control module shall also contain a Test/Bypass switch to turn all dimmers on to full for testing. This switch shall bypass all electronics and shall force the fan on.

2.3.5.5 The control module shall be able to record up to 128 presets group�wide.

Presets shall be user programmable by recording a snapshot of current dimmer levels (as set by the all control sources), by entering dimmer levels on the control module directly, or a combination of both methods. The system shall have the ability to program and activate group�wide presets from either the control module, a console or a networked computer or handheld device. Presets shall be activated in the default fade time of 2 seconds, but shall be have a user�programmable fade time between 0 and 60 minutes.

2.3.5.6 In the event of data loss each rack shall maintain the last level for a

user�programmable time of zero to five minutes or indefinitely, or may be programmed to fade out or to play a specific preset. Systems that do not offer this feature shall not be acceptable.

2.3.5.7 A system�wide panic circuit shall be provided. Any dimmer in any rack may

be assigned to the panic circuit. The panic may be set as momentary or maintained, normally open or closed, and shall have an option to force all non�panic dimmers to zero.

2.3.5.8 DMX A and B as well as the Ethernet DMX (EDMX) data may be patched using

a rack start address � assigned sequentially from a starting control channel or patched individually on a per�dimmer basis. Priority may be set per universe for the DMX inputs, and set per channel by the control source for the EDMX


265561�22

input. Each dimmer may have up to six network control inputs with either a highest takes precedence or priority patch. Each dimmer may also then be assigned to one of 4 rooms for additional specific preset control.

2.3.5.9 The control module shall provide the ability to set a dimmer, all dimmers or a

range of dimmers to a level. 2.3.5.10 The control module shall be capable of monitoring and displaying incoming

line voltage for all three phases on the LCD. With installed current sensors, the same display shall show amperage on each phase.

2.3.5.11 English, French, German and Spanish language support shall be standard in

the control module. 2.3.5.12 The control module shall support 4 levels of security access. The user shall to

able to program passwords that restrict access, preventing unauthorized use of higher�level functions by unauthorized personnel.

• Level 4: Administrator � shall have full access • Level 3: Super User – shall be able to access by circuit number, change

module and change rack types. • Level 2: User – shall be able to access by dimmer number • Level 1: Guest – shall be able to access “about” information

2.3.6 STANDARD FEEDBACK: 2.3.6.1 System and Rack messages shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

• DMX port A or B has an error or has failed • Network has an error or has failed • Phase A, B or C is below 90 volts • Phase A, B or C is above 140 volts • Phase A, B or C did not start because it was below 90V or above 140V at

power up • Phase A, B or C voltage headroom warning • Frequency is not 50 or 60 Hz • Rack shutting down due to air flow loss • Ambient temperature is below 0°C/32°F • Ambient temperature is above 40°C/104°F • Rack shutting down � ambient temperature exceeds 46°C/115°F • Configuration memory error

2.3.6.2 About display shall allow monitoring of system, rack or dimmer status.

• About System shall provide information about Panic circuits, Preset looks, and System name.

• About Network shall provide IP address, gateway and net mask. • About Rack General shall provide information about rack name, ambient


265561�23

temperature, air filters and rack type. • About Rack Power shall provide information about power type, rack

voltages, current per phase (only with current transformers), under voltage warnings.

• About Rack Data shall provide status for DMXA, DMXB, EDMX and Network activity.

• About Dimmer shall provide information about dimmer type, location, output level, control source, scale voltage, mode and curve.

2.3.7 ADVANCED FEEDBACK 2.3.7.1 Sensor's Advanced Features (AF) option shall add an additional sensor in the

individual dimmer modules. This option shall allow monitoring of current and output voltage on a dimmer�by�dimmer basis and provide information on lamp burnouts, dimmer status, and input voltages.

2.3.7.2 The control module shall allow the user to record the loads of all AF dimmers

in the system. The control module shall, during operation, test each AF dimmer, determine its load, and compare it to the recorded load. Any change from recorded loads greater than five percent shall display an error on the control module and any monitoring device on the network.

2.3.7.3 Dimmer Specific messages shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

• Load has dropped below recorded value • Load has raised above recorded value • DC detected on dimmer output • One SCR has failed on/off • Dimmer has failed off or circuit breaker has tripped • Dimmer has been removed • Dimmer load has failed • Dimmer has shut down due to over temperature

2.3.7.4 About Dimmer display shall provide additional information regarding the

dimmer’s recorded load and current or actual load. 2.3.8 NETWORK INTERFACE 2.3.8.1 The Ethernet network shall provide an integral link to connect all racks in the

system for rack�to�rack, rack�to�console and rack�to�network device communication.

2.3.8.2 The network interface to the control module shall provide a number of user�

programmable control logic schemes regulating the logical relationship between control sources, including Electrical Engineerural control.

2.3.8.3 A technician shall be able to program all parameters onsite, via the facepanel

or using a laptop personal computer. Systems that do not provide both types of user interface shall not be acceptable. These parameters shall include, but


265561�24

not be limited to, defining rack type, module type, scale voltage for each dimmer, firing mode, curve, dimmer numbering and DMX512 or network port assignments. Systems requiring factory programming shall not be acceptable.

2.3.9 WEB�BASED INTERFACE 2.3.9.1 The control module shall incorporate web server technologies for interaction

with standard web browsers. The Web interface shall provide an easy�to�navigate, graphical user interface for monitoring and control of the dimming systems. This interface shall duplicate all the functions of the control module.

2.3.9.2 The web�based interface shall be self�contained, requiring no software

installation on a user’s computer. A user may use any laptop with a web browser to configure and exert basic control. A user shall be able to configure, monitor and control the dimming system using a web browser such as Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Use of standard web technologies shall also allow handheld computers, or PDA’s, to access and control the system. Dimming systems that do not offer this facility shall not be acceptable.

2.3.10 PHYSICAL 2.3.10.1 The control electronics shall be contained in one plug�in module, housed in a

formed steel body with an injection�molded face panel, and self�retaining ejection handle to ease removal from the rack.

2.3.10.2 The control module shall operate on a universal voltage range of 90 – 250V,

single� or three�phase, 47 to 63 Hz. The control module shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during operation.

2.4 ADVANCED DIMMER MODULES 2.4.1 The dimmer modules shall be the Sensor Advanced Features dimmer modules as

manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor dimmer modules shall be designed for dependable, economical service in theatrical and video applications.

2.4.2 ELECTRICAL 2.4.2.1 Each dimmer module shall contain one or two single�pole circuit breakers, a

solid�state switching module, associated toroidal filters, and power and control connectors.

2.4.2.2 Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when

the module is not installed. 2.4.2.3 Modules shall be keyed so that dimmer modules of different capacity shall not

be interchangeable.


265561�25

2.4.2.4 Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient temperature. Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times normal current. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty applications. Dimmers that do not operate continuously at 100% load shall not be acceptable.

2.4.3 SCR ASSEMBLY 2.4.3.1 Each dimmer module shall use a solid state module (SSM) consisting of two

silicon�controlled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating circuitry on the high voltage side of an integral, opto�coupled control voltage isolator. Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. The SSM shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for temperature sensing, and silver�plated control and load contacts. The SSM shall include an integral output LED, output voltage sensors and current sensors for feedback to the control module. The entire SSM shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation, shall not be acceptable. Dimmer modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable.

2.4.3.2 All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be

contained in a single, field�replaceable housing. Modules requiring discrete wiring of electronic components shall not be acceptable.

2.4.3.3 SCR power switching devices shall have the following minimum ratings:

Module Size: 15/20A 50A 100A

Single cycle: Peak surge current

625A 1,200A 2,300A

Half cycle: 12T

1,620 4,150 22,000

Transient over voltage

600V 600V 600V

Die size (in) .257 .394 .570

2.4.4 FILTERING 2.4.4.1 Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise

time resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors. Modules shall offer 500 uS. filter rise times. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew rate (about 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output wave form with the dimmer operating at full load.


265561�26

2.4.4.2 All dimmers shall maintain their published rise time and/or fall time regardless of duty cycle or rack temperatures. Dimmers that derate due to increased dimmer temperature caused by full load operation or high phase angles shall not be acceptable.

2.4.5 PERFORMANCE 2.4.5.1 Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load

with a no�load loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.

2.4.6 STATUS REPORTING 2.4.6.1 The dimming system shall report dimmer specific errors via the rack control

electronics module and/or via a lighting control console. 2.4.6.2 Dimmer modules shall provide the following status reporting functions.

• Load dropped below recorded value • Load increased over recorded value • DC on dimmer output • SCR failed on/off • Circuit breaker tripped • Dimmer error • Dimmer module removed • Dimmer load absent

2.4.7 PHYSICAL 2.4.7.1 Dimmer modules shall be fully plug�in and factory wired. Dimmer modules

shall consist of a heavy duty, die�cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine�texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Dimmer modules shall be UL Recognized.

2.5 RELAY MODULES 2.5.1 The Relay modules shall be the Relay modules as manufactured by Electronic

Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. The relay modules shall be designed for dependable, economical service in theatrical, Electrical Engineerural, and video applications for use with theatrical and Electrical Engineerural lighting and motorized equipment.

• Relay modules shall be compatible with both Sensor Dimming Systems and


265561�27

Unison Dimming Systems 2.5.2 Relay module configuration shall be dual channel, 100/140V, 15A or 20A, as

noted on the Electrical Drawings. 2.5.3 Relay modules shall be fully plug�in and factory wired. The modules shall consist

of a heavy duty, die�cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine�texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Relay modules shall be UL and cUL listed power control devices with a minimum AIC rating of 10,000A.

2.5.4 Modules shall have a fully magnetic circuit breaker for each channel. Relay

modules shall be rated for a minimum of 100,000 full load activations. 2.5.5 Modules shall have Signal and Load LED indicators for each channel. 2.5.6 Relay modules shall be available with Advanced Features providing load and

status information. 2.6 CONSTANT MODULES 2.6.1 The Constant modules shall be the Sensor Constant modules as manufactured by

Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor modules shall be designed for dependable, economical service in theatrical and video applications for use with theatrical lighting and theatrical motorized equipment.

2.6.2 Constant module configuration shall be dual channel, 100/140V, 15A or 20A, as

noted on the Electrical Drawings. 2.6.3 Constant modules shall be fully plug�in and factory wired. The modules shall

consist of a heavy duty, die�cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine�texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Constant modules shall be UL and cUL Listed power control devices with a minimum AIC rating of 10,000A.

2.7 CONTROL ENCLOSURES 2.7.1 Approved Products:

• ETC – Unison Pardigm


265561�28

• Lutron – Grafik Eye 4000 • Strand – Vision Net • Colortran • Lightolier Controls (IGBT Systems)

2.7.2 MECHANICAL 2.7.2.1 The Control Enclosure shall be a surface mounted panel constructed of 18

gauge formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full�height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter.

• The Enclosure door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the

control module face panel. • Enclosures shall be convection cooled without the use of fans.

2.7.2.2 Control Enclosures shall be sized to accept one or two Control Processors and

one or two Station Power Modules, including various options and accessories.

• The two�space Control Enclosure (ERn2) shall support a single Station Power Supply module.

• The four�space Control Enclosure (ERn4) shall support two Control Processors, and two Station Power Supply modules, or, one Control Processor, one Station Power Supply Module and one Station Bus Repeaters module, or one control processor and one dual Station Bus Dual Repeater module.

2.7.2.3 All Enclosure components shall be properly treated and finished.

• Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch resistant, powder based epoxy paint.

2.7.2.4 Enclosure(s) shall also be available in a 19” rack mounted (RM) version.

• Rack�mounted version shall have an independent Enclosure suspension kit, with a full height, locking door/cover attached to the kit.

• Rack�mounted version shall have an opening to access the control module face panel, and openings to view indicators on option modules.

2.7.2.5 Enclosure dimensions and weights (without modules) shall not exceed:

• ERn2 � 15" W x 9" H, 10" D, 15 lb. • ERn2�RM � 19" W 11"H 10" D, 20 lb. • ERn4 � 15" W x 14" H x 10" D, 20 lb. • ERn4�RM � 19" W x 16" H x 10" D, 25 lb.

2.7.2.6 Top, bottom, and side knockouts shall facilitate conduit entry. 2.7.2.7 Enclosures shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all control


265561�29

and option modules without the use of tools.

• Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks.

• With modules removed, Enclosures shall provide clear front access to all power and control wire terminations.

2.7.3 OPTION MODULES 2.7.3.1 Ethernet Switch (ENET � Surface Mount ERn only)

• The Control Enclosure shall support an optional 5�port Ethernet Switch, with at least 4 ports supplying Power over Ethernet (PoE).

• The Ethernet Switch module shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af PSE compliant.

• The Ethernet Switch module shall contain power, status, and activity indicators. All indicators shall be visible when the Enclosure door is open for wall mounted ERn.

2.7.3.2 Redundant Power Supply (RRPS)

• The Control Enclosure shall support an optional redundant power supply which shall automatically provide power to the control electronics upon failure or removal of the primary power supply.

• The redundant power supply shall assert itself seamlessly without a loss of power to the control electronics.

• The redundant power supply shall seamlessly remove itself when the primary power supply is reengaged.

• The redundant power supply shall provide visible indication that it is active.

2.7.3.3 Station Bus Repeaters (ERn4 only)

• The Control Enclosure shall support an optional module to expand the station bus length an additional 400 meters, and the station count an additional 30 stations (62 maximum per processor/Enclosure)

• Wall�mount and 19" Rack�Mount versions of the Station Bus Repeaters shall also be available to support mid�span insertion away from the Control Enclosure.

2.7.3.4 Station Bus Dual Repeaters (ERn4 only)

• The Control Enclosure shall support an optional module to expand the station bus length to two additional 400 meter segments (a total of 1200 meters from a single Enclosure, and the station count to 62 stations (62 maximum per processor/Enclosure).

• Wall�mount and 19" Rack�Mount versions of the Station Bus Dual Repeaters shall also be available to support mid�span insertion away from


265561�30

the Control Enclosure. 2.7.4 ACCESSORIES 2.7.4.1 RideThru Option (RTO)

• The Control Enclosure shall support an optional, short�term back�up power source for the control electronics installed inside the Enclosure.

• RideThru Option (RTO) provides power for control electronics during brief power outages or drop outs.

• The short�term back�up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself.

• The short�term back�up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power.

• The short�term back�up power source shall support the control electronics for at least 10 seconds.

2.7.4.2 BatteryPack (BPO – Surface Mount ERn Only)

• The Control Enclosure shall be provided with a long�term back�up power source for the control electronics installed outside the Enclosure.

• The long�term back�up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself.

• The long�term back�up power source shall supply power to the control electronics for at least 90 minutes.

• The long�term back�up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power.

• A test switch/indicator shall be available without opening the rack door or removal of any modules/components.

2.7.5 ELECTRICAL 2.7.5.1 Control Enclosures shall be available in 100, 120, 230 and 240 volt, single�

phase configurations. 2.7.5.2 Control Enclosures shall be completely pre�wired by the manufacturer. The

contractor shall provide input and control wiring. 2.7.5.3 Control Enclosures shall be designed to support the following wire

terminations:

• AC (single phase) • Echelon link power (Belden 8471 or equivalent) • 24Vdc (2� 16AWG Wire) • DMX512A Port A (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent) • DMX512A Port B (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent)


265561�31

• RS232 Serial In/Out (Belden 9729 or equivalent) • Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5 Ethernet • Contact Closure In (14AWG to 26AWG Wire) • Contact Closure Out (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)

o Contact Closure Out shall provide 1A @ 30Vdc 2.7.6 STATION POWER MODULES 2.7.6.1 Station power supply modules shall provide LinkPower for at 32 stations and

1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power. 2.7.6.2 Station power repeater modules shall provide LinkPower for 30 stations

and1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power. 2.7.6.3 Station power module shall support over�current/short protection for

LinkPower and Aux. LinkPower shall support fault detection on each leg of the balanced data bus.

2.7.6.4 All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided

connectors. 2.8 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL CONTROLS (ACU) 2.8.1 The Electrical Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P�ACP

Series Control Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2.8.2 Mechanical 2.8.2.1 The Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series

Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures. 2.8.2.2 The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to

provide multi�scene lighting and building control. 2.8.2.3 ACP module electronics shall be contained in a plug�in assembly.

• The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire connections. o No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion.

2.8.2.4 The ACP shall be convection cooled. 2.8.2.5 User Interface

• The ACP shall utilize a backlit liquid crystal display capable of graphics and eight lines of text.

• The ACP shall provide an alpha�numeric keypad for data entry and


265561�32

navigation. • The ACP shall provide a touch�sensitive control wheel for navigation. • The ACP shall provide shortcut buttons to assist in navigation, selection,

and data entry. • The ACP keypad, buttons, and wheel shall be backlit for use in low�light

conditions. o The backlight shall have a user selectable time out, including no time

out. 2.8.2.6 The ACP shall provide a front�panel RJ45 jack for Ethernet connection to the

processor for configuration, live control, and web�browser�based system access.

• The Ethernet port shall be secured behind the locking door.

2.8.2.7 The ACP shall provide a Secure Digital (SD) Removable Media slot on the

front panel for transfer of configuration data.

• The SD slot shall be secured behind the locking door. 2.8.2.8 The ACP shall provide a Universal Serial Bus (USB) port on the front panel for

transfer of configuration data.

• The USB port shall be secured behind the locking door. 2.8.2.9 Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in

flash memory, which does not require battery backup.

• The ACP shall provide a Compact Flash (CF) Card as backup flash memory and storage.

• The CF Card is stored in the back of the ACP, and can be accessed only by removing the ACP.

• The ACP data can be exchanged by inserting the CF card into another ACP.

2.8.3 Electrical 2.8.3.1 The ACP shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be

terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure. 2.8.3.2 The ACP shall require low�voltage power supplied by the Dimming or Control

enclosure. 2.8.3.3 The ACP shall be hot�swap capable. 2.8.3.4 The ACP shall support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote

devices, including button stations, button/fader stations, Touchscreen stations, sensors, and third party LonMARK compliant products.


265561�33

• The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity�independent, low�voltage

Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit. Touchscreen stations, interface stations and portable stations connectors will also require (2) #16 AWG wires.

• The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be

bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. • Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) without

a repeater. Repeater option modules shall be available to increase wiring maximums in increments of 1640 ft. (500m).

• Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).

2.8.3.5 The ACP shall support 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant

Ethernet networking using TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols for internal communication and integration with third�party equipment.

2.8.3.6 The ACP shall support EIA�RS232 serial protocol for bi�directional command

and communication with third�party equipment. 2.8.3.7 The ACP shall support two discrete ESTA DMX512A ports, configurable as

input or output ports.*

• *When used in a Dimming Enclosure, the second port is always an output port.

2.8.3.8 The ACP shall provide four onboard dry contact closure inputs for integration

with third�party products. 2.8.3.9 The ACP shall provide four onboard contact closure outputs, rated at

1A@30VDC, for integration with third�party equipment. 2.8.4 Functional 2.8.4.1 Capacity

• Shall support 1024 channels of control • Shall support 2 physical DMX ports, each of which may be configured as

an input or output


265561�34

2.8.4.2 System

• Runtime application shall utilize support Net3 system interoperability • System shall support the use of Network Time Protocol for real time clock

synchronization • System shall support remote firmware upload an over Ethernet connection

from a connected PC running the Light Designer software or another connected processor.

• System shall support local firmware upload from removable media (SD

Card, USB Flash Drive) 2.8.4.3 Diagnostics

• Shall output an Event log • Standard log shall store a fixed�length history of recent activity • Separate critical log shall only store important messages (such as boot�up

settings) 2.8.4.4 Configuration Data

• Configuration Data can be uploaded over an Ethernet connection from a PC running Light Designer application

• Configuration Data can be retrieved from another Paradigm Processor • A Paradigm Processor shall make its configuration data available for

retrieval by another Processor as a backup/recovery mechanism • Configuration Data shall be stored on solid�state media that can be

removed to facilitate transfer between Processor units • Configuration Data may be loaded to and from removable media access

provided on front panel • Configuration Data for the entire System shall be available for download

from any single Processor • Shall store configuration data for Dimming enclosure processors and shall

make available for download


265561�35

2.8.4.5 Scalability

• Adding additional Processors to a System shall proportionately increase its overall capabilities up to a maximum System size

• The maximum number of Processors configured as a System shall be at

least 12. • Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to remain time

synchronized and share control information • Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to maintain

configuration data synchronization as modifications are made • Failure of a single Processor shall not prohibit continuing operation of the

remaining Processors • It shall be possible for multiple Systems to coexist on the same physical

network with logical isolation between Systems 2.8.5 Local User Interface

• Shall provide access to Processor setup (IP address) • Shall provide access to Processor status and diagnostics

• Where the Processor is installed within a Dimming enclosure, shall provide

access to Dimming enclosure setup, status and diagnostics • Shall provide control functionality for Control Channels, Zones, Fixtures,

Groups, Presets, Macros, Walls and Sequences within the current configuration.

• Shall provide functionality to schedule astronomical and real time events

(add/edit/delete) • Shall allow for display of local DMX information • Shall allow for transfer of log files to local removable media • Shall allow to perform firmware upgrades for connected Dimming

enclosures • Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from Dimming enclosures

using removable media • Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from LCD Stations using


265561�36

removable media • Shall allow for binding of Stations

2.8.5.1 Access Controls

• There shall be 2 user accounts � Administrator, and User with separate password protection

• Account and password settings shall be local to each Processor • Access Controls shall be applied to certain areas of the Paradigm Local

User Interface and Web Interface 2.8.5.2 Web User Interface

• Shall be an internal web server accessible via Ethernet port • Shall support common web browsers on Windows and Mac platforms • Shall provide functionality to Activate and Deactivate Presets • Shall provide functionality to schedule timed events (add/delete) • Shall display status information • Shall display log files • Shall allow for configuration of Processor settings (date, time) • Shall allow for upload and download of configuration data

• There shall be links to other web�enabled devices in the System, including

other Paradigm Processors 2.8.5.3 Stations

• Stations shall be connected to a Paradigm Processor via a LinkPower network or Ethernet

• Station discovery and binding shall be accomplished from the Local User

Interface or Light Designer 2.8.5.4 Net3 and ACN Devices

• Net3 Devices shall be connected to and controlled from Paradigm Processors via Ethernet


265561�37

• Paradigm Processors shall provide DMX�Net3 gateway functionality • It shall be possible to send and receive Macro triggers defined within the

System configuration via Net3 • There shall be support for Streaming ACN on up to 24 universes per

Processor 2.8.5.5 Operation

• When contained in an dimming enclosure, a snapshot of the dimming enclosure output data shall be stored in persistent memory so that hardware can access it for immediate output on boot

• DMX output refresh rate shall be configurable • There shall be support for 16�bit DMX Attributes • DMX inputs may be patched to DMX and Streaming ACN outputs as

external sources • Streaming ACN inputs shall be patched to DMX outputs (gateway) as

external sources • Where there are multiple external sources then priority and HTP shall be

used to perform arbitration • External and internal sources shall be arbitrated based on user�selection

of standard or custom rules • On Preset Record, the values of Attributes within the Preset shall be

updated to reflect the current output • The total output may be the combination of many different Presets

running concurrently • There shall be no hard limit on number of concurrent cross fades

• Multiple Presets controlling the same Attribute shall first interact based on

priority and second based on Latest Takes Precedence(LTP) or Highest Takes Precedence (HTP)

• LTP and HTP operation shall be supported simultaneously and interact (at

the same priority) using HTP • Settings due to LTP Presets may be automatically discarded from

operation when overridden


265561�38

• It shall be possible to specify that a Preset or Attribute Control will persist when overridden

• A Preset may be designated as an HTP Override and shall cause HTP

values to be discarded • It shall be possible to modify the rate of a Preset (Cross fades, Effects)

from a Control within the System • Each Preset shall have a status that can be Activated, Deactivated or

Altered • Preset status may be set based on matching levels in the current output

as an option • On startup the System shall be capable of automatically executing timed

events within the previous 24 hours to synchronize its initial output state with the current time of day

2.8.5.6 Serial Input/Output

• RS232 shall support 8�bit word length, parity selection and 1 or 2 stop bits

• RS232 shall support baud rates from 4800 to 115,200 bps • Serial input and output messages are fully customizable • Serial output messages can be generated by any Control or Event

2.11 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS (SM) 2.11.1 The Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Touchscreen P�

LCD Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2.11.2 General 2.11.2.1 Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages. 2.11.2.2 The Touchscreen station shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and

other images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages. 2.11.2.3 Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass�code, lock

out and visibility levels.


265561�39

2.11.3 Mechanical 2.11.3.1 Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal

display (LCD) with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 12�bit color depth with a touch interface.

2.11.3.2 Touchscreen bezels shall be constructed of aluminum and shall have no

visible means of attachment.

• The bezel shall install and remove without the use of tools. • The bezel shall provide two working positions for the Touchscreen: service

and operating. 2.11.3.3 The Touchscreen shall have a protective overlay over the display.

• The overlay shall reduce wear • The overlay shall reduce glare

2.11.3.4 The manufacturer shall provide backboxes for all LCD stations.

• Flush back box dimensions shall be 7.94” wide x 5.33” high x 3.25” deep • Surface back box dimensions shall be 8.3” wide x 5.6” high x 2.55” deep

2.11.4 Electrical 2.11.4.1 Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network. 2.11.4.2 Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with

Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network.

• Ethernet Network

o Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af

compliant. o Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5 wiring.

• Echelon® Link power network.

o Link power shall utilize low�voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair,

type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit).


265561�40

o Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.

o Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination

of these. o Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all

stations. 2.11.5 Functional 2.11.5.1 System

• The Touchscreen shall support configuration firmware upload from a Paradigm Processor as proxy

• The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local

removable media 2.11.5.2 Setup Mode

• There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user�defined configuration

• It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings • It shall be possible to view status information • It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings • It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration • It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings • The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable • The setup display may be invoked from within the user�defined

configuration and/or physical button on the Touchscreen • There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display

2.11.6 Configurations 2.11.6.1 It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD

Station 2.11.6.2 Only one configuration may be active on the LCD Station


265561�41

2.11.6.3 It shall be possible for Touchscreen Stations connected via the Echelon® Link power network to select a configuration automatically based on the configuration of the physical connection.

2.11.6.4 Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a boot menu to allow

selection of a configuration 2.11.6.5 Each configuration shall be identified as a different Station within the System 2.11.7 Operation 2.11.7.1 The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of

lighting and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.

• System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader,

Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software.

o Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600 seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds.

o Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations.

• System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner

system software.

o Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic.

o Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or

LightDesigner software.

• System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen, LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server.

• Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types

include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types.

• Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or

periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time.

• Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom

system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re�assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows�based configuration program.


265561�42

• Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation,

record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue light, or room join/separate.

• Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control,

fade rate control or preset master control. • Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component

electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner.

• It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. 2.12 CONFIGURATION AND SOFTWARE 2.12.1 System Configuration: The Architectural Lighting Control System Configuration

software shall be the Unison Paradigm LightDesigner as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2.12.2 Definitions 2.12.2.1 A System is the configuration of one or more Paradigm Processors 2.12.2.2 A Fixture is a controllable entity with one or more Attributes 2.12.2.3 An Attribute is a parameter of control such as Intensity, Pan or Gobo select

2.12.2.4 A Group is a selection of Fixtures that can be stored and recalled

2.12.2.5 A Space is defined area where other System objects reside. A Space defines the scope of Control for other objects.

2.12.2.6 Room Combine is functionality enabling the scope of control to vary in a pre�

defined way based on the current status of a moveable Wall or Walls 2.12.2.7 A Control is a single point of input to the System (e.g. Button, Fader, Serial

Port) 2.12.2.8 An Indicator is a single point of feedback from the System (e.g. LED, Label on

LCD) 2.12.2.9 A Station has an arrangement of Controls and Indicators 2.12.2.10 A Page stores the assignment of function to Controls and Indicators of a

particular Station and their properties (e.g. lockout threshold) 2.12.2.11 Actions are items of functionality that can occur within a running Paradigm

system in response to events (e.g. button presses, timed events)


265561�43

2.12.2.12 Preset is a container of Attribute settings (levels) and timings that can stored

and recalled 2.12.2.13 A Sequence is a series of connected steps referencing Presets along with

additional timing information 2.12.2.14 Effects are Attribute settings that result in continually varying levels following

a specified curve and using additional timing parameters (e.g. period, offset) 2.12.2.15 Palette is a container of Attribute settings (levels) that can be referenced

from Presets, allowing a change in the Palette to globally modify referenced Presets.

2.12.2.16 Macros are user�defined operations built up as a sequence of Actions that can

be recalled 2.12.2.17 Binding is the process of associating a logical instance of a device within the

configuration with a physical device discovered at runtime 2.12.3 Environment 2.12.3.1 Shall be possible to work with multiple System configurations simultaneously 2.12.3.2 There shall be clipboard functionality (cut, copy, paste) for entire objects

(e.g. Presets, Stations), settings (e.g. Attribute levels) and text 2.12.3.3 There shall be undo and redo functionality where persistent changes are

made to the System configuration (but not application settings or playback state)

2.12.3.4 There shall be an auto�backup feature 2.12.3.5 The application interface shall be based around (i) a tree�view; (ii) a

workspace area; (iii) a properties inspector; (iv) item selector.

2.12.3.6 It shall be possible to represent data about the workspace area graphically (plan) or in tabular form

2.12.3.7 Plan views shall support zoom 2.12.3.8 Plan views shall support a layout grid with user�defined spacing and color

with associated snap�to�grid functionality 2.12.3.9 The properties inspector shall be used to view and modify the properties of

one or multiple objects 2.12.3.10 There shall be 2 modes of operation that expose progressively more in�depth


265561�44

functionality (Normal, Advanced) 2.12.3.11 It shall be possible to enter User�configurable names in any language

supported by their operating system (e.g. encoded as UTF8) 2.12.3.12 User�configurable names shall be limited to 64 display characters each 2.12.3.13 There shall be provision for help functionality to be accessed from within the

application 2.12.4 System Configuration 2.12.4.1 It shall be possible to create Spaces 2.12.4.2 It shall be possible to add Fixtures by selecting a Fixture Template from the

provided library and create custom Fixtures 2.12.4.3 It shall be possible to add Stations by selecting a Station Definition from the

provided library and create custom Stations 2.12.4.4 It shall be possible to create a System based on data imported from a defined

documentation format (e.g. CSV, XML) 2.12.4.5 It shall be possible to export System configuration data to a defined

documentation format (e.g. CSV, XML) 2.12.4.6 There shall be a wizard to assist with the initial setup of a System including

Project data entry, Space creation, network configuration, and zone creation. 2.12.4.7 There shall be a straightforward process for the assignment of Fixtures and

Stations to particular Processors 2.12.4.8 There shall be a 2�dimensional plan view that displays the layout of Spaces 2.12.4.9 A Space shall be displayed as a user�configurable polygon with straight edges 2.12.4.10 The plan shall display Fixtures and Stations located within Spaces 2.12.4.11 The plan shall display Walls between Spaces and their current state (open,

closed)

2.12.4.12 Items displayed on the plan may be arranged using standard graphical interaction methods (e.g. drag�and�drop)

2.12.4.13 It shall be possible to import images JPEG, BMP and GIFformats as a

background image to the plan view 2.12.4.14 It shall be possible to create Walls that accomplish Room Combine between


265561�45

Spaces 2.12.5 Fixture Configuration 2.12.5.1 There shall be functionality to patch Fixtures to DMX and Streaming CAN 2.12.5.2 There shall be support for Fixtures with split patches (e.g. VL5) 2.12.5.3 There shall be support for multiply�patching a Fixture 2.12.5.4 It shall be possible to swap pan and tilt axes for a moving�light Fixture 2.12.5.5 It shall be possible to specify a minimum and maximum value for an Attribute 2.12.5.6 It shall be possible to specify a minimum fade time for an Attribute 2.12.5.7 It shall be possible to invert the range of values for an Attribute 2.12.5.8 It shall be possible to specify a default value for an Attribute 2.12.5.9 It shall be possible to specify a dimmer curve for an intensity Attribute 2.12.6 Design and Simulation 2.12.6.1 There shall be a tabular view of Fixture Attributes within Spaces 2.12.6.2 There shall be control of Zones (as a type of Fixture) 2.12.6.3 There shall be control of LED arrays (as a type of Fixture) 2.12.6.4 There shall be control of moving lights (as a type of Fixture) 2.12.6.5 There shall be independent control of every Attribute of a Fixture 2.12.6.6 Appropriate graphical controls shall be provided for non�intensity Attributes

(e.g. color picker) 2.12.6.7 It shall be possible to create Groups as a selection shortcut 2.12.6.8 The plan shall show the current status of Room Combine 2.12.6.9 The plan shall show simulation feedback for Fixtures in a graphical form 2.12.6.10 Feedback values for Attributes shall be displayed in terms of real�world units

where an appropriate real�world unit and mapping is available (e.g. pan in degrees)

2.12.6.11 Control events may be simulated by clicking on a representation of the


265561�46

Station in at least the plan view 2.12.6.12 The simulation may be linked to the actual online System to synchronize

playback and inject control events (live control) 2.12.7 Presets 2.12.7.1 There shall be provision to record a Preset based on current Attribute settings 2.12.7.2 There shall be a display of Presets that affect Fixtures in the Space being

worked with and their activation status 2.12.7.3 A Preset may store a reference to a Palette as an Attribute setting 2.12.7.4 Presets may be displayed and modified in tabular form (spreadsheet) 2.12.7.5 Timing in Presets may be set on an individual Attribute basis 2.12.7.6 Timing settings shall include a fade time, a delay time and a fade profile 2.12.7.7 All Presets may include split timing 2.12.7.8 Presets may be applied in an Latest Takes Precedence (LTP) or Highest Takes

Precedence (HTP) manner 2.12.7.9 It shall be possible for all Presets to include Effects 2.12.7.10 Each Effect shall have a Curve and parameters (to include size, period, offset

and repeat count) 2.12.7.11 There shall be support for a flicker effect 2.12.7.12 There shall be a provision to create Sequences from Presets 2.12.7.13 It shall be possible for a Sequence to be displayed and modified as a timeline

display 2.12.7.14 It shall be possible for any step of a Sequence to trigger a defined Action 2.12.7.15 The end state of a Sequence shall be user configurable (e.g. release, loop,

hold at end) 2.12.8 Stations and Events 2.12.8.1 Can assign functionality (Actions) to Controls and Indicators on a Page for a

particular Station 2.12.8.2 Stations may have multiple Pages that can be switched between at runtime


265561�47

2.12.8.3 Controls shall have a configurable event handler (Script) that determines the

nature of the control (e.g. momentary vs. maintained button) 2.12.8.4 Actions initiated from a Station shall, by default, be restricted to affecting the

Space containing the Station 2.12.8.5 A Control may be configured so that the Actions it triggers behave as if

initiated from a specified Space anywhere in the System 2.12.8.6 Controls shall have a priority that is used when performing operations (e.g.

preset activation, fader attribute control) 2.12.8.7 It shall be possible to specify timed events (including repeat intervals hourly,

daily, weekly, etc.) 2.12.8.8 It shall be possible to specify astronomical timed events 2.12.8.9 Serial (e.g. RS232, Ethernet) input data shall be treated as a Control event

and shall be handled through use of Script (standard or custom) 2.12.8.10 There shall be support for Occupancy functions using proximity sensors

connected via Echelon LonTalk or a Contact Interface 2.12.8.11 There shall be support for Daylight Harvesting functions using photo sensors

connected via Echelon LonTalk or a Fader Interface. 2.12.8.12 There shall be Override functionality that can be applied to any Control or

Event 2.12.8.13 There shall be Lock Out functionality for Controls using 3 distinct lockout

variables 2.12.8.14 Direct control of Attributes can be assigned to Controls (e.g. buttons, faders) 2.12.8.15 Mastering of Intensity for Fixtures, Groups or Presets can be assigned to

Controls 2.12.8.16 There shall be extensible support for third�party LonMark devices 2.12.8.17 A physical Lon native Station that is portable may automatically bind to

different logical Stations within the configuration based on an established physical LON connection

2.12.8.18 There shall be an option to assign default functionality to Controls and

Indicators of a Station automatically when it is added to the configuration and update it as the configuration changes


265561�48

2.12.8.19 There shall be an option to generate a graphical config for an Touchscreen automatically based on the current configuration and update it as the configuration changes

2.12.8.20 It shall be possible to import .ics files for display of holidays or other notable

dates 2.12.9 Actions 2.12.9.1 There shall be a standard Action for toggling the Intensity Attribute of a

Fixture or Group (Fixture Toggle) 2.12.9.2 There shall be standard Actions for recalling Presets (Preset Recall) 2.12.9.3 There shall be a standard Action for recording a Preset (Preset Record) 2.12.9.4 There shall be standard Actions for controlling Sequences (Timeline Control) 2.12.9.5 There shall be standard Actions for changing Wall state (Wall Toggle) 2.12.9.6 There shall be a standard Action for raising or lowering the intensity setting of

a Fixture or Group 2.12.9.7 There shall be a standard Action for raising or lowering the intensity setting of

a Preset 2.12.9.8 There shall be a standard Action that activates Faders within its scope

(Manual) 2.12.9.9 There shall be a standard Action that activates Faders on a target station and

locks out other Stations within its scope (Take Control) 2.12.9.10 There shall be a standard Action for setting lock out variables for a Station,

within a Space or System�wide (Lock Out) 2.12.9.11 There shall be a standard Action for enabling and disabling Overrides 2.12.9.12 There shall be a standard Action for recalling a Macro (Call Macro, Macro

Toggle) 2.12.9.13 There shall be a standard Action for turning Off a particular Fixture, Group or

Fixtures within a Space (Off) 2.12.9.14 There shall be a standard Action for controlling Fixture or Group Intensity

levels from a Fader 2.12.9.15 There shall be a standard Action for controlling Preset Intensity levels from a

Fader


265561�49

2.12.9.16 There shall be a standard Action for mastering Fixture or Group Intensity

levels from a Fader 2.12.9.17 There shall be a standard Action for modifying Preset fade times from a Fader 2.12.9.18 There shall be a standard Action for modifying Preset rate from a Fader 2.12.9.19 There shall be an equivalent standard Indicator behavior for every standard

Action 2.12.9.20 Qualified users may create custom Actions 2.12.10 Macros 2.12.10.1 Users can create, store and recall Macros that are sequences of Actions

(standard or custom) 2.12.10.2 Macros may define separate sequences to occur when turned on and off

(toggle) 2.12.10.3 Macros may incorporate conditional statements based on current status of

the System (e.g. comparisons such as x > y) 2.12.10.4 Conditional statements may be combinations of several simpler statements

using logical operators (AND, OR) 2.12.11 Script 2.12.11.1 There shall be a mechanism for defining custom functionality using a scripting

language 2.12.11.2 The behaviors of Controls and Indicators may be customized through the use

of Script 2.12.11.3 Script may be used to define custom functionality (Actions) within the System 2.12.11.4 Script shall allow new functionality to be defined in a manner that is reusable

in different Systems 2.12.11.5 Script shall support logical and arithmetic operations 2.12.11.6 Script shall support direct access to System data using names 2.12.11.7 Script shall support creating, reading and writing to persistent System�wide

variables (registered variables) 2.12.11.8 Script shall support timer functionality including the capability to cancel a


265561�50

running timer 2.12.11.9 Script shall support logging functionality 2.12.11.10 Standard functionality may be implemented as Scripts that will not be

user modifiable 2.12.11.11 A Custom Script may be copied from a suitable Standard Script to provide

a starting point 2.12.11.12 Script shall support reading data directly from connected interfaces (e.g.

LON NVs, ACN properties, DMX inputs) 2.12.11.13 Script shall support writing data directly to connected interfaces (e.g. LON

NVs, ACN properties, DMX outputs, Serial ports) 2.12.11.14 Script shall allow parsing of data (e.g. reading 8 contact inputs as

individual bits from a byte of data) 2.12.12 Network 2.12.12.1 Shall display a topological view of Paradigm Processors and connected

Stations 2.12.12.2 Can associate a particular Station with a Paradigm Processor 2.12.12.3 Shall report online status of Paradigm Processors and Stations 2.12.12.4 Shall allow for configuration of network properties (IP) of Paradigm

Processors 2.12.12.5 Shall allow for upload of configuration data to all or individual Paradigm

Processors 2.12.12.6 Shall allow for download of configuration data from Paradigm Processors 2.12.12.7 Shall allow for download of logging data from Paradigm Processors 2.12.12.8 Shall provide for performing firmware upgrades to Paradigm Processors 2.12.12.9 Shall allow to perform firmware upgrades for Dimming enclosures using

Paradigm Processors as proxies 2.12.12.10 Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from LCD Stations using

Paradigm Processors as proxies 2.12.12.11 Shall allow for discovery and binding of Stations


265561�51

2.12.12.12 There shall be a mode in which configuration changes are propagated to Processors as they occur without interrupting operation (live edit)

2.12.13 Reports 2.12.13.1 It shall be possible to generate tabular reports and customize their layout and

appearance 2.12.13.2 It shall be possible to print reports 2.12.13.3 It shall be possible to export reports to file (e.g. CSV) 2.12.13.4 There shall be reports for Presets 2.12.13.5 There shall be reports for Fixtures 2.12.13.6 There shall be reports for Stations 2.12.13.7 There shall be reports for Processors 2.12.13.8 There shall be reports for Macros 2.12.14 Resources 2.12.14.1 The installed package shall include a set of LCD Design Themes 2.12.14.2 Effect Curves, Fade Profiles and Dimmer Curves shall use a common format

and allow custom variants to be generated by the user 2.12.14.3 Additional Fixture Templates may be defined by the user (custom Fixtures) 2.12.14.4 Additional Station Definitions may be defined by the user (custom Stations) 2.12.15 Pharos 2.12.15.1 It shall be possible to add Pharos systems to the configuration for triggering

and status monitoring 2.12.15.2 There shall be standard Actions and Indicator behaviors for Pharos

integration via Ethernet 2.12.16 Touchscreen Station Configuration 2.12.16.1 The Control System Touch screen Configuration software shall be the Unison

Paradigm Control Designer as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2.12.16.2 The Unison Paradigm Control Designer software program shall be an


265561�52

application software package that facilitates off�line Unison Paradigm Touchs creen station configuration.

• Software setup shall include Configuration and Design Wizards, to create a

graphical representation of a control environment. • The software program shall be downloadable from the manufacturer's

website free of charge. 2.12.17 Functions 2.12.17.1 Provides functionality to create and modify Pages for display on a specific

type of LCD Station 2.12.17.2 There shall be a wizard to assist with the creation of Pages 2.12.17.3 A single configuration for an LCD Station shall be defined as a set of one or

more Pages 2.12.17.4 Each Page shall have a background that may incorporate multiple images or

animations 2.12.17.5 Pop�ups can be shown/hidden over any Page in a Configuration and more

than one Popup can be shown at once 2.12.17.6 Pages may have multiple design elements that may be Controls, Indicators or

both 2.12.17.7 Design elements shall have a user�defined size, position and z�order that

cannot be changed from within the System 2.12.17.8 Each design element shall have between 1 and 256 states, each of which can

have a distinct appearance 2.12.17.9 The appearance of a state can be taken from a Theme or imported image file 2.12.17.10 There shall be support for import of at least JPG, PNG and GIF image

formats 2.12.17.11 Transparency shall be supported 2.12.17.12 Animated images shall be supported 2.12.17.13 Transitions between states of design elements can be animated 2.12.17.14 Page transitions can be animated 2.12.17.15 Design elements shall have a visibility group and threshold


265561�53

2.12.17.16 Design elements that are Controls shall have a lockout group and

threshold 2.12.17.17 All text shall have a user�definable font family, size, color and alignment 2.12.17.18 There shall be at least the following types of design elements

• Label • Level Indicator • Button • Fader (straight and curved) • Clock (analogue and digital) • Numeric Keypad • Tab widget

2.12.17.19 Themes shall define a collection of consistent appearances and sounds for

design elements 2.12.17.20 It shall be possible to change the Theme used for a particular Station

without modifying the underlying design elements 2.12.17.21 There shall be tools to assist with the creation of new Themes 2.12.17.22 Shall allow sounds to be associated with a particular Page 2.12.17.23 Shall allow sounds to be associated with state transitions of particular

design elements 2.12.17.24 Sounds may be used to provide Touchscreen interaction feedback 2.12.17.25 A Page can be designated as the Stations inactivity Page 2.12.17.26 A Page can have a lockout group and threshold 2.12.17.27 A Tab can have a visibility group and threshold 2.12.17.28 There shall be a visualization interface for Page creation and editing 2.12.17.29 Standard graphical interaction methods (drag�and�drop) shall be used to

arrange design elements on Pages 2.12.17.30 There shall be a layout grid with user�defined spacing and color with

associated snap�to�grid functionality 2.12.17.31 It shall be possible to reuse the graphical layout of a configuration

independent of any assigned functionality


265561�54

2.12.17.32 The LCD Design functionality shall be part of a separate application that can be used alongside Light Designer

2.12.17.33 Pop�ups can be any fixed size up to the Page size 2.12.17.34 Pop�ups will have a fixed position on screen (but may move when being

shown/hidden) 2.12.18 Minimum Computer Requirements 2.12.18.1 The software shall require the Windows XP SP2 (Home or Pro) operating

system running on a x86�Windows�compatible computer (2 GHz Pentium 4 or better) with a minimum of 1 GB of hard drive space and 1 GB RAM, OpenGL graphics acceleration, a monitor capable of displaying at least 1024 x 768 screen resolution, a CD�ROM optical drive, Ethernet port, USB port or SD card slot, keyboard and mouse.

2.13 DMX GATEWAY – FOUR PORT (DMX) 2.13.1 The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor�based unit specifically

designed to provide DMX�512 control of stage, studio, and entertainment lighting systems. The gateway shall permit DMX�512 data to be encoded, routed over Ethernet and decoded back to DMX�512. The unit shall be a Net3 DMX 4�port Gateway.

2.13.2 Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least, Inc.’s

entertainment and Electrical Architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces.

2.13.3 Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, Electrical Engineerural

systems, and PCs over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT.

2.13.4 The unit shall support ESTA ACN and Streaming ACN 2.13.5 The unit shall support the Net2 protocol suite. 2.13.6 The unit shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed. 2.13.7 The unit shall be RoHS Compliant (lead�free). 2.13.8 The unit shall be CE compliant. 2.13.9 The gateway shall have a backlit graphic LCD display for identification (soft�

labeling) and status reporting. Labeling shall be user configurable using Network Configuration Editor (NCE). Each gateway shall also have power and network activity LEDs on both the front and rear of the unit. The LCD display shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid


265561�55

DMX/EDMX signal. Units that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid DMX/EDMX data shall not be allowed.

2.13.10 DMX Ports 2.13.10.1 DMX Ports shall comply with the requirements of the USITT DMX512 and

ANSI E1.11 DMX512�A standards. 2.13.10.2 The DMX port shall be software�configurable for either input or output. 2.13.10.3 Hardware configuration override setting shall be provided on the gateway. 2.13.10.4 DMX input shall be fully opto�isolated from the gateway electronics. 2.13.10.5 DMX output shall be earth�ground referenced. 2.13.10.6 DMX Port shall be capable of withstanding fault voltages of up to 250VAC

without damage. 2.13.10.7 Each port shall incorporate one 5�pin XLR type connector. A DMX Output port

shall utilize female connectors and a DMX input port shall utilize male connectors.

2.13.11 Processor 2.13.11.1 Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 64,279

DMX universes (32,910,848 DMX addresses). 2.13.11.2 Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one

packet time (approximately 22 mSec.). 2.13.11.3 A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions

unless specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility of older 3rd party DMX devices.

2.13.12 Mechanical � Rack Mount/Portable gateway 2.13.12.1 The rack mount/portable gateway will be fabricated of .16�gauge steel,

finished in fine�texture, scratch�resistant, black powder coat. Dimensions shall be 8.5” (22 cm) wide x 8.0” (20 cm) deep x 1.75” (5 cm) high not including tabs.

2.13.12.2 The weight of the gateway shall be 3.5 lbs (1.6 kg) with four connector

modules. An individual module shall weight no more than .25 lbs (.1 kg). 2.13.13 Power 2.13.13.1 Power for the gateway shall be provided either over the Category 5 (or


265561�56

better) cable, from 48V IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet distribution equipment, or via conventional switches together with isolated in�line power supplies capable of an operating range of 8�28vDC provided by the gateway manufacturer. Power consumption shall not be greater than 5 watts.

2.13.13.2 The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied

over the Cat5 cable. 2.13.13.3 Power may be provided from IEEE 802.3af compliant power�over Ethernet

distribution equipment, or by using conventional switches together with isolated in�line power supplies as provided by gateway manufacturer.

2.13.14 Configuration 2.13.14.1 Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using Net 2

Network Configuration Editor (NCE) or Gateway Configuration Editor, running on a PC connected to the network. The PC shall only be required for configuration, labeling and signal routing, and shall not be required for normal operation of the system.

2.13.14.2 Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the

confines of 64,279 DMX “universes”. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely configurable by the user. Duplicate outputs of DMX lines (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully supported.

2.13.14.3 Any number of DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512

addresses as long as the total does not exceed 32,767. Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each. Multiple sources may be combined and a priority may be assigned to each source. Each DMX line may have its own start address and offset for ease of use.

2.13.14.4 All relevant routing information shall be stored in non�volatile memory at

each gateway. The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the PC to be online.

2.13.15 Network 2.13.15.1 Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE�T,

802.3u for 100BASE�TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications. 2.13.15.2 All network cabling shall be Category 5 or better (for 5e and Category 6),

conforming to TIA�568A/B, and shall be installed by a qualified network installer.

2.13.15.3 Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX

data. 2.13.15.4 ESTA ACN and streaming ACN shall be supported.


265561�57

2.13.15.5 Switches shall comply with power�over�Ethernet IEEE802.3af, unless a

separate in�line power supply is provided. 2.13.15.6 Multiple DMX signal routing patches and multiple facilities shall be specifically

supported and limited only by the file storage capacity of the computer with Network Configuration Editor Software installed.

2.13.15.7 Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per port within

the confines of up to 64 DMX (32,767 EDMX addresses) “universes” when using EDMX and 64279 “universes” (32, 910,848 DMX addresses) when using Streaming ACN. Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each. Multiple sources may be combined and a priority may be assigned to each source. Each DMX line may have its own start address and offset for ease of use.

2.13.15.8 Units shall have built in DMX merger on a universe or channel�by�channel

basis. 2.13.15.9 Units shall have built in prioritizer on a universe or channel�by�channel basis. 2.13.16 DMX Connector modules 2.13.16.1 Each gateway shall incorporate four connector module locations. Each module

shall contain a single connector and its associated electronics for ease of service. Connector module options shall include a male DMX input connector, a female DMX output connector or a terminal strip connector.

2.13.16.2 Each connector module shall be fully opto�isolated from the gateway

electronics and from each other. 2.13.16.3 DMX connector modules shall be capable of withstanding fault voltages of up

to 250VAC without damage. 2.13.17 Environmental 2.13.17.1 The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). 2.13.17.2 The storage temperature shall be �40° to 70°C (�40° to 158°F). 2.13.17.3 The operating humidity shall be 5% � 95% non�condensing. 2.13.18 Accessories 2.13.18.1 Flexible Hanging Bracket kit � bracket shall allow unit to be mounted in 3

orientations, U�Bolt option also available


265561�58

2.13.18.2 Rack mount kit – a 1U rack�mount bracket that shall support either two

complete units or one unit and a Front Access Panel kit. This kit shall allow up to eight ports of DMX in a 1U rack space.

2.13.18.3 Front Access Panel kit – a kit that allows the connectors on the rear of the

unit to be accessed from the front of the unit in an equipment rack 2.13.18.4 Universal Power Supply with international plug�set included. Multiple power

supplies shall be able to fit in a vertically stacked power strip. 2.13.18.5 Network Configuration Editor (NCE) software 2.13.19 System Requirements 2.13.19.1 Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways

and software shall be as manufactured by Electronic Theater Controls Inc. of Middleton, WI.

2.13.19.2 Provide Ethernet switches and power supplies as scheduled and as shown on

drawings. 2.13.19.3 Provide a current generation PC with Windows operating system and a

10/100 Ethernet card. 2.14 ELLIPSOIDAL SPOTLIGHTS 2.14.1 Approved Products:

• ETC • Altmam • Selecon • Strand

2.14.2 Physical 2.14.2.1 The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs

and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be required for either lamp alignment or cleaning the reflector or lens

2.14.2.2 The following shall be provided:

• Integral cable clamp for power leads • Positive locking of lamp focus and independent lamp alignment controls • High impact, thermally insulated knobs and shutter handles • Reflector secured with shock mounts • Lens secured with silicone shock mounts • Rotating shutter assembly � 50° rotation

• 20 gauge stainless steel shutters


265561�59

• Insulated rear handle • Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for

smooth tube movement • Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top

mounted, quick release gel frame retainer • Rugged 3/16” x 1�1/4” steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing

300°+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke

• Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch • Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris

2.14.3 Optical 2.14.3.1 The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with a precision

molded borosilicate, ellipsoidal reflector and aspheric lens to produce an optimum cosine field.

2.14.3.2 The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

• Molded borosilicate reflector with multiple dichroic layers • 95% of visible light shall be reflected while 90% of infrared light as heat

shall be transmitted through the reflector • Low gate and beam temperature • Sharp imaging through a three plane shutter design • Projector�quality, high contrast aspheric lens, with an anti�reflective

coating to increase transmission

2.14.4 Performance 2.14.4.1 The unit shall be precision engineered to use an HPL lamp to deliver an even,

intense field with cosine distribution. 2.14.4.2 The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

• 5, 10, 14, 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree field angles • Projector�quality pattern imaging • Sharp shutter cuts without halation • Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable • Adjustable hard and soft beam edges

2.14.4.3 The unit shall be capable of utilizing Dimmer Doubling technology 2.14.4.4 The unit shall be UL and cUL listed and so labeled.


265561�60

2.14.5 Lamp 2.14.5.1 The high efficiency lamp shall be an HPL lamp, which shall consist of a

compact tungsten filament contained in a krypton�filled quartz envelope. The lamp shall mount axially within the reflector. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.

2.14.5.2 Provide the following quantities and accessories:

Ellipsoidal Reflector Spotlights 18 426 26° Ellipsoidal Reflector Spotlight (6x12) w/Color frame and C�Clamp 12 400PH�B Pattern holder (B size) 6 400RS Drop�in iris 18 400SC Safety cable, black (32�inch) 18 B Two pin ground (Stage Pin) installed 18 HPL750/115 HPL 750 Watt Lamp 115V, 3250, 300H

2.15 PAR SPOTLIGHTS � VARIABLE FOCUS SPOTLIGHT 2.15.1 General: The instrument shall be a Source Four PARNel spotlight as

manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or approved equal. 2.15.2 Physical 2.15.2.1 The spotlights are constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs

and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. 2.15.2.2 The spotlight shall provide, but not be limited to:

• Rugged die�cast aluminum construction • Ten interior baffles to eliminate beam scattering and spill light. • Thermally insulated, precision focus knob. • A sealed reflector housing that shall prevent all light leaks. • 17 heat�sink fins cast into the reflector housing for temperature control. • Integral cable clamp for power leads. • A brass self�retaining screw to retain the lamp socket • Sturdy gel frame holders with two accessory slots and a top mounted,

quick release gel frame retainer. • Rugged steel yoke with 300°+ rotation of fixture within yoke

• Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch. 2.15.2.3 Unit shall be nominally 11”long by 10” wide.


265561�61

2.15.2.4 Unit shall not weigh more than 8.5 pounds (without c�clamp). 2.15.2.5 The spotlight shall be UL and cUL listed and so labeled. 2.15.3 Electrical 2.15.3.1 The unit shall have an operating range of 115�240V, 50/60Hz. 2.15.3.2 The unit shall be capable of using a maximum of 750W HPL lamp. 2.15.3.3 The three conductor, 36” leads shall be rated for high temperature and

encased in a glass fiber outer sleeve. 2.15.3.4 The unit shall be capable of utilizing ETC Dimmer Doubling technology. 2.15.4 Lamp 2.15.4.1 The instrument shall use only one lamp type, the HPL lamp. 2.15.4.2 Fixtures that require the purchasing of multiple lamp types to achieve

different field angles shall not be acceptable. 2.15.4.3 The lamp shall:

• Be an HPL lamp consisting of a compact tungsten filament, contained in a krypton�filled quartz envelope

• Mount axially within the reflector and shall be pre�focused within the

reflector. • Have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal

temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment. • Use an ATP 220 nickel gold plated socket.

2.15.5 Lenses 2.15.5.1 Lens sets shall consist of two patented wave lenses. One clear and one

stippled.

2.15.5.2 Lenses shall be heat resistant, borosilicate glass. 2.15.5.3 Beam orientation of 25º�45º (spot to flood) shall be possible through rotation

of exterior rotation knob connected to a rotatable collar housed in the front of the unit.

2.15.5.4 Fixtures which require user to reposition the lamp socket to change the beam

angle shall not be acceptable.


265561�62

2.15.6 Optical 2.15.6.1 The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with modified

parabolic and multifaceted reflector. 2.15.6.2 Reflector finish shall be an Enhanced Aluminum deposition. 2.15.6.3 Reflector shall be cast into a heat sink assembly. 2.15.6.4 Reflector efficiency shall be a minimum of 93%. 2.15.6.5 Reflectors of pressed aluminum sheet construction shall not be acceptable. 2.15.7 Provide the following quantities and accessories:

16 S4PAR� PAR with Enhanced Aluminum Reflector w/Colorframe. 16 400CC C�clamp 16 B Two pin ground (Stage Pin) Factory installed 16 PHL575/115 HPL 575 Watt Lamp 115V

2.16 BORDERLIGHT 2.16.1 General: The instrument shall be Lighting and Electronics 4 circuit 6’ Border

light for stage lighting use. 2.16.2 Physical 2.16.2.1 Units shall be made from 20 gauge, galvanized iron, painted with high quality

dull black lacquer, having ventilation holes throughout the length, with spot�welded ends.

2.16.2.2 Solder heat resisting #12 wire to each socket. Provide four, 36" heat resisting

pigtails with appropriate connectors at each end of each strip. 2.16.2.3 Male connectors shall be at the stage left end with the color frame with the

spring loaded color frame holder at the top. 2.16.2.4 Furnish complete with glass roundels, 120 watt lamps. 2.16.2.5 Roundels shall be convex shaped, 5�5/8" diameter, heat�resisting, diffusing

glass. Color circuits shall be red, blue, green and clear. 2.16.2.6 Provide each unit with "C" clamp mounting. 2.16.2.7 Strips shall be mounted to the bottom pipe of the scheduled on 2nd, 3rd and

4th electrics.


265561�63

2.16.3 Provide the following quantities and accessories:

18 R40 Border light wth color farmes 216 GR Glass Roundel 400CC C�clamp 72 B�M Male Two pin ground (Stage Pin) Factory installed 72 B�F Female Two pin ground (Stage Pin) Factory installed 216 NPN 120Watt Flood lamp, 120VAC 36 SC Safety Cable

2.16.4 Wiring Devices (Connector Strips) (FS) (1E) (2E) (3E) (4E)

2.16.4.1 Wiring Devices shall be fabricated from 16 gauge cold rolled steel, in 8’0” sections. Devices shall be properly cleaned, primed and painted with fine textured, scratch�resistant, black powder coat. Circuit numbers shall be ¾” lexan tags with white letters on black background.

2.16.4.2 Individual pigtails and outlets shall be evenly spaced on 12” centers in

connector strips, or as otherwise specified. Where a circuit would fall on a joint it shall be moved 3” towards the junction box end of the strip.

2.16.4.3 Pigtails shall be three�wire type “SO” rubber jacketed cable sized for the

circuit capacity. Connectors available are 20, 50 and 100A pin connectors, 20 and 50A twistlocks and 20A “U” ground. Internal wiring shall be sized to circuit capacity and terminated in feed through compression terminals at one end for ease of installation. Wire shall be rated at 125’. Provide pigtails of sufficient length to reach any fixture mounting location.

2.16.4.4 Devices shall be supplied with appropriate hardware for mounting as shown

on the drawings. Connector strips shall have brackets on 5’ centers. 2.16.4.5 Wiring devices shall be UL Laboratories listed. 2.16.5 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING 2.16.5.1 FRONT OF STAGE (FS) – Connector strips 36’0” long with 20 pigtails and

stage�pin connectors wired on (20) 20A circuits plus 12 single pipe mounting brackets. Provide 20 circuit junction box.

2.16.5.2 FIRST ELECTRIC (1E) � Connector strips 40’0” long with 20 pigtails and


2.16.5.3 SECOND ELECTRIC (2E) � Connector strips 40’0” long with 12 pigtails and


2.16.5.4 THIRD ELECTRIC (3E) � Connector strips 40’0” long with 12 pigtails and

stage�pin connectors wired on (15) 20A circuits plus 12 single pipe mounting


265561�64

brackets. Provide 15 circuit junction box. 2.16.5.5 FOURTH ELECTRIC (4E) � Connector strips 40’0” long with 12 pigtails and


2.17 FRONT OF HOUSE STAGE ELECTRIC HOIST (TLS)

2.17.1 The Hoist, shall be purpose�designed and fabricated for overhead lifting of theatrical lighting fixtures and associated distribution elements. The system shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered, efficient device for overhead lifting. These system shall be controlled by a Quicktouch controller. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this hoisting and control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.

2.17.2 Each wire rope liftline shall adhere to a design factor of 10:1 with an ultimate

strength of 4200 pounds. All components of the system shall exceed the breaking strength of the wire rope.

2.17.3 The standard configured hoist P1000E shall be capable of lifting up to 1000

pounds suspended below the connector strip and pipe batten. 2.17.4 The standard hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1)

powerhead, 2) compression tube with beam clamps, cable management system, loft blocks, lift line and lift line terminations and 3) pipe batten and power/control distribution strip.

2.17.5 The hoist shall include the following features: 2.17.5.1 A powerhead containing the gearmotor, motor brake, load brake, limit

switches operating electronics, load sensor, slack line detector and wire rope. 2.17.5.2 The powerhead shall be no larger than 16” wide x 14” high x 48.5” long. 2.17.5.3 The powerhead shall weigh no more than 300 pounds. 2.17.5.4 A compression tube structure shall prevent any lateral load on the building.

Hoists or hoisting systems that impose a lateral load on the building structure shall not be acceptable for this project.

2.17.5.5 The hoist shall incorporate a built�in load cell. 2.17.5.6 The hoist shall incorporate a built�in slack line sensor 2.17.5.7 The hoist shall be manufactured from UL Listed components and shall be UL

Listed and tested as a complete system (not just UL listed parts).


265561�65

2.17.6 POWERHEAD 2.17.6.1 The powerhead shall be a fully enclosed sheet metal housing which shall

prevent contact with moving and electrical parts and shall provide protection against dirt, dust and debris collecting on the operating parts of the machine, the electrical and electronic components and the wire rope lift lines on the lifting drum.

2.17.6.2 The powerhead housing shall be fabricated from powder coated sheet metal.

It shall be punched and formed to enclose and support the gearmotor, motor brake, load brake, limit switch assembly, limit switch adjustment system, reversing contactor, emergency contactor, wire rope drum, wire rope (cable) keeper, load cell, slack line detector and motor electronics.

2.17.6.3 The rear hinged cover of the powerhead shall support connectors, switches

and LED lights for the following functions: local operating switch, power and control connector outlets, indicator lights for operating mode, limit switch indicator, limit switch override button, indicators for power, status and communication. Each of these functions shall be clearly labeled to identify their purpose.

2.17.7 GEARMOTOR AND MOTOR BRAKE 2.17.7.1 The gearmotor and motor brake shall be an integral unit from a single

manufacturer. It shall produce 1 horsepower and shall operate on 208 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase power.

2.17.7.2 The gearmotor shall operate the hoist at a fixed speed yielding a line speed

averaging 30 feet per minute. 2.17.7.3 The gearmotor shall drive a double output shaft that extends from each side

of the gearbox without couplings. 2.17.7.4 The integral motor brake shall be spring applied and electrically released. 2.17.7.5 The brake shall be capable of holding 150% of the motor full load torque. 2.17.7.6 On one side of the gearbox, the Prodigy hybrid drum™ shall be mounted. Up

to six 3/16” dia. 7 x 19 wire ropes, ASTM Specification 81023/A1023M�02, commonly referred to as galvanized aircraft cable, shall be wrapped on that drum.

2.17.7.7 The portion of the shaft protruding from the opposite side of the gearbox

shall support the load brake.


265561�66

2.18 LOAD BRAKE 2.18.1.1 The rotary disk load brake shall bring the moving load to a complete stop and

shall hold the load in position in the event of a mechanical failure of the motor, motor brake or gearbox.

2.18.1.2 The load brake shall not generate noise at any time in the operational cycle. 2.18.1.3 At no time shall normal hoist operation be limited by heat or noise caused by

the load brake. 2.19 WIRE ROPE DRUM. 2.19.1.1 The Prodigy Hybrid Drum shall allow the lift lines to be wrapped in a compact

manner that prevents wire rope damage. 2.19.1.2 A wire rope shall not cross over other wire ropes, nor lie vertically on top of

another wire rope nor be allowed to stack in a single pile as on a yoyo drum.

2.19.1.3 The drum shall have been tested for wear, durability, strength, service and

integrity by a nationally recognized testing lab. 2.19.1.4 The sloped drum shall be capable of safely wrapping up to eight pieces of

3/16” diameter wire rope lift lines. 2.19.1.5 An assembly of wire rope (cable) keepers shall assure that the lift lines wrap

appropriately on the drum. 2.19.2 LIMIT SWITCH 2.19.2.1 The limit switch assembly shall be mounted within the powerhead. The limit

switch shall establish hard “normal” end of travel limits and hard “ultimate” end of travel limits for movement in either direction. In addition, software shall establish resettable “normal up” and “normal down” end of travel limits, typically redundant for the normal end of travel limits. This combination of hard limits and soft limits shall provide each hoist with a total of three “up” and three “down” limits to assure that the hoist does not exceed the maximum allowable travel in either direction.

2.19.2.2 The hard end of travel limits shall be set or adjusted at the time of

installation via a screw adjustment on the bottom/rear of the powerhead cover. An indicator light shall be visible on the bottom panel of the powerhead cover and shall illuminate when the setting screw is adjusted to the current position of the batten. Any system that indicates that the limit has been set by audible or tactile means only shall not be acceptable.


265561�67

2.19.3 LOAD SENSOR/LOAD PROFILING. A load sensor shall be built into the powerhead. It shall be possible to create a profile of the actual load on the hoist as it travels through its normal cycle. The profile may be changed by “re�training” the profiling system whenever the suspended load is changed on the batten. The load sensor shall continuously monitor the load.

2.19.4 SLACK LINE DETECTOR: The slack line detector shall be built into the hoist.

When a slack line condition develops, the slack line detector shall remove power from the hoist and prevent hoist movement.

2.19.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT: The load circuits and control wiring shall be fed to the

hoist by a built�in cable management system that allows the flat feeder cable to fold and store in a trough no more than 6” high x 8’�0” long located on top of the connector strip. At high trim, the entire system shall be capable of storing in no more than 24” of vertical space.

2.19.6 COMPRESSION TUBE AND BEAM CLAMPS 2.19.6.1 The compression tube shall be a continuous channel of extruded aluminum

engineered to resist and eliminate the horizontal load on the building. 2.19.6.2 The tube shall support the loftblocks mounted within the spacing limits of the

system. 2.19.6.3 Compression tube sections shall be joined into a continuous assembly by a

dedicated splicing system at each tube joint. 2.19.6.4 The tube shall be installed only by means of dedicated beam clamps that

allow the compression tube to snap into place. 2.19.6.5 Beam clamps shall be capable of attaching to horizontal beams, joist flanges

or flat steel plates measuring from 3/8” thick up to 1” thick and from 4” wide up to 14” wide.

2.19.6.6 Hoist systems that do not neutralize the lateral forces on the building shall

not be accepted for this project. 2.19.7 LOFT BLOCKS 2.19.7.1 Each loft block shall be an assembly of steel side plates, a wire rope idler,

sheave and support hardware inserted in a slot on the bottom of the compression tube. The blocks shall be postioned in the compression tube may be located anywhere along the compression tube within 4’�0” of a beam clamp, 4’�0” from a compression tube splice and no closer than 4’�0” from each other (See Table 000).

2.19.7.2 Loft blocks shall measure 5” in diameter and contain a pair of press fit sealed

ball bearings. Lift lines shall travel in a groove shaped and sized for 3/16”


265561�68

diameter wire rope per the latest edition of the Wire Rope Users’ Manual as published by the Wire Rope Technical Board. The loft block sheave shall be concentric about the hub and shall be evenly balanced for ease of rotation.

2.19.7.3 An idler shall be incorporated into the top assembly of the loft block to guide

and support lift lines as they pass the block. 2.19.7.4 Hoisting systems requiring the loft blocks to be mounted directly to the

facility steel shall not be accepted for this project. 2.19.8 HANGERS: Raceway hangers shall be specially shaped flat bar that shall

support the wire rope termination hardware and secure the raceway and the pipe batten.

2.19.9 LIFTLINE TERMINATIONS 2.19.9.1 Lift lines shall be terminated at the powerhead standard thimble and a copper

oval compression sleeve installed at the factory. 2.19.9.2 Liftlines shall be terminated at the load hanger with a low profile Right Angle

Cable Adjuster (RACA)™, thimble and copper oval compression sleeve. 2.19.9.3 The batten trim shall be adjusted at the RACA. 2.19.9.4 Systems utilizing turnbuckles or chain to trim the batten shall not be

accepted for this installation. 2.19.10 CONNECTOR STRIP—DISTRO 2.19.10.1 Power to the connector strip shall be fed via flat cable described above. The

strip shall be built to the length specified. Internal structure shall be provided to allow installation of pendant or surface mounted architectural fixtures located as specified or shown on the construction drawings.

2.19.10.2 A barrier may be provided inside the connector strip to allow distribution of

emergency power in a separate chamber within the distribution strip. 2.19.10.3 Flat feed wire shall enter a terminal box at the designated end of the

raceway. The wiring and all components shall meet UL and NEC codes, as appropriate.

2.19.10.4 A maximum of one data wire, one ground wire and six load circuits shall be

provided. 2.19.10.5 Fixtures shall be suspended directly from the distribution strip. 2.19.11 POWER AND CONTROL DISTRIBUTION


265561�69

2.19.11.1 Each hoist shall receive power and control via a pair of 8’�0” long jumper cables extending from the powerhead to the source outlets. The receptacles shall be installed in a sheet metal junction box located less than 8’�0” away from each hoist powerhead and shall include a power and control outlet. Provide a 20 amp 3 phase breaker in each distribution box. The wiring and connectors shall be barriered between high and low voltage. The power/distribution channel shall be UL listed for this application.

2.20 QUICKTOUCH CONTROL SYSTEM 2.20.1 GENERAL 2.20.1.1 The entire hoisting system shall be operated by an Electronic Theatre

Controls Quicktouch Group 24 fixed speed controller. It shall be purpose�designed and fabricated to manage and operate hoists specifically designed for overhead lifting of theatre lights, curtains and scenic elements. The systems shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered, efficient device to control the equipment. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.

2.20.1.2 The Quicktouch Control System shall consist of a flush mounted primary

control panel and up to three remote E�stop stations. The hoisting system shall also include one Quicktouch Fixed Speed Remote control device with 30’ of flexible cable that may be attached to the system at the primary operating station, the Quicktouch Group 24 control panel.

2.20.1.3 The controller shall include the following features:

• Key operated power switch • LCD display with feedback/operating information • Key operated hoist load profile training/enable switch • Latching hoist selection buttons with rear illuminated naming tabs • Rear illuminated hold�to�operate (deadman) up and down operation

buttons • Dedicated E�stop button • Outlet for wired remote • Optional door • Optional rack mount kit

2.20.1.4 The controller shall be UL Listed and shall be fabricated from UL Listed

components. 2.20.2 ENCLOSURE 2.20.2.1 The back box and face panel shall be fabricated from 16ga powder coated


265561�70

sheet steel specially formed to provide support for installation as well as all components installed within the housing.

2.20.2.2 The Quicktouch face panel shall be printed with complete labeling information

to identify the function each of the buttons in the control station. 2.20.2.3 The face panel shall identify the system as a Quicktouch controller for stage

rigging. 2.20.2.4 The face panel shall be shades of grey. The ring surrounding the E�stop

button shall be safety yellow and shall be rear illuminated 2.20.2.5 The face panel shall be removable. The steel panel to which all switches are

mounted shall be removable via screws in the surface located underneath the face panel.

2.20.3 LCD SCREEN 2.20.3.1 The liquid crystal display shall be purpose designed to communicate all

information in human readable text. 2.20.3.2 The screen shall be rear illuminated. 2.20.3.3 During system start up the screen shall show the progress of the hoists

diagnostics self tests. Upon completion of the startup sequence the screen shall indicate that the system is “OK” or shall provide specific information should a fault be detected. Fault conditions shall be reported in human readable text. Systems that report fault conditions in a series of blinking lights shall not be acceptable for this installation.

2.20.3.4 When a hoist is selected the LCD screen shall readout the hoist name or

number, its current position above the floor, the amount of weight suspended from the batten, preset position recorded, as well as a bar graph scale that shows the current position of the hoist, top and bottom limits and the current weight suspended by the hoist.

2.20.4 HOIST SELECTION/OPERATION BUTTONS 2.20.4.1 There shall be 12 rear illuminated hoist selection buttons. When the button is

selected it shall be rear illuminated. The button shall remain illuminated until it is de�selected.

2.20.4.2 Up to four hoists may be selected to move at one time. When the up or

down button is pushed and held each hoists shall move to its next stop location. If the stop location is the adjustable preset, the hoist can be made to continue to travel in the selected direction by releasing and re�pressing the up or down hold�to�operate button until the next stop for the hoist(s) is reached.


265561�71

2.20.4.3 Only four hoists may move at one time and they may only move in one

direction at a time. 2.20.4.4 All button shall fit neatly within each of the metal and cover panel cutouts on

the controller. 2.20.5 KEY SWITCHES 2.20.5.1 A key switch shall control power to the control system. The key must be in

the lock and the key turned to the on position for the hoisting system to operate.

2.20.5.2 A separate key is required to turn on the load profiling system. That key

must be in the lock and turned to the “ON” position for load profiling to be functional.

2.20.5.3 When load profiling is turned on the hoist will know the amount of weight that

is supposed to be supported by the batten at any location in the path of travel. Should the weight exceed or be reduced below the profiled weight, the hoist will stop operation until the fault is cleared.

2.20.6 SLACK LINE DETECTOR: The slack line detector is located in the power head.

When a slack line condition occurs, power will be disconnected from the hoist and the hoist will cease to operate until the slack line condition has been cleared. The condition will result in a fault message on the LCD screen on the controller.

2.20.7 E�STOP 2.20.7.1 The E�stop button on the Quicktouch controller shall be a mushroom button

with a rear illuminated ring surrounding the button. The light shall always be on. During normal operation the E�stop button shall be in the out position. An E�stop can be activated via this button by firmly pressing the button in. the button will latch and will immediately cause a class zero stop of all hoists in the system. The LCD screen shall report the E�stop as an E�stop fault. To continue system operation the E�stop button must be cleared by twisting the button to release the latch.

2.20.7.2 Up to three remote E�stop stations may be connected to the system. Each

remote E�stop station shall operate in the same way as the primary E�stop at the Quicktouch control panel.

2.20.8 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 2.20.8.1 Upon energization the control system shall perform a series of diagnostic

tests that shall assure that all system safety functions are working. Should an error in the safety functions be determined the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of


265561�72

the fault. 2.20.8.2 During operation should a fault be detected, the LCD window shall identify

the fault condition and its cause. When appropriate, the diagnostic shall cease hoist operation.

2.20.8.3 Monthly, the system shall perform an additional series of diagnostic tests to

determine if there are any problems with any portion of the hoisting control system safety features. In the event of a problem, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault.

2.20.8.4 11 months after a system inspection has been performed , system will

remind the user to schedule full system maintenance/inspection. The reminder will remain in the system until it is turned off by the factory authorized and trained inspector.

2.20.9 REMOTE CONTROL PENDANT 2.20.9.1 A remote control pendant with 35’�0” long attached cable and plug shall be

provided for the system. The remote control must be plugged to the Quicktouch control panel. When the remote control is plugged in the E�stop on the remote is active.

2.20.9.2 The remote control provides up/down control for those hoists that have been

preselected at the Quicktouch controller. PART 3 � EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Installation of this equipment shall only be performed by a factory approved and

factory trained theatrical rigging installers. Installation shall be performed in a workmanlike way and shall strictly adhere to the standards of these specifications and manufacturer’s installation requirements. Where necessary, the installer may make adjustments to accommodate unforeseen impediments to installation. The completed work must achieve all electrical, safety and appearance requirements as established in these specifications.

3.1.2 Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes. 3.1.3 On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with

advanced approval from the architect or Owner’s representative. 3.1.4 It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to receive and store the

necessary materials and equipment for installation of the dimmer system. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the dimming system, even


265561�73

though every item may not be specifically mentioned. The contractor shall deliver on a timely basis to other trades any equipment that must be installed during construction.

3.1.5 The electrical contractor shall be responsible for field measurements and

coordinating physical size of all equipment with the Electrical Engineering requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.

3.1.6 The electrical contractor shall install all lighting control and dimming equipment

in accordance with manufacturer’s approved shop drawings. 3.1.7 All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the

dimmer system load terminals. 3.2 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES 3.2.1 Upon completion of the installation, including testing of load circuits, the

contractor shall notify the dimming system manufacturer that the system is available for formal checkout.

3.2.2 Notification shall be provided in writing, two weeks prior to the time that factory�

trained personnel are needed on the job site. 3.2.3 No power is to be applied to the dimming system unless specifically authorized

by written instructions from the manufacturer. 3.2.4 Upon completion of the formal check�out, the factory engineer shall demonstrate

operation and maintenance of the system to the owner’s representatives. Provide (24) hours of Owner training.

3.2.5 As part of operational test, perform a power outage simulation test to confirm

proper emergency power operations of the systems. END OF SECTION.


270610�1

DIVISION 27 � COMMUNICATION SECTION 270610 – VOICE/DATA SYSTEM PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor is directed to examine each and every section of these

specifications, all drawings relating to the Contract Documents, any and all Addenda, etc., for work described elsewhere that may relate to the provision of the work described herein. Materials and performance requirements are specified elsewhere herein that relate to these systems.

1.2 The use of proprietary or copyrighted names or reference to patented trade

items within this specification or elsewhere in the Contract Documents is meant to establish a standard of quality and performance. All materials and equipment proposed for installation must meet or exceed all specified requirements. The manufacturer of all wiring components and patch panels shall be Amp, Inc. or Panduit. The manufacturer of wire management components shall be Panduit.

1.3 Specialty Contractor shall be BICSI certified to work with Category 6 cable and

will be expected to provide a SPIN number as provided by the FCC. PART 2 � SCOPE OF THE WORK 2.1 The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, consulting services, purchasing,

testing of completely installed systems, etc., that are indicated or required to provide a complete data distribution wiring network to passive patch panels from wallplates.

2.2 The data distribution network shall be designed and installed in a format and

construction equivalent to the Ethernet Ten Base "T" system as it is commonly known and in use throughout the world. The actual means for segmenting of the network shall be determined by the owner as he installs wiring concentrators.

2.3 The data distribution system shall be installed complete, except as hereinafter

described. The system shall be provided with all input plates, wiring, equipment racks and supports, equipment, connections, wire terminations and identifications, 120 VAC power outlets, etc., for a completely functioning premises wiring network.

2.4 The system hubs and software shall be installed by the Owner. 2.5 A number of data ports shall be provided, as indicated on the plans. The data

ports shall be configured as follows: 2.5.1 Installed and wired data jacks, that are connected to the patch panels in

individual star home runs.


270610�2

2.5.2 Data ports shall be completely ready to receive a connection from data generating or receiving device, enabling such device to run on the network in an unrestricted fashion, meeting all network performance parameters, except as may be limited by the connected device itself.

2.5.3 Provide single, double, triple or 4�way data jacks as indicated on the plans.

Outlet boxes and conduit runs shall be sized appropriately for 40% fill of conductors used. An outlet plate shall be provided with four positions for snap�in jacks. Provide blank inserts for unused positions.

2.5.4 Special Note: In the design and layout of the individual segments, backbones,

routing of cable, connections between segments, wiring concentrators, etc., the current conventional 100 meter limitation of physical wiring distance shall be included for all ports. Additional equipment, wiring, etc., shall be included in the system as needed to ensure all performance criteria can be met in the final installation, when all indicated ports are activated. If this distance requirement cannot be maintained, an additional wiring closet or remote hub shall be incorporated into the project by the system supplier.

2.6 This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades in the furnishing of "mixed

service" wallplates, such as "teachers' wallplate" for voice/data and voice/data wallplates in offices. The completed installation shall be coordinated with all services incorporated into "mixed�service" plates. Contact other suppliers prior to bid or as needed to effect this coordination.

PART 3 � TESTING AND WARRANTIES 3.1 The data distribution network, upon completion of the installation, shall be tested

in its entirety. This testing shall completely check each new data port, thru the wiring to the terminations. Each and every data port shall have a system address.

3.2 Testing shall encompass all system performance parameters of each port,

including N.E.X.T., continuity of wiring to D.C., EMI/RFI levels, capacitance, length and all significant performance parameters related to Category Six, 350 mb/sec 10 base T transmission and as outlined in the K.E.T.S. Wiring Standard.

3.3 All of the network cabling that is installed shall be checked after all terminations

are complete with an approved test instrument such as the Microtest "Pentascanner" or approved equivalent instrument. The testing device shall have an inboard memory that is capable of retaining testing parameters and actual results. The Contractor shall provide a printout summary, cable by cable, using the actual cable I.D. format to allow future comparison testing or circuit tracing. Provide the printout summaries on 8�1/2" X 11" paper, three complete sets mounted in a ring binder as part of the project's closeout documentation. Submit the printout summaries to the Engineer for review.


270610�3

3.4 Contractor shall provide a written Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) test report on each cable.

3.5 The test results shall be in a form and format that can be easily understood. The

results shall be recorded port by port, identified room by room so the results can be traced and repeated if necessary, or checked for performance drift.

3.6 Before labeling any device or port or doing any testing, verify the actual

room numbers for each school. Always use the actual room name/numbering scheme.

3.7 Contractor shall certify in writing that tests were performed in accordance with

KDOE and KETS Standards and signed by person performing the test. 3.8 The completed data distribution system, in its entirety, shall be unconditionally

warranted for a period of one year from the completion of testing and system acceptance by the Engineer and/or Owner.

PART 4 �DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.1 The cable and connector system shall be capable of operating at up to 350

megabit/second speed, with capability to handle ISA, EISA, Microchannel and all other currently available bus architectures. It shall be compliant with EIA/TIA568A Standards, latest version, all Category six construction.

4.2 The system shall be capable of interfacing with or transparent to IBM, Apple and other common brands of computer equipment.

4.3 Lengths of cabling shall not exceed the published criteria for this type of system. LAN repeaters shall not be considered or used in cabling design.

4.4 The selection and location of patch panels shall be made with 10%, or minimum of ten additional ports for future growth in addition to the ports indicated on the drawings and required for the project.

4.5 Patch panels shall be rack mounted at indicated or required locations. The Contractor shall indicate the final locations on the project record drawings. Provide for any needed general construction in bid. Patch panels shall be entirely Category Six construction, A.T. & T 110�Style with RJ�45 jacks as needed, maximum 48 jacks per panel, EIA/TIA 568A compliant.

4.6 The Contractor shall evaluate the geography of the building and cable layout prior to bid and satisfy himself that the design intent can be met. The design shall be based on the indicated wiring closet locations as shown. If pre�bid


270610�4

analysis indicates the need for additional equipment, wiring, etc., contact the Engineer 10 days prior to bid for clarification by written addendum.

4.7 The Contractor is to prepare shop drawings for review prior to purchasing or installing any equipment or wiring. Provide ten sets for review, bound neatly. The review drawings should consist of floor plans indicating all port locations, their style, routings, port address nomenclature, wiring distances, etc. The shop drawing submittal for the system shall include all components, wiring, plates, details, etc., involved in the system.

4.8 Submit documentation outlining system testing procedures and equipment for review prior to beginning testing. Testing documentation shall include the proposed formats for cable testing summary and hub throughput testing as applicable.

4.9 All system wiring to and from ports is to be Category Six, unshielded twisted pairs. The installation of the wiring shall be thru sleeves, conduit, bridal rings and along backboards as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall consider the possibility of RFI/EMI in the installation and take all necessary precautions or provide physical separations to ensure proper system performance. Wiring shall be 4 pairs, 23 AWG, all pairs certified Category Six, plenum type. If necessary, wiring is to be installed within conduit or other enclosed raceway in plenum ceiling areas. Coordinate all requirements for plenum and non�plenum spaces with other trades and the contract documents or by site verification prior to bidding the work.

4.10 Cable shall be as follows:

Data and Voice Cables plenum cable � Category 6, 4 pairs, 23 AWG, all pairs Siemen, Berk�Tek LANmark – 1000 Plenum�Rated, AMP Inc., Superior Essex, AT&T, Bertek, General or West Penn equivalent.

Color of Cable: Voice = Blue

Data = Blue 4.11 All data port plates for outlet boxes shall be installed with all wiring terminated

per the manufacturer's recommendations. All plates shall be Category Six, A.T. & T 110 style with RJ�45 jacks. All jacks shall be blue for data and blue for voice.

4.12 Plates shall be configured for the number of data outlets shown. For certain

plates marked voice/data style, provide one data port, RJ�45 style and an additional telephone voice jack, style as needed. Clearly label the "voice" and "data" jacks with black�filled engraved letters, permanent plastic labels, plastic�shielded tags, or other approved means, per K.E.T.S. standards. All jacks shall be non�keyed. Coordinate provisions for multi�service plates with each other


270610�5

potential project supplier prior to bid or as needed after bids, to ensure all needed components are provided in the contract.

4.13 Provide 120 volt surge�suppressed AC line power to all system equipment

whether indicated on the plans or not. Refer to other sections of these specifications for electrical requirements.

4.14 All system wiring shall be neatly draped, labeled, properly supported and

terminated at all locations. Provide permanent labeling indicating room number and address. Each patch panel termination for an individual port shall be permanently marked. See other requirements this section (M. below) for more specific labeling information.

4.15 All system installations shall be made in full compliance with the following:

National Electrical Code Kentucky Building Code ANSI C2�1981 National Electrical Safety Code 47 CFR Part 68 NFPA 75 EIA/TIA 568A Other EIA Standards that Apply to such Installations Kentucky Education Technology Standards � Current Version as of Bid Date

4.16 All cable shall be carefully routed and connected to avoid ground loops and EMI.

All racks and equipment enclosures shall be effectively grounded to the nearest ground point provided in electrical spaces. Use only solid copper, green color wiring, #6 awg minimum for grounds. Avoid sharp bends in wiring.

4.17 At the patch panel locations, provide a plexiglas framed or shielded permanently�

mounted chart showing the cable schedule for the system, highlighted to show the cables and equipment at that location. This schedule shall include:

4.17.1 Cable Number

Each cable shall have a unique identifier. This number shall be up to 5 characters in length. The first two characters MAY be ALPHA characters, the last three characters MUST be numeric.

4.17.2 Drop ID

The drop id. identifies the cable drop location. This field may be up to six characters in length. This identification shall represent a room number, floor plan grid location, or wiring closet location. Note: It is imperative that the final version of the building room numbering system be utilized in all cable identifications. Verify room numbering system with the Architect or Owner.


270610�6

4.17.3 Jumper From

This field shall identify whether the drop/grid cable is terminated in THIS wire closet or patched from a device. A drop/grid cable shall terminate on a distribution panel. A patch cable shall jumper from a device unit number.

4.17.4 Termination Point

Grid/riser cable termination point in a rack and panel. This termination is in the DESTINATION wire closet "Jumper From" location.

4.17.5 Length

Cable length in feet. 4.17.6 Jumper To

This field may be up to 11 characters and shall be used to identify the "jumper to" point in THIS wire closet. "Jumper to" may be a device and unit number or distribution panel position. The owner will insert these identifications. Leave a blank space on charts.

NOTE: Identify fiber optic cables in similar fashion, as applicable and differentiate their codes by an "FO" prefix. Also, all cable ID configurations shall be verified with owner and shall match the owner’s existing labeling schemes.

4.18 Fiber Optic patch panels shall be Amp P/N 559561�1 with Amp P/N 559515�1

couplers for 12 ports. ST style or equivalent by Panduit. PART 5 � INSTALLATION 5.1 Provide permanent labeling as shown in the sequence chart. 5.2 Provide cable installation of Category Six UTP 4 pair cable, installed per the cable

lists. Cable lengths shown in cable lists should be verified before cutting and terminating cables. Data cables shall be terminated in back of each distribution panel.

5.3 Provide cable/connector/hub testing, as appropriate, to satisfy system

installation requirements and verification of proper function. 5.4 The Cabling System shall be installed in a professional manner by persons skilled

in the trades represented and in accordance with local building codes and applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), except where specifications for the system design and specifications exceed NEC requirements, where the more stringent standard shall apply. The electrical contractor shall not pull in or make connections for the data cabling system


270610�7

5.5 All electrical materials and equipment installed shall be of one manufacture, and

approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear the UL label. 5.6 Drawings generally indicate work to be done, but do not show all bends,

transitions or special fittings required to clear beams, girders, or other work already in place. Contractor shall carefully investigate conditions where wiring conduit and bridal rings are proposed or installed, and furnish and install any required fittings, offsets, etc. All cutting and patching necessary to install the system shall be provided as a part of this contract, in accord with the established or prevailing standards.

5.7 Contractor shall install labels as follows: 5.7.1 One label at each end of each cable at the end of the cable sheath, after

stripping. 5.7.2 One label or marking of port address and/or cable drop I.D.# on the inside of

each active outlet plate. Plates shall be provided with permanent, typed plastic labels for each jack Amp #558088 and associated material.

5.7.3 One label on the front of the distribution panel centered below each associated

cable connect. 5.7.4 All markings shall be done in a manner that presents a neat, professional

appearance. 5.8 Contractor shall bond together cable grounds to distribution rack, and bond rack

to building electrical panel ground for ground continuity. Continuity shall be checked with an ohmmeter between adjacent components, to a maximum of one OHM. Provide additional jumpers if necessary.

5.9 All cables from overhead shall be neatly dressed behind distribution panels,

providing adequate working space in back of the panels, allowing rack movement and working space.

5.10 Contractor shall terminate the pairs of each cable on the patch panels with RJ�45

Category Six EIA/TIA 568A data connectors. 5.11 Equipment racks shall be grounded to building ground using an appropriate size

ground wire (minimum #6 AWG). Route to the nearest available panelboard ground bus, preferably the panel that feeds receptacles at the equipment location. Route the ground wire in E.M.T. conduit, with redundant ground bushings.

5.12 The equipment racks shall be completely installed before or just as cables are

pulled.


270610�8

5.13 Contractor shall use basket grips or other wire pulling apparatus as recommended by the wire manufacturer wherever possible, and exercise care while pulling cable so as not to exceed the maximum allowable pulling strength of any cable.

5.14 Contractor shall economize on the use of cable by limiting excess length on runs

to one foot at the outlet, and four feet at the distribution panel(s), unless longer lengths are needed to make up terminations with the necessary amount of slack. Leave sufficient slack to allow moving of racks away from wall for easy service access.

5.15 Insulated throat conduit fittings shall be used for ends of raceway or sleeves at

all locations. Provide 3/4" x 4' x 8' high fire retardant plywood backboard(s) as needed at each wiring closet location. Backboards shall be painted with white, fire resistant paint prior to installing any devices. Mount ground wire and surge�suppressing ANSI Category "A" 120 volt outlets at bottom of backboard. Provide quadruplex outlets as needed (minimum of two), with each quad on a dedicated 20 amp circuit from panel, leaving 25% spare outlets for the Owner's future use. Equipment racks shall be mounted at no more than 60" to top.

5.16 Requirements for grounding, bonding, structural supports, relieving of sharp

edges, etc., shall be in accordance with local codes and accepted building practices.

5.17 Cable Separation from Power Wiring: (Note: These are recommended guide

distances only. The Contractor is responsible for minimizing RFI/EMI problems in the wiring and equipment installations to the point that they do not affect system performance.)

5.17.1 The following distances are a guide for separation of data wiring from power

voltages up to 480 volts:

<2kva 2�5kva >5kva

Unshielded power lines 2.5 in. 39 in. 48 in.

Unshielded power lines enclosed in grounded conduit 5 in. 12 in. 24 in.

Power lines with grounded metallic sheath enclosed in conduit 5 in. 6 in. 12 in.

5.17.2 Between the data wiring and any fluorescent, neon, or high intensity discharge

(HID) lamp fixtures, the minimum clearance shall be five inches, or greater if recommended by the cable or hardware vendors.


270610�9

5.17.3 Cables may be installed closer to lighting and convenience outlet power cables (single phase 120V, 20A. maximum), in metal cable channels for limited distances, if the following are observed:

5.17.3.1 Parallel runs of no more than fifteen feet are permissible if a one inch

separation between the power cable and the data cable is maintained by separators or suitable retention hardware.

5.17.3.2 Parallel runs of no more than thirty feet are permissible if a two inch

separation is maintained. The separation may be less than two inches for a run of up to twelve inches, if no contact occurs between the data cable and the power cable.

5.17.4 Contractor shall correct all cables which malfunction due to proximity to power

cable, or other interference source revealed by checking or electronic network testing.

5.17.5 Contractor to verify all listed cable clearances with the system supplier

prior to installing any cable and perform his work in accord with the suppliers' requirements.

5.17.6 Wiring Concentrator Equipment 5.17.6.1 To be provided by the Owner, outside this contract. 5.17.7 Project Completion 5.17.7.1 Contractor's work shall be considered complete after the following has

been accomplished: 5.17.7.1.1 Installation is complete, all system testing has been completed and

Contractor certifies in writing that the entire system is in working order. 5.17.7.1.2 All system labels have been put in place. 5.17.7.1.3 All construction debris and scrap materials have been removed from the

premises. 5.17.7.1.4 All marked up record drawings have been returned to the

Architect/Engineer. 5.17.7.1.5 All unused materials have been returned to the Owner, as Owner directs. 5.17.7.1.6 The Engineer has accepted the installation. 5.17.7.1.7 The Engineer has accepted the system wiring in its entirety in writing.

Forward a copy of this communication to the Architect and Engineer for their records.


270610�10

5.17.8 There shall be no visible slack or sags in cables. Contractor shall provide

additional supports as required to correct and also as required to maintain cable tension limits. Cable shall not be installed with sharp bends that may damage cable. Coordinate installation requirements with cable manufacturer.

5.17.9 All fiber optic cable shall be ran in innerduct in cable tray or conduit. Innerduct

shall be 1 � 1/4" corrugated. Carlon or equal. 5.17.10 All multi�pair cables shall be Category 5E, in 25 pair multiples as required. END OF SECTION.


270800 � 1

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION

SECTION 270800 � SOUND SYSTEM

PART 1� GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1.1 Provide all materials, equipment, and services as specified herein.

1.1.2 The work specified herein shall be performed by a Professional AV Contractor

including but not limited to the installation of cabling, devices, termination, programming, and training.

1.1.3 Final placement of speaker clusters and steering of coverage patterns is to be determined by the installing AV Contractor providing optimal direct sound

field coverage and Intelligibility.

1.1.4 Should the supplier furnish a system with different wiring requirements than indicated, changes necessary by the installing CONTRACTOR to comply shall be at no extra cost to the owner.

1.1.5 (2) four hour final training sessions shall be provided to the owner and

coordinated to occur prior to final completion date. AV Contractor shall provide a technician to support School Personnel during 1st scheduled production event as long as the event occurs within 60 days of final

completion or a (3rd) four hour training session within the same time frame.

1.2 RELATED WORK 1.2.1 All electrical pull boxes, all outlet boxes, cable trays, and all conduit with pull

strings, shall be furnished and installed under Division 16 of the General Contract. Coordinate and field verify as necessary with AV System

Contractor for proper installation. 1.2.2 All 120VAC power conductors and conduits associated with the power circuits

to all Sound and Video System equipment locations shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. The 120 VAC power to the equipment racks shall

be terminated by an Electrical Contractor inside the racks to Installer�supplied Plugmold isolated ground plugstrips or isolated ground quad convenience outlets.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

1.3.1 It is the intent of this package to procure a supplier who can provide labor for

the installation of new equipment, pulling cables, and for furnishing all cables

and accessories necessary. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for leaving in


270800 � 2

place proper sized conduits with pull wires and boxes for the AV System

Contractor use. 1.3.2 The AV System supplier shall be an “AV System Contractor” who regularly

engages in the furnishing and installation of both Professional Sound Reinforcement and Video Systems.

1.3.3 The AV System contractor shall be an authorized and certified Dealer of the

equipment listed within this specification. A copy of factory programming

certification with respect to the main house speaker system and AV Control System shall be provided to the engineer prior to the bid and within the

submittal package. All suppliers interested in bidding this project shall provide the ENGINEER with the above information 10 days prior to the bid.

1.3.4 The AV System Supplier shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the A/E and OWNER that they have:

1.3.4.1 Adequate staff and equipment to pursue the work properly and

expeditiously. 1.3.4.2 Adequate technical experience.

1.3.5 Suitable financial status to meet the obligations of the work.

1.3.6 Supplier to provide maintenance and warranty service for a period of 1 year

after acceptance of installation to be included in the lump sum bid.

1.4 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE AND SINGLE OPERATION

1.4.1 The speaker system is to be constructed, configured, and installed in such a

manner as to provide a uniform sound field both front to rear and side to side

in order that crisp, clean, intelligible sound will be provided to every seat without dead spots or area of excessive brightness. The sound field shall not

vary more than plus or minus 3 dB from front to rear or side to side.

The frequency response of the system shall be measured in the free field

with a calibrated spectrum analyzer. The Frequency Response curve shall be flat from 100 Hz ro 6 kHz with a 3 dB per octave roll off above 6 kHz. Check

system for any RFI and remove unwanted signal as required. 1.4.2 Single Presenter Operation� Provide remote power up switch and

reconfiguration of DSP from stage area for a single wired microphone and single wireless Microphone to be used on stage for presentations. System

microphone and system level should also be controlled from this location. The operation of the main house mixer will not be required.


270800 � 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 Completely detailed shop drawings shall be prepared prior to the

procurement of equipment or commencement of work. Drawings shall be prepared and submitted on 30” x 40” paper. Equipment lists, data sheets,

etc. shall be 8�1/2” x 11” size, properly bound into a single or multiple volumes.

1.5.1.1 Submit the following for approval:

1.5.1.2 A complete equipment list, with manufacturers’ names, model numbers, and quantities of each item;

1.5.1.3 Manufacturers’ data sheets on all equipment items;

1.5.1.4 Equipment rack layouts showing locations of all rack mounted equipment items;;

1.5.1.5 Floor plans and reflected ceiling plans, performed at a scale of not less

than 1/8”=1’�0, showing loudspeaker locations, wall plates, and all other

related device locations;

1.5.1.6 Proposed constructions details for any custom fabricated items, including interface panels, patch panels, and wall plates. These details shall show dimensions, materials, finishes and color selection.

1.5.1.7 Comprehensive system schematics, showing detailed connection to call

equipment, with wire numbers, terminal block numbers, and color coding; 1.5.1.8 Riser diagrams showing conduit requirements for head�end and

auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for any remote control of electrical power, in sufficient detail to coordinate with the Electrical Subcontractor,

showing exact conduit requirements and locations for switched duplex receptacles.

PART 2� PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Alternate manufacturers will be considered with the submissions of the

following criteria 10 days prior to bid.

2.1.1.1 Data sheets and model numbers on all equipment proposed. 2.1.1.2 Acoustic 3D model analysis of the room utilizing proposed equipment.

Data shall clearly demonstrate direct and total sound pressure and STI Mapping of the room.


270800 � 4

2.1.1.3 Complete signal line drawings for complete AV System. 2.1.1.4 Manufacturer’s Warranty Statements

2.1.1.5 Copy of Technical Factory Certifications for the equipment proposed.

2.2 AUDITORIUM SOUND REINFORCEMENT

2.2.1 Loudspeaker Systems: Main Speaker Systems�Located as shown on the drawings.

2.2.1.1 The loudspeaker shall be a Renkus�Heinz Model ICL�FR� Dual or

approved equal self�powered, digitally steerable column array with wide

horizontal dispersion and a narrow vertical beam. The ability to move the acoustic center and multiple rays are paramount to the success of this

design. Any speaker for consideration must meet this performance. The column array shall be equipped with DSP control and supervision from a

remotely located computer. Column arrays that are not digitally steerable and do not include DSP control will not be considered equal under these specifications. The column array shall include five 6 1/2” transducers with

neodymium magnets, three 1�inch titanium nitride HF compression drivers and an 8�channel DSP controlled Class D digital amplifier. Each amplifier

channel shall deliver a minimum of 100 Watts RMS to its associated transducer. It shall provide closely controlled 150° horizontal coverage (up to 3 kHz; 120° dispersion above) and either single beam or multi�beam (up

to 4 separate beams; 8 when stacked) vertical coverage. Beam opening angles (vertical dispersion) shall be adjustable to 20, 25 or 30 degrees

(5,10,15 & 20 degrees when stacked) and steerable from minus 30 degrees to plus 30 degrees. Vertical coverage and beam steering, gain and EQ shall be easily adjusted after setup using a remotely located PC. The array’s

frequency response shall be at least 80 Hz to 20 kHz; maximum peak SPL shall be at least 105 dB at 100 feet (108 db peak when stacked). Input

sensitivity shall be 1.0 Volts for rated power output. The column array shall be provided with dual (looping) analog audio inputs, an AES/EBU input and redundant CobraNet inputs. Remote computer control of beam steering, gain

and EQ shall be provided. The enclosure shall be constructed from Finnish Birch and a perforated steel grille. It shall be no larger than 48" tall, 8" wide

and 7" deep and weigh no more than 61 Lbs. The finish shall be (black paint) (white paint) (custom color paint). It shall be provided with (2�point mounting hinges) (Metric M6 attachment points for flying). The column

array shall include a universal power supply that operates from 90/260 V, 50/60 Hz AC. It shall consume no more than 500 VA at full output. Above

each array fly a 15” powered subwoofer cabinet. The loudspeaker system shall include a heavy duty 15" woofer with a Neodymium magnet, rigid cast�alloy frame and long throw magnetic structure. The frequency response shall

be 40 Hz to 120 Hz. � The loudspeaker shall have a self�contained Class D power amplifier designed specifically for the loudspeaker's requirements. The


270800 � 5

amplifier module shall include complete crossover, protection and

equalization circuitry and be equipped with looping (female in, male out) XLR type connectors. It shall operate from 120 V /240 V, 50/60 Hz and deliver a minimum of 500 Watts RMS to the transducer; maximum peak SPL shall be

at least 127 dB. The loudspeaker shall weigh no more than 117 Lbs. The self�contained amplifier shall be empowered with Ethernet networking capabilities

that include CobraNet multi�channel digital audio distribution and DSP control and supervision from a remotely located computer. Sub Woofer shall be Renkus�Heinz model CF15S�5R or approved equal. Pull Category 6 cable to

each cluster and sub woofer assembly for programming purposes and terminate at rack location in control room.

2.3 Rear Stage entrance and Lobby Speaker: The loudspeaker system shall be a

two�way, full�range architectural surface mount loudspeaker with a 6.5�inch

low frequency transducer with patented Carbon Ring Cone Technology™ and a coaxially mounted 1�inch exit high frequency compression driver. The

drivers shall be connected to an integral crossover with a crossover frequency of 1.2 kHz, with a self�resetting solid state circuit breaker for

driver protection. The paintable enclosure shall be constructed of high�impact ABS plastic. The system shall have an amplitude response of 80 Hz to 20 kHz (+/� 3dB) and a low impedance (8 ohm) input capability of 28.3V RMS. The

sensitivity at 1W/1m shall be 93 dB (125 Hz to 12.5 kHz, half space). The loudspeaker system shall have a conical coverage pattern of 115° from 1 kHz

to 6 kHz, emanating from the face of the loudspeaker pointing downwards at a 26° angle. The nominal system impedance shall be 8 ohms (in low impedance setting). The system shall be equipped with a 60W high

performance autoformer for use in 70.7V or 100V distributed audio systems, with 60W, 30W, 15W and 7.5W taps available in 70.7V distributed systems

(60W, 30W and 15W taps available in 100V distributed systems). An easily accessible rear tap selector switch shall be available for selecting autoformer and low impedance settings. Dimensions shall be 11.2 inches (284 mm) high,

15.3 inches (389 mm) wide and 8.3 inches (212 mm) deep, with a loudspeaker weight of 11.9 lbs (5.4 kg). Loudspeaker shall be Community

model DA6. Provide as indicated on drawings. Provide Volume Controls where indicated.

2.4 Floor Monitor Speakers

2.4.1 The loudspeaker shall be a Renkus�Heinz CFX121M or approved equal full�range, 2�way loudspeaker system utilizing Complex Conic horn technology. Loudspeakers having conventional constant beamwidth or oval horns will not

be considered equal. The loudspeaker system shall include a heavy duty 12" woofer and an extended range 2" HF driver coupled to a Complex Conic high

frequency horn. It shall provide closely controlled 90° horizontal and 60° vertical coverage that can easily be converted to 60° H and 90° V coverage by rotating the horn. The frequency response shall be 70 Hz to 18 kHz. The

enclosure shall be multi�angled in shape and constructed from multi�ply hardwood. It shall be no larger than 17 1/2" high, 15 1/2" wide and 15”"


270800 � 6

deep. The finish shall be (black) (custom color) paint. A matching perforated

metal grille shall be included. It shall be equipped with handles. Provide 2 Speakers with (2) 50’ patch speaker cables.

2.4.2 Signal Processing, Input, and Output Devices • Digital Signal Processing and Signal Distribution

• The DSP speaker processor shall provide four balanced line inputs and eight balanced line outputs on plug�in barrier�strip connectors. Inputs and outputs shall be analog, with internal 24�bit A/D & D/A converters

operating at a sample rate of 48kHz. All internal processing shall be digital (DSP). NexLink connections shall allow sharing of digital audio

within multi�unit systems. • Software shall be provided for creating/connecting DSP system

components within each hardware unit. Available system components

shall include (but not be limited to) various forms of: mixers, equalizers, filters, crossovers, dynamics/gain controls, routers, delays, remote

controls, meters, generators, and diagnostics. Ethernet communications shall be utilized for software control and configuration. After initial

programming, processors may be controlled via dedicated software screens, third�party RS�232 control systems, and/or optional remote control devices. Software shall operate on a PC computer, with network

card installed, running Windows® XP Professional/Vista. The DSP speaker processor shall be CE marked, UL listed, and shall incorporate AES48�

2005 Grounding & EMC practices. The DSP speaker processor shall be compliant with EU Directive 2002/95/EC, the RoHS directive. Warranty shall be 5 years.

• The DSP speaker processor shall be Nexia® SP. Provide RED 1 Remote Control on stage.

2.5 Data Switch: Provide 1 Cisco SG200�08P 8 port switch or equal with Cisco

RV180W Wireless Router. Switch is to support Crestron and DSP Control,

and wireless router.

2.6 Network SD/USB Audio Recorder: Recorder shall accommodate SD/SDHC and USB in MP3 and WAV file format up to14�bit/96kHz. Dual record feature recording options simultaneously for primary and backup recording. File

Archiving via FTP. Web Remote for setup and control with password protection. Indpendent switchable LXR Mic/Line inputs. NTP supported. EDL

marking and file edit functions. Record monitor. Unit shall be Denon DN�700R 2.4 CD/ iPod Player Provide Denon DN�500C CD player with iPod dock.

2.7 Theatre Intercom System: Provide Telex MS�2002 Two Channel Theatre Intercom Master Station and power supply, 4 HR�1 Single Sided Intercom

Headset, 4 BP2002 Two Channel Intercom System Belt pack, 4 ME�25�2 Two Channel Cable. Provide WP�3 Channel 2 Gang Wall Plates as shown. West Penn 431 3/22 AWG cable.


270800 � 7

2.8 ADA Hearing Assistance System: Provide Williams Sound PPA�T45 FM

Wideband Hearing Assistance System with Professional transmitter features, digital inputs, large OLED display, DSP audio processing, 3 powerful microprocessors, and easy�to�use menu controls. Provide RPK005 Rack

mount Kit and ANT029 Remote Antenna kit. Provide a total of 20 � PPA�R37 Receivers, total of 20 – EAR 014T ear buds with easy�to�use receiver

features, and seek�button channel selection. Equal by Listen Technologies. 2.9 Mixing Console: Basis of design shall be Allen & Heath QU�24. 30 in/24 Out

Digital Mixer. 24 Mono Inputs, 25 Motor Faders, 3 Stereo Inputs, 4 Stereo FX with dedicated Sends and Rreturns. 110 Soft Keys. Input processing�

Preamp, HPF, Gate, PEQ, Compressor, Delay. Output processing�PEQ, Graphic EQ, Compressor, Delay. 31 Band Real Time Analysis and Spectrogram. USP Streaming to/from Apple Mac or Windows PC.

2.10 Microphones

2.10.1The frequency�agile FM wireless receiver shall be part of a wireless

microphone system operating in the bands of 482.000–507.000 MHz, 541.500–566.375 MHz , or 655.500–680.375 MHz. It shall be capable of operating on any of 996�1001 PLL�synthesized frequencies per band. The all�

metal receiver shall provide an automatic scanning function to select appropriate local usable channels for proper wireless system operation.

2.10.2All configuration functions of the receiver shall be controlled by soft�touch

controls on the receiver front panel. It shall be a True Diversity receiver with

two independent internal receiver sections, automatically selecting the highest quality signal for the receiver’s output. The system will be equipped

with an advanced Tone Lock™ digital identification system to ensure that only the desired wireless microphone transmitter allows the receiver to be un�muted. The receiver shall have an alert LED on the front panel that

indicates transmitter low battery warning, signal loss and input overload. The receiver shall continuously monitor and display the battery life indicator of

the wireless transmitter, the RF signal strength and the diversity selection of internal dual tuner sections (A&B). The receiver shall have a rear panel selector to lift the ground connection from pin 1 of the XLR�type output

connector to prevent ground loops. The receiver shall be able to be powered by 120V AC 60 Hz or 12–18V DC at 500 mA. Antennas shall be located on

the rear of the receiver and shall incorporate standard BNC�type connectors to allow them to be detached from the receiver to facilitate the receiver being used with external antennas or antenna distribution devices. Switchable 12V

DC power shall be provided on the BNC�type connectors. An accessory bracket should allow for the antennas to be located at the front of the

receiver. The receiver can be rack�mounted singly or in pairs in a single rack space. The receiver’s design shall provide totally silent audio output mute when the wireless transmitter is turned off or signal is lost. The wireless

receiver and the supplied metal rack�mounting brackets shall be industrial black.


270800 � 8

2.10.3The FM wireless receiver shall be an Audio�Technica ATW�R3100b or equivalent. Provide a total of 8 units 2 with ATW�T341b handheld transmitters and 6 with BP892cW headworn mic and ATW�RM1 Rack Mount

Hardware Kit. Equivalent by Shure and CAD Audio. Install in Main cabinet. Install system to include 2 AEW�DA660D Antenna Distribution System with a

pair of ATW�A49 Antennas remotely mounted. 2.11 Wired Microphones and Stands

2.11.1Choir, Instrument, and Orchestra Microphone

• Provide 3 microphones with the following specification: Externally�biased condenser type microphone, continuously variable pattern with a frequency response of 20Hz to 20kHz. A sensitivity of �36dbV (16mV)@ 1

Pa. Max SPL of 143dB, 1% THD. Microphone shall contain a Hi�pass Filter of 100 Hz, 6dB/octave and a 10dB attenuator. Supply with 50’

microphone cables.

2.11.2Vocal Microphone: Provide 2 Shure SM58 Microphones with 50’ microphone cables. Equal by Audio Technica and CAD Audio.

2.11.3Provide (5) Ultimate Support Microphone Stands model number MC�05B and (3) Ultimate Support Boom Stands model number MC�40B.

2.12 Amplifiers

2.12.1Floor Monitor Amplifier: The two�channel power amplifier shall use digital class�D circuit topology and shall be configurable to allow one or two channel

operation. Power output in two�channel mode with both channels driven shall be: 250 watts per channel into 4 ohms and 170 watts per channel into 8 ohms. The two channels shall be bridgeable to produce 500 watts into 8

ohms. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 0.1% at 1 kHz and less than 0.3% from 20 to 20,000 Hz. Frequency response shall be 20 to

20,000 Hz (+/� 1 dB). Hum and noise shall be 100 dB below rated output (A weighted). Crosstalk shall be better than 70 dB (A weighted). Input sensitivity shall be +4 or �10 dBv (jumper selectable) for rated output,

where 0 dBv = 0.775 volts RMS. Input impedance shall be 10k ohms for each side of an electronically balanced input circuit.

Dual�channel or mono�bridged operation shall be selectable via a rear�panel switch. A rear�panel input mode switch shall allow the selection of parallel

mode, whereby the signal feeding the channel 1 input terminals is simultaneously fed to both amplifier channels. Rear panel input connector

shall be a 3�pin removeable terminal block for each channel. Rear panel output connector shall be a heavy�gauge M4 screw�terminal barrier strip suitable for spade lugs or up to #10 AWG bare wire. The front�panel

attenuators shall be recessed to prevent accidental level changes and may be


270800 � 9

removed and replaced by included security covers once levels have been

properly set.

The front panel shall have two sets of four LED indicators to indicate the

following conditions for each channel: signal presence at input (greater than �20 dBv), signal presence at output (greater than 1 watt at 8 ohms), peak

clipping, and protection circuit activation. The front panel shall also have removable air filters that may be cleaned and reinstalled without removing the amplifier from a rack. The amplifier shall be forced�air fan cooled with the

air Intake at the front and exhaust at the rear.

Built�in protection circuitry shall monitor Voltage and current levels to minimize potential damage from overloads, and disable output during shorts, DC offset, or excessive operating temperature over 167°F (110° C) via a

relay for each channel. The relay shall also delay amplifier connection to the load during turn�on for 3 seconds while the protection circuitry analyzes the

load. Power consumption shall be no more than 120 watts when both channels are driven with continuous pink noise at 1/8 full power into 4 ohms

(UL/CSA standard), and no more than 650 watts when both channels are driven with continuous pink noise at full power into 4 ohms.

The amplifier shall use only one standard rack�space or 1.75" (44.5 mm) and its dimensions shall be 19" (482 mm) W x 15.8" (401 mm) D x 1.7" (44 mm)

H. Front panel finish shall be black anodized aluminum and case finish shall be sheet steel. Weight shall be 11 lbs. (5 kg).

2.12.2Dressing Room and Lobby Speaker Amplifier: The two�channel power amplifier shall use digital class�D circuit topology and shall be configurable to

allow one or two channel operation. Power output in two�channel mode with both channels driven shall be: 250 watts per channel into 19.6 ohms (70.7 volts). The two channels shall be bridgeable to produce 500 watts into 39.2

ohms (140 volts). Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 0.1% at 1 kHz and less than 0.3% from 20 to 20,000 Hz. Frequency response shall

be 20 to 20,000 Hz (+/� 1 dB). Hum and noise shall be 100 dB below rated output (A weighted). Crosstalk shall be better than 70 dB (A weighted). Input sensitivity shall be +4 or �10 dBv (jumper selectable) for rated output,

where 0 dBv = 0.775 volts RMS. Input impedance shall be 10k ohms for each side of an electronically balanced input circuit.

Dual�channel or mono�bridged operation shall be selectable via a rear�panel switch. A rear�panel input mode switch shall allow the selection of parallel

mode, whereby the signal feeding the channel 1 input terminals is simultaneously fed to both amplifier channels. Rear panel input connector

shall be a 3�pin removable terminal block for each channel. Rear panel output connector shall be a heavy�gauge M4 screw�terminal barrier strip suitable for spade lugs or up to #10 AWG bare wire. The front�panel

attenuators shall be recessed to prevent accidental level changes and may be removed and replaced by included security covers once levels have been


270800 � 10

properly set. An internal jumper for each channel shall allow independent

on/off selection of a 50 Hz high pass filter for protection against excessive low frequency loading and saturation of speaker transformers.

The front panel shall have two sets of four LED indicators to indicate the following conditions for each channel: signal presence at input (greater than

� 20 dBv), signal presence at output (greater than 1 watt at 8 ohms), peak clipping, and protection circuit activation. The front panel shall also have removable air filters that may be cleaned and reinstalled without removing

the amplifier from a rack. The amplifier shall be forced�air fan cooled with the air intake at the front and exhaust at the rear.

Built�in protection circuitry shall monitor Voltage and current levels to minimize potential damage from overloads, and disable output during shorts,

DC offset, or excessive operating temperature over 167°F (110° C) via a relay for each channel. The relay shall also delay amplifier connection to the

load during turn�on for 3 seconds while the protection circuitry analyzes the load. Power consumption shall be no more than 120 watts when both

channels are driven with continuous pink noise at 1/8 full power into 19.6 ohms (UL/CSA standard), and no more than 580 watts when both channels are driven with continuous pink noise at full rated power into 19.6 ohms.

The amplifier shall use only one standard rack�space or 1.75" (44.5 mm) and

its dimensions shall be 19" (482 mm) W x 15.8" (401 mm) D x 1.7" (44 mm) H. Front panel finish shall be black anodized aluminum and case finish shall be sheet steel. Weight shall be 11 lbs. (5 kg).

2.12.3Equipment Rack and Power Sequencing

2.12.4The EIA�compliant rack shall be Lowell Model No. LBR� 2442, which shall

measure 23.06” W x 21.25” D x 46.20” H and have a racking space of 24

rack units. The rack shall be fully welded 18�gauge certified U.S. steel with seamless side�frame construction and 16�ga. steel bottom reinforced at all

load�bearing junctures. It shall include welded side panels with vents, a recessed rear door with vents and keyed lock, vents above and below the open front, one�pair of fixed�position front mounting rails (tapped 10�32),

and a Z�angle set towards the rear. The rack shall have top and rear knockouts. The 7U top opening shall have integral EIA rail (tapped 10�32) for

optional 19 in. [483mm] wide accessories. The open bottom shall include a grounding stud, provisions for optional leg levelers, and holes for optional anchor bolts (by others). Finish shall be black wrinkle powder epoxy. Provide

with LFD�24FV Vented Front Door.

2.12.5Power Sequencer: Device for sequentially activating equipment shall be Lowell rack mount Model SCS8R�ASM. Device shall feature front mounted actuation switch rocker style, front mounted LED's and front accessible trim

pot for delay adjustment of sequence operation.


270800 � 11

Rear panel shall feature eight barrier strip terminals for remote power control

units plus dry auxiliary contacts for accessory devices. It shall also have a separate alarm interface connection and dip switch settings to bypass selected outputs. Equipment to be controlled shall be connected to the

sequencer using 2 conductor wire and Lowell's remote power control Series RPC (required, order separately). The rear panel shall also include contacts

for connecting an optional momentary style switch (Series RPSW�M, RPSB�M) Switch located at Stage location as shown.

2.12.6Power Outlets: Device for remotely controlling AC power shall be Lowell remote power control Model RPC�3N1. Device shall include a power supply

and relay housed within a 16"L x 3"W x 2.5"H steel chassis. Model shall include 4 duplex outlets (3 switched, and 1 unswitched) with a power rating of 15A. Power control device shall terminate with a 6 foot cord and NEMA 5�

15 plug. Device shall include overcurrent protection for 15A. Provide 2 in rack and 1 at console location.

2.13 Floor Boxes: Floor box assembly shall consist of a Door / Cover with hinged

door opening, a Gasket, and a Basket. Door / Cover shall be of 12 gauge steel, shall measure 14”L x 8”W, shall be self�trimming, mount virtually flush with the floor or surrounding surface and shall be secured with security

socket head screws. Door / Cover shall have hinged Cable Door 1.25” x 1.25”, shall have radiused corners and shall have a ceramic plastic satin

black finish so as not to create specular light reflections. Basket shall be of 16 gauge steel and shall be 10.5”L x 4.625”W x 2.5” deep. Basket shall mount on manufacturer’s backbox BB2000.

All components shall be UL Listed and conform to all applicable standards of

the National Electrical Code. Floor box assembly shall be Mystery Electronics FMCA2400. Provide three as shown with 2 MPK Moduline Insert Panels. Install (4) XLR input connectors and (2) speakon monitor connector in each

box. Each floor box shall have a channel A and Channel B monitor mix.

PART 3� VIDEO 3.1 Projection Screen: Provide and install electric projection screen as shown on

drawings. Screen specifications are based on DaLite model 70187L Electric Tensioned Contour with black case. Screen should have 189.00” Diagonal

viewing area with approximately 41.00” of Black Drop. Final measurements are to be field verified prior to ordering screen. Screen is to be provided with low voltage control module.

3.2 Projector: Provide and install per drawings and 8500 Lumen WXGA DLP

Projector. Unit should have 2 HDMI inputs, HDBaseT�enabled, and HDCR. Specification is based on Hitachi CP�WX9210. Provide appropriate lens to accommodate distance. Suspend using Chief RPA Projector Mount.


270800 � 12

3.3 VGA/HDMI/Audio Signal: Provide and install C2G 41031 Decora Style Wall

Plate with VGA, 3.5mmm Audio and HDMI Pass Through in location shown in Control Room. From this plate run audio signal cable to input of mixer, provide C2G rapid run PC Assembly with Flying Leads to projector location.

Extend HDMI to projector using FSR DR�PCB�HxxM style hybrid polyer/copper structure to projector location.

Provide and install Crestron AM�100 Presentation Gateway and interface to wireless router. Patch audio output of AM�100 to input at mixer location.

Extend HDMI Output of AM�100 Gateway to projector. Extend HDMI to projector using FSR DR�PCB�HxxM style hybrid polyer/copper structure to

projector location.

3.4 Control: Provide and install a 4.3” Touch Screen Control System. The

system shall contain a proximity control function waking up the display automatically. The system shall control the position of the electric screen,

power and input selection of the projector with a custom configured easy to understand user interface. System shall be Crestron model TPCS�4SM.

Installer shall be a Certified Crestron Programmer and Crestron DMC�E Certified.

PART 4� EXECUTION

4.1 Conductors 4.1.1 Provide and install cable as shown on prints. Cable paths should follow the

following criteria. Maintain separate conduits and cable paths between microphone, speaker, and data cables. Signal cable to main speaker cluster

shall be considered speaker cables. Conduits leaving the control room shall be separated by type. VGA and HDMI Cables may be grouped together with either microphone or speaker cable but must be separated from data cable.

If open air installation is utilized each cable type must appear in a separate ring or j hook when parallel to each other no less than 12” between them.

All cables must be labeled at both ends utilizing printed labels. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. Cables are as follows:

4.1.2 Microphone and Signal Cable West Penn 291 or equivalent by Windy City Wire

4.1.3 Common Area and Green Room Speaker Cable West Penn 224 or equivalent

by Windy City Wire

4.1.4 Stage Monitor Cable West Penn 226 or equivalent by Windy City Wire

4.1.5 Speaker Programming, Router, RED Control and Crestron Control Category 6

4.1.6 Crestron Control Cresnet Cable


270800 � 13

4.1.7 Provide Plenum equivalents as required.

4.2 Testing

4.2.1 Provide printed test results of the final system tuning curve, SPL, and STI results from the front, middle, and end seating sections containing left

center, and right positions. Include these results with the O & M Manuals as specified.

END OF SECTION


270720�1

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION SECTION 270720 � TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Each Electrical Contractor's attention is directed to Section 260501, General

Provisions, Electrical, and all other contract documents as they may apply to his work.

PART 2 � SCOPE OF THE WORK 2.1 The Electrical Contractor shall provide the necessary labor, materials, services

and coordination with the local telephone company to provide the complete telephone system indicated on the plans and specified herein. This work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:

2.1.1 All necessary conduit, panels, voice cable, jacks, boxes, pedestals, etc., as

required by the telephone company and the contract documents. 2.1.2 Making arrangements with the local telephone company for all work to be

performed by them and payment of all charges made by them. The Electrical Contractor shall insure that work to be performed by the phone company is scheduled and accomplished on a timely basis so as not to delay any other parts of the construction.

PART 3 � INSTALLATION 3.1 The owner shall provide all instruments and equipment for the telephone system. 3.2 The Contractor shall install conduit system, terminations, devices, cabling, etc.

as shown on the plans. Refer to section 270610 for further requirements. END OF SECTION.


275123�1

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION SECTION 275123 � INTERCOMMUNICATION AND CLASS CHANGE & SIGNALING SYSTEM PART 1 � GENERAL 1.1 The conditions of the General Contract (General, Supplementary, and other

Conditions) and the General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. Other sections of Division 26 are applicable to the work of this section.

1.2 All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. The catalog

numbers and model designations are that of the Dukane Corporation. An equal system manufactured by Rauland�Borg Corporation shall be permitted and any alternate system must be approved by the specifying authority.

1.3 Bidders wishing to submit alternate equipment shall submit to the specifying

authority, at least 15 days prior to bid opening, the equipment proposed to provide a precise functional equivalent system to meet specifications. Bidder shall provide adequate information prior to bid date such as specification sheets, working drawings, shop drawings, and a demonstration of the system. The bidder shall also provide the FCC registration number of the proposed system. Alternate supplier�contractor must also provide a list to include six installations of a comparable system proposed which have been in operation for a minimum period of two years.

1.4 Final approval of the alternate system shall be determined at the time of job

completion. Failure to provide the "precise functional equivalent" shall result in the removal of the alternate system at the contractor's expense.

1.5 Special Requirements 1.5.1 Provide "Panduit" raceway for wire management of all exposed wiring at control

console, on backboards and other areas, to contain wiring. Use #CE156F22�4�C with #EC156F�4�D end covers.

1.5.2 All shields must be properly terminated and grounded at one end. All cables

must be permanently labeled with final room numbers. 1.5.3 Each room speaker must be on a separate call point. Each major corridor must

be on a separate switch position. 1.5.4 Provide 15 watt weatherproof speakers on a separate switch position, located

around the perimeter of the building as directed by the Engineer. Install in inconspicuous positions below building soffits.

1.5.5 All programming must be submitted and approved by Nelson County Public

Schools prior to implementation.


275123�2

1.5.6 Do not splice intercom or telephone wiring unless absolutely unavoidable and

then only with insulated compression connectors, not with wire nuts. Shields must be electrically continuous. J�boxes shall be sized in accord with N.E.C. 370.

1.5.7 Final room numbers selected by the Owner shall be used as intercom dial

numbers. 1.5.8 Connections between sound console and flush wall J�box shall be in a poly�laced

bundle. This flush J�box shall be 18" X 18" square X 4" deep, shall be Dukane #145�184 with a split cover. One side shall be piano hinged with locking trim, the other side shall be a fixed panel with two 2" bushed openings for cables. Provide strain relief on cable bundle at each end.

1.6 Scope of Work 1.6.1 Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with

these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating integrated Intercommunication, Public Address, and Program Control System.

1.7 Submittals 1.7.1 Specification Sheets shall be submitted on all items including cable types. 1.7.2 Submit outline drawing of system control cabinet showing relative position of all

major components. 1.7.3 Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment. 1.7.4 Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training from the

system manufacturer. 1.8 Service and Maintenance 1.8.1 The contractor shall provide a one�year warranty of the installed system against

defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner/Engineer.

1.8.2 The contractor shall, at the owner's request, make available a service contract

offering continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period.

1.8.3 The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments

capable of rendering advice regarding installation and final adjustment of the system.


275123�3

1.9 Quality Assurance 1.9.1 All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the

manufacturer to function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.

1.9.2 The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor

that has had and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least five years. The contractor shall be a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied with full manufacturer's warranty privileges. Written proof of distributorship shall be required if requested by the engineer.

1.9.3 The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains

a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system. The contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied.

1.10 Single Source Responsibility 1.10.1 Except where specifically noted otherwise, all equipment supplied shall be the

standard product of a single manufacturer of known reputation and experience in the industry. The supplying contractor shall have attended the manufacturer's installation and service school.

1.10.2 A certificate of this training shall be provided with the contractor's submittal. 1.11 Safety / Compliance Testing 1.11.1 The communication system supplied shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories

under UL Standard 1459. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor's submittal.

1.12 In�Service Training 1.12.1 The contractor shall provide a minimum of eight hours of in�service training with

this system. These sessions shall be broken into segments, which will facilitate the training of individuals in the operation of this system. Operator’s Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training.

1.13 Wiring 1.13.1 System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good

engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts.


275123�4

1.14 Protection 1.14.1 The contractor shall provide all necessary transient protection on the AC power

feed and on all station lines leaving or entering the building. 1.14.2 The contractor shall note in his system drawings, the type and location of these

protection devices as well as all wiring information. PART 2 � EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers 2.1.1 All devices shall be fully compatible with the Phase I intercom equipment.

Provide all programming and installation required for new equipment. Coordinate all work with Phase I Contractor.

2.2 Intercom, Security and Public Address Operation 2.2.1 Provide complete and satisfactorily operating Integrated

Intercom/Communications System as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturer’s standard design and construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.

2.2.2 Features offered by this system shall be implemented and controlled by software

programs that can be changed and expanded as customer needs evolve. 2.2.3 The system shall provide system monitoring and administration from a local

Windows XP PC or remote Windows XP PC via the WEB and or an optional modem.

2.2.4 A graphical user interface (GUI) shall be provided. The interface will provide

system reports of all intercom activities. In addition all system functions can be activated from any PC on the network.

PART 3 � ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND FEATURES 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 3.1.1 To fulfill other requirements, provide the following: 3.1.1.1 Terminal Cabinets: Terminal cabinets shall be 30”x 30” x 6” minimum 16 gage

steel, recessed in wall with a hinged door held closed with bolts. Cabinet shall


275123�5

be equipped with back plate, S66 blocks and wireway for cable management. Cabinet shall be primed and painted with a baked on enamel gray finish.

3.1.2 Terminal Blocks: Terminal Blocks are to be Siemen #S66M2�5W or approved

equivalent labeled with room and area location of each cable. 3.1.3 Speaker Types: 3.1.3.1 Speaker Assy: Classroom/hallway 8" loudspeaker unit 4 watt multi tap

transformer and 4.8 oz. magnet. 3.1.3.2 Ceiling Baffle Assy: Classroom/hallway 8" loudspeaker unit with 4 watt multi

tap transformer and 4.8 oz. magnet, tile bridge support and back box. 3.1.3.3 Vol Control Speaker: 8" stays speaker baffle assembly with recessed volume

control with 4 watt multi tap transformer and 4.8 oz. magnet, tile bridge support and back box.

3.1.3.4 Horn Speaker: 15 Watt Paging Horn with built�in 25 volt and 70 volt multi tap

transformer with selector switch. 3.1.3.5 Exterior Speaker: Quam H16/SVP speaker baffle assembly mounted in a

Quam ES8 backbox. Baffle to be field painted color selected by Architect. 3.1.4 Expanded Audio Switching Cards � (Maximum Wattages) 3.1.4.1 15 watt�Intercom/ 25 watt Page per port. 3.1.4.2 50 watts total per card and 200 watts per shelf. 3.1.5 New Cables: 3.1.5.1 Sound Cables (No Call�In) shall be West Penn #290 or approved equal 1�pair,

shielded 3.1.5.2 Sound Cables with Call�In shall be West Penn #420 or approved equal 2 pair,

shielded 3.1.5.3 Equipment Cabinet connecting sound cables shall be 25 pair Telco Cables with

Amphenol connectors on each end. Contractor shall determine quantity of cables, cable lengths and type of Amphenol end connectors (male or female).

3.1.5.4 Telephone cable to MDF Room shall be 25 pair 24 AWG UTP Category 5e. 3.1.5.5 Equipment Cabinet connecting telephone cable shall be 4 pair 24 AWG UTP

Category 5e.


275123�6

3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 All equipment components shall be installed, connected and programmed

by factory trained personnel. A licensed electrical contractor may install bridal rings and raceways and pull cables but in no case connect and install devices without proof of training by the manufacturer of the equipment being installed.

3.2.2 Where cables are spliced all conductors in the cables shall be connected including

the drain and shield. Splices shall be made with insulated compression connectors. Wire nuts are not to be used.

3.2.3 Cable shields shall be terminated and grounded only at the end in the terminal

enclosure adjacent to the console. Grounding cable shields at both ends shall not be permitted.

3.2.4 Each cable shall be permanently labeled with the room number it terminates in.

Where no number exists the room name must be used. For example the cable for gym speakers shall be labeled “GYM”.

3.2.5 One additional S66 block shall be mounted in the terminal cabinet and connected

to a 25 pair UTP Level 5 telephone cable installed to the telephone board in the MDF Room. Contractor shall provide and install this 25 pair cable to the MDF Room.

3.2.6 Terminal blocks shall be labeled with the location of the devices connected to each

cable terminated on the block. 3.2.7 Connect the new equipment cabinet to the S66 blocks mounted in the terminal

cabinet with 25 pair Telco cables with Amphenol connectors on each end. The contractor shall determine the quantity of each cable, the cable lengths, and the type of connectors.

3.2.8 Where multiple sound cables are required (multiple speakers in the area or room

such as halls) to connect to the same terminals in the terminal cabinet these cables shall be connected together and to an additional cable with insulated compression connectors inside the cabinet. The additional cable shall be connected to the correct terminals on the S66 block.

3.3 Speaker Wattage Taps: 3.3.1 All speakers shall be tapped at 1/2 or 5/8 watt, 25volt except as follows: 3.3.1.1 Hallway and Cafeteria speakers shall be tapped at 1 or 1.25 watt, 25volt. 3.3.1.2 Interior Horn speakers shall be tapped at 1.25 or 1.8 watt, 25volt.


275123�7

3.3.1.3 Exterior 8" speakers shall be tapped at 2.5 or 4 watt, 25volt. 3.3.1.4 Exterior Horn speakers shall be tapped at 7.5 watt, 25volt. 3.4 Special Program Requirements: 3.4.1 Speakers shall be connected as follows: 3.4.1.1 Hallway speakers on each floor shall be on one port, 3.4.1.2 Girls Restroom speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.3 Boys Restroom speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.4 Each Classroom speaker shall be on one port, 3.4.1.5 Each Room with speakers designated for Speech, Tutoring, or Resource shall

be on its own port, 3.4.1.6 Each Store Room speaker shall be on one port, 3.4.1.7 All exterior speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.8 Each office speaker including the Plant operator’s office and PTA office shall be

on one port, 3.4.1.9 Speakers in each Gym including any stage shall be on one port, 3.4.1.10 Speakers in each PE Room including any stage shall be on one port, 3.4.1.11 Girls Locker Rooms shall be on one port, 3.4.1.12 Boys Locker Rooms shall be on one port, 3.4.1.13 Cafeteria Speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.14 Teachers’ Lounge shall be on one port, 3.4.1.15 Kitchen speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.16 Family Resource Rooms shall be on one port, 3.4.1.17 Media Center (Library) speakers shall be on one port, 3.4.1.18 Mechanical and Boiler Room speakers shall be on one port, and 3.4.1.19 Speakers in each Auditorium including the stage shall be on one port.


275123�8

3.4.1.20 Speakers located in small rooms or offices shall be equipped with an accessible volume control.

3.4.2 Speakers shall be zoned for paging as follows: 3.4.2.1 All�Page *00 All Speakers (including Outside) 3.4.2.2 Zone 1 Page *01 All Speakers (except Outside) 3.4.2.3 ZZone 2 Page *02 Non�Classroom Areas 3.4.2.4 Zone 3 Page *03 Outside Speakers END OF SECTION.


280730�1

DIVISION 28 � ELECTRICAL SECTION 280730 – INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 � WORK INCLUDED 1.1 The Security System shall include all items, articles, and materials necessary for

a complete system. This includes all labor, materials, cabling, equipment, and incidentals, necessary and required for a complete and operational security system.

1.2 The installing contractor must have been in the business of installing and

programming security systems for at least (5) years. This includes programming control panels, keypads, and all addressable devices. The installing contractor shall be a manufacturer�certified installer or have equivalent training or experience for the type of equipment being installed.

1.3 The installing contractor must provide all programming for control panels,

keypads, expansion modules, and other addressable devices as per the manufacturer recommendations for correct security system operation. This includes zoning, entry/exit delays, reporting codes, partitions or any other system parameter as required for a fully functional system.

PART 2 � CABLING 2.1 A complete cabling system shall be furnished and installed, which shall adhere to

the highest workmanlike standard of quality and appearance. Cables shall be installed square with building lines, subject to the approval of the engineer or Owner.

2.2 Cabling shall be concealed above the finish ceilings and within the finished walls

where possible. Open cables above lay in suspended ceilings, unfinished attics, basements, tunnels, and crawl spaces shall be run through and supported by the metal bridal ring path. Cables above plaster and drywall ceilings shall be installed in electrical metallic conduit (EMT).

2.3 Cables in unfinished areas and mechanical rooms may utilize exposed EMT.

Cables in finished “occupied” areas must utilize concealed conduit. 2.4 Cables and associated raceways shall be supported directly to the building

structure and walls. Cables and raceways shall not be supported to pipes, conduits, ducts, suspended ceilings or equipment. Cables shall not touch or lay on ceilings, light fixtures, pipes, ducts, or equipment.

2.5 Cables run to ceiling mounted sensors shall have a minimum of 20 feet of cable

(coiled and secured above sensor) to allow for the sensors relocation when needed.


280730�2

2.6 The contractor will install a cable from telephone equipment room to master security control panel. All final connections of the telephone cable are to be made by Contractor.

2.7 Color of cabling: Orange 2.8 Use the following chart to select the proper cabling for data bus lines from the

control panel to the expansion modules and zone devices.

Data Bus Line Length Wire Gauge Belden Cable # 250’ 22 5502UE (zone devices up to 1000’) 500’ 18 5302UE (zone devices over 1000’) 1000’ 16 5202UE 1500’ 14 5102UE 2500’ 12 5002UE

2.9 Cabling for zone sensors and equipment alarms shall be 22 gauge unless the run

exceeds 1000 feet, then 18 gauge shall be used. 2.10 All cabling shall be a continuous run whenever possible. Any junctions of cable

conductors shall be made in a metal enclosure, then soldered and taped. No mechanical connections will be accepted. All cabling will be labeled on both ends as to wire location with a permanent type of labeling system.

2.11 All cabling and raceway must be routed in the control panel, and expansion

modules as to not interfere with the electronics removal or replacement.

Cables and raceways shall be installed in strict accordance with the

cable manufacturers’ recommendations and the National Electric Code.

PART 3 � ELECTRICAL WIRING 3.1 Electrical work required for the control panel and the remote expansion modules

shall be included in the bid and installed per all applicable codes. Coordinate with other trades as required for a complete system.

3.2 Electrical power for the control panel and expansion modules shall be fed from a

circuit or circuits from an electrical distribution panel and shall not be taken from receptacles, lighting or equipment circuits. The circuit(s) within the electrical distribution panel shall be marked “Security System”. Power should be taken from an emergency power panel.

3.3 Provide at each panel location a duplex receptacle. PART 4 – EQUIPMENT 4.1 Each system shall be provided with the following:


280730�3

4.1.1 Master Network Control Panel DMP Part Number XR100 with the following:

• A panel mounted alphanumeric keypad, DMP Part Number 7060�W. • Expansion to a total of at least 10,000 user codes with 99 user profiles

definitions. • Twenty holiday dates for custom holiday scheduling by area. • A total door access granted event buffer of at least 10,000 events. • Anti�passback access control selectable by area and user. • Provide a dedicated 120 VAC duplex receptacle below the panel. • Provide a network connection (from the Lan) to the control panel. • Provide a telephone line to the control panel.

4.1.2 Panels for expansion modules will be fabricated based on the following: (see

detail)

• DMP Part Number 714�16 16 Zone expander module. • Each module will utilize no more than 14 zones each. • Provide a dedicated 120 VAC duplex receptacle below the panel.

4.1.3 Keypads to be DMP Part Number 7063�W.

4.1.4 Proximity Readers to be DMP Part Number PP�6005B. 4.1.5 All panels will be provided with a flush mounted key lock (All must be the same

color and keyed alike).

4.1.6 System shall be compatible with the schools existing system – Best Lock Stanley Basis EX 665 system. Existing key fobs in the system shall be compatible with the new system provided.

PART 5 � SENSORS 5.1 All sensors are to be white in color. 5.2 All motion detectors shall be located as to avoid air movement, or other problem

areas. 5.3 All sensors shall have form NC contacts, and shall be wired in a normally closed

fashion. 5.4 Sensor Types:

• Sentrol AP�633. This sensor is wall mounted between 8 and 10 feet from floor. It is primarily used in hallways (center of hall) and large areas (gyms, cafeterias, and media centers).

• Sentrol Sharpshooter 6157N. This sensor is wall mounted between 8 and 10 feet from the floor. It is used primarily in classrooms, storerooms, and offices. It is primarily corner mounted.


280730�4

• Detection Systems DS9360. This sensor is ceiling mounted in a ceiling tile at a height of between 8 and 16 feet. Primary use in areas where a wall mount sensor is not practical.

PART 6 – WARRANTY 6.1 Reference 260501�9.1 for required warranties and correction of work. END OF SECTION.


283100�1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 283100 � FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL: 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 Field verify existing locations of electro�magnetic hold open devices for doors. 1.3 Refer to applicable Division � 15 sections for duct detectors at air handler units. PART 2 � DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 2.1 Extent of fire alarm and detection system work is indicated by drawings and

schedules. 2.2 Types of fire alarm and detection systems in this section include the following: 2.2.1 Addressable, Multiplex PART 3 � QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Manufacturers: A firm regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm and

detection systems, of types and sizes, and electrical characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

3.2 Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on

projects with fire alarm and detection system installation work similar to that required for project.

3.3 Code Compliance: Comply with all NFPA Requirements as applicable to

construction and installation of fire alarm and detection components and accessories.

3.4 UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide fire alarm and detection system

components which are UL listed and labeled. 3.5 FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories which

are factory mutual approved. PART 4 � SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on fire alarm and detection systems

including, but not limited to, rough�in diagrams and instructions for installation,


283100�2

operation and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 4.2 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and

connecting wiring of entire fire alarm and detection system. Include wiring diagrams, riser diagrams, and point to point drawings.

PART 5 � ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 5.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm and

detection systems to be similar to and compatible with the existing system. PART 6 � FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS: 6.1 General: Provide fire alarm and detection system products of types, sizes and

capacities indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components; construct in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Provide fire detection systems for applications indicated, and with the following sequence of operations, components and function features:

6.2 Either manual activation of a fire alarm station or activation of an automatic

initiating device shall sound a non�coded alarm and provide device identification on an annunciator.

6.3 Equip and wire system so that energizing the fire alarm audible visual signaling

devices also activates the following: 6.3.1 Smoke door releases 6.3.2 Fire door releases 6.3.3 Elevator interlock circuit 6.4 System Operating Features: 6.4.1 The system shall automatically transmit an alarm to the local fire department. 6.4.2 Activation of any fire alarm device shall cause the associated device to indicate

an alarm at the fire alarm control panel and annunciator panels, and a signal to be transmitted to the fire department.

6.4.3 Activation of any manual pull station shall cause all A/V devices to operate and

release magnetic hold open devices. 6.4.4 Activation of any ceiling mounted smoke or heat detector shall cause all A/V

devices to operate, release magnetic hold open devices, and transmit an alarm to the Fire Department.


283100�3

6.4.5 Activation of an AHU duct smoke detector shall cause the associated air handling unit to shut down and the operations described for ceiling mounted smoke and heat detectors. Otherwise, air handling units shall continue to operate.

6.4.6 Activation of a fire protection system flow or tamper switch shall cause all A/V

devices to operate and release magnetic hold open devices. 6.4.7 Provide static pressure switch in main supply air duct at all air handling units

with smoke dampers in the supply air duct systems. Connect switch to shut down A.H.U. on static pressure of 2.0" water gauge (+ 1.0" field adjustable).

6.4.8 Provide all smoke damper closure and air handling unit shut�down similar to the

existing system. PART 7 � MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: 7.1 Wiring System Materials: Provide basic wiring materials which comply with

Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections, "Raceways", "Wires and Cables", and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings"; types to be selected by Engineer.

7.2 All conductors shall be solid copper, stranded copper or bunch tinned stranded

copper for A.W.G. sizes 16 and 18 (stranded), a maximum of 7 strands shall be permitted. In A.W.G. sizes 16 and 18 (stranded) a maximum of 9 strands shall be permitted if strands are bunch tinned. In A.W.G. size 14 (stranded) a maximum of 19 strands shall be permitted.

7.3 Junction boxes and terminal panels shall be painted red and be provided with a

suitable number of terminals and of proper size for their use. 7.4 All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC�

Article 760, Power�Limited Protective Signaling circuits. Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.

7.5 Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard construction, red

enclosure, manual fire alarm stations to be similar to and compatible with the existing system.

7.5.1 Semi�flush mounted (finished areas). 7.5.2 Addressable 7.6 Automatic Fire Detectors: Provide manufacturer's standard construction

addressable automatic fire detectors similar to and compatible with the existing system.

7.7 Automatic Smoke (Combustion Products) Detectors: Provide manufacturer's

standard construction True Alarm automatic smoke detectors to be similar to and compatible with the existing system.


283100�4

7.8 Automatic Alarm Initiative Switches and Extinguishing Systems: Provide

manufacturer's standard construction automatic switches for the following applications:

7.8.1 Main type water flow switch. 7.8.2 Pressure or flow type switches for fixed extinguishing system. 7.9 Chimes: Provide manufacturer's standard construction electronic fire alarm

chimes to be similar to and compatible with the existing system. 7.10 Combination Alarm Unit: Provide manufacturer's standard construction

combination bell and light unit or combination chime and light as indicated on the drawings to meet provisions of ADA.

7.11 Annunciators: Provide new annuciators as indicated on plans. Modify all existing

annunciators as required to accommodate all work of this project. 7.12 Control Panels: Modify all existing control panels and/or install new control

panels as required to accommodate all work of this project. PART 8 � INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS: 8.1 Install fire alarm and detection systems as indicated, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC.

PART 9 � INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION: 9.1 Install electrical identification in accordance with Division 16 Basic Materials and

Methods Section "Electrical Identification". 9.2 All conductors shall be marked at each termination and junction point. Markings

shall be permanent. Markings shall be same as those which appear on "As Built Drawings".

PART 10 � INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS: 10.1 Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with

Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections, "Raceways", "Wires and Cables", and Electrical Boxes and Fittings".

PART 11 � FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 11.1 Inspect relays and signals for malfunctioning, and where necessary, adjust units

for proper operation to fulfill project requirements. Clean smoke detector chambers with gas to clear them of all foreign material.


283100�5

PART 12 � TESTING: 12.1 Upon completion of installation of fire alarm and detection systems, test to

demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

PART 13 � DEMONSTRATE AND INSTRUCTION: 13.1 Demonstrate and instruct Owner's representative in operation, service, and

maintenance of units. Obtain receipt that this has been accomplished. 13.2 Provide a minimum of 4 hours of detailed instruction to the Owner's

Representative at completion of the project. 13.3 At 4 months after completion and at 8 months after completion, provide 4 hours

of detailed instructions and problem solving at the project for the Owner's Representatives.

END OF SECTION.

Thomas Nelson High School 08223

31 22 16 - 1

SECTION 31 22 16 - ROUGH GRADING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK

(A) Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply

to this section.

(B) Related Sections:

Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Backfill

Section 31 23 16.16 - Trenching

1.02 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes removal of subsoil; and cutting, grading, filling, rough

contours, compacting and setting rough grade for site structures, building

pads, parking areas and drainage structures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

(A) Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities

remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope

gradients.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

2.01 EXAMINATION

(A) Verify site conditions.

(B) Verify survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as

indicated on Drawings.

2.02 PREPARATION

(A) Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.

(B) Stake and flag locations of known utilities.

(C) Locate, identify and protect above and below ground utilities indicated to

remain, from damage.

(D) Protect plant life, lawns and other features remaining as portion of final

landscaping.

(E) Protect benchmarks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, and

paving from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

2.03 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

(A) Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated and/or regraded.

(B) Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet.

Construct stockpiles in a manner to freely drain surface water. Protect

stockpiles during construction.

(C) Replace damaged or displaced subsoil as specified for backfill.


31 22 16 - 2

(D) Any excess material shall be disposed of offsite.

2.04 FILLING

(A) All backfill operations will be in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

2.05 TOLERANCES

(A) Top surface of subgrade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/10

foot from required plan elevations.

END OF SECTION 31 22 16


31 23 00 - 1

SECTION 31 23 00 – EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

PART 1– GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK



to this section.


Document: Geotechnical report by Greenbaum Associates, Inc. dated March

9, 2009.

Section 31 22 16 – Rough Grading

Section 31 23 16.16 – Trenching

1.02 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes mechanical excavation for building, drives, sidewalks,

backfilling to subgrade elevations, site filling and backfilling and site grading.

Pavement base course is specified in Section 32 12 00 - Flexible Pavement.

(B) Section includes removal of unusable material identified and discovered

during excavation.

1.03 REFERENCES

(A) ASTM D698, Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures,

Using a 5.5-lb. Rammer and 12-in. Drop.

(B) ASTM D 1556, Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

(C) ASTM D 2049, Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils.

(D) ASTM D 2167, Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method.

(E) ASTM D 2922, Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

(F) AASHTO T180 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials) - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb Rammer and an

18-in. Drop.

(G) ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 inch Drop.

(H) ASTM D3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

(I) Local utility regulations as they may apply.

(J) Other local codes as they may apply.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

(A) Submittal Procedures: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division 01

Sections.

(B) Submit qualifications of each excavation contractor.

(C) Test report on borrow material from geotechnical consultant.

(D) Field density test reports from geotechnical consultant. A proctor sample has

been provided in the project soils report.


31 23 00 - 2

1.05 COORDINATION

(A) Coordination and Project Conditions: Under provisions of Construction

Managers Division 01 Sections.

(B) Schedule work to avoid damage to nearby improvements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


3.01 PREPARATION

(A) Identify required excavation limits, lines levels, contours, and datum

locations.

(B) Locate, identify, and protect existing above and below ground utilities from

damage.

(C) Protect plant life and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

(D) Protect benchmarks and survey control points from excavating equipment and

vehicular traffic.

(E) Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials,

in accordance with the project soils report.

(F) Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill

with onsite soils and compact to density equal to or greater than

requirements for subsequent fill material.

(G) Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to identify soft spots; remove soft

areas, fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for

subsequent fill material.

(H) All cut and fill pads should be constructed with a slight crown and rolled to

smoothness at the end of each day of construction to ensure free drainage

should the area be subjected to rain. The geotechnical engineer should be

advised if fill materials are exposed to excessive moisture or freeze-thaw

action.

3.02 EXCAVATING

(A) Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade,

paving, site structures and construction operations.

(B) Compact disturbed load-bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to

original bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with the project

soils report.

(C) Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

(D) Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into

excavation. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove any

water that may become trapped in the excavations to prevent softening and

stability of subgrades for foundations and pavements. Provide and maintain

any necessary dewatering operations to convey water away from excavations.

(E) Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

(F) Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock.

(G) Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue

affected Work in area until notified to resume Work.

(H) Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of

materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific

direction from Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as


31 23 00 - 3

correction of unauthorized excavation directed by Architect/Engineer, shall be

at Contractor’s expense.

(I) Stockpile excavated material in an area designated on site.

(J) Excavation Limits:

1. 0’-6” outside face of footing in a vertical plane.

2. 1’-6” outside face of wall in a vertical plane.

3. 0’-6” outside bell of pipe up to 24” in diameter in a vertical plane.

4. 1’-0” outside bell of pipe over 24” in diameter in a vertical plane.

5. 1’-0” below bottom of floor slab as allowance for aggregate base course.

6. 1’-0” below surface of athletic field surfaces to allow for turf or infield

construction.

7. 1’-6” below bottom of foundation as allowance for aggregate base and 12”

soil cushion, if required by design.

8. 0’-6” below barrel of pipe as allowance for bedding.

3.03 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

(A) Payment shall not be made for excavations made beyond the excavation

limits as identified on the drawings, nor for replacement materials, regardless

of the nature of the excavations.

(B) Notify testing agency when excavations have reached required subgrade. Do

not place foundation concrete until subgrade has been inspected and

approved.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(A) Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions noted on the

structural drawings.

(B) Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698.

1. Backfill beneath floor slabs shall be compacted to 95% of the soil’s

maximum dry density, as per ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor), as

described in the project soils report.

2. Backfill beneath exterior driveways, parking areas, and sidewalks shall

be compacted to 95 % of the soil’s maximum dry density as per ASTM

D698 (Standard Proctor), as described in the project soils report.

3. All other exterior areas shall be compacted to 90% of the soil’s

maximum dry density, including areas beneath athletic fields, as per

ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). Do NOT overcompact areas beneath

the athletic fields to avoid poorly draining fields.

4. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove

work, replace and retest.

(C) Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by Architect/Engineer before

installing subsequent work.

3.05 PROTECTION

(A) Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil

stability. Protect bottom of excavations from freezing.

(B) Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards

created by earth operations.


31 23 00 - 4

3.06 BACKFILLING

(A) Fill soils should be free of organics, debris, or rocks larger than 8” in

diameter. Fill soils shall meet all the requirements outlined in Section 5.0 of

the project soils report. All fill pads should extend laterally a minimum of five

feet from the perimeter of any planned building, before beginning a fill slope.

(B) In-place density testing should be performed to ensure adequate compaction

energies are applied. Test locations should be evenly spaced throughout the

fill area, and should be performed at a frequency of one test every 10,000 s.f.

per foot of fill depth. No less than three tests per lift are recommended.

(C) Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

(D) Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not

back fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

(E) Soil for fill shall be placed in loose lifts of 8” or less, compacted and tested

prior to placing additional lifts.

(F) Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

(G) Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required

compaction density.

(H) Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

3. 7 TOLERANCES

(A) Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from

required elevations.

(B) Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required

elevations.



31 23 16.16 - 1

SECTION 31 23 16.16 – TRENCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK



to this section.



9, 2009.


Section 33 41 00 – Storm Piping and Drainage

1.02 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes excavating trenches for any utilities that are a minimum five

feet from the outside of the building and extending outward. This section also

encompasses compacted fill from top of utility bedding and backfilling (utility

envelope) and compaction of that fill material.

1.03 REFERENCES

(A) AASHTO T180 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials) - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. Rammer and an

18-in. Drop.

(B) ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.

(C) ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

(D) Aggregate, Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 in. Drop.

(E) ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone

Method.

(F) ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 in. Drop.

(G) ASTM D2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the

Rubber Balloon Method.

(H) ASTM D2922 - Test Method for Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth).

(I) ASTM D3017 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

(A) Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit or cable.

1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

(A) Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.


31 23 16.16 - 2

1.06 COORDINATION

(A) Coordination and project conditions: Under provisions of Construction


(B) Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing

higher elevation utilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

(A) Fill: As indicated in Section 31 23 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LINES AND GRADES

(A) Grades:

1. Lay pipes to lines and grades indicated on Drawings.

2. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines

and grades.

(B) Location of Pipe Lines:

1. Location and approximate depths of proposed pipelines are shown on

Construction Drawings.

2. Architect/Engineer or Owner reserves right to make changes in lines,

grades and depths of pipe lines and manholes when changes are

required for Project conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

(A) Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum locations.

(B) Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving and curbs

from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

(C) Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

(D) Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill

with aggregate and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements

for subsequent backfill material.

3.03 TRENCHING

(A) Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe.

(B) Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection.

Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

(C) Excavate bottom of trenches maximum 18 inches wider than outside diameter

of pipe or structure.

(D) Excavate trenches to depth indicated on Drawings. Provide uniform and

continuous bearing and support for bedding material and pipe utilities.

(E) Slope sidewalls of excavation per OSHA regulations. When sidewalls cannot

be sloped provide sheeting and shoring to protect excavation as specified in

this section.


31 23 16.16 - 3

(F) When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft, excavate to

greater depth as directed by Architect/Engineer.

(G) Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove

loose matter.

(H) Correct over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for

authorized excavation.

(I) Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and in accordance

with the SWPPP.

(J) All safety practices during trenching operations shall comply with current

OSHA regulations.

3.04 SHEETING AND SHORING

(A) Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures

and adjacent properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of

surrounding subsoil.

(B) Support five feet deep trenches that are excavated through unstable, loose,

or soft material. Provide sheeting, shoring, bracing or other protection to

maintain stability of excavation.

(C) Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work.

(D) Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for

settlement of filled excavations or adjacent soil.

(E) Repair damage to new and existing work from settlement, water or earth

pressure or other causes resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring or

bracing.

3.05 BACKFILLING

(A) Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.

(B) Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not

backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

(C) Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding

8 inches compacted depth.

(D) Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trench.

(E) Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required

compaction density.

(F) Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day.

(G) Protect open trench to prevent danger to owner.

3.06 TOLERANCES

(A) Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from

required elevations.

(B) Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required

elevations.


(A) Testing and inspection requirements are identified as noted on the structural

drawings.

(B) Compaction Testing: In accordance with ASTM D2922.


31 23 16.16 - 4

(C) Frequency Test: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one

test for each 150 feet (46m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two

tests.

(D) When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove

Work, replace, compact and retest.

3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

(A) Protecting finished work: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division

01 Sections.

(B) Reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

END OF SECTION 31 23 16.16

Thomas Nelson High School 08-223

31 23 16.26 - 1

SECTION 31 23 16.26 – ROCK REMOVAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK



to this section.



9, 2009.

Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Backfill.

Section 01 41 10 – Testing Laboratory Services.



1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

(A) Removal of identified and discovered rock during excavation. Expansive tools

to assist rock removal.

1.03 REFERENCES

(A) NFPA 495 – Code for Manufacture, Transportation, Storage, and Use of

Explosive Materials.

(B) Commonwealth of Kentucky Department of Mines and Minerals, Laws and

Regulations Governing Explosives and Blasting.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

(A) Rock: Solid mineral material of a size that cannot be removed with an

excavator.

1.05 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

(A) Rock Removal: Subgrade shall be inspected and approved prior to placing

foundation concrete or soil cushion, as required by design.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(A) Rock Removal Firm: Company specializing in the approved method for

removal of rock, with five years documented experience. Certificates of

insurance shall be provided.

1.07 SCHEDULING

(A) Schedule work to avoid disruption to occupied buildings nearby.


31 23 16.26 - 2

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

(A) Mechanical Disintegration Compounds: Grout mix of materials that expand

on curing.

(B) Explosives: Type required by authorities having jurisdiction and

recommended by explosives firm.

(C) Delay Devices: Type State regulations allow and recommended by explosives

firm.

(D) Blasting Material: Type State regulations allow and recommended by

explosives firm.


3.01 EXAMINATION

(A) Verify site conditions and note subsurface irregularities affecting work of this

section.

3.02 PREPARATION

(A) Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.

(B) If explosives are needed, applicable permits should be obtained from

authorities having jurisdiction before they are brought to the site or drilling

has begun. A pre-blast survey and inspection shall be performed on adjacent

structures as required by standard blasting regulations.

3.03 ROCK REMOVAL - EXPLOSIVE METHOD

(A) Explosives

1. The maximum explosive charges that can be used on the property

should be determined by calculations performed by a licensed blaster,

prior to excavation. The maximum explosive charge should not have

any damaging effects on adjacent properties. A written plan for

blasting shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to drilling.

2. The contractor should notify the Engineer prior to the use and storage

of explosives on site. Explosives should be present only during the

time that they are being used. The quantity of explosives on site

should only be for the work that is under way and must be stored in a

secure manner separate from all tools. The caps and detonators shall

be kept 100 feet from the explosives. Once the blasting is complete,

all related material must be removed from the property.

3. The contractor is expected to follow all State, Federal and municipal

laws, ordinances and regulations related to the transportation,

handling, use and storage of explosives. If a licensed blaster is

required to be present on site by any of the laws, ordinances or

regulations, the said licensed blaster shall have his license on the site

and allow examination thereof by the Engineer or other authorities

having jurisdiction.


31 23 16.26 - 3

(B) Blasting Precautions

1. Explosives should not be used within 20 feet of building, structures,

underground or overhead utilities whether existing or partially

constructed.

2. The Engineer must grant written permission before any deviation from

the restrictions can occur. However, the responsibility still lies with

the Contractor in the event of damage to buildings, structures or

utilities.

3. Explosive operations should be handled with care to avoid damage to

persons and property. The strength and quantity of explosives used at

the site should break the rock on the intended lines and grades

without shattering the unexcavated rock. Excessive cracking should

be avoided to avoid injury or damage of piping or other structures.

Logs and mats should be used to cover the rock where required. All

persons in the vicinity of the work should be notified before the

blasting operations take place.

4. The responsibility of the blasting operations lies solely with the

blasting contractor. The Owner and/or Engineer shall not be held

liable for any damages resulting from the blasting operations on this

project.

3.04 ROCK REMOVAL - MECHANICAL METHOD

(A) Excavate and remove rock by the mechanical method. Drill holes and utilize

expansive tools, wedges, and mechanical disintegration compound to

fracture.

(B) Cut away rock at bottom of excavation to form level bearing.

(C) Remove shelled layers to provide sound and unshattered base for footings.

(D) Correct unauthorized rock removal in accordance with backfilling and

compacting requirements of Section 31 23 00.


(A) Provide for visual inspection of foundation bearing surfaces and cavities

formed by removed rock.

(B) Seismograph measurements should be obtained during each blast and shall

be made available to the engineer if requested.

END OF SECTION 31 23 16.26


31 31 16- 1

SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes soil treatment for termite control below grade at scheduled

locations.

1.02 REFERENCES

(A) EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and

Rodenticide Act.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


Sections.

(B) Product Data: Submit toxicants to be used, composition by percentage,

dilution schedule, intended application rate in accordance with manufacturer's

current pesticide label.

(C) Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.

(D) Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate caution requirements and

proper procedure.

(E) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify toxicants meet or exceed specified

requirements.

(F) Certify applications followed the National Pest Control Association (NPCA)

Approved Referenced Procedures (ARP) for termite control or other regional

location guidance.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

(A) Project Record Documents: Record moisture content of soil before application,

date and rate of application, areas of application, diary of toxicity meter

readings and corresponding soil coverage.

(B) Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule and

recommendations.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

(A) Applicator: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with

minimum 5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer and

licensed at Project location in State of Kentucky.

1.06 SEQUENCING

(A) Apply toxicant in accordance with product label supplemented by the NPCA’s

ARP for termiticiding or local requirements.

1.07 WARRANTY

(A) Furnish five-year warranty.


31 31 16- 2

(B) Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building

contents caused by termites. Repair damage. Re-treat where required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

(A) Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; proven to prevent termite infestation,

synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil and not

injurious to plants and landscaping.

(B) Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

2.02 MIXES

(A) Mix toxicant to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

(A) Verify soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to adsorb toxicant, and ready

to receive treatment.

(B) Verify final grading is complete.

3.02 APPLICATION

(A) Apply toxicant at locations indicated in Schedule at end of section in strict

accordance with National Pest Association standards and with manufacturer’s

submitted instructions.

(B) Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces including pipe or

ducts, and soil penetrations including grounding rods or posts.

(C) Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.

(D) When inspection or testing identifies presence of termites, re-treat soil and

re-test.

(E) Post signs and other warning indicating that soil poisoning has been applied.

Protect persons and property from injury or damage from soil treatment

work.


(A) Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

3.04 SCHEDULES

(A) Locations:

1. Under Slabs-on-Grade.

2. Both Sides of Foundation Surface.



32 12 00 - 1

SECTION 32 12 00 – FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK



to this section.



9, 2009.

Section 31 22 06 - Rough Grading

Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Backfill: Compacted subbase for paving.


1.02 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes asphalt concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course;

surface sealer; aggregate subbase course and porous asphalt requirements.

Refer to plans for locations of flexible and rigid pavements

1.03 REFERENCES

(A) ASTM D946 - Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement

Construction.

(B) TAI - (The Asphalt Institute) - MS-2 Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete

and Other Hot Mix Types.

(C) TAI - (The Asphalt Institute) - MS-3 Asphalt Plant Manual.

(D) TAI - (The Asphalt Institute) - MS-8 Asphalt Paving Manual.

(E) TAI - (the Asphalt Institute) - MS-19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual.

(F) Section 805, KYTC Standard Specifications (State of Kentucky Highway

Standards)

(G) Section 404, KYTC Standard Specifications (State of Kentucky Highway

Standards)

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

(A) Asphalt Concrete Paving: Designed for medium duty commercial vehicles.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


Sections.

(B) Product Data: Submittal product information and mix design.


(A) Perform Work in accordance with TAI Manual MS-8 and State of Kentucky

Highways standard.

(B) Mixing Plant: Conform to TAI Manual MS-3 and State of Kentucky Highways

standard.


32 12 00 - 2

(C) Obtain materials from same source throughout.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

(A) Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum five years documented experience.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

(A) Environmental conditions affecting products on site: Under provisions of

Construction Managers Division 01 Sections.

(B) Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less

than 40 degree F, or surface is wet or frozen.

(C) Porous Asphalt (Open-Graded Friction Course) shall only be placed when

ambient air or base surface temperatures are 60 degrees F, or greater.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

(A) Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946 ad in accordance with State of Kentucky

Highways standards.

(B) Asphalt Cement, Open-Graded Friction Course (Porous Asphalt): Section 404

of KYTC Standard Specifications (State of Kentucky Highway standards).

(C) Aggregate for Base Course Mix: In accordance with State of Kentucky

Highways standards.

(D) Aggregate for Binder Course Mix: In accordance with State of Kentucky

Highways standards.

(E) Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: In accordance with State of Kentucky

Highways standard.

(F) Aggregate for Stone Reservoir under Porous Asphalt, #3 Stone per KYTC,

Section 805, single size stone, washed and does not contain excessive dust or

fine material.

(G) Aggregate for Choker Course under Porous Asphalt, #9 Stone per KYTC,

Section 805.

(H) Fine Aggregate: In accordance with State of Kentucky Highways standards.

(I) Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other

mineral dust, free of foreign matter.

(J) Prime: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.

(K) Tack Coat: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.

(L) Geotextile Fabric

(M) Traffic Paint: Shall be used on pavements for parking area, parking lines,

lane lines, traffic directional arrows and as otherwise specified or shown on

drawings.

1. Color shall be white, except blue for handicap markings.

2. The paint shall be ground to a uniform consistency and shall permit

satisfactory application by the pressure spray type of painting machine

currently in use.

3. The paint shall be furnished ready for use without thinning or other

modification and shall not settle badly, cake, curdle, liver, gel or show


32 12 00 - 3

excessive change in viscosity in the container during a period of one

year after manufacture and shall be capable of being broken up with a

paddle to a smooth consistency. The manufacturer shall furnish any

necessary information as to special storage requirements. The paint

may be rejected if it contains skins, thickened or jelly-like layers or

lumps, coarse particles, dirt or other foreign material. The

composition of the pigments and vehicles of the paint are at the option

of the manufacturer, provided the paints conform with the

requirements specified herein.

4. Specific Requirements:

(a) Pigment: Federal Standard 141A, method 4022, 54 - 60% by

eight.

(b) Titanium Dioxide: ASTM D476, Types II, III or IV, white only,

1.2 lbs./gallon of paint

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIX

(A) Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

(B) Base Course: 3.0 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in

accordance with TAI MS-2 and State of Kentucky Highways standards.

(C) Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in

accordance with TAI MS-2 and State of Kentucky Highway standards.

(D) Porous Asphalt: PG 76-22 liquid asphalt binder, “D” type aggregate, air voids

should be 16% or greater, 6 percent or greater asphalt cement by weight in

mixture with gradation consistent with an Open-Graded Friction Course as

described in Section 404 of the KYTC Standard Specifications.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

(A) Testing inspection and analysis requirements: As noted on drawings.

(B) Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning

of work.

(C) Test samples in accordance with TAI MS-2.


3.01 EXAMINATION

(A) Verification of existing conditions before starting work: Under provisions of

Construction Managers Division 01 Sections.

(B) Verify compacted subgrade and subbase is dry and ready to support paving

and imposed loads.

(C) Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

(D) Subgrade beneath porous asphalt area shall not be compacted or subject to

excessive construction equipment prior to geotextile and stone bed

placement. The bottom of the entire porous pavement area shall remain flat.


32 12 00 - 4

3.02 PREPARATION – PRIMER FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

(A) Apply primer in accordance with TAI MS-2 and State of Kentucky Highways

standards.

(B) Use clean sand to blot excess primer.

3.03 PREPARATION - TACK COAT FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

(A) Apply tack coat in accordance with TAI MS-19 and State of Kentucky

Highways standards. Refer to Section 404 of KYTC Standard Specifications

for special requirements for porous asphalt pavement.

(B) Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs.

3.04 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE

(A) Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

(B) Place binder course to 2 inch compacted thickness.

(C) Place wearing course within 12 hour of placing and compacting binder course.

When binder course is placed more than 24 hours before placing wearing

course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.

(D) Place wearing course to 1 inch compacted thickness.

(E) Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude

pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling

equipment.

(F) Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish,

without roller marks.

3.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLACING POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT –

OPEN-GRADED FRICTION COURSE

(A) Once sugrade is prepared, place non-woven geotextile fabric over entire

porous pavement area.

(B) Dense graded aggregate shall NOT be used within any of the pavement

structure.

(C) Place aggregate reservoir layer of clean, washed No.3 stone to thickness

shown on the plans. Install underdrains as shown on the plans and in

accordance with specifications for french drains.

(D) Place 3” choker course above aggregate reservoir layer consisting of #9

stone.

(E) The hot mix porous asphalt shall be laid in two lifts, with a minimum lift

thickness of 1 ½”. The final asphalt section shall be 3 ½” thick. Utilize

conventional paving equipment for placement of porous asphalt. Make two or

three passes with a small roller immediately after placement. Do NOT make

frequent trips with the roller to avoid over compaction of open-graded

mixture.

3.06 TOLERANCES

(A) Tolerances: As indicated on drawing notes.

(B) Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10-foot straight

edge.

(C) Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/8 inch.

(D) Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


32 12 00 - 5


(A) Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing: As indicated on drawing

notes.

(B) Take samples and perform tests in accordance with TAI MS-2.


(A) Protecting finished work: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division

01 Sections.

(B) Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 24

hours or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.

(C) Porous Asphalt areas shall restrict traffic from the areas for the first 24 hours

after placement. Construction equipment must be kept off the porous asphalt

areas for the duration of the project.

(C) All surfaces to receive pavement markings shall be thoroughly cleaned.

(D) Traffic paint shall be applied only when the pavement temperature is 40

degrees F or above. The wet thickness of the traffic paint shall be a minimum

of 0.015 of an inch.

(E) All pavement markings shall be a minimum of 4” wide.

(F) All pavement markings shall be installed as indicated on the drawings, in

accordance with the current Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, and as

specified herein.



32 14 00 - 1

SECTION 32 14 00 - UNIT PAVERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide concrete unit pavers as shown and specified. Work includes:

1. Unit paver exterior gathering space, installed over an aggregate base.

2. Aggregate base, bedding and joint sand.

3. Concrete base, aggregate bedding and joint sand.

4. Edge restraints, aluminum.

5. Detectable pavers, installed over a concrete base.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 00 00 – Site Conditions

2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry Assemblies

3. Section 31 22 19.13 – Finish Grading

4. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Backfill

5. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Reference standards:

1. ASTM:

a. ASTM C33-97 "Specification for Concrete Aggregates."

b. ASTM C136-96a “Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and

Coarse Aggregates.”

c. ASTM C140-97 "Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units."

d. ASTM C150-97a "Specification for Portland Cement".

e. ASTM C418-90 "Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete by

Sandblasting."

f. ASTM C936-96 "Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking

Paving Units."

g. ASTM D1557-91 "Test Method for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort, (56,000 ft-lbf/cubic ft)."

2. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA):

a. NCMA TEK 11-1 “Edge Restraints for Concrete Pavers.

b. NCMA TEK 11-2 "Pavement Construction with Interlocking Concrete

Pavers."

c. NCMA TEK 11-6 "Cleaning and Sealing Interlocking Concrete

Pavements.”

d. NCMA TEK 11-10 “Base and Subase Options for Concrete Pavers.”

3. Ohio Department of Transportation (ODOT):

a. Construction and Material Specifications, 1997 Edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type

of paver unit required.

B. Submit a full size sample unit paver of each type required. Include the full

range of style, size, exposed finish, color and texture proposed for the

work.


32 14 00 - 2

C. Submit manufacturer's certification that unit pavers comply with ASTM C936

and specified material and physical requirements.

D. Submit material certificates for aggregate base and sieve analysis for grading

of bedding and joint sand materials.


A. Installation: Performed only by skilled workers with a minimum of three years

experience installing interlocking concrete unit pavers and satisfactory record

of performance on completed projects of comparable size, material, design

and quality.

B. Sample panels: Before starting unit paver work, provide sample panels using

materials, patterns and joints indicated for project work. Build panels of full

thickness and approximately 4’-0” x 4’-0”. Provide the full range of color,

texture and workmanship proposed for the work. Correct and rebuild sample

panels until Architect's acceptance of the work. Retain accepted panels during

construction as a standard for completed paving work.

1. The approved sample panels may be a portion of the work and remain in

place.

C. Do not change source of concrete unit pavers during the course of the work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect unit pavers from damage, chipping and soiling during delivery,

storage and handling. Store materials off the ground on pallets or wood

platforms. Handle materials in accordance manufacturer’s instructions to

prevent damage and soiling.

B. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on a solid surface to

prevent mixing with foreign materials. Cover bedding and joint sand with

waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rain or removal by wind.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Review installation procedures and coordinate unit paver work with other

work affected by the unit paving work.

B. Cold weather:

1. Do not use frozen materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.

2. Do not build on frozen work or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade.

Remove and replace unit paving installation damaged by frost or freezing.

C. Protect partially completed unit paving against weather damage when work is

not in progress.

D. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of

project work, worker and public safety.

E. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, or staining during paving

operations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available manufacturers: Provide materials from one of the manufacturer’s

listed below. To propose substitutions for review, submit literature describing


32 14 00 - 3

how product meets the requirements of the specification per Section 01 35 00

‘Product Substitutions.

1. Pavestone Company, Cincinnati OH

2. Oberfield’s Inc, Delaware OH

3. Belgard/Oldcastle, Atlanta GA

B. Interlocking Pavers:

1. Basis of Design: Pavestone ‘Holland Stone’, Style ‘Standard’

2. Description: Description: 7 13/16” x 3 7/8” x 2 3/8” interlocking concrete

paver, integral color, with eased edges.

3. Installation Pattern: Runnerbond, or as shown on drawings.

C. ADA-Compliant Detectable Pavers:

1. Basis of Design: Pavestone ‘ADA Detectable Warning Paver’

2. Description: 7 13/16” x 3 7/8” x 2 3/8” interlocking concrete paver (4

stones per square foot), integral color, with eased edges, truncated

domes.

3. Installation Pattern: Runnerbond, or as shown on drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Unit paver materials and fabrication shall meet or exceed the

requirements of ASTM C936 "Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units."

1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type 1.

2. Aggregate: Normal weight ASTM C33.

3. Pigments: ASTM C979.

4. Other constituents: Previously established as suitable for use in concrete,

comply with ASTM standards where applicable or shown by test or

experience not to be detrimental to concrete.

B. Physical properties:

1. Compressive strength: ASTM C140, when delivered to the project site, not

less than 8,000 psi with no individual units less than 7200 psi.

2. Absorption: ASTM C140, average absorption not greater than 5%, with no

individual units greater than 7%.

3. Resistance to freezing and thawing: ASTM C67, no breakage and not

greater than 1% loss in dry mass of any individual unit after 50 cycles of

freezing and thawing.

4. Abrasion resistance: ASTM C418, maximum volume loss of 0.915 cu.

in/7.75 sq. in. Average thickness loss 0.118”.

5. Dimension tolerances: Length maximum +/-1/16”, height maximum +/-

1/8” from standard dimension

6. Provide only sound units free of defects that would interfere with proper

placing of units or impair strength or performance of construction. Minor

cracks and minor chipping incidental to methods of manufacture, handling

in shipment and delivery will be acceptable subject to Architect's review

and acceptance. Excessive cracks and chipping, as determined by

Architect, will be rejected as not complying with specification

requirements.

7. Submit test reports certifying compliance with materials and physical

requirements. Tests shall have been conducted not more than 12 months

before manufacture.

C. Aggregate base material:


32 14 00 - 4

1. ODOT 304 graded crushed limestone, crushed stone, or crushed gravel

free from clay, organic material, or other deleterious matte matter and

shall be 100% crushed with fines.

2. ODOT 703, #68 or #57, graded crushed limestone, crushed stone, or

crushed gravel free from clay, organic material, or other deleterious matte

matter and shall be 100% crushed with fines.

D. Bedding, leveling and joint sand material: Clean, non-plastic, free from

deleterious or foreign matter; natural or manufactured from crushed rock.

Grading of samples in accordance with ASTM C136. Provide sharp, washed

coarse concrete sand complying with grading requirements of ASTM C33 free

from foreign material. Masonry mortar sand is not acceptable as bedding and

leveling material.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Edge restraints:

1. Sure-loc Corporation of Holland, MI. “Aluminum Paver Restraints” or an

approved equal Aluminum paver edge restraint system designed for

concrete unit paver systems, mill finish, staked with standard 3/8" x 10"

steel spikes.

a. Edging to be manufactured from 6063 extruded aluminum alloy of T-5

hardness. Material to have 45 degree, “V” cutouts in base along with

recessed stake pockets every 4 inches.

b. Sections to lock together without offset or overlap. Joining tabs and

hardware to connect sections to be supplied with product.

B. Other materials required for proper completion of interlocking concrete unit

paver work: As selected by Contractor and acceptable to the Architect, as

verified through submittal process.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and installation conditions. Do not start interlocking

concrete unit paving work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Verify that base is dry and ready to support bedding material, pavers and

imposed loads.

2. Verify grades and elevations are correct.

3. Verify location, type installation, and elevations of edge restraints around

perimeter of paved area.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for

satisfactory performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Do not use paving units with cracks, voids, discolorations, or other visible

defects that would impair the strength or performance of unit paver

construction.


32 14 00 - 5

B. Cut paving units with block splitter or motor driven masonry saw equipment

designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp unchipped edges. Cut units as

required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full

units without cutting wherever possible. Where cutting is required, use the

largest size units possible. Avoid the use of small pieces of pavers or large

joint spaces.

C. Install edge restraints in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

1. Layout and secure edge restraints to compacted aggregate base with

landscape spikes, spaced 12” on center, through predrilled holes in

edging.

3.3 INSTALLATION: BASE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Base: Provided under Section 03 30 00.

B. Aggregate Base:

1. Obtain Architect's inspection and acceptance of subgrade surface before

placing aggregate base course materials.

2. Spread base course materials in layers that when compacted will not

exceed 4" lifts.

a. Total compacted depth as indicated.

b. Pedestrian sidewalks: Minimum 4”-6” thickness.

3. Compact each lift of base course materials with suitable compaction

equipment to 95% of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM

D1557 Modified Proctor Method.

4. Screed, level and shape base course surface to required grade and cross

section with an allowable local tolerance of 1/4".

C. Bedding and leveling course:

1. Obtain Architect's inspection and acceptance of finished base course

before placing bedding and leveling course materials.

2. Spread bedding and leveling course materials evenly over the entire area

to be paved, screed to a minimum level that will provide a minimum 1" to

1-1/2” bedding course thickness when the paving units have been placed

and vibrated.

3. Protect screeded and leveled bedding and leveling course from damage

until paver installation.

3.4 INSTALLATION: UNIT PAVERS

A. Install interlocking concrete unit pavers in accordance with manufacturer's

recommended installation details for aggregated base course and sand

bedding and leveling course.

B. Install detectable concrete unit pavers in accordance with manufacturer's

recommended installation details for concrete base and sand bedding and

leveling course.

C. Install edge restraints at all unrestrained edges of unit pavers. Securely

anchor in place. Provide straight sections in true straight alignment.

D. Lay unit pavers in bond pattern indicated on the drawings, when not

indicated, as directed by Architect. Maintain desired pattern and provide

uniform 1/16" to 1/8" joints between units.

1. Maintain straight pattern lines and layout.


32 14 00 - 6

E. Fill gaps at the edge of the paved surface with manufacturer's standard edge

pieces or with paver units cut to fit. Provide cut units with straight even cut

surfaces, free from cracks or chips.

F. Vibrate interlocking paver units to their final level with three or more passes

of a low amplitude, high frequency vibrating plate compactor capable of 3,000

to 5,000 pounds per foot of compaction force.

1. Do not vibrate within 3’-0” of an unrestrained edge.

2. All work within 3’0” of the laying face shall be fully compacted with sand

filled joints at the completion of each day.

3. Cover the remaining uncompacted edge of the laying face and sand with a

waterproof covering.

G. After first vibration, brush sand over the surface and vibrate into the joints

with additional passes of the plate vibrator. Completely fill joints.

H. After final vibrating the finish paver surface shall be true to grade and shall

not vary by more than 3/8" when tested with a 10'-0" straightedge at any

location on the surface.

I. Surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8” to 1/4” above adjacent drainage

inlets, concrete collars or channels.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Restrict traffic from interlocking concrete unit paver surfaces during setting of

units and until completion of installation.

B. Protect unit pavers from damage until final acceptance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove and replace interlocking concrete paver units that are broken,

cracked, stained, or otherwise damaged. Provide new matching units, install

as specified and to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work.

Remove from site all excess materials, debris and equipment. Repair damage

resulting from interlocking concrete paver unit installation operations.



33 41 00 - 1

SECTION 33 41 00 – STORM PIPING AND DRAINAGE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK



to this section.



Section 03 30 00 – Cast–in-Place Concrete

1.02 SUMMARY

(A) Section includes gravity site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and

accessories, downspout hub connection, bedding, catch basins, cleanouts,

culverts with end sections, paved area drainage, and site surface drainage.

1.03 REFERENCES

(A) AASHTO T180 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials) - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb. Rammer and an

18-in. Drop.

(B) ASTM C 76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.

(C) ASTM C507- Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer

Pipe.

(D) ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using

Rubber Gaskets.

(E) ASTM C969 - Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of

Installed Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines.

(F) ASTM D2729 – Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

(G) ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

(H) ASTM D 3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

(I) ASTM A74 – Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

(J) ASTM C564 – Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

(A) Submittal procedures: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division 01

Sections.

(B) Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe, pipe accessories and drainage

structures.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

(A) Closeout procedures: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division 01

Sections.

(B) Project Record Documents:

1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch

basins, cleanouts and invert elevations.


33 41 00 - 2

1.06 COORDINATION



(B) Coordinate the Work with termination of downspouts outside building,

trenching, connection to foundation drainage system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

(A) Storm Pipe Materials:

1. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3033, Type PSP, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

material, SDR 35 minimum for 8” diameter pipe. Joints shall be push-

on bell and spigot type using elastomeric ring gaskets conforming to

ASTM D3212 and F477.

2. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) Smooth Interior: ASTM F405,

ASTM F667, ASTM D2321, as manufactured by Advanced Drainage

Systems (ADS), Hancor, Princo, or equal.

3. Cast Iron Pipe (Above grade): ASTM A74 service weight with cast iron

fittings. Joints shall be neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum

conforming to ASTM C564

4. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): ASTM C 76, as manufactured by

Sherman Dixie Concrete Industries, Independent Concrete, or

approved equal.

(B) Culvert Pipe Materials:

1. Aluminized Corrugated Steel Pipe (ACSP): KDOT, Standard

Specification for Road and Bridge Construction or equal.

2. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): ASTM C 76, as manufactured by

Sherman Dixie Concrete Industries, Independent Concrete , or

approved equal.

3. Reinforced Elliptical Concrete Pipe (RECP): ASTM C 507, as

manufactured by Sherman Dixie Concrete Industries, Independent

Concrete, or approved equal.

(C) Headwalls:

1. Dimensions shall comply with KDOT standard drawings or as shown on

the plan details.

2. Precast headwalls may be used for pipe dimensions of 48” diameter

and less. Precast reinforced concrete shall comply with ASTM C478, as

manufactured by Sherman Dixie Industries, Cloud Concrete Products,

Thorn Orwick or equal.

3. Cast-in-place reinforced concrete headwalls shall comply with Division

03 30 00.


33 41 00 - 3

(D) Catch Basins:

1. Dimensions shall comply with the plan details.

2. Precast reinforced concrete shall comply with ASTM C478, as

manufactured by Sherman Dixie Industries, Cloud Concrete Products

or equal.

3. HDPE drain basins shall comply with ASTM D3350 or ASTM 335400C,

as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Hancor, Prinsco or

equal.

4. Frames and Grates: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron

designed for heavy-duty service. Include flat grate with small square

or short-slotted drainage openings. Size: 24” x 24” minimum, unless

otherwise indicated on plan details.

(E) Channel Lining & Aprons:

1. Rip-Rap: Rip-rap shall consist of Class III limestone as per KY DOT

standard Specifications and Project Plans.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

(A) Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end

design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other

configurations required.

2.03 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS

(A) Provide downspout boots made from cast gray iron pipe in heights indicated

with inlets of size to accept downspouts.

1. Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into storm pipe.


3.01 EXAMINATION



(B) Verify trench cut base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions,

and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

(A) Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with

aggregate.

(B) Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage piping or

impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.03 BEDDING

(A) Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.16 for work of this

Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations

indicated.


33 41 00 - 4

(B) Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer

not less than 6 inches compacted depth. Bedding material shall be No. 9

crushed stone aggregate.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE

(A) Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM C12. Seal

joints watertight.

(B) Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings.

(C) Install No. 9 aggregate at sides and over top of pipe. Install top cover to

minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches, compact to 95 percent. Piping

beneath pavement shall be covered with No. 9 aggregate to the pavement

subbase. Refer to the Storm Details of the Construction plans for storm pipe

trench details for backfill materials, depths, etc. for various pipe types.

Install in accordance with the KY Transportation Cabinet Standard

Specifications and Standard Drawings, latest addition.

(D) Refer to Section 31 23 00 for backfilling and compacting requirements. Do

not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

(E) For pipe buried under pavement, backfill with stone to pavement subbase

elevation.

(F) Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar

materials.

(G) Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint and to exterior wall.

(H) Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for

finish painting.


(A) Testing and inspection services: Noted on the structural drawings.

(B) Request inspection prior to placing aggregate cover over pipe.

(C) Compaction Testing: In accordance ASTM D2922.

(D) When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove

Work, replace and retest.

(E) Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with ASTM C 969.


(A) Protecting finished Work: Under provisions of Construction Managers Division

01 Sections.

(B) Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until

backfilling operation is in progress.

1. Take care not to damage or displace installed pipe and joints during

construction of pipe supports, backfilling, testing, and other

operations.

2. Repair or replace pipe that is damaged or displaced from construction

operations.

(C) The engineer may require a camera or mandrel test, KM 64-114, for any pipe

when deflection, cracking, joint faulting, or any other interior damage is

suspected. If damaged, the pipe shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to

the OWNER. Any deflection 10% or greater will be replaced at the

CONTRACTOR’s expense. (Do not pave over any pipe until inspection or


33 41 00 - 5

required testing is complete.) When paving will not be delayed by the wait,

test pipe 30 days or more after backfilling is complete.
